# PPC Ad Editor help, full text > Every public help page from https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/, as markdown. Each page starts with its title and its source URL. Links are absolute. Site index: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/llms.txt --- # Add or remove the accounts you watch Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/accounts/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 The Accounts screen at /adrecap/accounts lists the accounts Ad Recap watches and how healthy each connection is. ## Add Google Ads or Microsoft Ads accounts 1. Open Accounts in the Ad Recap menu. 2. Click Connect account at the top right, or a Google Ads or Microsoft Ads tile under Add a platform. Before your first account, the tiles sit under Start with. 3. In the account picker, search by name or ID and tick each account to add. Accounts you already watch show Monitoring and cannot be ticked. 4. Click the Add button, for example Add 3 accounts. A message starts, for example, with 3 accounts added and goes on to say it is loading the last 28 days of changes. While Ad Recap reads an account for the first time, its row shows Loading, Loading last 28 days… and Reading change history. That usually takes under a minute, then the row turns Connected. The Ad Recap plan covers one account, and each extra account is $19 a month. On the free plan, the picker opens with a banner that says The free plan includes 1 ad account. Upgrade to watch more. You can tick one account. Once you watch one, the picker does not let you tick another. Click Upgrade in the banner to watch more. If some accounts could not be added, the picker stays open, marks each one that failed with the reason, and the rest are added. If a tile says Sign in with Google, or Sign in with Microsoft or Google, there is no saved login for that platform yet. See [Connect Google Ads or Microsoft Ads](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/connections/). ## Add a manager account and its child accounts In the Ad Recap account picker, a Google Ads manager account (MCC) shows as a group headed by its name and Manager account, with its child accounts listed under it. Accounts outside a manager are listed under Other accounts. Click Select all to tick every account in the group you do not watch yet, or tick only the ones you need. Child accounts show their names from Google Ads. An account with no name shows as Account followed by its ID, in the picker and on the Accounts screen. ## What each account row shows, and when an account looks broken An account looks broken on the Accounts page when its row says Error, Expired or Never synced, or a banner says it is disconnected. Each row on the Ad Recap Accounts screen shows the account name and ID, its status, when it last synced, and how many changes it had in the last 7 days. - Connected means Ad Recap is reading its change history. The line under the change count says Monitoring change history. - Error or Expired means the connection needs attention. The line under the change count says what went wrong, or Needs a reconnect to keep history current, and the row shows a Reconnect button. Reconnect opens the sign-in for that platform, and you come back to Accounts. - Loading means Ad Recap is reading a new account's last 28 days for the first time. - Never synced means Ad Recap has not read the account yet. Ad Recap checks Connected accounts for new changes every 6 hours. That automatic check skips accounts in Error or Expired until you reconnect them. ## Why a Google Ads account shows as disconnected When the Google sign-in behind an account stops working, Ad Recap still shows the account. A banner at the top of the Ad Recap Accounts screen names the account and the Google login it uses, says it is disconnected from Google Ads, and says when it last synced, such as Last synced 5 hours ago. If Ad Recap does not have a name for it, the banner shows the Google login, or A Google Ads account. Click Reconnect on the banner and sign in to Google again. When you finish, you come back to the Accounts screen. In the account picker, the same account shows its Google login and when it last synced, with a Reconnect button, and you cannot tick it. Click Reconnect to sign in again. ## Sync one account or see its changes On the Ad Recap Accounts screen, open the Account options menu, the three dots at the end of a row. - Sync now fetches that account's changes from the last 28 days, then says how many new changes it found, or Up to date. - View changes opens the Dashboard filtered to that account. ## Stop watching an account To remove an account from Ad Recap, for example an old client you no longer manage, disconnect it. 1. On the Ad Recap Accounts screen, open the Account options menu on the row. 2. Click Disconnect. The row warns that disconnecting deletes this account's saved change history. 3. Click Disconnect again to confirm, or Cancel to keep it. Ad Recap says Stopped watching account, stops watching it and deletes the changes it saved for it. If you add the account again later, Ad Recap loads its last 28 days of changes again. --- # Connect Google Ads or Microsoft Ads Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/connections/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 To hook up your ad accounts to Ad Recap, connect Google Ads and Microsoft Ads from inside Ad Recap, on the Accounts screen. Sign-in starts there and brings you back there, and the account picker opens as soon as you finish. You do not need to connect Google Ads in Budget Pacer first, and Ad Recap no longer asks you to. Logins your workspace already saved, in Ad Recap or in Budget Pacer, show up in the picker without signing in again. ## Connect Google Ads 1. Open Accounts in the Ad Recap menu and click the Google Ads tile. Before your first account, the tiles sit under Start with. After that, they sit under Add a platform. 2. If the tile says Sign in with Google, Google's sign-in opens. Sign in with the Google login that has access to your Google Ads accounts. 3. You come back to the Ad Recap Accounts screen. It says Finishing Google Ads sign-in…, then Google Ads connected, and the account picker opens. 4. Tick the accounts to watch and click the Add button, for example Add 3 accounts. If the tile already says something like 4 accounts available, your workspace has a Google login saved, and the tile opens the account picker straight away. ## Watch a Microsoft Ads account Can Ad Recap watch my Microsoft Ads account? Yes, as well as Google Ads. Connect a Microsoft Ads account like this. 1. Open Accounts in the Ad Recap menu and click the Microsoft Ads tile. It says Sign in with Microsoft or Google until a login is saved. 2. Ad Recap asks How do you sign in to Microsoft Ads? Click With a Microsoft account or With a Google account. Use the same login you use at ads.microsoft.com. Pick With a Google account only if your Microsoft Ads account was created with Google sign-in. 3. Sign in. You come back to the Ad Recap Accounts screen, it says Microsoft Ads connected, and the account picker opens. 4. Tick the accounts and click Add. For Microsoft Ads, Ad Recap reads the change history of search campaigns. ## Add an account from a different login In the account picker for one platform, click Use another login next to Signed in as. That starts the same sign-in, so you can add accounts that sit under another Google or Microsoft login. If the picker says No Google Ads accounts on your saved logins yet, click Sign in to Google Ads, or Sign in to Microsoft Ads. ## Reconnect a Google Ads account that is disconnected When a banner on the Ad Recap Accounts screen says an account is disconnected from Google Ads, click Reconnect on that banner. Sign in to Google with the same login as before. You come back to the Ad Recap Accounts screen. In the account picker, a disconnected account also has its own Reconnect button. ## Reconnect an account that shows Error or Expired On the Ad Recap Accounts screen, a row with an Error or Expired status shows a Reconnect button, and the line under its change count says what went wrong. 1. Click Reconnect. Ad Recap opens the sign-in for that platform. A Microsoft Ads account signs in the same way it did before, with Microsoft or with Google. 2. Sign in with the same login as before. 3. Back on the Accounts screen, a message starts, for example, with Google Ads reconnected and goes on to say it is resuming 2 accounts. Every account under that login that was in Error or Expired is Connected again. 4. To fetch its changes now instead of at the next automatic check, open the Account options menu on the row and click Sync now. If the row says Connection needs re-authorization. Please disconnect and reconnect your Google Ads account., click Reconnect on the row and follow the same steps. Do not use Disconnect for this. Disconnecting deletes the account's saved change history, and adding it back only loads the last 28 days. Reconnect keeps the history. ## When sign-in fails If sign-in does not finish, a red notice at the top of the Accounts screen says why, for example Sign-in could not be verified. Please try again. Close it with the ×, then click the tile again. If an account cannot be added, the picker marks that account and a message says how many could not be added. ## Platforms you can connect Ad Recap connects to Google Ads and Microsoft Ads, and to Meta Ads where it is enabled for your workspace. It only reads your account data and change history, so it cannot pause campaigns, edit budgets or spend money. Meta Ads is not open to every workspace. Where it is enabled, its tile says Sign in with Meta and connects the same way as Google Ads. Where it is not, the tile is locked and says Not enabled for this account. There is no switch to turn it on yourself. To ask for Meta Ads on your workspace, ask Albert to open a support ticket, or use the contact page at https://www.ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/. If you open /adrecap/connections, you land on the same Ad Recap Accounts screen. --- # Set up your change emails Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/email-settings/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 The Ad Recap Settings screen at /adrecap/settings controls when the recap email arrives and who gets it. Every change saves on its own, and the top of the screen shows Saving… and then All changes saved. Scheduled recap emails start as soon as your workspace watches its first account. Until you change them, they go out Weekly at 8:00 AM UTC. ## Pick daily, weekly or monthly emails On the Ad Recap Settings screen, under Delivery, click one option. - Daily arrives every morning and covers the last day. - Weekly arrives on Mondays and covers the past 7 days. This is the default. - Monthly arrives on the 1st and covers the past month. ## When does the daily, weekly or monthly email arrive? Every recap email arrives at 8:00 AM in the timezone you pick in the Timezone menu on the Ad Recap Settings screen. The timezone starts as UTC. - The daily recap email arrives every morning at 8:00 AM. - The weekly recap email arrives on Monday at 8:00 AM. - The monthly recap email arrives on the 1st of each month at 8:00 AM and covers the month before. The day is the date in your chosen timezone, so a monthly email set to Pacific Time arrives on the 1st at 8:00 AM Pacific. ## Change the email time zone To change the email time zone, open the Ad Recap Settings screen and pick your timezone in the Timezone menu. It saves on its own, and the next email arrives at 8:00 AM in that time zone. The Timezone menu offers UTC, Eastern Time (ET), Central Time (CT), Mountain Time (MT), Pacific Time (PT), London (GMT/BST), Central European Time (CET), Japan Standard Time (JST), Singapore Time (SGT) and Australian Eastern Time (AET). The Send on and At boxes are locked, so you cannot pick another day or time. The Preview on the right shows when the next email goes out, such as Next send: Mon, Oct 12 · 8:00 AM ET. ## Add or remove recipients 1. On the Ad Recap Settings screen, find Recipients. 2. Type an email address and click Add, or press Enter. 3. To take someone off, click the small Remove button at the end of their address. Your own address shows first, marked you. The recap email goes to the workspace's owners and admins and to every address on this list. It covers every Connected account in the workspace, so add a client only if they may see all of those accounts. ## I'm a member and don't get the email If you are a member of the workspace but not an owner or admin, your address still shows as you, but the scheduled email does not go to it, and Settings will not let you add your own address (it says Email already added). Ask an owner or admin to add your address under Recipients. The Email recap button on the Dashboard always sends to you. If an address is not a real email address, Settings says Invalid email address, or Failed to save settings. Remove it and add it again correctly. ## What is in the recap email? What is in the Ad Recap email? The subject starts with AdRecap and names the first account, the number of changes and the dates. Inside, the email lists the accounts under Monitored Accounts, adds an AI Summary when one can be written, and shows up to 10 recent changes with who made each one. A View full dashboard button opens Ad Recap, and Manage email preferences opens Settings. When nothing changed, the email still goes out and says no changes were detected. It covers only accounts that show Connected on the Accounts screen. With no Connected account, no email is sent. ## Dashboard switches on the Settings screen The three switches under What the recap includes on the Ad Recap Settings screen change the Dashboard only, in the browser you use. - Written summary at the top shows or hides the Written recap card. It is on to start. - Group changes by account lists changes by account instead of by day. - Only budget and status changes hides keyword, bid and creative edits. These switches do not change the recap email. The Preview on the right of Settings follows the switches, but the email that goes out always includes every type of change and an AI Summary when one can be written. ## How long we keep your history At the bottom of the Ad Recap Settings screen, How long we keep your history shows where your workspace stands and the rules: paid plans keep unlimited history, the free plan includes 1 ad account and the last 7 days, a full history is kept for 30 days when a paid plan or trial ends, and after that older changes are deleted each night. - Unlimited history means your plan keeps every change Ad Recap has recorded. Nothing is deleted while you're subscribed. - Full history kept until a date means your Ad Recap plan has ended. Everything is kept until that date, then only the last 7 days. Click Reactivate before then to keep all of it. - Free plan: last 7 days of history means you are on the free plan, with 1 ad account. Older changes are deleted each night. Click Upgrade for longer history to keep unlimited history from then on. If it says We couldn't check your plan just now, nothing is deleted until Ad Recap can check. ## Get an email of the changes right now On the Ad Recap Dashboard, click Email recap. Ad Recap sends the changes in the date range and account you picked to your own email address. --- # Common questions Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/faq/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Short answers to what people ask most about Ad Recap. ## What changed last week? Open the Ad Recap Dashboard and pick Last 7 days. The Written recap sums up the week, and the list below shows each change. If you get the weekly email, it arrives on Monday at 8:00 AM in the timezone set in Ad Recap Settings and covers the past 7 days. ## Who changed it? Each change on the Ad Recap Dashboard carries the initials of the person who made it. Hover them to see the name or email. Pick a person in the Anyone menu to see only their changes. When Google Ads or Microsoft Ads does not report a person, the Dashboard shows System and the scheduled recap email shows Unknown. ## What time does the email arrive? At 8:00 AM in the timezone picked in the Timezone menu on the Ad Recap Settings screen. It starts as UTC, so pick your own timezone to get the email at 8:00 AM your time. You cannot pick another hour. ## Can a client or teammate get the email? Yes. Add their address under Recipients on the Ad Recap Settings screen. The email covers every Connected account in the workspace, so add a client only if they may see all of those accounts. ## Can I turn off the email? Ad Recap Settings has no option to turn the recap email off. The choices under Delivery are Daily, Weekly and Monthly. You can remove addresses you added under Recipients, but the workspace's owners and admins always get the email. Members who are not owners or admins get it only when their address is on the Recipients list. ## How far back can I see changes? The Ad Recap Dashboard goes back up to 28 days, with Last 30 days. Ad Recap keeps unlimited history on a paid plan and during a trial. If your plan ends, your full history is kept for 30 days, then only the last 7 days are kept. Older changes are deleted each night and can't be restored. On the free plan, Last 14 days and Last 30 days are locked and only the last 7 days show. There is no 180-day cut-off on a paid plan. Ad Recap keeps every change it records while you are subscribed. ## Is it free? Ad Recap has a free plan with 1 ad account and the last 7 days of history. The paid plan is $19 a month per linked account and keeps unlimited history. See [Is Ad Recap free? The Ad Recap free plan](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/free-plan/). ## Does it delete my history when my plan ends? Not straight away, even if you cancel. When your Ad Recap plan or trial ends, your full history is kept for 30 days. After that, only the last 7 days are kept, and older changes are deleted each night. Click Reactivate before the date shown in Ad Recap Settings to keep all of it. Upgrading later keeps unlimited history from then on, but changes already deleted can't be restored. ## Who can change settings and accounts? Permissions Everyone who can open Ad Recap on the workspace can add and disconnect accounts, run Sync now, and change Ad Recap Settings, including Delivery, Timezone and Recipients. Ad Recap has no setting to limit these to some members. Ad Recap covers the whole workspace, so it opens for owners, admins and members with All dashboards access, not for a member set to Selected dashboards only. Only workspace owners and billing members can start an Ad Recap trial or buy Ad Recap. Scheduled recap emails always go to the workspace's owners and admins, plus everyone on the Recipients list. Disconnecting an account deletes its saved change history for everyone in the workspace. ## Does it change anything in my ad accounts? No. Ad Recap only reads change history. It cannot pause campaigns, edit budgets or spend money. ## Can it undo a change? No. Click the change on the Ad Recap Dashboard to see its Previous and New values, then change it back yourself in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. ## How often does it check for changes? Ad Recap checks each Connected account every 6 hours. When you open the Dashboard, it also refreshes any account that has not synced for 4 hours. Sync now on the Dashboard fetches changes straight away. ## What does another account cost? Is there a maximum? Each extra linked account in Ad Recap is $19 a month, on top of $19 a month for the first account. When you subscribe, the checkout's Google Ads accounts covered setting picks how many accounts the plan covers, from 1 to 20. The maximum number of accounts you can pay for at checkout is 20. --- # Is Ad Recap free? The Ad Recap free plan Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/free-plan/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Yes. Ad Recap has a free plan: 1 ad account and the last 7 days of change history. Everything else works for that account, including the Dashboard, the Written recap, the recap email and Email recap. More accounts and longer history need the paid Ad Recap plan, which is $19 a month per linked account. ## Who is on the free plan? Any workspace without a paid Ad Recap plan or a running Ad Recap trial. That includes a workspace whose Ad Recap trial has ended. Your Ad Recap pages stay usable after a trial ends. In the product menu the Ad Recap chip says Free and the line under it says Free plan · 1 ad account · last 7 days. ## Can I watch more than one ad account for free? No. The free plan includes 1 ad account. 1. Open Ad Recap and click Accounts in the left menu. 2. Open the account picker for Google Ads, Microsoft Ads or Meta Ads. 3. A banner at the top says The free plan includes 1 ad account. Upgrade to watch more. If you already watch one, it says The free plan includes 1 ad account, and you're already watching it. Upgrade to watch more. 4. Tick one account and add it. Ticking a different one swaps your pick. If you already watch an account, the picker does not let you tick another. Click Upgrade in the banner to buy the paid plan and watch more. If you try to add a second account anyway, that account is not added and says The free plan includes 1 ad account. Upgrade to watch more. ## My trial ended and I was watching several accounts You can still open Ad Recap, see your accounts and remove the ones you do not need. Other actions say The free plan includes 1 ad account. Remove the others or upgrade to keep using them. Remove accounts on the Accounts screen until one is left, or upgrade to keep them all. Disconnecting an account deletes that account's saved change history. ## How much history do I see on the free plan? The last 7 days. On the Ad Recap Dashboard, Last 7 days works as usual. Last 14 days and Last 30 days show a lock, and clicking one opens the upgrade page instead of changing the range. Hover a locked range and it says Upgrade for longer history. The change list, the Written recap and Ask Albert only cover those 7 days too. Changes older than 7 days are deleted each night on the free plan and can't be restored, even after you upgrade. ## The monthly email on the free plan is short The recap email still goes out on the free plan, on the schedule you picked. A Monthly email can only include the changes still kept, so on the free plan it covers about the last 7 days, not the whole month. Pick Weekly or Daily if you want every change in the email. ## What if I had a paid plan before? When a paid plan or trial ends, your full history is kept for 30 days first. Ad Recap Settings shows Full history kept until and a date, with a Reactivate button. After that date you are on the free plan and only the last 7 days are kept. A workspace that never had a plan or trial starts with 7 days. ## Where do I see which plan I am on? Open Ad Recap Settings and scroll to How long we keep your history. On the free plan it says Free plan: last 7 days of history, with an Upgrade for longer history button. The Dashboard shows the same notice. ## How do I upgrade? Click Upgrade in the account picker banner, Upgrade for longer history on the Dashboard or in Settings, or a locked date range. Each opens the Ad Recap checkout. Paid plans keep unlimited history, and nothing is deleted while you're subscribed. --- # Set up and what to do first Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/getting-started/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Just got Ad Recap? Here is what to do first. Connect one ad account, read its changes on the Dashboard, then pick when your recap email arrives. It should take about a minute to get your first recap report. 1. Open Accounts in the Ad Recap menu and connect your Google Ads or Microsoft Ads account. 2. Tick the accounts to watch and click Add. Ad Recap loads their last 28 days of changes. 3. Open Dashboard to read who changed what. 4. Open Settings to choose Daily, Weekly or Monthly emails and your timezone. Each step is below. If you have not started Ad Recap yet, start with the trial. ## Start a trial When your workspace does not have Ad Recap yet, the left menu lists it under Add to your suite. Clicking it opens the Ad Recap trial screen at /trial/recap. 1. If the trial screen lists your Google Ads accounts, pick the one to recap. The trial covers one account, and you can add more later. 2. Click Start my free trial. Only workspace owners and billing members can start it. Anyone else sees Ask an owner or billing member to start this trial. 3. Ad Recap opens on its Dashboard at /adrecap. To pay straight away, open Already sure? Skip the trial and subscribe from $19/mo, then click Subscribe. If your workspace has already used its Ad Recap trial, the trial screen takes you to checkout instead. If you never start a trial, or your trial ends without a subscription, Ad Recap stays usable on its free plan: 1 ad account and the last 7 days of history. See Ad Recap free plan. ## Connect your first account Until you add an account, the Dashboard says Connect your ad accounts, and the Accounts screen says Your first recap takes about a minute, with three steps: Sign in to the ad platform, Choose the accounts to watch, and Get the recap. 1. Open Accounts in the Ad Recap menu, or click Connect Your First Account on the empty Dashboard. 2. Click Connect account, or click the Google Ads or Microsoft Ads tile under Start with. 3. In the account picker, tick the accounts you want in the recap. A manager account is listed with its child accounts, and Select all ticks the whole group. 4. Click the Add button, for example Add 2 accounts. Ad Recap starts watching them right away and loads their changes from the last 28 days. If a tile says Sign in with Google, or Sign in with Microsoft or Google, your workspace has no login for that platform yet. Click the tile and sign in. You come back to Accounts and the account picker opens. Each new account shows Loading and Loading last 28 days… while Ad Recap reads its history, which usually takes under a minute. ## Read your first changes on the Dashboard 1. Open Dashboard in the Ad Recap menu. 2. Pick Last 7 days, Last 14 days or Last 30 days at the top. On the free plan, Last 14 days and Last 30 days show a lock. Click one to see Upgrade for longer history. 3. Click Sync now to fetch the latest changes for that range. 4. Read the Written recap at the top, then the list of changes under it. Click any change to see its old and new values. ## Choose your emails When does the recap email arrive? At 8:00 AM in the timezone you pick in Settings. Recap emails start as soon as you add your first account. Until you change them, they go out Weekly, on Mondays at 8:00 AM UTC. 1. Open Settings in the Ad Recap menu. 2. Under Delivery, pick Daily, Weekly or Monthly. Weekly is the default. 3. In the Timezone menu, pick your timezone, so the email arrives at 8:00 AM your time. 4. Under Recipients, add anyone else who should get the recap email. Daily arrives every morning at 8:00. Weekly arrives on Mondays and covers the past 7 days. The monthly recap email arrives on the 1st of each month at 8:00 AM and covers the month before. You cannot pick another day or hour. Your settings save on their own. --- # What Ad Recap does Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/overview/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 What does Ad Recap do? Ad Recap tells you when someone changes your Google Ads or Microsoft Ads accounts, what they changed, who made the change, and when. It writes the changes up in plain words on a Dashboard and emails you a recap on your schedule. It opens at /adrecap in PPC Ad Editor, with three screens in its left menu: Dashboard, Accounts and Settings. Ad Recap is not in beta, and the left menu does not mark it as Beta. ## Who Ad Recap is for Ad Recap is for anyone who needs to know what changed in an ad account, such as an agency watching client accounts, a manager checking a team's edits, or a freelancer who wants proof of what was done and when. ## What you see in Ad Recap The Ad Recap Dashboard lists every change in the accounts you watch, newest first. Each row shows the time, the type of change, what changed, the old and new value, the account, and who made the change. A Written recap at the top sums up the period in plain words. A highlighted row above it flags changes that need a look, such as a budget cut of 40% or more, or a campaign that was paused. Ad Recap also emails you a recap at 8:00 AM in your timezone. On the Ad Recap Settings screen you choose Daily, Weekly or Monthly, pick your timezone, and add the people who should get it. ## What Ad Recap does not do Ad Recap only reads change history. It never edits campaigns, pauses anything, changes budgets or spends money. Ad Recap cannot undo a change. It shows you the old value, so you can put it back yourself in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. Ad Recap works with Google Ads and Microsoft Ads, and with Meta Ads where it is enabled for your workspace. Where it is not, the Meta Ads tile on the Accounts screen says Not enabled for this account. ## How much Ad Recap costs Ad Recap is $19 a month for one linked account. That includes the dashboard, change emails and unlimited history. Each extra linked account is $19 a month. There is no Ad Recap Pro tier. Without a paid plan or trial, Ad Recap stays usable on the free plan: 1 ad account and the last 7 days of history. See [Is Ad Recap free? The Ad Recap free plan](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/free-plan/). ## How long Ad Recap keeps your change history On a paid Ad Recap plan, and during an Ad Recap trial, Ad Recap keeps unlimited history. Every change it records is kept, and nothing is deleted while you're subscribed. If your plan ends, your full history is kept for 30 days. After that, and on the free plan, only the last 7 days are kept. Older changes are deleted each night and can't be restored, so reactivate within the 30 days to keep all of it. If Ad Recap can't check your plan, it deletes nothing that night. To see where your workspace stands, open Ad Recap Settings and scroll to How long we keep your history. It says Unlimited history on a paid plan, Full history kept until a date after your plan ends, or Free plan: last 7 days of history on the free plan. During the 30 days, and on a free account, the Dashboard shows the same notice with a Reactivate or Upgrade button. ## When I add an account, how far back does Ad Recap pull changes? When you add an account to Ad Recap, it pulls that account's changes from the last 28 days right away, usually in under a minute. Google Ads only shares the last 30 days of change history, and Ad Recap stays two days inside that limit so Google does not turn the request away. Changes from before those 28 days cannot be pulled in, on any plan. From then on, Ad Recap keeps its own copy. It checks each Connected account for new changes every 6 hours, and on a paid plan it keeps every change it records, even after the platform has dropped it. The Dashboard itself shows the most recent 28 days, as below. ## How far back the Dashboard goes The longest range on the Ad Recap Dashboard is Last 30 days, and it shows the most recent 28 days. Pick Last 7 days, Last 14 days or Last 30 days at the top of the Dashboard. On the free plan, Last 14 days and Last 30 days show a lock and open the upgrade page. --- # See who changed what on the dashboard Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/read-the-dashboard/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 The Ad Recap Dashboard at /adrecap lists every change in the accounts you watch, newest first. ## Pick the date range At the top of the Ad Recap Dashboard, choose Last 7 days, Last 14 days or Last 30 days. The line under the Dashboard title shows the dates covered, how many accounts you watch, and when they last synced. Last 30 days covers the most recent 28 days, which is as far back as the Dashboard goes. Click Sync now to fetch new changes for that range. On the free plan, only Last 7 days is open. Last 14 days and Last 30 days show a lock, and clicking one opens the upgrade page. Hover it to see Upgrade for longer history. ## Filter the list of changes Use the bar above the list on the Ad Recap Dashboard. - Search changes… finds words in the change, campaign, account or person. - All accounts narrows the list to one account. - All types narrows it to Budget, Keyword, Bid, Ad or Status changes. - Anyone narrows it to one person's changes. Clear filters resets them and also sets the date range back to Last 7 days. The count on the right, such as Showing 12 of 40 changes, shows how many match. Your browser address keeps the account, type, person and date range, so you can bookmark a filtered view. ## What does Ad Recap track, and which changes does it capture? Ad Recap tracks the change history your ad platform keeps for each account you watch, so it picks up the changes the platform records, made in the platform, in an editor, through a tool or by the platform itself. For Google Ads that covers changes to campaigns, ad groups, ads, keywords, budgets, bids and bid strategies, targeting and exclusions, assets and asset groups, and extensions. For Microsoft Ads, Ad Recap reads the change history of search campaigns. Each change gets a type tag, such as Budget, Keyword, Bid, Ad, Creative, Status, Audience, Exclusion or Other. The All types menu narrows the list to Budget, Keyword, Bid, Ad or Status. Ad Recap reads history only. It does not record performance changes such as spend or clicks. ## Read one change Each row on the Ad Recap Dashboard shows the time, a type tag, a plain sentence about the change, and the platform, campaign and ad group. On a wide window the row also shows the old value crossed out, the new value and the percent change, plus the account name. Click a row to open its details, with the Previous and New values and, where they apply, All Changed Fields, Keywords, URLs, Headlines and Descriptions. Changes are grouped by day, newest day first. If you turned on Group changes by account in Settings, they are grouped by account instead. Load older changes at the bottom adds earlier ones from the same date range. ## See who made a change The round badge at the end of each row on the Ad Recap Dashboard shows the initials of the person who made the change. Hover it to see their name or email and, when the platform reports it, the tool they used, such as Google Ads Editor or Recommendations Auto-apply. When Google Ads or Microsoft Ads does not report a person, Ad Recap lists the change as System. ## The written summary and the warning row The Written recap card at the top of the Ad Recap Dashboard sums up the period, with the total changes, accounts and people and a bar showing the mix of change types. Text written by AI carries an AI label, and Regenerate writes it again. If AI is not available, the card shows counts instead. When something needs a look, a highlighted warning row appears above the card. It flags a budget cut of 40% or more, a campaign that was paused or removed, or an account whose connection needs a reconnect. Click See change to jump to the change, or, for a connection, to the Accounts screen. Click Dismiss to hide the row. ## Email the current view Click Email recap at the top of the Ad Recap Dashboard to send the changes in the current date range to your own email address. If you picked one account in the account menu, the email covers only that account. The button is greyed out when the date range has no changes. --- # Ad Recap not working or broken? Fix common problems Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/troubleshooting/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Ad Recap not working, or something looks broken? Find what you see below. Start here when Ad Recap is not working as expected, whether on the Dashboard, the Accounts screen or in the recap email. ## No changes showing on the Dashboard - If the Dashboard says No changes detected yet, click Sync now. If it is still empty, pick Last 30 days and click Sync now again. - If it says No changes match your filters, click Clear Filters. Clearing also sets the date range back to Last 7 days, so pick a longer range again if you need it. - If you only see budget and status changes, turn off Only budget and status changes in Settings. - On the Accounts screen, check that the account shows Connected. - Test and sandbox Google Ads accounts have no change history. Their row says Change history is not available for this account. ## Changes older than four weeks are missing Ad Recap can load changes from up to 28 days back, because Google Ads only shares the last 30 days of change history. On the Ad Recap Dashboard, Last 30 days covers the most recent 28 days, and older changes cannot be loaded. Disconnecting an account also deletes the changes Ad Recap saved for it. ## It says The free plan includes 1 ad account Your workspace is on the Ad Recap free plan, which watches 1 ad account. Upgrade to watch more says a second account was not added. Remove the others or upgrade to keep using them means you watch more than one, usually because a trial ended. Remove accounts on the Accounts screen until one is left, or upgrade. See [Is Ad Recap free? The Ad Recap free plan](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/free-plan/). ## Last 14 days and Last 30 days are locked The free plan shows the last 7 days of history. Upgrade for longer history. ## A Google Ads account is disconnected: where is Reconnect? A banner at the top of the Ad Recap Accounts screen names the account and its Google login, says it is disconnected from Google Ads, and says when it last synced. This means the Google sign-in behind it stopped working. Click Reconnect on that banner and sign in to Google again with the same login. When you finish, you come back to the Accounts screen. In the account picker, the same account shows its Google login, when it last synced and a Reconnect button, and it cannot be ticked. Click Reconnect there to start the same sign-in. ## An account shows Error or Expired On the Ad Recap Accounts screen, click Reconnect on the row. Ad Recap opens the Google or Microsoft sign-in for that account. Sign in with the same login as before, and you come back to the Accounts screen with every account under that login Connected again. Then click Sync now in the row's Account options menu to fetch its changes. While an account shows Error or Expired, the automatic sync and the recap email leave it out. ## It says Connection needs re-authorization If a row on the Ad Recap Accounts screen says Connection needs re-authorization. Please disconnect and reconnect your Google Ads account., use Reconnect on that row, not Disconnect. Disconnecting deletes this account's saved change history, and adding it again only loads the last 28 days. 1. Click Reconnect on the row. 2. Sign in to Google with the same login as before, and allow the access Google asks for. 3. Back on the Accounts screen, the account is Connected again with its history kept. Click Sync now in the row's Account options menu to fetch its changes. If Sync now says Connection needs re-authorization. Please disconnect and reconnect., the same steps apply. Use Reconnect, not Disconnect. ## Do I need to connect Google Ads in Budget Pacer first? No. You connect Google Ads and Microsoft Ads inside Ad Recap, on the Accounts screen. Click the Google Ads or Microsoft Ads tile, sign in, and the account picker opens. Logins your workspace already saved in Budget Pacer show up there too. See [Connect Google Ads or Microsoft Ads](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/connections/). ## The account picker has no accounts for a platform If the picker says No Google Ads accounts on your saved logins yet, or the same for Microsoft Ads, your workspace has no login saved for that platform. Click Sign in to Google Ads or Sign in to Microsoft Ads in the picker, or click the platform's tile on the Accounts screen. You sign in and come straight back to the picker. You do not need to go to Budget Pacer first. If the picker says We couldn't load your accounts, click Try again. If it says Google connection is temporarily unavailable on our side. We've been alerted. Please try again shortly., the problem is on our side and your Google login is fine. Do not reconnect. Try again in a few minutes. A notice that starts We couldn't load the accounts for names the one login that failed. Accounts from your other logins still show. ## A Google Ads account says temporarily unavailable If an account's sync error says Google connection is temporarily unavailable on our side. We've been alerted. Please try again shortly., Google refused the request for a reason on our side. Your Google sign-in still works, so you do not need to click Reconnect. The team is alerted, and the next sync picks the changes up. ## A Microsoft Ads warning names another sign-in option The Ad Recap Accounts screen shows a warning when a Microsoft Ads account was registered with a different sign-in. For example, This Microsoft Ads account is registered with Google sign-in. Reconnect it using the Google SSO option. Click the Microsoft Ads tile, or Use another login in the Microsoft Ads picker. When Ad Recap asks How do you sign in to Microsoft Ads?, pick the option the warning names. - The Google SSO option is With a Google account. - A personal or a work or school Microsoft account is With a Microsoft account. ## A Microsoft Ads login needs to sign in again If a warning on the Ad Recap Accounts screen says a Microsoft Ads login needs to sign in again, that Microsoft sign-in has lapsed and its accounts are missing from the account picker. Click the Microsoft Ads tile or Use another login, and sign in again with the same login and the same option, With a Microsoft account or With a Google account, as before. ## Does Ad Recap work with Meta Ads? Meta Ads is not open to every workspace. Where it is enabled, the Meta Ads tile on the Accounts screen says Sign in with Meta, and you add Meta ad accounts the same way as Google Ads. Where it is not, the tile is locked and says Not enabled for this account. ## Never got the recap emails? The email did not arrive Ad Recap sends recap emails at 8:00 AM in the timezone set in the Timezone menu on Ad Recap Settings, which starts as UTC. Daily goes out every day, Weekly on Mondays and Monthly on the 1st, by the date in that timezone. If you expected it at 8:00 AM your time, check the Timezone menu. Emails go out only when at least one account shows Connected on the Accounts screen. Each email goes to the workspace's owners and admins and to the Recipients list in Ad Recap Settings. The sender name is AdRecap. If you are a member but not an owner or admin, the scheduled email does not come to you, even though Settings shows your address marked you. Ask an owner or admin to add your address under Recipients. ## The written summary is missing If AI is not available, the Written recap card on the Ad Recap Dashboard shows counts instead, and the recap email goes out without its AI Summary. If the whole card is gone, turn Written summary at the top back on in Settings. --- # Ways to use change tracking Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/use-cases/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 These are the jobs Ad Recap is built for, with the Ad Recap screens to use for each. ## Catch a budget cut or a paused campaign The job is to hear about a big unplanned change before it costs you. In Ad Recap Settings, choose Daily under Delivery and pick your Timezone, so the recap email arrives every morning at 8:00 AM your time. On the Ad Recap Dashboard, a highlighted warning row flags a budget cut of 40% or more, a campaign that was paused or removed, or a connection that needs a reconnect. Click See change to open it. To see only budget and status changes on the Dashboard, turn on Only budget and status changes in Settings. You get the change, the old and new value, and who made it, so you can put it right in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. ## Find out who changed a campaign The job is to answer a client or manager who asks who changed something. On the Ad Recap Dashboard, pick Last 30 days, then type the campaign name into the Search changes box. Click the change to see its Previous and New values, and hover the initials at the end of the row to see who made it. To see everything one person changed, pick them in the Anyone menu. You get the person, the time, the old and new value and, when the platform reports it, the tool they used. On the free plan, Ad Recap keeps the last 7 days of history, so Last 30 days needs the $19 plan or a trial. ## Send clients a weekly change report The job is to keep a client informed without writing a report by hand. In Ad Recap Settings, choose Weekly, then add the client's email under Recipients. Each Monday at 8:00 AM, in the timezone set in Settings, they get the past 7 days of changes, with an AI Summary when one can be written. Scheduled emails go to every workspace owner and admin, plus anyone on the Recipients list, and cover every connected account, so add a client only if they may see all of them. For a one-off report on one account, pick it in the account menu on the Dashboard and click Email recap. It goes to you, so you can forward it. ## Send a monthly change report The job is a month-end summary for a client or a manager. In Ad Recap Settings, choose Monthly under Delivery. On the 1st of each month at 8:00 AM your time, the recap covers the month before. Add people under Recipients the same way as for a weekly report. ## Watch every client under a manager account The job is to follow many client accounts from one place. On the Ad Recap Accounts screen, click Connect account, click Select all under your Google Ads manager account (MCC), and add the accounts. On the Dashboard, use the account menu to switch between clients, or turn on Group changes by account in Settings. The free plan watches 1 ad account. On the $19 plan, each linked account after the first is $19 a month. You get one list of changes across all your clients, and one recap email. --- # What's new Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/whats-new/ Last verified: 2026-10-20 Is there anything new in Ad Recap? These are the recent changes you can see in Ad Recap, newest first. ## October 2026 - 28 Oct: When the main AI provider cannot be reached, the Written recap is written on a backup instead of failing. - 22 Oct: When Google Ads fails for a reason on our side, Ad Recap says Google connection is temporarily unavailable on our side instead of asking you to reconnect. See Fix common problems. - 20 Oct: Give feedback at the top right of Ad Recap lets every signed-in user rate it from 1 to 5 and send a note to the team. See Give feedback. - 19 Oct: Ad Recap has a free plan: 1 ad account and the last 7 days of history, with every feature working for that account. The account picker says how many accounts the free plan includes, Last 14 days and Last 30 days on the Dashboard are locked, and Settings and the Dashboard offer Upgrade for longer history. After a trial ends, Ad Recap stays usable on the free plan instead of becoming view-only. - 17 Oct: Paid plans and trials keep unlimited change history. When a plan ends, full history is kept for 30 days, then only the last 7 days. Ad Recap Settings has a How long we keep your history section, and the Dashboard shows a notice during those 30 days or on a free account. - 16 Oct: You connect Google Ads and Microsoft Ads from the Ad Recap Accounts screen. Sign-in starts and ends there, and the account picker opens as soon as you finish. Reconnect on an Error or Expired account signs you in again and resumes every account under that login. - 16 Oct: One account picker covers every platform. It has Use another login, a Reconnect button on a disconnected account, and marks any account that could not be added. A new account shows Loading while its first 28 days load, which usually takes under a minute. - 16 Oct: Child accounts under a Google Ads manager account show their names. - 14 Oct: The Meta Ads tile on the Ad Recap Accounts screen says Not enabled for this account unless Meta Ads is open to your workspace. - Recap emails arrive at 8:00 AM in the timezone you chose, and start with your first account. - Disconnected accounts are named on Accounts. ## September 2026 - The left menu does not mark Ad Recap or Budget Pacer as Beta. - When a Google Ads account is disconnected, a banner names that account, says when it last synced, and offers Reconnect. It shows on Accounts. - You can start an Ad Recap trial from Add to your suite in the left menu. The trial screen at /trial/recap lets you pick the account to recap before you start. - The left menu in Ad Recap now matches the rest of PPC Ad Editor. It shows your workspace name, Home, each product with its pages, and Manage workspace, which opens billing. Ad Recap's pages in the menu are Dashboard, Accounts and Settings, and an Upgrade plan link appears during a trial. - When a Microsoft Ads account was registered with a different sign-in, the Ad Recap Accounts screen now names the sign-in option to reconnect with. - Ad Recap has its own left menu instead of sitting inside Budget Pacer. Only one product's pages stay open at a time, and the AdScanner links open AdScanner in PPC Ad Editor. - The Ad Recap Dashboard now leads with a Written recap, flags changes that need a look, and groups changes by day. The Accounts screen adds several accounts at once, with manager accounts grouped with their child accounts. Settings shows a preview of the recap email and saves as you go. --- # AdMinerX questions Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/faq/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 ## Where do AdMinerX shopping offers come from? AdMinerX shopping offers come from the same saved page as the ads. AdMinerX keeps the shopping ads and product listings on that page, with title, price and advertiser. The capture page's shopping offers table also shows each offer's link. The Products sheet of the spreadsheet has Type, Product Title, Price, Advertiser, Image Link, Subtext, Additional Text and Keyword, with no link column. Shopping offers do not go into the editor preview. ## Where do AdMinerX related searches come from? AdMinerX takes them from the same saved page. It keeps the related searches, the People also ask and People also search for phrases, and the search suggestions saved with the page. Each one is listed as a keyword with match type Broad. They are not ads. ## Can AdMinerX run the search for me? Yes, through Albert, where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace. Ask Albert to search Google for your phrase in AdMinerX. He shows a card with the phrase, where it runs from and how many ads it keeps, and the search runs only when you click Do it. The ads land as a new job in AdMinerX job history. The AdMinerX page itself has no search box. There you upload a saved page with Upload saved page (.html). ## Can I choose a city, country or language in AdMinerX? On Pro, yes, when Albert runs the search. Name a city, a country and a language in your request. Albert knows 12 large US cities by name, such as Chicago, Dallas or Seattle. For any other place, write City,Region,Country, for example Austin,Texas,United States. A country and a language each go as a two-letter code, such as dk for Denmark and da for Danish. Without a city, a Pro search runs from New York. On Lite, Albert's searches always run from New York, NY, in US English. If you ask for a place on Lite, Albert says Choosing a city, country or language is part of the Pro plan. I can run the search from the standard location instead. An uploaded page has no location setting on any plan. It holds the ads Google showed your own browser, from where and how you searched. ## Is there a daily limit on AdMinerX searches? Uploads have no daily limit. Searches Albert runs do. On Lite you get 3 in any 24 hours, and Albert then says Daily search limit reached. Upgrade to Pro for more searches. Pro has no daily limit, but a monthly allowance applies, on Lite and Pro alike, over any 30 days. Every search that runs counts toward the daily limit, even one that finds no ads or that you cancel. The monthly allowance mostly grows with the ads a search keeps. AdMinerX searches and AdScanner scans have separate limits. ## Are AdMinerX limits per person or per workspace? Per person. The daily searches, the monthly allowance and your job history follow your own sign-in, in every workspace you open AdMinerX from. Your plan, Lite or Pro, comes from the PPC Ad Editor workspace you open AdMinerX from. ## Does AdMinerX work with Bing? Not in AdMinerX itself. Upload saved page (.html) only reads a page you saved from a Google search, and a saved Bing page is refused. The AdMinerX Chrome extension can read a Bing search, but its captures stay in your browser and do not reach AdMinerX job history. ## Is my saved page file uploaded to your servers? No. AdMinerX reads the file on your device. Only the captured ads, keywords and shopping offers are saved to your AdMinerX history. ## Is there a daily limit on AdMinerX uploads? No. The AdMinerX upload card says Free on every plan · does not use a daily search. The Lite limit is per capture, at 5 ads. ## How do I jump to another page quickly? Press Ctrl K, or Cmd K on a Mac, or click Quick search… at the top of the left menu. Type part of a page name in the box that reads Jump to a tool or page, then pick it. It lists Home, the tools on your account and their pages, such as Capture and History under AdMinerX, plus Manage workspace. It finds pages, not your searches or ads. When nothing fits it says No matching destinations. ## Why does AdMinerX only keep 5 ads from my saved page? On Lite, one capture keeps the first 5 ads from the saved page. When the page had more, the capture says This job stopped at its 5-ad Lite budget. Upgrading to Pro raises it; the ads already captured are kept. On Pro there is no per-capture ad limit for an uploaded page. Upload the same saved page again after you upgrade to keep every ad on it. ## Does AdMinerX publish ads to Google Ads? No. AdMinerX never publishes ads. Send to Studio creates a preview in the editor, and Download .xlsx saves a file for you. ## Can I delete or remove an old AdMinerX capture? No. AdMinerX has no delete button, so you cannot remove an old capture. Job history keeps every capture on Lite and on Pro. To find one fast, type its search term in Filter by advertiser in AdMinerX job history. ## Can my teammates see my AdMinerX captures? No. Each capture belongs to the person who made it, so a teammate does not see it in their job history, and a capture link you send them says That job does not exist in this workspace. To share one, click Send to Studio and put it in a PPC Ad Editor project your teammates can open, or download it with Download .xlsx and share the file. ## What is under Settings in the AdMinerX menu? Settings opens the same Settings page as the rest of PPC Ad Editor: Profile and Login & security, the people on the workspace, Integrations and API Keys. There are no AdMinerX-only settings. The plan and price for AdMinerX live on AdMinerX plans, which opens from Compare plans on the AdMinerX page. ## How do I open Albert in AdMinerX? Click the Albert icon on the right edge of the page, or press Ctrl J (Cmd J on a Mac). --- # Get started with AdMinerX: make your first capture from a saved results page Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/getting-started/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Upload one Google results page you saved yourself, and AdMinerX turns it into your first capture. 1. Sign in to PPC Ad Editor, then open AdMinerX. In the left sidebar, choose AdMinerX, then Capture. The page is at studio.ppcadeditor.com/adminerx. 2. In another browser tab, search on Google for the term you want to study. Wait until the results show. 3. Save the results page. Press Ctrl+S (Cmd+S on a Mac). If your browser asks for a format, choose HTML only. The saved file ends in .html or .htm. 4. Back on the AdMinerX page, find the card Upload a saved results page and click Upload saved page (.html). 5. Pick the file you saved. The button reads Capturing… while AdMinerX reads it. 6. AdMinerX opens your new capture on the AdMinerX capture page, with the ads, related searches and shopping offers from that page. ## AdMinerX says No searches yet Until you make your first capture, Recent searches on the AdMinerX page reads No searches yet. Upload a saved results page to make one. After that, Recent searches lists your four newest captures. ## Which file the AdMinerX upload accepts The AdMinerX upload takes one .html or .htm file: a Google results page you saved yourself. Any other file type is refused with Upload the saved results page as an .html file. A Bing results page, or a page from another site, is refused too, because AdMinerX reads Google results pages only. A verification page or Google's consent screen is not a results page, so save the results themselves. ## What the AdMinerX upload messages mean - That did not look like a Google results page. The file is not a Google results page. Save the results page itself with Ctrl+S, HTML only, and upload that file. - Google declined that search with a verification page. Nothing was captured. Google showed a check instead of results. Try again in a few minutes. - That page is Google's consent screen, not the results. You saved Google's consent screen. Accept or dismiss it on the Google tab, then save the results page with Ctrl+S, HTML only, and upload that file. - That file is too large to be a results page. You saved something bigger than one results page. Save the results page itself and try again. - This page does not say which search it is for. Type the search term in the Keyword field beside the upload button (it is marked only if the saved page does not name its search), then upload the same file again. - Capture failed, Capture failed while saving, or Capture saved but not closed. See [Fix AdMinerX upload and capture problems](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/troubleshooting/). ## Do I need to type the keyword in AdMinerX? Usually not. A saved results page names its own search, so there is nothing to type first. The AdMinerX Keyword field, marked only if the saved page does not name its search, is a fallback. Use it only when AdMinerX says This page does not say which search it is for. Then type the search term and upload the same file again. ## What AdMinerX does with your saved file AdMinerX reads the file on your device. Only the captured ads, keywords and shopping offers are saved to your AdMinerX history. Uploading a saved page is free on every plan and does not use a daily search. On Lite, each capture keeps up to 5 ads. AdMinerX Pro has no per-job cap. --- # What is AdMinerX? Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/overview/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 AdMinerX keeps the ads that show on a Google search. There are two ways in. You can save a Google results page in your own browser and upload it, and AdMinerX keeps the sponsored ads on it, plus the related searches and shopping offers from the same page. Or you can ask Albert to run the Google search for you, and the ads that show land in AdMinerX as a new job. Either way you can send the capture into the editor as one preview, with one campaign per search term and one ad group per ad. ## Grab the ads from a Google search you ran: upload the saved page 1. Search on Google in your own browser. 2. Save the results page as an HTML file. 3. On the AdMinerX page, click Upload saved page (.html) and pick the file. AdMinerX reads the file on your device. Only the captured ads, keywords and shopping offers are saved to your AdMinerX history. The saved page names its own search, so there is nothing to type first. Uploading is the way to capture from the AdMinerX page itself, and it has no daily limit. ## Ask Albert to run an AdMinerX search for you Where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace, you can ask Albert, for example "search Google for crm software in AdMinerX". Albert shows a card first. It names the search phrase, where the search runs from, the engine, and how many ads it keeps. Nothing runs until you click Do it. The card also says the search cannot be undone, can take up to a minute, and counts toward your daily and monthly limits even if no ads come back. It shows an estimated cost in cents per ad. That is what the search costs PPC Ad Editor to run. Your Lite or Pro plan price does not change, and no per-search charge is added to your bill. When it finishes, Albert says Finished the search of … and how many ads it found, and the ads land as a new job in AdMinerX job history. If it found none, he says the search ran but did not return any ads. If you ask again while it is starting, he says That is still starting. Check your job history in a moment instead of starting it again. - Lite: the search runs from New York, NY, in US English. It keeps up to 5 ads, and you get 3 searches in any 24 hours. - Pro: you can name a city, a country and a language. Without a city the search runs from New York. It keeps up to 50 ads, with no daily limit, though a monthly allowance applies. - Both plans use the default engine, and each request is one search from one place. You cannot pick the engine or run several cities at once. These limits count for you, the person signed in, in every workspace. Uploads never count toward them. ## Where AdMinerX lives in PPC Ad Editor AdMinerX is a page inside PPC Ad Editor at studio.ppcadeditor.com/adminerx. It has no separate website and no separate sign-in. In the left sidebar, AdMinerX lists Capture, History and Settings, plus Upgrade to Pro while you are on Lite. The AdMinerX page shows your plan chip, the upload card, and your four newest captures under Recent searches, including searches Albert ran for you. ## What AdMinerX keeps from each ad For each sponsored ad, AdMinerX keeps the headlines, descriptions, final URL and display path, plus the ad's sitelinks, callouts and structured snippets. Related searches become keywords with match type Broad. Shopping offers keep their title, price, advertiser and link. ## What you can do with an AdMinerX capture - Read it on the AdMinerX capture page. - Download it as a spreadsheet with Download .xlsx. - Send it into the editor with Send to Studio. The preview holds exactly the ads that were captured. Nothing is padded. ## AdMinerX Lite and Pro Lite is included with your PPC Ad Editor account. Its chip on the AdMinerX page reads Lite · 5 ads per job, and the footer of the left menu reads AdMinerX Lite · 5 ads per job. Before your first capture, the AdMinerX home page says No searches yet and Upload a saved Google results page to keep the ads it showed you. AdMinerX Pro is $19.99 a month. Its chip reads Pro · no per-job cap. An uploaded page keeps every ad on Pro, and a search Albert runs keeps up to 50. Intel Pro is $29 a month and is AdScanner Pro plus AdMinerX Pro. Job history keeps your captures on both plans. To get Pro, click Compare plans on the AdMinerX page, then Upgrade to Pro. PPC Ad Editor checkout opens on AdMinerX Pro. ## What AdMinerX does not do The AdMinerX page has no search box of its own. To have a search run for you, ask Albert. Choosing a city, country or language is part of Pro, and only through Albert. AdMinerX reads Google results pages only, not Bing. AdMinerX never publishes ads to Google Ads. Sending a capture creates a preview in the editor. --- # AdMinerX Lite and Pro: the ad limit and how much Pro costs Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/plans-and-limits/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 AdMinerX has two plans. Lite is included with your PPC Ad Editor account, and AdMinerX Pro is $19.99 a month. You upgrade with **Upgrade to Pro** on the **AdMinerX plans** page, which opens PPC Ad Editor checkout. | | Lite | Pro | | --- | --- | --- | | Ads kept from an uploaded page | 5 per job | Every ad on the page | | Uploads per day | No limit | No limit | | Searches Albert runs for you | 3 in any 24 hours | No daily limit, a monthly allowance applies | | Ads kept from a search Albert runs | Up to 5 | Up to 50 | | Where Albert's search runs from | New York, NY, in US English | The city, country and language you name | | Job history | Kept | Kept | ## How many ads you get with AdMinerX Lite The chip at the top of the AdMinerX page reads Lite · 5 ads per job. Each capture keeps up to 5 ads, in the order they appear on the page. Related searches and shopping offers do not count toward the 5. When a page has more ads, the capture is marked partial and the extra ads show as skipped. Uploads have no daily limit. The upload card says Free on every plan · does not use a daily search. ## How many ads you get with AdMinerX Pro AdMinerX Pro is $19.99 a month. Its chip reads Pro · no per-job cap, and an uploaded page keeps every ad on it. A capture Albert makes for you on Pro keeps up to 50 ads. ## Searches Albert runs for you, by plan Where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace, Albert can run a Google search in AdMinerX for you. Every search that runs counts, even one that finds no ads. Uploads never count. - On Lite, you get 3 searches in any 24 hours. Each runs from New York, NY, in US English, and keeps up to 5 ads. After the third, Albert says Daily search limit reached. Upgrade to Pro for more searches. - On Pro, there is no daily limit, but a monthly allowance applies. When it is used up, Albert says Monthly vendor spend ceiling reached for this workspace. Searches stop counting after 30 days. On Pro you can also name a city, a country and a language. Without a city, the search runs from New York. - On both plans the search uses the default engine, from one place. You cannot pick the engine or search several cities at once. ## Limits are per person The daily searches and the monthly allowance count the searches you ran, with your own sign-in, in every workspace. A teammate has their own. Your plan, Lite or Pro, comes from the PPC Ad Editor workspace you open AdMinerX from. ## How long AdMinerX keeps your captures AdMinerX job history keeps your captures on Lite and on Pro. The history page and **AdMinerX plans** both say History is kept. ## Intel Pro Intel Pro is $29 a month. It is AdScanner Pro plus AdMinerX Pro, so it turns on Pro in both. ## Compare AdMinerX plans On Lite, click Compare plans next to the chip on the AdMinerX page. It opens AdMinerX plans, where Lite is marked Included and AdMinerX Pro shows $19.99 / month. ## Upgrade AdMinerX to Pro 1. On the AdMinerX page, click Compare plans. AdMinerX plans opens. 2. Click Upgrade to Pro. PPC Ad Editor checkout opens on AdMinerX Pro at $19.99 per month. Its note says AdMinerX Pro works in the AdMinerX app on this account and is not a Chrome extension. 3. Finish checkout. Checkout can also offer AdScanner Pro and AdMinerX Pro together as Intel Pro, for $29 a month. While you are on Lite, the AdMinerX section of the left menu also has an Upgrade to Pro row with $19.99/mo beside it. It opens the same checkout. Only workspace owners and billing members can buy. Anyone else sees Only owners and billing members can buy at checkout. ## Does Intel Pro replace my AdMinerX Pro line? Yes. Intel Pro replaces a separate AdMinerX Pro line, so you never pay for both, and checkout says so on the Intel Pro option. Intel Pro, at $29 a month, also turns on Pro in the other research tool. If you only need AdMinerX, AdMinerX Pro on its own is $19.99 a month. ## When Pro turns on Pro turns on for the PPC Ad Editor workspace that bought it, so open AdMinerX from that workspace. The chip then reads Pro · no per-job cap, AdMinerX plans says You are on Pro, and the line at the bottom of the left menu reads AdMinerX Pro · active. Pro can take up to 10 minutes to show after checkout. Reload the page if it still reads Lite. ## If AdMinerX still says Lite after you paid - Check that you opened AdMinerX from the workspace that bought Pro. - Wait up to 10 minutes and reload. - AdScanner Pro alone does not turn on AdMinerX Pro. Intel Pro does. - While the subscription is past due, AdMinerX shows Lite. - If the chip still reads Lite · 5 ads per job, contact PPC Ad Editor support. ## While the subscription is past due AdMinerX drops to Lite, and Albert cannot start AdMinerX searches. He says Your subscription payment is past due, so new scans and searches are paused. Uploads still work at 5 ads per job, and your job history stays. To fix it, someone who manages billing for the workspace opens the Billing page in PPC Ad Editor, clicks Fix payment, then Update payment method. --- # Read an AdMinerX capture Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/read-a-capture/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Every upload becomes one capture with its own page, titled AdMinerX capture. So does every search Albert runs for you. A capture opens right after the upload, and this page explains what you are looking at. To reopen a capture later, click its search term under Recent searches on the AdMinerX page, or in AdMinerX job history. ## The numbers at the top of an AdMinerX capture The top card of the AdMinerX capture page shows four numbers. - ads: how many ads this capture kept. - seen: everything AdMinerX read from the page, ads and extras together. - skipped: ads left out because of your plan's limit. - budget: how many ads this capture may keep. On Lite it is 5. On Pro it is unlimited for an upload and 50 for a search Albert ran. Beside them you see the search term, the engine and the time of the capture. The engine reads Your browser for an upload. For a search Albert ran, it names the search engine used, such as Standard, and the line under it names the place the search ran from, such as New York, NY. ## The ads table on the AdMinerX capture page Each row is one sponsored ad. The columns are Campaign, Ad group, Headlines, Descriptions, Final URL and Sitelinks. - Campaign is the search term. - Ad group is Ad1, Ad2 and so on, one per ad, in the order the ads appeared. - Sitelinks is the number of sitelinks the ad showed. ## Related searches and shopping offers in an AdMinerX capture Below the ads, the AdMinerX capture page lists the related searches and People Also Ask phrases from the same page. They are not ads, and each one shows match type Broad. The shopping offers table lists each offer with Offer, Price, Advertiser and URL. ## When an AdMinerX capture shows no paid ads No paid ads on this results page means the capture found no sponsored ads, so there is nothing from it to send to Studio. The upload card appears again on the same AdMinerX capture page, with the search term already in the Keyword field. - For an upload, the note says your browser's copy of the page had no sponsored ads. That was Google's real answer for that search at that moment. Upload a newer copy of the page later. - For a search Albert ran, the note says a server search does not always receive the ads your own browser sees. Search the phrase on Google yourself. If you see ads there, save that page and upload it on the same capture page. ## While a capture is still running A search Albert ran can read running for up to about a minute. The capture page reloads itself every few seconds and says Waiting for the first capture… until ads arrive. Click Cancel to stop the search, and nothing more is kept from it. The capture page itself does not show a status word. A search that ended with no ads, whether it found none, failed or was cancelled, says No paid ads on this results page. Job history shows whether it was done, failed or cancelled. If the page says That job does not exist in this workspace., open the capture from job history in the workspace where you ran it. ## Buttons on the AdMinerX capture page - Refresh reloads the capture. - Download .xlsx saves the capture as a spreadsheet. - Send to Studio opens the send page. It is greyed out when the capture has no ad copy. - Cancel shows only while a capture is running. It stops a search Albert ran. - Download .xlsx is greyed out while a capture is running. ## An AdMinerX capture won't open If the capture page says That job does not exist in this workspace, the link is for a capture made with another person's sign-in, or the link is incomplete. Each capture opens only for the person who made it. Open your own captures from AdMinerX job history. ## When a capture stopped early If Lite cut the capture short, a notice reads This job stopped at its 5-ad Lite budget. Upgrading to Pro raises it; the ads already captured are kept. If a search Albert ran on Pro reached 50 ads, the notice reads One search collects up to 50 ads, and this source had more. Everything captured is kept. It also tells you to run the search again later to catch newer creatives. --- # Find your old AdMinerX searches in job history Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/search-history/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 AdMinerX job history lists every capture you have made, newest first, and keeps them on Lite and on Pro. That includes your uploads and the searches Albert ran for you. ## Where to find AdMinerX job history In the left sidebar, choose AdMinerX, then History. You can also click All N jobs → next to Recent searches on the AdMinerX page. Recent searches shows only your four newest captures. The full list is titled AdMinerX job history. ## What each row in AdMinerX job history shows - When is the date and time of the capture. - Advertiser shows the search term for an AdMinerX capture. Click it to open the capture. - Run by is who made the capture. - Engine reads Your browser for an upload. For a search Albert ran, it names the engine used, such as Standard. - Status is done, or partial when your plan's limit stopped the capture. A search Albert ran can also read running while it works, failed when the search could not finish, or cancelled when you stopped it. A search that ran and found no ads shows done with 0 captured. - Captured is how many ads were kept. - Skipped counts ads left out by the Lite limit, marked (quota). Each row also has its own Send to Studio link. ## Filter AdMinerX job history Type in Filter by advertiser to find a search term. The status filter offers All statuses, Done, Partial, Running and Failed. A cancelled search is listed under Failed. The engine filter offers Both engines, Extension and Server. Your uploads sit under Extension, and the searches Albert ran sit under Server. Click Refresh to reload the list. If nothing fits, the page says No jobs match these filters. ## Send a set of AdMinerX captures as one preview When more than one capture is showing, AdMinerX job history offers Send all N to Studio. It sends exactly what your filters show, up to 25 captures, as one preview with one campaign per search term. With more than 25 showing, the button reads Send newest 25 to Studio. ## How long AdMinerX keeps your captures AdMinerX keeps your captures on Lite and on Pro. The line under the title reads Your jobs stay here. History is kept. The footer of the table counts your jobs and captured ads, and says History is kept again. ## Who sees your AdMinerX job history Job history lists the captures made with your own sign-in, whichever workspace you open AdMinerX from. A teammate who signs in with their own account sees their own captures. To share a capture, send it into a PPC Ad Editor project your teammates can open. ## When AdMinerX job history is empty With no captures yet, the page shows Nothing saved here yet and an Upload a results page button. It takes you back to the AdMinerX page to upload a saved page. --- # Send an AdMinerX capture to the editor with Send to Studio Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/send-to-studio/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Send to Studio turns an AdMinerX capture into a new preview inside a PPC Ad Editor project. 1. Open the capture and click Send to Studio. You can also click Send to Studio on the capture's row under Recent searches or in AdMinerX job history. 2. On the Send to Studio page, under Choose a project, pick a project from Select a project…. To start a new project, type a name in Or name a new project… and click Create project. 3. Read What will be sent. It says how many ads and campaigns will go, and names the preview after AdMinerX, the search term and the date, for example crm software on 2026-09-24. 4. Click Send to Studio. The button reads Sending… while it works. When the page says Sent., click Open the preview in PPC Ad Editor. The new preview opens in that project. The button stays greyed out until What will be sent has finished Building the payload… and you have picked a project. A new project you create with Create project is picked for you. ## What the AdMinerX preview contains A send from AdMinerX builds one campaign per search term and one ad group per ad. Each ad keeps its headlines, descriptions, final URL and display path, plus its sitelinks, callouts and structured snippets. The related searches go along as broad-match keywords. Nothing is padded. The preview contains exactly the ads that were captured, and no copy is added. Shopping offers stay on the AdMinerX capture page and in the spreadsheet. They are not part of the preview. ## Send several AdMinerX captures as one preview In AdMinerX job history, narrow the list with the filters, then click Send all N to Studio, where N is the number of captures showing. They go as one preview, with one campaign per search term, oldest search first. The preview is named for the number of searches, for example AdMinerX with 5 searches on 2026-09-24. One send carries at most 25 captures. When more are showing, the button reads Send newest 25 to Studio. ## Some captured ads have no copy If some ads in a capture have no headlines and no final URL, a note on the page says how many carry no copy and will be left out, and only the ads with headlines or a final URL are sent. If no ad in the capture has any copy, the page says This capture has no ad copy, so there is nothing to import as a whole job, and shows Open this job instead of the project picker. Click Open this job to go back to the capture. Nothing blank is added to your project. ## Back to job history opens the wrong list On the This capture has no ad copy card, the Back to job history button opens the AdScanner list instead of AdMinerX job history. To get back to your AdMinerX captures, choose AdMinerX, then History in the left sidebar. ## Your editor plan still applies to an AdMinerX send The preview lands in your PPC Ad Editor workspace, under that workspace's plan. If some ads do not fit your plan's limit, the message on the Send to Studio page says how many were left out. Sending never publishes ads to Google Ads. It only creates a preview. ## When Send to Studio is greyed out in AdMinerX On the AdMinerX capture page, Send to Studio is greyed out when the capture has no ad copy, such as a page with no paid ads. On the Send to Studio page, the button stays greyed out until you pick a project. If the page says 0 ads across 0 campaigns, the capture has no ads at all, and Send to Studio and Create project both stay greyed out. Go back to job history and pick a capture with ads. The page also says No capture selected. Open one from job history. when it opens with no capture, and one send carries at most 25 captures. If that page says No projects found for this workspace, type a name in Or name a new project… and click Create project, or create one in PPC Ad Editor and click Refresh. ## Send to Studio says No capture selected The Send to Studio page needs a capture. Open it from the capture page or from a row in AdMinerX job history, not from a bookmark. If the page says That is N captures, and one send carries at most 25, go back to job history and send smaller sets. --- # Download an AdMinerX capture as an Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx) Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/spreadsheet/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 To keep a copy of the ads you found, download any AdMinerX capture as a spreadsheet file from its capture page. 1. Open the capture. Click its search term under Recent searches on the AdMinerX page, or in AdMinerX job history. 2. On the AdMinerX capture page, click Download .xlsx. The button reads Downloading… while the file is built. 3. Your browser saves a file named PPC Ads Editor.xlsx. ## Why is Download .xlsx greyed out? Download .xlsx stays off while the capture is queued or still running. Wait for it to finish, or click Refresh on the capture page, then download. ## What is in the AdMinerX spreadsheet The AdMinerX spreadsheet follows the PPC Ad Editor template. It has these sheets. - Instructions - Responsive Search Ads, with Campaign, Ad Group, Final URL, URL Path 1, URL Path 2, Headline 1 to Headline 15, Description 1 to Description 4, and Last Shown - Keywords, with the related searches and match type Broad - Sitelinks, Callouts and Snippets, with the extensions each ad showed - Products, with Type, Product Title, Price, Advertiser, Image Link, Subtext, Additional Text and Keyword for each shopping offer. There is no link column. The offer's link is on the capture page. Every row the capture kept is in the file, including the related searches and the shopping offers. The campaign is the search term, and each ad has its own ad group, named Ad1, Ad2 and so on. ## Use the AdMinerX spreadsheet in the editor The Instructions sheet of the AdMinerX spreadsheet reads PPC Ad Editor template. Import at studio.ppcadeditor.com. If you want the capture in the editor without handling a file, click Send to Studio on the same AdMinerX capture page instead. ## Who can download an AdMinerX capture Download .xlsx works on AdMinerX Lite and on AdMinerX Pro. It is part of AdMinerX, and it is separate from the editor's export. The spreadsheet stays with you. Nothing is sent to Google Ads. --- # Is there an AdMinerX Chrome extension? Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/the-chrome-extension/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Yes, but it works on its own, and its captures are not saved to your account. AdMinerX itself captures by upload. To keep a capture in AdMinerX and send it to the editor, use Upload saved page (.html) on the AdMinerX page. ## What the AdMinerX product page shows PPC Ad Editor has an AdMinerX product page at studio.ppcadeditor.com/products/adminerx. It shows AdMinerX for Chrome with whether the extension is in this browser, such as Not installed, Connected, or Installed with a note that it is not connected. It has a Re-check button, and Add to Chrome, which opens the Chrome Web Store. When the extension is already installed, that button reads Open in Chrome Web Store. The left sidebar has no extension row for AdMinerX. Under How it works, the page lists the upload, not the extension: open AdMinerX on this account, upload a saved Google results page, then review the ads and keep what you need. The page says Lite uploads extract 5 ads per job on this account. ## What the AdMinerX Chrome extension does In the extension's popup, Capture ads reads the text ads, sitelinks and shopping offers from the Google or Bing search open in your tab. Capture keywords reads the suggestions and related searches. It reads a page only when you click. The captures are saved in your browser, and Download .xlsx in the popup saves them as a spreadsheet. You do not need an account for this. Clear saved captures empties the list. ## What the send button in the AdMinerX popup does The popup also has Send to Studio. It works only once the extension is connected and holds captures. Clicking it opens AdMinerX job history in a new tab. Because extension captures are not saved to your account, they are not there to send. To get a search into the editor, upload the saved Google results page on the AdMinerX page, then click Send to Studio on that capture. Or download the popup's captures with Download .xlsx and import that file in PPC Ad Editor. ## The extension popup says This only works on a Google or Bing results page Open a Google or Bing search in the tab first, then click Capture ads. Nothing to capture on this page. means the results page had no ads or suggestions to read. Chrome blocked the capture on this page. Try reloading it. means Chrome stopped the extension on that tab. Reload the page and try again. ## AdMinerX extension captures and job history My AdMinerX captures vanished? If you made them with the Chrome extension, they were never in your account. They live only in that browser, so they are gone after Clear saved captures, or on another browser or computer. Captures you uploaded on the AdMinerX page stay in job history. Captures made with the AdMinerX Chrome extension stay in your browser, even when the extension is connected. The popup button for that is Connect. They do not appear in AdMinerX job history, and AdMinerX cannot send them to the editor. When the extension is connected, the popup says Captures from this extension are not saved to your AdMinerX account. You can still download them here. To keep a search in your account, save the Google results page and upload it on AdMinerX. The page that links the extension says the same, and that linking does not add captures to job history. For a capture you can find later and send with Send to Studio, upload a saved results page on the AdMinerX page. --- # Fix AdMinerX upload and capture problems Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/troubleshooting/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 If an AdMinerX upload keeps failing or something else looks wrong, find the problem or message you see below and follow its fix. ## AdMinerX won't run a keyword search for me The AdMinerX page has no search box. Ask Albert instead, for example "search Google for crm software in AdMinerX", where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace. Click Do it on his card to run it. Or search on Google in your own browser, save the results page (Ctrl+S, HTML only) and upload the file with Upload saved page (.html) on the AdMinerX page. ## Albert would not start an AdMinerX search Albert says why on his card. Find his words below. - Daily search limit reached. Upgrade to Pro for more searches. You used your 3 Lite searches in the last 24 hours. Try again when the oldest is a day old, or upload a saved page, which has no daily limit. - Monthly vendor spend ceiling reached for this workspace. You used the monthly search allowance, on Lite or Pro. Searches stop counting after 30 days, so it opens up again over time. Uploads still work. - Choosing a city, country or language is part of the Pro plan. I can run the search from the standard location instead. Ask again without the place, or upgrade to Pro. - I could not place that location. Name a city such as Chicago, or write City,State,Country (for example Austin,Texas,United States). Ask again with one of the 12 US cities Albert knows by name, or with the place written that way. - Your subscription payment is past due, so new scans and searches are paused. Someone who manages billing for the workspace opens the Billing page in PPC Ad Editor, clicks Fix payment, then Update payment method. Your history stays, and uploads still work. - If Albert says he could not check your plan, nothing was started. Ask again in a moment. - AdMinerX searches are not available right now. Upload a saved page instead, or try again later. - AdScanner and AdMinerX did not answer in time. Please check there before trying again. Open AdMinerX job history first. The search may have run, and asking again would use another search. ## A search Albert ran found no ads The AdMinerX capture page says No paid ads on this results page, and adds that a server search does not always receive the ads your own browser sees. Search the phrase on Google yourself. If you see ads there, save that page and upload it with the upload card shown on the same capture page. The search phrase is already filled in. The empty search still counts as one of your daily searches. ## Stop a search that is still running Open it from AdMinerX job history while it reads running, and click Cancel. Job history then lists it as cancelled, and nothing more is kept from it. On the capture page it reads No paid ads on this results page. It still counts toward your daily searches. Cancel only stops a search. It does nothing to an uploaded page. ## AdMinerX won't take my Google page When AdMinerX will not take the page you upload, the message says why. The sections below cover each one: the file is not .html, it is not a Google results page, it is Google's consent or verification page, it does not name its search, or it is too large. In every case, run the search in Google, wait for the results, save the page with Ctrl+S as HTML only, and upload that file. ## Upload the saved results page as an .html file AdMinerX shows this when the file does not end in .html or .htm. If your browser saved a single-file archive such as .mhtml, or you picked a screenshot or a PDF, save the results page again as HTML only and upload that file. ## That did not look like a Google results page The file you gave AdMinerX is not a Google results page. It may be a Bing page, another site, or a partial copy. Save the Google results page itself (Ctrl+S, HTML only) and upload that file. ## Google declined that search with a verification page Google showed a verification page instead of results, so AdMinerX captured nothing. Wait a few minutes, search again, then save the new results page and upload it. Do not try to get around the check. ## That page is Google's consent screen, not the results You saved Google's consent screen instead of the results. Accept or dismiss it in your Google tab. Then save the results page with Ctrl+S, HTML only, and upload that file to AdMinerX. ## The saved page does not name its search AdMinerX says This page does not say which search it is for when the saved file lost its search term. On the AdMinerX page, type the term in the Keyword field, marked only if the saved page does not name its search, beside the upload button. Then upload the same file again. ## That file is too large to be a results page AdMinerX refuses a file far bigger than a saved results page. Save the results page itself and try again. ## The AdMinerX capture stopped at 5 ads On Lite, the AdMinerX capture page says This job stopped at its 5-ad Lite budget. Upgrading to Pro raises it; the ads already captured are kept. Lite keeps 5 ads per job, and the rest show as skipped. ## Send to Studio is greyed out on an AdMinerX capture The capture has no ad copy, for example when the AdMinerX capture page says No paid ads on this results page. Upload a newer copy of the page when the search shows ads. ## AdMinerX says You are signed out Sign in to PPC Ad Editor on the same site, studio.ppcadeditor.com, with the Sign in button on the AdMinerX page, then come back. AdMinerX uses your PPC Ad Editor sign-in. ## Capture failed, or Capture saved but not closed If AdMinerX shows Capture failed, or Capture failed while saving, with a code in brackets, upload the same file again. If it shows Capture saved but not closed, the ads were saved and the capture is already in your history, so open it from job history. If that capture keeps reading running and Download .xlsx stays greyed out, Cancel does not help, because it only stops searches Albert runs. Upload the same file again to get a new, finished capture. ## A capture link says That job does not exist in this workspace Each AdMinerX capture belongs to the person who made it. A capture link opens only for that person's own sign-in, so a link a teammate sends you shows That job does not exist in this workspace, even inside the same workspace. The same happens for a link that was cut short when it was copied. To share a capture, the person who made it clicks Send to Studio and puts it in a PPC Ad Editor project you can both open, or downloads it with Download .xlsx and shares the file. ## Send to Studio says No capture selected The Send to Studio page opened without a capture, for example from a bookmark. Open AdMinerX job history and click Send to Studio on the capture's row, or open the capture and click Send to Studio there. ## Send to Studio says one send carries at most 25 One send carries up to 25 captures. If the page says That is N captures, and one send carries at most 25, open AdMinerX job history, narrow the list with the filters, and send the captures in smaller sets. ## Send to Studio is greyed out on the Send to Studio page The button stays greyed out until you pick a project under Select a project…, and while What will be sent still reads Building the payload…. It also stays greyed out when the capture has no ads to send, for example a capture that found no paid ads. What will be sent then counts 0 ads. ## Send to Studio says No projects found for this workspace The Send to Studio page needs a project to put the new preview in. Type a name in Or name a new project… and click Create project, or create a project in PPC Ad Editor and click Refresh. Then pick it under Select a project… and click Send to Studio. The button stays greyed out until a project is picked. ## Send to Studio says No workspace selected Open the PPC Ad Editor workspace you want the AdMinerX capture to land in, then come back to the Send to Studio page. ## The send shows an error once you click it - Your PPC Ad Editor session expired. Reload and try again. Reload the page, sign in if asked, and send again. - Could not reach PPC Ad Editor, ending in Check your connection and try again. Check your internet connection, then send again. - PPC Ad Editor refused the import, followed by the reason. Fix what the reason names, for example your plan's limit, then send again. - PPC Ad Editor returned HTTP and a number. Wait a moment and send again. If it repeats, contact PPC Ad Editor support. - N ads did not fit your plan's limit and were left out. Only the ads that fit were sent. - You are not a member of this workspace in PPC Ad Editor. Switch to a workspace you belong to, or ask its owner to invite you. - PPC Ad Editor is unavailable right now. Try again in a moment. Wait a moment and send again. - This workspace has reached its dashboard limit, or PPC Ad Editor access is required. Pick an existing project instead of creating one, or upgrade the workspace in PPC Ad Editor. - This workspace is read-only, or only the owner can create a dashboard. Pick an existing project, or ask the owner to create one. - Someone else used the last dashboard slot. Try again. Pick an existing project, or try again. - Could not build the import payload, with a code. Reload the page and try again. If it repeats, contact PPC Ad Editor support. ## AdMinerX still says Lite after paying for Pro - Open AdMinerX from the PPC Ad Editor workspace that bought Pro. Pro turns on for that workspace only. - Pro can take up to 10 minutes to show after checkout. Reload the page. - AdMinerX Pro or Intel Pro turns on Pro in AdMinerX. AdScanner Pro alone does not. - While the subscription is past due, AdMinerX shows Lite, and Albert cannot start searches until the payment is fixed. - If the chip on the AdMinerX page still reads Lite · 5 ads per job, contact PPC Ad Editor support. ## Checkout says Only owners and billing members can buy Only a workspace owner or billing member can buy AdMinerX Pro. Ask one of them to click Upgrade to Pro on AdMinerX plans. ## The Chrome extension says its captures are not saved to your account The extension shows Captures from this extension are not saved to your AdMinerX account. Its captures stay in your browser and never reach AdMinerX job history, though you can still download them from the extension. To keep a search in your account, save the Google results page and upload it with Upload saved page (.html) on the AdMinerX page. --- # What is AdMinerX good for? Ways to use AdMinerX Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/use-cases/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 AdMinerX is good for seeing which ads show on a Google search. It keeps the ads that show on a Google search and turns them into a capture you can read, download and edit. You capture by uploading a results page you saved in your own browser, or by asking Albert to run the search for you. These are the jobs it does well. ## Turn a competitor search into an editable preview for a pitch The job is to show a prospect which ads appear for their main search term, then write your better version. 1. Search the prospect's main term in your own browser and save the page as HTML. 2. On the AdMinerX page, click Upload saved page (.html) and pick the file. 3. On the AdMinerX capture page, click Send to Studio and pick the prospect's project. You get a preview in the editor with one ad group per ad on that page, ready to edit next to your own copy. ## Compare several search terms in one AdMinerX preview The job is to compare what shows for a set of related terms before you plan a campaign. 1. Capture each term with its own upload on the AdMinerX page. 2. In AdMinerX job history, filter the list down to those captures. 3. Click Send all N to Studio. You get one preview with one campaign per search term, oldest search first. One send carries up to 25 captures. ## Collect keyword ideas from AdMinerX related searches The job is to find the phrases people search around a term before you build a campaign. 1. Upload a saved page for the term. 2. Read the related searches table on the AdMinerX capture page, or click Download .xlsx and open the Keywords sheet. You get the related searches, People also ask and People also search for phrases from that page, each marked Broad. ## Check which shopping offers show for a product search The job is to see which products, prices and sellers appear for a shopping term. 1. Upload a saved page for the product search. 2. Read the shopping offers table on the AdMinerX capture page, or the Products sheet of the spreadsheet. You get each offer's title, price and advertiser. The capture page also shows each offer's link, and the spreadsheet's Products sheet adds the image link. ## Keep a dated record of the ads for a client file The job is to file what showed for a client's terms on a given day. 1. Capture each term on the AdMinerX page. 2. Click Download .xlsx on each AdMinerX capture page. You get a PPC Ads Editor.xlsx file for each capture that you can file with the client's records. The captures also stay in AdMinerX job history on Lite and on Pro, each with the date and time it was made. ## See the ads in another city without travelling (Pro) The job is to check which ads show for a term in a market you are not in, such as a client's home city. 1. Where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace, ask Albert, for example "search Google for emergency plumber in Chicago in AdMinerX". 2. Read his card. It names the phrase, where the search runs from and how many ads it keeps. Click Do it. 3. Open the new capture from AdMinerX job history. On Pro you can name a city, a country and a language, and the search keeps up to 50 ads. Albert knows 12 large US cities by name. For anywhere else, write City,Region,Country, such as Austin,Texas,United States. On Lite, Albert's searches always run from New York, NY, in US English, keep up to 5 ads, and you get 3 in any 24 hours. Every search that runs counts, even one that finds no ads. ## What AdMinerX is not for AdMinerX reads Google results pages only. It does not read Bing or other search engines, it does not watch a term on a schedule, and it never publishes ads to Google Ads. For the ads a competitor is running, from Google's Ads Transparency Center, use AdScanner. --- # What's new in AdMinerX Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adminerx/whats-new/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Recent updates to AdMinerX, newest month first. Each line is something you can do in AdMinerX now. ## October 2026: Albert can start AdMinerX searches for you On 17 October, Albert started running AdMinerX searches for you, and on 20 October AdMinerX got a Give feedback button. - 17 Oct: Albert started running AdMinerX searches. Ask Albert to run a Google search in AdMinerX for you, where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace. Albert shows a card with the phrase, where the search runs from and how many ads it keeps, and runs it only when you click Do it. The ads land as a new job in AdMinerX job history. On Lite the search runs from New York, NY, keeps up to 5 ads, and you get 3 in any 24 hours. On Pro you can name a city, a country and a language, and it keeps up to 50 ads. See AdMinerX Lite and Pro. - 20 Oct: Give feedback at the right of the bar above AdMinerX lets you rate it from 1 to 5 and send a note to the team. See Give feedback. - 7 Oct: The extension popup button now reads Connect, and its messages say plainly that extension captures are not saved to your AdMinerX account, but you can still download them. - Upgrade to Pro on the AdMinerX plans page now opens checkout. Buying AdMinerX Pro or Intel Pro turns Pro on for that workspace. - Job history keeps your captures on both plans. When it is empty, it offers Upload a results page. - The Chrome extension now tells you its captures are not saved to your account. Upload a saved results page instead. - To ask Albert a question in AdMinerX, click the Albert icon on the right edge of the page, or press Ctrl J (Cmd J on a Mac). ## September 2026 - The AdMinerX chip in the left menu shows the plan on your account, Lite or Pro. - Send several AdMinerX captures to the editor as one preview. In AdMinerX job history, Send all N to Studio sends the captures your filters show, with one campaign per search term, up to 25 at a time. - Capture in one place. The AdMinerX page now centers on Upload saved page (.html), and the Keyword field is only for a saved page that does not name its search. - Upload a results page you saved in your own browser. AdMinerX keeps its sponsored ads, related searches and shopping offers, and it reads the file on your device. - AdMinerX reads the search term from the saved page, so there is nothing to type before you upload. - More related searches from each page, including the People also search for phrases. - A capture with no paid ads now says so, and shows the upload card again with the search term filled in. - AdMinerX opens inside PPC Ad Editor at studio.ppcadeditor.com/adminerx, with job history, a page for each capture, Download .xlsx and Send to Studio. --- # Do I need the Chrome extension? Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/chrome-extension/ Last verified: 2026-10-27 No. AdScanner captures ads with **Server search** on its home page, and you do not need to install anything. The AdScanner section of the left menu has no extension link, and the AdScanner home page has no extension tab. ## Why the extension is not offered The Google Ads Transparency Center changed how it shows text ads, and the AdScanner Chrome extension can come back with no ads. Server search on the AdScanner home page collects the advertiser's ads for you. When you send or download picked ads, AdScanner reads their words from each ad's image. ## If you already installed the extension Jobs the extension sent earlier stay in AdScanner job history, with **Extension** in the **Engine** column. The popup still has **Connect your account**, **Capture ads on this page**, **Download .xlsx**, **Send to Studio**, **Clear saved ads** and **Disconnect**. **Connect your account** opens the **Connect AdScanner** page in PPC Ad Editor. **Disconnect** in the popup takes the extension's access away from your workspace. ## The old install page The page at /products/adscanner still shows **AdScanner for Chrome** with its install status, such as **Not installed**, **Connected**, or **Installed** with a note that it is not connected. It has a **Re-check** button, and **Add to Chrome**, which opens the Chrome Web Store. When the extension is already installed, that button reads **Open in Chrome Web Store**. The page says AdScanner capture needs a PPC Ad Editor account, and that Lite captures 5 ads per job. You do not need this page to use AdScanner. Run your scans from the AdScanner home page instead. ## Does the extension work in Edge, Firefox or Safari? The old install page checks for Chrome. In another browser it shows Chrome required, and in some browsers Install status unknown or Install status unavailable here. You do not need any browser extension to use AdScanner. Server search runs from the AdScanner home page, with nothing to install. ## When server search is paused If your AdScanner subscription is past due, the AdScanner home page says **Server search is paused**. That notice says the workspace can still use the extension. Job history stays available either way. --- # Connect an extension and manage your workspace Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/connect-and-workspace/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 This page covers the **Connect** page that links a Chrome extension to your PPC Ad Editor workspace, and the **Manage workspace** and **Settings** pages for AdScanner. ## Connect an extension to your workspace Connecting links the AdScanner or AdMinerX Chrome extension to your workspace. For AdScanner, the **Connect** page says it turns on job history and **Send to Studio**, and that your captures stay in the extension either way. For the AdMinerX extension, see the note below. 1. Open the extension's popup. In AdScanner, click **Connect your account**. In AdMinerX, click **Connect**. 2. Chrome may ask for permission to talk to PPC Ad Editor. Allow it. The popup then opens **Connect AdScanner** or **Connect AdMinerX** in PPC Ad Editor. Sign in if you are asked to. 3. Click **Connect this extension**. 4. When the page says **AdScanner is connected** or **AdMinerX is connected**, you can close the tab. AdScanner extension captures then appear in AdScanner job history. ## Connecting the AdMinerX extension does not save its captures AdMinerX extension captures stay in your browser, even when the extension is connected. They do not reach AdMinerX job history. The **Connect AdMinerX** page says so, and after a capture the popup says captures from this extension are not saved to your AdMinerX account. You can still download them from the popup. To keep a search in your account, save the Google results page and use **Upload saved page (.html)** on the AdMinerX page. That upload is the capture you can keep and send to the editor. ## Do I have to connect to capture with the AdMinerX extension? No. Capturing and **Download .xlsx** in the AdMinerX popup work without an account. Connecting only links the extension to your workspace. ## If the Connect page shows a problem - **Start from the extension.** You opened the page without the popup's one-time code. Click connect in the extension's popup. - **That extension is not installed in this browser.** Add the extension first, then start from its popup. - **That connect link has expired. Open the extension popup and click Connect again.** - **This link points at an extension we do not recognise.** Start the connection from the extension's own popup. - **That extension did not identify itself as AdScanner** (or AdMinerX). Start the connection from the extension's own popup. - **The extension did not answer.** Make sure the extension is installed and turned on, then try again from its popup. - **Connecting needs permission to talk to PPC Ad Editor.** The popup shows this when the Chrome permission was not allowed. Click connect again and allow it. ## What connecting shares The extension gets a token for your workspace, never your PPC Ad Editor password or session. **Disconnect** in the popup takes that token away. Connecting again replaces the old token instead of adding a second one. ## The Manage workspace page The **Manage workspace** page for AdScanner and AdMinerX lists **Members**, **Billing**, **Google Ads accounts** and **Security**. Each row opens the matching PPC Ad Editor settings. **Billing** covers the Studio plan and invoices for this workspace, and the page says every tool in the left menu bills to this workspace. **Manage workspace** at the bottom of the left menu opens billing directly. ## Settings in the left menu **Settings** in the AdScanner section of the left menu opens your settings. Under **Account** there are **Profile** and **Login & security**. Under **Workspace** there are **Plans & billing** and **Invoices & receipts**. Under **Studio** there are **Users & dashboards**, **Integrations** and **API Keys**. ## Why can't I see Plans & billing in Settings? **Plans & billing** shows only for workspace members whose role can view billing. **Invoices & receipts** shows for everyone, but some roles see the invoice list with the amounts hidden, and only owners and billing members can download invoice PDFs. Ask a workspace owner if you need to change the plan. --- # Download picked ads as a bulk-upload spreadsheet Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/download-xlsx/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 The **Selected ads** panel on an AdScanner job saves your picked search ads as the PPC Ad Editor bulk upload spreadsheet. It is an .xlsx file, the Excel spreadsheet format. This is how you export competitor ads from AdScanner to a file. 1. Open the job in **Grid** view. 2. Pick the ads you want. Click a card, or its **Add to Studio** button. 3. In **Selected ads**, click **Download N as .xlsx**. N is the number of picked search ads. 4. If some picked ads have no words yet, the panel shows **Reading N ads…** while AdScanner reads the words from each ad's image. Then the button reads **Building the sheet…**. 5. Your browser saves **PPC Ads Editor.xlsx**. The panel says **Downloaded PPC Ads Editor.xlsx. Import it from PPC Ad Editor.** ## What is in the spreadsheet The file has the sheets **Instructions**, **Responsive Search Ads**, **Keywords**, **Sitelinks**, **Callouts**, **Snippets** and **Products**. Each picked ad is one row on **Responsive Search Ads**. The columns are **Campaign**, **Ad Group**, **Final URL**, **URL Path 1**, **URL Path 2**, **Headline 1** to **Headline 15**, **Description 1** to **Description 4**, and **Last Shown**, the date Google last showed the ad. **Campaign** and **Ad Group** carry the advertiser's name. The other sheets hold rows only when a picked ad came with that detail, such as sitelinks. ## Which ads go in the bulk-upload spreadsheet Only search ads go in. The bulk-upload template has no image sheet, so display ads and video ads stay out. The AdScanner panel says so before you click, for example **1 display ad can't go in the spreadsheet**, followed by the reason (the bulk-upload template has no image sheet) and **Send to Studio to keep it.** A search ad whose words could not be read is left out too, and a note under the panel says how many. ## What to do with the downloaded xlsx file After downloading, import the file into PPC Ad Editor. In the editor, start an import from a new preview and choose the file. The import step accepts .xlsx files. AdScanner does not upload anything to your Google Ads account. ## You can download without a workspace The AdScanner spreadsheet download works even when no PPC Ad Editor workspace is open. Only **Send to Studio** needs a workspace. You can download the same picked ads again. You get the same sheet each time. ## If the download does not work - **None of the picked ads could go in the spreadsheet, so nothing was downloaded. The template only takes search ads with copy.** Pick at least one search ad. - **Server-side copy recovery is off while the subscription is past due.** AdScanner cannot read new words while your subscription is past due. - **Too many ads at once**, followed by a note to select fewer and try again. Pick fewer ads that still need their words read, then download again. - **Sign in again**, followed by a note that your session expired before the sheet was built. Sign in to PPC Ad Editor again, then download again. - **That job does not exist in this workspace.** The job belongs to another workspace, or it was removed. Switch to the workspace that ran the scan. - **The spreadsheet could not be built**, followed by a reason. Try again. If it keeps happening, ask Albert to open a support ticket. ## The download button is greyed out The button reads **Download as .xlsx**, without a number, and stays off until you pick at least one search ad. Display and video ads do not count, because they cannot go in the sheet. ## Can I download every ad in a job at once? An AdScanner job downloads the ads you pick. Pick every search ad you want in **Grid** view, then click **Download N as .xlsx**. The one-click **Download .xlsx** for a whole job is on AdMinerX jobs only. --- # AdScanner export: the Exports page for your scans Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/exports/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 How do you export from AdScanner? Download a job's picked ads as an .xlsx spreadsheet, or send them to the editor. **Exports** in the AdScanner section of the left menu opens a PPC Ad Editor page titled **Exports**, with the line **Spreadsheets and editor-ready sends from your scans.** It explains how a capture leaves AdScanner. It does not list past files. A spreadsheet you download saves to your browser's usual downloads. ## What the Exports page says The Exports page says every capture can leave AdScanner two ways. - **Download .xlsx** from a job gives you the PPC Ad Editor bulk-import sheet. - **Send to Studio** from a job creates a preview in the project you pick, with exactly the ads that were captured and nothing padded. The page ends with a link, **open job history**, which opens AdScanner job history. ## How do I download a spreadsheet from an AdScanner job? Download from the job page. Open a job in **Grid** view, pick ads, and click **Download N as .xlsx** in the **Selected ads** panel. You get **PPC Ads Editor.xlsx**, the bulk-upload spreadsheet, with one row per picked search ad. Display and video ads do not go in the sheet. ## Can I download the whole AdScanner job at once? Not in one click. The Exports page mentions the whole job, but an AdScanner job downloads only the ads you pick. To get every search ad in a job, pick them all in **Grid** view, then click **Download N as .xlsx**. The one-click **Download .xlsx** button for a whole job is on AdMinerX jobs. ## Where your sends go **Send to Studio** creates a new preview in the PPC Ad Editor dashboard you chose. Open it from that dashboard in the editor, or click **Open the preview** right after the send. AdScanner keeps your captures in job history, so you can download or send the same ads again later. --- # AdScanner questions Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/faq/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 Short answers to what people ask most about AdScanner. ## How long does AdScanner keep a pull? Do my scans get deleted after 30 days on Lite? No, your AdScanner scans are not deleted after 30 days on Lite. Every AdScanner scan you run is a job in **Job history**, and it stays there on Lite and on Pro. The history page says **History is kept**, and the footer of the table says it again. ## Does AdScanner give me the ad's words? A server search tells AdScanner who ran each ad, its format and dates, and how long it ran. It does not return the words as text. Most cards show the ad as a picture or as a live preview you can read. When you send or download picked ads, AdScanner reads their words from each ad's image first. **See in Google Transparency Center** on a card opens the ad on Google's page. ## How do I see which ads have lasted? On the AdScanner job page, every group lists the longest-running ads first. Each card shows **Live N d**, the days between the first and last time Google showed the ad. Each tile shows the average days live for its format. ## Can I see another advertiser's ads next to mine? Yes. Pick a competitor's ads on the AdScanner job page and send them to PPC Ad Editor. They land as a new preview in the dashboard you choose, sent from your browser with your own sign-in. ## Does every AdScanner ad come with an image? No. Some ads come with a captured image, some with the Ads Transparency Center's live preview, and some with neither. A card with nothing to show says **No preview came back with this creative**. ## Can AdScanner put ads into my Google Ads account? No. AdScanner never changes a Google Ads account. **Send to Studio** creates a preview in PPC Ad Editor. **Download N as .xlsx** gives you a spreadsheet that you import into PPC Ad Editor yourself. ## Does AdScanner scan on a schedule? No. AdScanner does not monitor a competitor automatically. An AdScanner scan runs when you click **Capture ads**, or when you ask Albert to run one and click Do it on his card. To catch newer ads, run the search again. Each run is kept as its own job in job history. ## Can Albert run an AdScanner scan for me? Yes, where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace. Ask him to scan a competitor's domain or advertiser ID. His card shows what will be scanned and how many ads it keeps, and nothing runs until you click Do it. The scan lands in **Job history** and counts toward the same daily and monthly limits as a scan you run yourself. Albert can also list your recent scans and tell you what a job found. ## Can my teammates see my AdScanner scans? AdScanner keeps scans with the account you sign in with. A teammate who signs in with their own account has their own AdScanner job history. To share what you found, send the ads into a PPC Ad Editor dashboard your teammates can open. ## Are the AdScanner limits shared by my team? No. The three Lite searches a day and the monthly allowance are per person. They count the searches you ran with your own sign-in, in every workspace, and each teammate has their own. Your plan, Lite or Pro, comes from the PPC Ad Editor workspace you open AdScanner from. ## How do I jump to another page quickly? Press Ctrl K, or Cmd K on a Mac, or click **Quick search…** at the top of the left menu. Type part of a page name in the box that reads **Jump to a tool or page**, then pick it. It lists Home, the tools on your account and their pages, such as **Scans**, **History** and **Exports** under AdScanner, plus **Manage workspace**. It finds pages, not scans or ads. When nothing fits it says **No matching destinations.** --- # Get started with AdScanner: your first scan Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/getting-started/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 New to AdScanner and wondering where to start? Start here. Go from opening AdScanner to a competitor's ads in a PPC Ad Editor preview in a few minutes. You need to be signed in to PPC Ad Editor. 1. In PPC Ad Editor, open **AdScanner** in the left menu, then **Scans**. The AdScanner home page opens. 2. Click into **Advertiser domain or Transparency Center ID**. Type the competitor's website domain, or their advertiser ID from the Ads Transparency Center. An advertiser ID starts with AR. 3. Leave **Format** on **All** and every **Channel** off to scan everything. Or narrow the scan first. 4. Click **Capture ads**. The button reads **Searching…** and a line tells you what AdScanner is doing, with a seconds counter. A search can take up to a minute. 5. When the green result line appears, click **Open job**. 6. On the job page, the ads are grouped as **Search**, **Display** and **YouTube**. Each group lists the longest-running ads first. 7. Click an ad card, or its **Add to Studio** button, to pick it. Picked ads appear in the **Selected ads** panel on the right. 8. Under **Dashboard**, choose where the preview should go. Then click **Send N to Studio**, where N is the number of ads it can send. 9. When the button reads **Sent to Studio**, click **Open the preview**. Your competitor's ads open in PPC Ad Editor. Prefer a file? In step 8, click **Download N as .xlsx** instead. You get the PPC Ad Editor bulk-upload spreadsheet. ## See whether AdScanner is Lite or Pro Look at the AdScanner row in the left menu. The chip on that row shows whether AdScanner is Lite or Pro for your account. ## If your first scan looks wrong - The left menu chip shows the AdScanner plan on your account, Lite or Pro. - On Lite, a job stops at 5 ads. The result line tells you when the advertiser is running more than that. - If the AdScanner home page says **You are signed out**, click **Sign in** and come back. - If the **Selected ads** panel asks you to open a PPC Ad Editor workspace, open the workspace you want the preview in, then return to the job. - If the home page says **Server search is paused**, your AdScanner subscription is past due. --- # Find past scans in job history Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/history/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Where are my old scans? **Job history** lists every AdScanner scan you have run, newest first, so you can go back to older scans. Scans Albert ran for you are listed too. Open it from **History** in the AdScanner section of the left menu, or click **All N jobs →** beside **Recent captures** on the AdScanner home page. ## What each row in job history shows - **When** is when the job last changed, such as **Today · 09:14**. - **Advertiser** is the domain or advertiser ID you searched. Click it to open the job. - What does the **Run by** column show? The email address of the account that ran the job. It shows a dash for captures sent by the Chrome extension. - **Engine** names what ran the job. A server search and an extension capture show different names. - **Status** is **done**, **partial**, **running** or **failed**. A job you stopped while it ran shows **cancelled**, and a job waiting to start shows **queued**. - **Captured** is how many ads the job kept. - **Skipped** counts the ads your plan's limit left out, shown like **3 (quota)**. **Send to Studio** at the end of a row opens that job, where you pick the ads to send. ## Filter job history Type in **Filter by advertiser** to find a domain or ID. The status menu has **All statuses**, **Done**, **Partial**, **Running** and **Failed**. A cancelled job is listed under **Failed**, and a queued job under **Running**. The engine menu has **Both engines**, **Extension** and **Server**. **Refresh** reloads the list. If nothing fits, the page says **No jobs match these filters.** ## How long job history keeps scans Job history keeps your scans on Lite and on Pro. The line under the **Job history** title ends with **History is kept.**, and the footer of the table says **History is kept** again, next to a count of your jobs and the ads captured. ## Who sees your job history Job history lists the scans run with your own sign-in, whichever workspace you open AdScanner from. A teammate who signs in with their own account sees their own scans. To share what you found, send the ads into a PPC Ad Editor dashboard your teammates can open. ## What partial and failed mean **partial** means the job reached your plan's limit and the advertiser has more ads. On Lite that is 5 ads in one job. On Pro it is 50 ads in one search. **failed** means the search did not bring back ads. **running** means the job is still working. **cancelled** means you stopped it. ## Stop a job that is still running Click the job to open it. While it reads **running**, the job page has a **Cancel** button next to **Refresh**. Click it and the job shows **cancelled**. Ads already kept stay in the job, and the search still counts toward your daily searches. A job that still says running long after it started is stuck. Cancel it, then run the search again from the home page. ## Recent captures on the home page The AdScanner home page lists your four newest jobs under **Recent captures**, with the same columns as job history. It reads **Loading recent captures…** while it loads. A search you just ran shows up there as soon as it finishes. With no jobs yet it says **No captures in your jobs yet** and **Search an advertiser above to find every creative they are running on Google.** ## When job history is empty With no scans yet, the page says **No captures in your jobs yet** and offers **Go to Capture**, which opens the AdScanner home page to run a search. At /adscanner/jobs the same empty page says **No jobs yet** and **Start one from Capture.** ## Job history does not load While it loads, the page says **Loading job history…**. If it says **Could not load job history** with a code in brackets, reload the page. If the code is about sign-in, such as **NOT_SIGNED_IN** or **INVALID_TOKEN**, sign in to PPC Ad Editor again, then reopen job history. If the page says **You are signed out**, click **Sign in**. ## Two addresses, one list /adscanner/history and /adscanner/jobs both open **Job history** with the same table. Only the empty-page wording differs. --- # Read a job's results and pick ads Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/job-results/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Open a job with **Open job** after a scan, from **Recent captures**, or from job history. The AdScanner job page shows every ad the scan captured, so you can compare them and pick the ones to keep. ## The top of the job page While the job loads, the page says **Loading job…**. The heading is the advertiser you searched, with the job status beside it, such as **done**, **partial**, **running**, **queued**, **failed** or **cancelled**. **queued** means the search is waiting to start. The line under it says how many ads were captured, from a server search or with the extension, when, and how many are text, image and video. **Grid** shows ad cards. **Table** shows rows. **Refresh** reloads the job. The job also reloads when you come back to its browser tab. ## Stop a job that is still running While a job reads **running**, a **Cancel** button sits next to **Refresh**. Click it to stop the server search. The job then shows **cancelled**, and job history lists it under **Failed**. Ads it already kept stay in the job. A cancelled search still counts toward your daily searches. A running job page reloads itself every few seconds and says **Waiting for the first capture…** until ads arrive. ## Format tiles on the job page Tiles sum up the job. **All formats** counts every ad. **Search** holds text ads, which land as responsive search ads. **Display** holds image ads. **YouTube** holds video ads. Each tile shows its count, the average days live and its text, image and video split. Click a tile to show only that group, and click it again to show everything. A line beside the search box can say which group runs longest on average. ## Read an ad card Each group lists the longest-running ads first. A card shows what AdScanner has for that ad, meaning the words drawn as a search ad, the captured image, or a live render from the Ads Transparency Center. Under it you see **Live N d**, the days between the first and last time Google showed the ad, and the month it started. The chip says where it lands, **RSA**, **RDA** or **YouTube**. When an ad has several versions, numbered buttons step through them. **See in Google Transparency Center** opens the ad on Google's own page. ## Pick or select ads on the job page Click a card, or its **Add to Studio** button, to pick it. The button changes to **Added**. **Add all N** on a group picks that group. Type in **Search ad text…** to filter by words, display URL or advertiser, then **Select all N** picks what is on screen. A video card says **Video ads can't go to Studio yet**. A card with neither words nor a picture says **Nothing captured to send**. Picked ads go to the **Selected ads** panel, where you send or download them. ## Unpick an ad: Remove all and Clear To remove an ad you picked by mistake, click the picked card again, or its **Added** button, to take it out. Once every ad in a group is picked, **Add all N** turns into **Remove all N**, and **Select all N** turns into **Clear N**. Click either to unpick those ads. In the **Selected ads** panel, the x at the end of an ad's row removes it too. ## The Selected ads panel The panel's heading shows **N picked**. With nothing picked it says **Add ads from the gallery. Each format lands as its own ad group.** Picked ads are listed by where they land, such as **RSA ad group · 2 ads** or **RDA ad group · 1 ad**, with each ad's days live. A display ad with no words carries the note **Lands as an empty-copy display ad**, followed by a note that Studio's import has no image field. Picks are not saved. If you leave the job page, pick the ads again when you come back. ## Can image ads go into the editor? Yes. An image ad that shows a picture can be picked from the **Display** group and sent. AdScanner reads any words it can from the picture when you send, and the ad lands as a display ad. The picture itself does not travel into the editor, so add an image there. Image ads do not go in the spreadsheet download. Only video ads cannot be sent at all. ## "This is a discovery job" This AdScanner notice means the server search found the ads and how long each ran, but no headline or description text. The cards are pictures of the ads. The notice ends with **Image creatives with a stored image can still be added as empty-copy display ads.** When you send or download picked ads, AdScanner reads their words first. You can also read an ad on Google's page with **See in Google Transparency Center**. A second version of the notice can show above the ad list. It says the server search found the creatives and how long each has run, but not their copy, because the Ads Transparency Center does not return headlines or descriptions, and asks you to open the ones worth having to read the words on the creative's own page. It means the same thing, and image ads can still be sent. ## When the job shows no ads - **This job captured nothing.** means the search ended without ads. Run it again from the home page, or widen **Format** and **Channel**. - **No captured ad matches** followed by what you typed, or **No captured ad matches these filters.**, means your filter hides every ad. Clear **Search ad text…** or click the format tile again. On a discovery job the page adds **This job captured no ad copy, so only the advertiser and display URL are searchable.** ## Table view **Table** lists **Advertiser**, **Format**, **First shown**, **Last shown**, **Live for** and **Region**, with a link to each ad's Transparency Center page. A job with words shows **Campaign**, **Ad group**, **Headlines**, **Descriptions**, **Final URL** and **Sitelinks** instead. The **Selected ads** panel appears in **Grid** view only. --- # AdScanner pricing: Lite, Pro and Intel Pro limits and prices Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/limits-and-billing/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 AdScanner Lite is included with your PPC Ad Editor account. AdScanner Pro is $19.99 a month. With Pro you get up to 50 ads per search instead of 5, and no daily search limit. **Compare plans** on the AdScanner home page opens **AdScanner plans**, where the two sit side by side, with **Upgrade to Pro** under Pro. ## What Lite includes AdScanner Lite is included with your PPC Ad Editor account. A Lite job keeps up to 5 ads. That limit is per job, not per month. Lite runs up to three server searches in any 24 hours. Sending ads to PPC Ad Editor and downloading the spreadsheet both work on Lite. Job history keeps your scans. The Lite card on **AdScanner plans** lists **5 ads per search**, **3 searches a day**, **Send to Studio, unlimited** and **History is kept**. ## What Pro adds and how much it costs AdScanner Pro is $19.99 a month. Pro removes the 5-ad cap on a job. Lite also keeps your job history and reads the words of picked ads, so the difference is how many ads a job keeps, how many searches you run, and how many picked ads are read at once: 25 on Pro, 5 on Lite. One Pro search collects up to 50 ads. Pro has no daily limit on server searches, though a monthly usage cap applies. The Pro card on **AdScanner plans** lists **Up to 50 ads per search**, **No daily search limit (a monthly usage cap applies)** and **History is kept**. ## Are AdScanner limits per person or per workspace? Per person. The three Lite searches a day and the monthly usage cap count the searches you ran with your own sign-in, in every workspace you open AdScanner from. Scans Albert runs for you count too. A teammate has their own. Your plan, Lite or Pro, comes from the PPC Ad Editor workspace you open AdScanner from. ## Intel Pro Intel Pro is $29 a month. It is AdScanner Pro plus AdMinerX Pro, so it turns on Pro in both. ## Upgrade to Pro 1. On the AdScanner home page, click **Compare plans**. **AdScanner plans** opens. 2. Click **Upgrade to Pro**. PPC Ad Editor checkout opens on **AdScanner Pro** at $19.99 per month, with the note **Lite stays free on your account at 5 ads per job.** 3. Finish checkout. Checkout can also offer AdScanner Pro and AdMinerX Pro together as Intel Pro, for $29 a month. While you are on Lite, the AdScanner section of the left menu also has an **Upgrade to Pro** row with $19.99/mo beside it. It opens the same checkout. So does an old bookmark to /products/adscanner/upgrade. Only workspace owners and billing members can buy. Anyone else sees **Only owners and billing members can buy** at checkout. ## When Pro turns on Pro turns on for the PPC Ad Editor workspace that bought it. Open AdScanner from that workspace. The pill at the top of the AdScanner home page then reads **Pro · up to 50 ads per search**, the chip in the left menu reads **Pro**, and **AdScanner plans** shows **You are on Pro**. If you just bought Pro, it can take up to 10 minutes to show. Reload the page if it still reads Lite. ## Why is the Upgrade to Pro button greyed out? On **AdScanner plans**, a greyed button that reads **You are on Pro** means AdScanner already has Pro for this workspace, so there is nothing to buy. The Pro card also shows **Current plan**. On Lite, the Lite card shows **Current plan** and the Pro card has a blue **Upgrade to Pro** button. If the button says **You are on Pro** but you expected Lite, you opened AdScanner from a workspace that has Pro or Intel Pro. ## Where you see your plan - The pill at the top of the AdScanner home page reads **Lite · 5 ads per job** or **Pro · up to 50 ads per search**. - The chip beside AdScanner in the left menu reads **Lite** or **Pro**. - The line at the bottom of the left menu reads **AdScanner Lite · 5 ads per job** or **AdScanner Pro · up to 50 ads per search**. Click it to open **AdScanner plans**. - The strip under the search box reads **Lite budget · 5 ads per job** or **Pro budget · up to 50 ads per search**. On Lite it adds **See plans**. ## When a job reaches its limit On Lite, the result line says you reached your Lite plan's limit for one job and the advertiser is running more. The job page adds **This job stopped at its 5-ad Lite budget. Upgrading to Pro raises it; the ads already captured are kept.** On Pro, the job page says **One search collects up to 50 ads, and this source had more. Everything captured is kept.** The notice goes on to tell you to run the search again later to catch newer creatives. On Pro, AdScanner does not ask you to upgrade. In job history, a job that reached its limit shows as **partial**, and the ads left out show in **Skipped** as **(quota)**. ## Server search is paused When the AdScanner home page says **Server search is paused**, your AdScanner subscription is past due. While it is past due, AdScanner shows Lite, server search is off, and AdScanner cannot read new ad words. Albert cannot start scans for you either. Your job history stays. To turn server search back on, someone who manages billing for the workspace opens the Billing page in PPC Ad Editor, clicks **Fix payment**, then **Update payment method**. Server search comes back once the payment goes through. --- # Send picked ads to PPC Ad Editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/send-to-editor/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Send the ads you picked on an AdScanner job into a new preview in PPC Ad Editor. You do it from the **Selected ads** panel on the job page. 1. Open the job in **Grid** view and pick ads. Click a card, or its **Add to Studio** button. 2. Under **Dashboard** in **Selected ads**, choose the dashboard the preview goes in. To make a new one, type in **New dashboard name** and click **Create**. 3. Check the preview box. It reads **New preview ·** the advertiser and month, then the campaign and how many ad groups it will hold. 4. Click **Send N to Studio**. If picked ads have no words yet, the button reads **Reading N ads…** while AdScanner reads each ad's image. Then it reads **Sending…**. 5. When the button reads **Sent to Studio**, click **Open the preview**. A mixed send shows **Open the grouped preview**. The preview opens in a new browser tab, so the AdScanner job stays open behind it. ## How the ads land, and why a send can create two previews The preview holds one campaign named after the advertiser. Each format gets its own ad group. Search ads land as an RSA ad group and display ads as an RDA ad group. Image ads that show a picture land as display ads, with any words AdScanner read from the picture. When you send both search and display ads, you get one preview per format, grouped together, and the message reads **Sent as a grouped preview**, followed by the count, such as 2 previews. Display ads land without their image, because the editor's import has no image field, so add an image in the editor. Video ads are held back, and the panel says **Held**, with a note that Studio's import doesn't accept video yet. ## Open the preview opens a new tab After a send, **Open the preview**, or **Open the grouped preview**, opens the new preview in PPC Ad Editor in another browser tab. The AdScanner job stays open in the first tab, and the button stays on **Sent to Studio**. Your preview is also in the dashboard you chose. ## Ads left out of a send A text ad AdScanner could not read is left out, and the panel says how many, for example **1 ad could not be read and was left out**. Its picture stays in the job. If your PPC Ad Editor plan limits how many ads a preview holds, the message says **N ads did not fit your plan's limit and were left out.** **Exactly these ads. Nothing padded, nothing invented.** means AdScanner adds nothing you did not pick. After reading the pictures, the panel can say that some ads **came back headline-only**, **could not be read**, **were not attempted** because the reader stopped early, or that AdScanner has **stopped retrying** them. Ads the reader stopped before reaching can be sent again. AdScanner troubleshooting explains each note. ## If the send shows an error The send stops and the panel shows the reason in red. The most common are **Your PPC Ad Editor session expired. Reload and try again.**, a message starting **Could not reach PPC Ad Editor**, and **PPC Ad Editor refused the import:** with a reason. If a read was refused first, for example **Server-side copy recovery is off while the subscription is past due.**, nothing was sent. AdScanner troubleshooting lists every message and what to do. ## Choose a dashboard for the preview The **Dashboard** menu in the AdScanner **Selected ads** panel lists your PPC Ad Editor dashboards. It reads **Loading dashboards…** while the list loads, then shows your first dashboard. Click it to choose the one the new preview should go in. To make a new dashboard, type in **New dashboard name** and click **Create**. A new dashboard counts against your plan's dashboard limit, and a full plan is refused. **Create** stays off until you pick at least one ad that can be sent, and the menu says **Add at least one ad before making a dashboard, so the new one does not land empty.** ## Before you can send Sending from AdScanner needs a PPC Ad Editor workspace. If the panel says **Open the PPC Ad Editor workspace you want this capture to land in to send it**, open that workspace in the editor and come back. ## Can I send the entire scan without picking ads one by one? Yes. On the job page, leave **Search ad text…** empty and click **Select all N**, which picks every ad on screen, or click **Add all N** on a group. Then send them from the **Selected ads** panel. Video ads cannot go to the editor yet. ## The Send to Studio page for a whole job A link to /adscanner/send with a job opens the **Send to Studio** page. It sends the whole job instead of a selection. The buttons in AdScanner open the job page, where you pick ads, so you reach this page only from a saved link. 1. Under **Choose a project**, pick a project from **Select a project…**. To make a new one, type in **Or name a new project…** and click **Create project**. **Refresh** reloads the list. 2. **What will be sent** says how many ads and campaigns go, and the name of the preview. 3. Click **Send to Studio**. It reads **Sending…**, then a green box says what was sent, with a link to open the preview in PPC Ad Editor. Only ads with headlines or a final URL are sent. When some have neither, the page says how many carry no copy and will be left out. If the capture has no ad copy at all, the page says **This capture has no ad copy, so there is nothing to import as a whole job.** and offers **Open this job**, where you can pick ads instead, and **Back to job history**. ## Messages on the Send to Studio page - **No job selected.** The link had no job in it. Open the job from **Job history** and pick ads there. - **No workspace selected.** Open the PPC Ad Editor workspace you want the capture to land in, then come back. - **No projects found for this workspace.** Type a name in **Or name a new project…** and click **Create project**, or make a dashboard in PPC Ad Editor and click **Refresh**. - **Could not build the import payload**, with a code. Reload the page and try again. --- # Ways to use competitor ad research Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/use-cases/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Here are six jobs you can do with AdScanner, with the screens and steps for each. ## See what a competitor runs on Google right now The job is a quick read of a competitor before a pitch or a planning call. On the AdScanner home page, type the competitor's domain in **Advertiser domain or Transparency Center ID** and click **Capture ads**. Open the job. The **All formats** tile shows how many ads the scan captured, and the **Search**, **Display** and **YouTube** tiles split them by format. You get the advertiser's ads with their dates in one place, up to 5 per job on Lite and up to 50 on Pro. No domain to hand? Click one of the Try examples under the search box to see a scan first. ## Find the competitor ads that have lasted The job is to spot the ads a competitor keeps running. On the AdScanner job page, every group lists the longest-running ads first, and each card shows **Live N d**. Each tile shows the average days live, and a line beside the search box can say which format runs longest. Use **Search ad text…** to find ads that mention an offer or a word. You get a shortlist of long-running ads to study. ## Put a competitor's ads in a PPC Ad Editor preview The job is to show a client or teammate a competitor's ads as ads. Pick the ads on the AdScanner job page, choose a dashboard in **Selected ads**, and click **Send N to Studio**. Click **Open the preview**. You get a new preview in PPC Ad Editor, one campaign named after the advertiser, with an ad group per format. ## Hand over competitor copy as a spreadsheet The job is to get competitor search ads into a file. Pick search ads on the AdScanner job page and click **Download N as .xlsx**. You get **PPC Ads Editor.xlsx**, the PPC Ad Editor bulk-upload spreadsheet, with headlines, descriptions, final URL and last-shown date for each ad. Import it into PPC Ad Editor when you want to work on it there. ## Check which channels a competitor advertises on The job is to see where on Google a competitor chooses to advertise, and in which formats. On the AdScanner home page, pick one or more under **Channel**: **Search**, **Youtube**, **Shopping**, **Maps** or **Play**. Leave every channel unselected to scan them all. You can also pick a format, **All**, **Text**, **Image** or **Video**, before you click **Capture ads**. Run another scan with a different channel to compare. Each scan lands in AdScanner job history, so you can come back to it. You get a view of a competitor's ads channel by channel. ## Study a competitor's image and video ads The job is to see a competitor's display and video creative, and how long it ran. On the AdScanner home page, pick **Image** or **Video** before you click **Capture ads**. AdScanner says that image and video creatives carry no headline or description, so they are captured for research: the advertiser, the dates and how long each ran. They cannot be sent into a PPC Ad Editor preview or downloaded as a spreadsheet. For ads you want to edit as a preview, scan **Text** or **All**. --- # What's new in AdScanner Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/whats-new/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 What's new in AdScanner? What changed this week or this month? New AdScanner features, fixes and updates, listed newest first. ## October 2026 - 28 Oct: A change to how AdScanner reads ad images. When the main AI provider cannot be reached, AdScanner reads the words from your picked ads' images on a backup instead, so a send or download still gets the ad copy. - 28 Oct: The Exports page in PPC Ad Editor now points to the download on each job instead of the extension popup. See [AdScanner export: the Exports page for your scans](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/adscanner/exports/). - 20 Oct: Give feedback at the right of the bar above AdScanner lets you rate it from 1 to 5 and send a note to the team. See Give feedback. - 7 Oct: The Pro pill now reads Pro · up to 50 ads per search, and AdScanner plans lists 3 searches a day on Lite and no daily limit on Pro, with a monthly usage cap. - Upgrade to Pro on the AdScanner plans page now opens checkout. Buying AdScanner Pro or Intel Pro turns Pro on for that workspace. - Job history now says History is kept, on Lite and on Pro. - To ask Albert a question in AdScanner, click the Albert icon on the right edge of the page. ## September 2026 - Opening AdScanner from PPC Ad Editor now keeps you signed in as the same account you use in the editor. - The AdScanner and AdMinerX chips in the left menu show the plan on your account, Lite or Pro. They do not stay on Lite when the account is Pro. - The AdScanner left menu now matches the editor's, with your workspace name, a **Lite** or **Pro** chip, and **Scans**, **History**, **Exports** and **Settings**. - You can download picked search ads as the PPC Ad Editor bulk-upload spreadsheet with **Download N as .xlsx** in the **Selected ads** panel. - On Pro, a job that reaches the 50-ad search limit now tells you to run the search again later, instead of asking you to upgrade. - Ad cards now show every description an ad has, not only the first. - While a search runs, the AdScanner home page now names each step and counts the seconds. The result line tells you whether the job reached your plan's limit. - The job page now groups ads as **Search**, **Display** and **YouTube**, by where each one lands in the editor. Each tile shows the average days live. - When you send or download picked ads, AdScanner now reads their words from each ad's image first, and tells you about any ad it could not read. - A selection with both search and display ads now sends as one preview per format, grouped together. Image ads without words can go to the editor as display ads. - Every ad card now has **See in Google Transparency Center**, which opens the ad on Google's own page. - You can click anywhere on an ad card to pick it, pick everything on screen with **Select all N**, and search captured ads by their words, display URL or advertiser. - The gallery now shows up to three ads per row, and the search box has a clear button. - Job history now has a **Run by** column, and **Advertiser** shows the domain you searched. - Capture now runs from **Server search** on the AdScanner home page. The home page no longer shows an extension tab. - You can create a new dashboard from the **Selected ads** panel without leaving AdScanner. - Cards now show the Ads Transparency Center's own live preview when no image came back, and step through an ad's versions. - The job page now shows ads as a gallery of cards, with a **Selected ads** panel for picking what to send to PPC Ad Editor. - You can narrow a scan by **Format** and **Channel** before you click **Capture ads**. - The **Table** view lists each ad's format, first and last shown dates, and days live. - AdScanner opened inside PPC Ad Editor at /adscanner. You can search an advertiser by domain or Transparency Center ID. --- # Read the pacing dashboard Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/dashboard/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 The dashboard is the first page Budget Pacer opens. It shows every tracker's budget, spend and pace for the period you pick. Next to View at the top right, switch between Simple and Advanced. This page covers the parts both views share and the Simple view. ## The dashboard header The large title is the period, such as Q3 2026 or Sep 2026. Under it you see the period dates and Actual spend through a date, which is the last completed day Budget Pacer counts. While the period is running you also see Today's spend excluded. Then come the number of accounts, trackers and campaigns. The label above the title shows sync status, such as Live and when data last synced, Syncing, Sync failed or Sync stalled. ## Switch between monthly and quarterly pacing Use the buttons under the dashboard header. Choose Quarterly or Monthly, then pick Q1 to Q4. In Monthly, also pick the month. Every number on the dashboard follows this choice, and budgets switch between the tracker's quarterly and monthly amounts. ## The Simple view summary A strip at the top of the Simple dashboard says how many trackers need attention, or that all trackers are on track. When some need attention, it also shows projected overspend or underspend. Chips count Need attention, On track and No budget. A tracker needs attention when its pace is above 115% or below 80% of the ideal pace, the same red band the Status column uses. The On track chip counts every other tracker that has a budget, including ones spending a bit fast or a bit slow. ## Filter and search trackers Use All, Needs attention, On track or No budget to filter the tracker list, and Search trackers... to find one by name. Click a column name to sort. The heading of the list shows how many trackers are on screen out of the total, such as 6 of 12. ## Show only some tracker groups on the dashboard Use the Groups menu above the tracker list. It reads All groups until you pick something. Tick one or more of your groups, and tick Ungrouped to include trackers that are in no group. The menu then shows how many you picked, such as 2 groups. The totals, the chart and the currency sections follow the filter. Click All groups to show everything again. If you have no groups yet, the menu says No groups yet. Use Manage groups to create one. A saved view keeps the groups you picked. The controls above the list are labelled Engine, Currency, Group by and Groups. ## Show the dashboard in sections by platform or by group Open the Group by menu above the tracker list and pick Group by platform, Group by my groups or Group by currency. Pick No grouping to go back to one list. With Group by platform the list heading shows a By channel label. Each section has its own heading with the number of trackers in it, and a subtotal line under it with the section's budget and yesterday's spend. Click a section heading to collapse or expand it. Your saved view remembers the grouping. ## Trackers in several currencies When your linked accounts bill in two or more currencies, the dashboard on All currencies shows one section per currency, each with its own totals, and does not convert or add amounts across currencies. Use the Currency menu next to All engines to show one currency, or Group by currency to hold the sections in place. If the sections counted spend to different days, the header says Actual spend dates differ by currency. See [Track budgets in multiple currencies](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/multiple-currencies/). The group menu on a tracker row, which moves it into one of your groups, sits under the tracker name. ## Select several trackers at once Tick the checkbox at the start of each tracker row you want. A bar shows how many are selected. Use Move to group to put them all in one group, or pick Ungrouped, and click Clear to drop the selection. Each row also has its own group menu next to the name. ## Where do I see yesterday's spend? In the Yesterday's spend column of the tracker table, in both the Simple and Advanced dashboards. Open a tracker row in Simple to see it in the details too. ## Columns in the Simple view - Tracker: click the name to open the tracker's page, or the arrow beside it to expand its details in place. A long name wraps onto more lines, so you always see it in full. Underneath is the budget source chip, such as Manual or From Google Ads I/O. When the tracker was set up for one platform but its campaigns now all come from the other, a small note says Set up as and the platform you first chose. Pacing always follows the campaigns in the tracker. See What does Set up as Google mean under a tracker name? below. - Status: On track, Spending a bit fast, Spending a bit slow, Spending too fast, Spending too slow, No budget, or No recent spend. - Monthly Budget or Quarterly Budget: the budget for the selected period. - Total Spend: spend in the period. The small line underneath splits actual spend through the last completed day from today so far. - Current Pace: spend compared with the ideal pace, as a percent where 100% is exactly on plan, on wide screens. The Advanced view shows the same number. - Projected Spend: where the tracker lands at period end, and how far over or under budget. - Required Daily Spend: the daily average needed to land on budget. - Yesterday's spend: spend on the latest completed day shared by the accounts in the view. Hover over the heading or a value to see the date. It shows a dash until that day has closed. - Action: View, or Review when the tracker needs attention. ## What the Status labels mean The Status column uses the same bands as the pacing legend in Quickstart. - On track: pace is between 95% and 105% of the ideal pace. - Spending a bit fast: above 105%, up to 115%. Shown in amber. - Spending a bit slow: from 80% up to 95%. Shown in amber. - Spending too fast: above 115%. Shown in red, and the tracker needs attention. - Spending too slow: below 80%. Shown in red, and the tracker needs attention. - No recent spend: there are no completed days in the period yet. - No budget: the tracker has no budget for this period. Hover over Spending too fast or Spending too slow to see what it means. ## Notices about changed history A notice can appear above the trackers for the period on screen. Campaign mapping changed this period means a campaign moved between trackers, so its imported history moved too and pacing was recalculated. Imported historical spend corrected means a later refresh changed past spend by more than a rounding amount, so pacing was recalculated. Click the cross to hide the correction notice. Neither notice means anything changed in your ad accounts. ## Footer notes The footer shows the currency all amounts use, such as All amounts in USD, when data last synced, that pacing is straight-line, and that today's spend is excluded. When the dashboard is split by currency, the footer says Amounts shown in each section's currency instead. ## Can I hide or shrink the Budget Pacer sidebar? Yes. Click Collapse sidebar at the bottom of the left sidebar on any Budget Pacer page. It shrinks to a narrow rail of icons, and you can still hover each icon to see its name. Click Expand sidebar to bring it back. Your browser remembers the choice the next time you open Budget Pacer. ## What does Set up as Google mean under a tracker name? Set up as and a platform name, such as Google, under a tracker name means you picked that platform when you created the tracker, but the campaigns in it now all come from the other platform. Nothing is wrong with the numbers. The dashboard puts the tracker under the platform its campaigns really come from, in the Engine menu and in Group by, and pacing follows those campaigns. To make the note go away, check the campaigns on the tracker page with Manage campaigns, or create a new tracker for the right platform. --- # Read the Advanced dashboard view Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/dashboard-advanced/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 The Advanced view of the Budget Pacer dashboard adds period cards, total KPI cards, a burn-down chart and a wider tracker table. Click Advanced next to View at the top of the dashboard to open it. ## Period cards on the Advanced dashboard - Period: the dates and the length of the cycle in days. - Actual Spend Through: the last completed day that counts. - Remaining Window: days left for Required Daily Spend. - Period Completed: the share of completed days, such as 12 of 30. - Today: In progress, with today's spend excluded. - Pacing Window: the Pacing Window card shows the range where total spend should be by today. ## Total cards across all trackers, and what the Current Pace card means - Total budget: the monthly or quarterly cap across trackers. - Total spend: spend so far, with actual spend through the last completed day and today so far listed separately. - Current Pace, the card that was called Ahead / Behind Pace before 21 October: the pace of all trackers together, weighted by budget, as a percent where 100% is exactly on plan. Above 100% is faster than planned and below 100% is slower, with a short caption such as spending faster than planned. It is the same number the Simple view shows. The number is green from 95% to 105% of the ideal pace, amber from 80% to 115%, and red outside that. This is not the percent of budget spent. - Projected spend: where total spend lands at period end, based on completed days only. - Required Daily Spend: the combined daily spend needed to land on budget, compared with the last completed day. ## The attention banner and chart When a tracker with a budget is pacing above 115% or below 80% of the ideal pace, a banner says how many funded trackers need attention. It names each one with its pace, and any projected overrun of the monthly or quarterly cap. Click Review to jump to the table, or View required daily spend to open Budget Tracker. With one tracker in the banner, that button shows its required amount per day instead. Click the cross to hide the banner. The Burn-down chart plots actual spend, ideal pace, projected spend and the budget cap for one tracker at a time. Use Hide chart or Show chart to toggle it. ## Group the table into sections The grouping menu above the table can split trackers by platform, by your own groups or by currency, with a subtotal for each section. The Group trackers page explains how to set groups up. ## Columns in the Advanced tracker table Tracker is always the first column. To change the order of the others, click Columns in the table's title bar and use Move left or Move right, or Reset column order. Save a view to keep the order. - Planned media budget: the tracker's budget for the period. - Spend: total spend, with the completed-day and today split underneath. - Remaining: budget minus completed-day spend. - Budget Used: the percent of the budget already spent. - Projected spend: the period-end estimate. Red means over budget. - Daily: the budget spread evenly over every day of the period. - Required Daily Spend: the daily average needed from here. - Yesterday's spend: spend on the latest completed day shared by the accounts in the view, with a dash until that day has closed. The date shows when you hover over it. - Δ vs last day: Required Daily Spend minus spend on the last completed day. - Current Pace, formerly Ahead / Behind Pace: the tracker's pace badge, such as 109.7%, or No budget, or Spend w/o budget. The badge is green from 95% to 105% of the ideal pace, amber from 80% to 95% or above 105% up to 115%, and red outside that. The KPI Goal column shows each tracker's target, or Add target when it has none. Once any tracker has a target for the period, you also see Actual / Goal and Recommendation. ## Untagged campaigns and the Total row If some campaigns are in no tracker, a row shows how many untagged campaigns there are, with Tag campaigns in Settings to include them. Their spend sits under Total Spend, marked excluded from pacing totals. The Total row adds up every tracker, and it follows your column order. ## Take the dashboard tour Click Take tour for a guided walk through the Advanced dashboard. Click the small cross on that button to hide it. --- # Change a tracker's budget by month or quarter Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/edit-budgets/ Last verified: 2026-10-20 You change tracker budgets on the Budget Tracker page in Budget Pacer. Click a budget cell, type the new amount, then click Save in the bar at the bottom. The page is titled Budgets and shows one row per tracker. 1. In the left sidebar, open Budget Pacer and click Budget Tracker. 2. Click the budget cell you want to change and type the new amount. 3. Press Enter to keep the change, Tab to move to the next cell, or Esc to cancel the edit. 4. A bar at the bottom shows how many unsaved changes you have, for example "3 unsaved changes". Click Save to store them, or Discard to drop them. Budgets here are the plan Budget Pacer paces against. Saving never changes a budget in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. ## Do my budget edits save on their own? No. Cell edits wait in the bar at the bottom until you click Save. If you leave the page or reload before you save, those edits are lost. Renaming a tracker is different, because a new name saves as soon as you press Enter. The line under the Budget Tracker title says Auto-saves to draft before you save anything in this visit. That line does not save your cell edits. While edits wait it says, for example, 3 unsaved, and after you click Save it says Auto-saved just now. ## Simple and Advanced views of Budget Tracker Simple is the default. It shows a quarterly grid, Q1 to Q4 plus a total, for each tracker. When you type a quarter amount, Budget Pacer splits it evenly across that quarter's three months. Any amount that does not divide evenly goes to the first month of the quarter. Advanced adds a choice of Annual, Quarterly or Monthly matrix. Typing a yearly amount in the Annual matrix splits it across all 12 months. In the Monthly matrix, past months are locked and shown dimmed. The current month, marked as the live month, and every future month stay editable. Use All or Q1 to Q4 to focus on one quarter, and Comfy or Compact to change row height. Budget Pacer remembers whether you last used Simple or Advanced. ## Spread a tracker's budget evenly Hover over a tracker's row on the Budget Tracker page and click Distribute evenly. Budget Pacer takes the row's yearly total and splits it evenly across the 12 months. Click Reset pending edits to undo unsaved changes on that row. Then click Save as usual. In Advanced, the panel beside the chart has two more shortcuts under Auto-balance. Distribute remaining evenly gives each tracker with no budget yet an even slice of the year's plan. Copy Apr → future months copies each tracker's April amount into every month after the live month. It is available from May onward. Both stage changes for you to review and save. ## Can I plan next year's budget? No. The year menu at the top of the page only lets you pick the current year, and other years are greyed out. Budget Tracker plans one year at a time. ## Rename a tracker On the Budget Tracker page, hover over the tracker name, click the pencil (Rename), type the new name, and press Enter. Press Esc to cancel. Click the name itself to open the tracker's own page and its campaigns. ## Delete a tracker from Budget Tracker Hover over the row, click More budget tracker actions, then Delete budget tracker, then Confirm. Click Cancel to keep it. The tracker's campaigns become unassigned, and their data is kept. ## What the Advanced numbers mean Advanced also shows four cards for the plan year. Annual budget is the total of every tracker's months. YTD spend is spend so far this year, with the share of the yearly plan it uses. Forecast year-end estimates where spend will land by year end, marked On track, Under plan or Overrun risk. Avg monthly burn is average spend per month so far. A chart below compares planned and actual spend by month, and Rows with no budget counts trackers that have nothing assigned for the year. ## Take a budget from Google Ads or Microsoft Ads A tracker can read its monthly budget from the insertion order on its ad account. Click Use budget from Google Ads or Microsoft Ads in the row, then Pull account budgets at the top of the page. Those cells are greyed out, and hovering shows "Comes from the ad platform. Choose Override to edit." - Click Override on the row to type your own amounts. Saved edits on that row are kept as overrides. - Click Use platform value to put the overridden months back to the ad account's amount. - Click Switch to manual to stop reading the budget from the ad account. The budget from your ad account page has the full steps. ## See who edited a budget Click History on a row, or Change history at the top of the page, to see each budget change with who made it and the old and new value. History starts from when it was released, so earlier edits are not listed. ## Download your budgets Click Export CSV to download every tracker's budget by month for the plan year, with its engine and a total per tracker. The file holds saved amounts only, so click Save first if you have unsaved changes. --- # Common pacing questions Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/faq/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 Short answers to common Budget Pacer questions, with the page to open for each. ## How do I know if we're on pace? To know if you're on pace, open the Budget Pacer dashboard and read the Status column. On track means 95% to 105% of the ideal spend for the days that have finished. Spending a bit fast or Spending a bit slow means slightly off pace, up to 115% or down to 80%. Spending too fast or Spending too slow means well off pace, and the tracker needs attention. Current Pace shows the same thing as a percent, where 100% is exactly on plan, above 100% is faster than planned and below 100% is slower. The Advanced view shows Current Pace for all trackers together at the top, and each tracker has its own Current Pace. ## Is Spending a bit fast a problem? Spending a bit fast is a gentle warning, not a problem yet. It means the tracker has spent more than 105% and up to 115% of the ideal spend for the days that have finished, so it is shown in amber and still counts as on track in the summary. Check Projected Spend to see how far over budget it would land if nothing changes, and Required Daily Spend for the daily average that lands it on budget. Above 115% the Status turns to Spending too fast, shown in red, and the tracker needs attention. Spending a bit slow works the same way below the ideal pace, from 95% down to 80%. ## Where will we land at the end of the month or quarter? Read Projected Spend on the Budget Pacer dashboard. It extends completed-day spend at the same daily rate to the end of the period, and says how far over or under budget that lands. Today's partial spend is not part of it. ## What should we spend per day? Read Required Daily Spend on the Budget Pacer dashboard or a tracker's page. It is the daily average needed to land on budget from here. It is planning guidance and never changes a budget in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. ## Which campaigns are driving a tracker's spend? Open the tracker from the Budget Pacer dashboard and read Spend breakdown by campaign. Share and Contribution show which campaigns move the tracker most. ## Which currencies does Budget Pacer support, and does it convert currency? No. Budget Pacer shows amounts in the currency your ad accounts report, and the footer says which one. It does not convert between currencies. If your accounts use several currencies, the dashboard shows one section per currency, each with its own totals, and does not add them together. Use the Currency menu to see one currency at a time. See [Track budgets in multiple currencies](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/multiple-currencies/). Budget Pacer supports USD, EUR, GBP, AUD, NZD, CHF, SEK, NOK, JPY, INR, BRL, MXN and TRY. ## Can one tracker hold Google Ads and Microsoft Ads campaigns? Yes. A tracker can mix campaigns from both. The dashboard marks it as Mixed. ## How often does the data refresh? Each connected account refreshes automatically once a day, after its ad platform's reporting window. To refresh sooner, click Sync all on Accounts or Sync all now on the Sync settings page. ## Is the overall pace an average of the trackers? No. The overall Current Pace on the Advanced dashboard is weighted by budget, so a large tracker counts for more than a small one. ## Can it pause campaigns or change budgets for us? No. Budget Pacer only reads your account data. It never edits campaigns, pauses ads or changes budgets. You make changes in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads yourself. ## Can my teammates see our trackers? Yes. Teammates in your PPC Ad Editor workspace open Budget Pacer on that workspace and see its trackers. Saved dashboard views stay private to each person. ## Who can change things in Budget Pacer? Everyone who can open Budget Pacer on the workspace can connect and unlink ad accounts, create, edit and delete trackers, change budgets, tag campaigns, manage groups and run a sync. Budget Pacer has no setting to limit these to some members. A few things do depend on your role: - Budget Pacer covers the whole workspace, so it opens for owners, admins and members with All dashboards access. A member set to Selected dashboards only cannot use it, and may see Budget Pacer requires account-wide access for this workspace. - Only workspace owners and admins can change the Notifications page. Others can see it but not change it, with Only workspace owners and admins can change notification settings. - Only workspace owners and billing members can start a trial on the trial page or buy Budget Pacer at checkout. - A trial that starts inside Budget Pacer starts only when the workspace owner opens it. - Pacing alerts and the daily digest go to workspace owners and admins. ## Can I stop the daily pacing digest? No. The Daily Pacing Digest has no setting. It goes to every active workspace owner and admin, once the day's data is fresh. The switches on the Notifications page change pacing alerts and data refresh emails, not the digest. ## Can I organize trackers by client? Yes. Click Manage groups on the dashboard, create a group for each client, and move trackers into them. Then pick Group by my groups in the grouping menu to show the dashboard in sections with a subtotal for each. Groups are shared by everyone on the account. ## Can I take the budget from my Google Ads or Microsoft Ads insertion order? Yes, for a tracker that covers every campaign on its ad accounts. Click Use budget from Google Ads or Microsoft Ads on the tracker's row in Budget Tracker. It only reads the amount and never changes anything in the ad account. --- # Get started with Budget Pacer Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/getting-started/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 The first time you open Budget Pacer, a short setup takes you from connecting an ad account to your first tracker. The progress bar at the top shows three steps: Connect, Campaigns and Tracker. 1. Open Budget Pacer at /pacer. Until setup is finished, Budget Pacer takes you to the setup screens. If you already have a PPC Ad Editor (Studio) account and have not connected an ad account or picked campaigns in Budget Pacer yet, it opens your dashboard instead, with Create your first budget tracker and a New Budget Tracker button. Connect an account from the Accounts page, then build your first tracker. 2. On First, connect an ad account, click Connect Google Ads or Connect Microsoft Ads and finish the sign-in. Budget Pacer only imports spend data and never edits your account. 3. On Select Google Ads accounts (or Select Microsoft Ads accounts), tick one or more accounts and click the Link button, for example Link 2 accounts. Accounts under a manager (MCC) account are listed beneath it. 4. Back on the Connect step, check your linked accounts and click the Continue button, for example Continue with 2 accounts. Budget Pacer starts pulling your campaigns in the background. 5. On Create your first budget tracker, type a name under Name your tracker, for example Brand Search. 6. Under Campaigns, click an account in the Accounts column, then click campaigns in the middle column. Your picks appear in the Selected column. 7. Under Budget, pick the Plan year, choose Annual, Quarterly or Monthly, and type the budget. 8. Click Create tracker & finish. 9. On the All set! screen, check the summary and click Open dashboard. ## Add accounts from a login you already connected Back on the Connect step, Connect another Google account adds more accounts. If you connected a Google login before, Budget Pacer first shows Use a saved Google login, with each saved login's email and the date it was connected. Click one to pick accounts from it without signing in to Google again. Click Use a different Google login to sign in with another one, or Cancel to go back. Microsoft Ads works the same way, with Use a saved Microsoft login. ## No accounts show after I sign in On Select Google Ads accounts, the screen can say one of these instead of a list. Click Back to return to the Connect step. - No accounts found. That login has no Google Ads or Microsoft Ads accounts it can open. Try a different login. - Accounts under this manager could not be loaded. Google did not return the accounts under your manager (MCC) account. Try again shortly. - Google temporarily unavailable. The Google connection is down on our side and the team has been alerted. Try again shortly. ## Suggested budget during setup When the campaigns you pick have recent spend, Budget Pacer fills in a suggested budget based on their last 30 days of spend, shown as "Suggested from recent spend". It is only a starting point. Type your real budget over it. ## Skip the tracker step for now On the tracker step, click Skip for now to finish setup without a tracker. The All set! screen then reminds you that you can create a tracker any time from the dashboard with New Budget Tracker. ## If campaigns do not appear during setup Campaigns can take a moment to arrive after you connect. While they load, the Campaigns column says it is pulling campaigns from your ad accounts. If an account shows No campaigns synced for this account yet, click Sync now. If the sync fails, click Retry sync, or pick campaigns later from the dashboard. ## Setup links that moved Setup used to have separate accounts, budgets and tags steps. Old links to /pacer/setup/accounts, /pacer/setup/budgets and /pacer/setup/tags now open the tracker step at /pacer/setup/tracker. --- # Get help in Budget Pacer: Albert, the pacing assistant, and support Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/human-help/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 For a quick answer, ask Albert inside Budget Pacer. For questions about your own pacing numbers, use the pacing assistant. To reach a person, ask Albert to open a support ticket, or use the contact page. ## Open Albert in Budget Pacer Click Ask Albert at the bottom of the left menu, or the Albert icon on the right edge of the page, or press Cmd+J on a Mac or Ctrl+J on Windows. Albert opens on the right. He is the same Albert as in Studio, and your conversation carries over in the same browser. Clear chat, the trash icon in his header, empties the conversation, with Undo for 5 seconds. ## Ask about your live pacing numbers At the top of Albert's pane in Budget Pacer it says Questions about your pacing numbers? The pacing assistant reads your live spend and budgets. Click Ask about my pacing data. A separate panel opens, Albert with Budget Pacer under the name. Pick a question or type your own in Ask about your budgets…: - How are my budgets pacing? - Which trackers need attention? - What Required Daily Spend should I plan for? - Summarize my month-to-date performance It answers from your own trackers, not from a manual. An answer can end with Based on: and what it used, and one follow-up question you can tap. Rate it with the thumbs under Did this help? ## What the pacing assistant cannot do The pacing assistant only reads your account data. It cannot change a budget, tag a campaign or edit your ad accounts, so it points you to the page to use instead. It cannot open a support ticket. The conversation is not kept: closing the panel ends it, and the next one starts fresh. ## When the pacing assistant cannot answer or keeps showing an error - Too many Ask Albert requests. Try again shortly. means the workspace sent a lot of questions at once. Wait a moment and ask again. - Albert could not answer just now. Try again. or Albert returned an empty reply. Try again. means that one answer failed. Ask the question again. - AI features are currently disabled for your account. Please contact support if you believe this is an error. means AI answers are switched off for your login. Contact support to have it looked at. If the pacing assistant's main AI provider cannot be reached, it answers on a backup provider instead, so you get an answer rather than an error. ## Ask Albert about pacing from PPC Ad Editor Where Albert's Do it cards are switched on for your workspace, you can also ask Albert in PPC Ad Editor how your trackers are pacing, without opening Budget Pacer. He reads each tracker's pacing the same way the pacing assistant does: a quarterly tracker against the current quarter, and a monthly tracker against the current month, so an over-budget month earlier in the quarter does not make this month look like it is overpacing. Trackers in different currencies are each read in their own currency. Budget Pacer has to be active for your workspace. ## Reach a person Ask Albert in the pane to talk to a person. He opens a support ticket with your conversation, gives you the ticket number, and the team replies by email. A box under his reply, Anything else the team should know?, adds details to that same ticket. You can also use the contact page at https://www.ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/. Every Budget Pacer email, including pacing alerts and the daily digest, has a Help link at the bottom that opens the same page. ## What to include when you contact support Say which tracker or ad account the question is about, the period you were looking at on the dashboard, and the exact message you saw. That helps the team find the problem faster. ## When a screen asks you to contact support A few sign-in errors, such as We couldn't open Budget Pacer, suggest contacting support. First try the button on that screen, Sign in to Budget Pacer or Back to Studio. If the error keeps coming back, contact support through the contact page and include the message. --- # Add a KPI target to a tracker Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/kpi-targets/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 A KPI target sets what good performance looks like for a tracker, so it can say whether spending faster or slower is a problem. A target applies to one tracker for the selected month or quarter. 1. Open the Advanced view of the dashboard. Click Add KPI target on the banner, or Add target in a tracker's KPI Goal column. You can also click Add KPI target under KPI & Targets on a tracker's page. 2. Under Which tracker?, choose the tracker, if asked. 3. Under What do you want to track?, choose CPA / CPL, Conversions, Clicks or CPC. CPA / CPL is marked Recommended. ROAS and Revenue cannot be picked as a target. 4. Click Next and enter the target. For CPA / CPL and CPC, enter the average CPA or CPC you want to pay. For Conversions and Clicks, enter the total you want to reach this period. 5. Click Next, check the Review, and click Add target. The review shows the tracker, KPI, target, date range and data source. Budget Pacer only reads your account data, so the target only drives advisory recommendations. It never changes your campaigns. ## Edit or remove a KPI target On the Advanced dashboard, click the tracker's KPI Goal cell, or click Edit target on the tracker's page. Change the value and click Save changes, or click Remove target. ## What Actual / Goal shows Actual / Goal on the Advanced dashboard compares confirmed results with your target. Today's in-progress data is not included. - For CPA and CPC, lower is better. Below target is good, On target means up to 10% above your target, and Above target means more than that. - For Conversions and Clicks, higher is better. Budget Pacer projects results to period end, then shows Ahead above 105%, On pace from 95% to 105%, and Behind below 95%. If there is not enough data, you see a note such as No conversions yet or Not enough data yet. ## The Recommendation column With at least one target set, the Advanced table adds a Recommendation column. It combines budget pace with your KPI, for example that a tracker is underpacing with an efficient CPA, so there is room to scale. Hover over it for the full text. Recommendations are advice only. Any change is yours to make in the ad platform. The Recommendation reads the pace the same way as the dashboard Status. A tracker that is Spending a bit fast counts as spending fast, and Spending a bit slow counts as spending slow, just like Spending too fast and Spending too slow. A few other messages you may see: - No budget assigned. means the tracker has no budget for this period. Add one on Budget Tracker first. - Add target for smarter recs. means that tracker has no KPI target yet. - No spend detected. Check setup. means the tracker has a target but no confirmed spend. Check paused campaigns, approvals, billing or which campaigns are in the tracker. - Not enough data yet. means there are not enough completed days or conversions to judge. Check back after the first full day. ## Dismiss the KPI target banner The banner Add performance targets to get smarter recommendations appears when a period has no targets. Click Dismiss to hide it for that period. --- # Connect Microsoft Ads when your company admin must approve it Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/microsoft-admin-approval/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Some companies require a Microsoft admin to approve PPC Ad Editor before anyone can connect Microsoft Ads to Budget Pacer. When that happens, the connect screen in Budget Pacer shows an error instead of your accounts. ## Your company Microsoft admin must grant access If Budget Pacer says your company Microsoft admin must grant PPC Ad Editor access for the organization, ask your admin to approve it: 1. On the error in Budget Pacer, click Email my Microsoft admin. 2. Under Admin work email, type your admin's work email address. 3. Click Send approval email. 4. Budget Pacer says We emailed your Microsoft admin. After they accept, retry Sign in with Microsoft and close extra Microsoft tabs. 5. After your admin accepts, go back to Accounts, click Connect Microsoft Ads again, and close any extra Microsoft tabs. ## My admin says they already approved it, but I still get the error Close every extra Microsoft tab, then click Connect Microsoft Ads again. If the error comes back, ask your admin to check in Microsoft Entra under Enterprise applications, then PPC Ad Editor, then Permissions, that admin consent shows as granted. If the Microsoft Ads login was created with Google, use Sign in with Google instead of the Microsoft options. The admin email must be a work Microsoft address. A personal Hotmail, Outlook, Live or Gmail address is refused. If you leave the box empty, it says Admin work email is required. If you send several requests in a short time, Budget Pacer says Too many admin emails from this workspace. Try again later. If the email could not go out, it says Could not send the email. Try again. or Could not send the admin email. Try again. ## What your admin sees after approving The approval link opens a Budget Pacer page that says PPC Ad Editor was approved. It asks the person who requested it to retry Sign in with Microsoft in Budget Pacer and close extra Microsoft tabs. If the admin cancels, the page says Admin consent did not complete. Either way, the admin can close that tab. ## The Microsoft Advertising API is missing in your organization If Budget Pacer says your organization is missing the Microsoft Advertising API in Microsoft Entra, an admin has to add the Microsoft Advertising API Service to your organization first. Then try connecting again from the Accounts page. You can also send this to your admin with Email my Microsoft admin. ## A personal Microsoft account was used as a company account If Budget Pacer says a personal Microsoft account cannot sign in this way, click Connect Microsoft Ads again and choose Personal Microsoft account, for Hotmail and Outlook.com sign-ins. If the Microsoft Ads login was created with Google, choose Sign in with Google instead. ## IT has to assign you to PPC Ad Editor If Budget Pacer says Ask IT to assign you to PPC Ad Editor, your company only lets assigned people use the app. Ask your IT team to assign you, then click Connect Microsoft Ads again. ## Your company's sign-in policy blocked it If Budget Pacer says Blocked by your company's sign-in policy, a rule in your company's Microsoft settings stopped the sign-in. Ask your IT team to allow it, then try connecting again. ## The sign-in was cancelled or blocked If Microsoft Ads sign-in was cancelled or blocked by your organization, Budget Pacer brings you back to Accounts with that message. If your admin already approved PPC Ad Editor, close the extra Microsoft tabs and try connecting again. Click Back to accounts to return to your list. If Budget Pacer says Microsoft did not return an authorization code. Try connecting again., the sign-in did not finish. Click Connect Microsoft Ads again. --- # Track budgets in multiple currencies Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/multiple-currencies/ Last verified: 2026-10-27 Can Budget Pacer show my USD and EUR clients on one dashboard? Yes. As of 27 October 2026, when your linked ad accounts bill in two or more currencies, the dashboard shows every currency at once, in one section per currency. Each section has its own totals in its own currency. Budget Pacer does not convert amounts or add them up across currencies. ## How the dashboard splits trackers by currency Open the dashboard with the Currency menu on All currencies. When your workspace's accounts use two or more currencies, the trackers sort into sections named by currency code, such as EUR, GBP and USD. - Each section lists the trackers whose campaigns bill in that currency, with that section's budget and spend. - On the Advanced view, each section has its own Total budget, Total spend, Current pace and Projected spend. - The footer says Amounts shown in each section's currency. - A tracker with no campaigns yet sits in a last section called No currency yet. - If the sections have counted spend to different days, the header says Actual spend dates differ by currency instead of one date. With one currency in the workspace, the dashboard stays one list, and the footer says All amounts in, followed by the currency. ## Show only one currency Pick a currency in the Currency menu above the tracker list, next to the engine menu. The dashboard then shows only trackers in that currency, with one set of totals. Pick All currencies to see every currency again. ## Group by currency Open the grouping menu and pick Group by currency. The dashboard splits into one section per currency even when you filter by creator or engine. Picking Group by currency sets the Currency menu back to All currencies. Your saved view remembers the grouping, like Group by platform and Group by my groups. ## Pick accounts in one currency when you build a tracker On New Budget Tracker, when your linked accounts use two or more currencies, a Currency menu sits at the top of the Accounts column. Pick a currency and the column lists only accounts that bill in it. Pick All currencies to see every account again. A tracker's campaigns should share one currency, because Budget Pacer does not convert between them. ## The Viewing buttons on other Budget Pacer pages On Budget Pacer pages other than the dashboard, a multi-currency workspace shows Viewing with one button per currency and the line Trackers in other currencies stay separate. Click a currency to see that currency's trackers on that page. The dashboard does not show these buttons, because it shows every currency at once. ## What Budget Pacer does not do with currencies - It does not convert one currency into another. - It does not add a USD budget and a EUR budget into one total. - It shows amounts in the currency each ad account reports. --- # Planning tags: give each campaign an audience, indication and category Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/planning-tags/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Planning tags label each campaign with an Audience, an Indication and a Category, and choose whether it counts in Projections. They appear only on workspaces where planning is turned on. If you do not see Planning tags in Budget Pacer, your workspace does not have them, and Settings then Tags shows the usual campaign tagging instead. ## Open Planning tags 1. In the left sidebar, open Budget Pacer and click Settings. Tags opens. 2. Above the campaign list, click Planning tags. On workspaces with planning, it is the view that opens first. Click Budget assignment to go back to putting campaigns in trackers. A tracker's own page also has a Planning tags section, titled Audience, category & indication for this tracker's campaigns, with the same columns for just that tracker. ## Tag a campaign Each row shows the campaign's full name, its engine and account, and its tracker under Brand / Budget, or Unassigned when it is in none. - Audience. Pick DTC, HCP or Other, or any extra audience set up for your workspace. - Indication. Type it, or pick one of the suggestions your workspace offers. It saves when you click or tab out of the box. - Category. Pick Brand, Nonbrand, Conquest, PMax, Display, Demand Gen, YouTube or Other, or any extra category set up for your workspace. A change saves on its own. While it saves, the Status column says Saving…. ## Keep a campaign out of Projections The Include switch on each row decides whether the campaign counts in Projections. Hover it to see Included in projection or Excluded from projection. Switching it off does not take the campaign out of its tracker or out of pacing. ## What the Status column means - Mapped: the campaign has both an Audience and a Category. - Unmapped: it is missing one of them. - Excluded: Include is switched off, so it is left out of Projections. ## Why are campaign names cut off? They are not any more. Long campaign names wrap in full in Planning tags, and Category and Indication stay on screen beside them. Hover a name to see it in a tooltip too. --- # Use the budget from your Google Ads or Microsoft Ads insertion order Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/platform-budgets/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 A tracker can take its monthly budget from the insertion order (I/O) on its ad account instead of a number you type. It reads the amount and never changes anything in Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. ## Turn it on - When you create a tracker, tick Use the account budget from Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. The number you enter stays until the first pull. - For an existing tracker, open Budget Tracker and click Use budget from Google Ads or Microsoft Ads in the tracker's row. To go back, click Switch to manual in the same row. The label on the row then reads Manual. ## When it works The tracker has to cover every campaign on each ad account it uses. If another tracker holds some of the same account's campaigns, the pull pauses and the label says Platform budget paused. The last amounts stay as they were until you fix the split. A tracker with no mapped campaigns cannot use an account budget either. ## How the amounts are worked out It adds up the approved insertion orders that overlap each month and splits each order across months by the days that fall in each one. Pending and cancelled orders are ignored. A month keeps its current amount when: - there is no order for that month - the order is still pending - the order is unlimited or has no end date - the order's currency does not match the tracker Quarter totals are rebuilt from the three months. ## Pull the budgets Click Pull account budgets at the top of Budget Tracker to read them now. It also pulls after your account syncs. The pull runs in the background. The button reads Pulling… for a moment, then goes back to Pull account budgets, and no message appears either way. Wait a minute, reload the page, and hover over the label on the row to see the new Last pulled time. ## Pull account budgets did nothing, or the IO budget is not updating Pulling needs Budget Pacer to be syncing. When your trial has ended, or before your trial has started and syncing is paused, the pull does not run, and the page does not say so. Check the sync message at the top of Budget Pacer. If it says Your trial has ended. Upgrade to a paid plan to continue syncing., upgrade first. See Why can't I add another tracker or ad account? If syncing is running and the amounts still do not change, read the label on the row, as below. ## What does Platform budget paused mean? Read the label on each row - Manual means you type the budget yourself. Hover over it to read Typed in Budget Pacer. - From Google Ads I/O, From Microsoft Ads I/O, or both together, means the amounts came from the platform. With more than one platform it reads From Google Ads + Microsoft Ads I/Os. Hover over the label for the account, purchase order, dates and the last pull time. - Will use Google Ads I/O after the next sync means nothing has been pulled yet. The amount on screen is the number you entered when you set it up. - Override, with the platform in brackets, such as Override (Google Ads I/O), means you edited a month by hand. - Platform budget paused means the tracker no longer covers whole ad accounts. - No billing access for Google Ads means the ad account would not let Budget Pacer read the insertion order. Ask whoever manages billing on that account, then pull again. - No Google Ads I/O means no matching order was found. - A From label can be out of date when the last pull was more than about a day and a half ago or failed. ## Override a month, then go back Cells on a platform-sourced tracker are locked. Click Override on the row to edit them, then save as usual. Click Use platform value to drop your changes and take the platform amounts again. ## See the history of a budget Click History on a row to see every change to that tracker's budget, or Change history at the top of Budget Tracker for the whole account. Each line shows who or what made the change, such as Edited in Budget Pacer, Override, Returned to the platform value, or Updated from the ad platform I/O, with the old and new value. History starts from when this was released, so earlier edits are not listed. The email for a budget alert or the daily digest also names the source when a tracker uses an account budget. --- # Find active campaigns that are not in any tracker Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/review-unmapped-campaigns/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Budget Pacer can flag active Google Ads campaigns that are in no tracker, so their spend does not slip past your pacing. This review appears only when it is turned on for your workspace. ## The campaigns need review banner When the review is on and Budget Pacer finds unmapped campaigns, a banner at the top of Budget Pacer says how many active campaigns need review and across how many accounts. Click Review campaigns to open Review unmapped campaigns. ## Assign or exclude each unmapped campaign 1. On Review unmapped campaigns, pick the account under Google Ads account. Each account shows how many campaigns it has to review. 2. Use Search campaigns, with the box that reads Campaign name or ID, to find one. Load more shows more campaigns. 3. For each campaign, choose a tracker under Tracker and click Assign. 4. Or click Exclude to keep that campaign out of pacing. If the campaign already belonged to another tracker, Budget Pacer asks you to confirm the move first, because moving reassigns its imported history too. Click Back to dashboard when you are done. ## Why the review is not ready The review only uses fresh, complete Google Ads inventory, so it can be paused: - Campaign review is not ready, or Review is paused until a fresh, complete Google inventory is available: wait for the next refresh and check again. - Microsoft Ads inventory is unsupported for this review. Tag Microsoft Ads campaigns on Settings, then Tags. - No active campaigns need review: every fresh Google Ads campaign is already in a tracker or excluded. ## Why does Projections say to review campaign coverage before saving? When this review is on for your workspace and Projections is turned on too, Save in Projections checks the same fresh Google Ads inventory. If an active Google campaign is in no tracker and not excluded, saving stops with Fresh campaign inventory found active Google campaigns that are not fully mapped. Review campaign coverage before saving. Assign or exclude the campaigns on Review unmapped campaigns, then save again. If your workspace does not have this review, unmapped campaigns never block a Projections save. ## If your workspace does not have this review If the page says Campaign coverage review is not available, your workspace does not have it. You can still find untagged campaigns yourself. Open Settings in Budget Pacer, then Tags, and click the Untagged tab. The Advanced dashboard also shows a row with the number and spend of untagged campaigns. --- # Group trackers on the dashboard Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/tracker-groups/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 You can organize your trackers into groups, which work like folders, such as one per client or per team, and show the dashboard in sections with a subtotal for each. Groups are shared by everyone on the account. Your saved views stay private. ## Create, rename or delete a group 1. On the dashboard, click Manage groups in the controls above the tracker list. 2. Type a name in Group name, up to 60 characters, and click Add. Two groups cannot share a name. 3. Click Rename next to a group to change its name, or Delete to remove it. Deleting a group does not delete any tracker. The box asks you to confirm and tells you how many trackers will move to Ungrouped. ## Put trackers in a group - On a tracker's row, use the small menu under the tracker name that starts at Ungrouped and pick a group. The menu only shows once your account has at least one group. - To move several at once, tick the checkbox on each tracker row. A bar appears with how many are selected. Open Move to group, pick a group or Ungrouped, and the trackers move. Click Clear to drop the selection. - When you create a tracker, a Group menu on the setup form lets you pick its group straight away. ## Show the dashboard in sections To group the dashboard by channel, client or currency, open the grouping menu next to Manage groups and pick one of four options. - No grouping shows one flat list. - Group by platform makes a section for each ad platform, or channel, based on the campaigns inside each tracker, plus sections for trackers that mix platforms or have no campaigns yet. Sections with no trackers are left out. - Group by my groups makes a section for each of your groups, with Ungrouped last. - Group by currency makes a section for each currency your ad accounts report, each with its own totals. Picking it sets the Currency menu back to All currencies. See [Track budgets in multiple currencies](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/multiple-currencies/). Each section is its own block with a coloured edge. The heading is labelled Channel for a platform section or Group for one of your groups, then the name and how many trackers it holds, such as 3 trackers. The tracker table uses the full width of the page, so columns share the space instead of scrolling sideways. Click the heading to collapse or expand the section. Your browser remembers which sections you collapsed. Under an open section, a subtotal line shows that section's budget and yesterday's spend. Your choice of grouping is saved with a saved view, so you can keep one view per way of looking at the account. ## Show only some groups To see only some groups without splitting the list into sections, use the Groups menu above the tracker list. Tick the groups you want, and Ungrouped for trackers in no group. A saved view keeps it. Click All groups to clear it. ## Quick answers about groups **Do my teammates see the tracker groups I make?** Yes, everyone on the account does. Groups are shared by everyone on the account. A saved view, including its grouping choice, is private to you. **Why did my tracker land in Ungrouped?** Trackers have no group until you pick one. Trackers in a group you deleted also go to Ungrouped. --- # Fix common pacing problems Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/troubleshooting/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 Start with the message Budget Pacer shows. Most problems come from data that has not refreshed yet, campaigns that are not in a tracker, or a period with no completed days. ## Spend is missing or looks too low 1. Open Accounts in Budget Pacer and check the account's Status. Current means its data is verified. Anything else means spend may still be arriving. 2. Check that the campaigns are in a tracker. Open Settings, then Tags, and open the Untagged tab. Untagged campaigns do not roll into pacing. 3. Check Actual spend through on the dashboard. Spend after that date, including today, is not counted yet. 4. Check the period. The dashboard shows only the month or quarter you picked. ## Data refresh needs attention banner This banner at the top of Budget Pacer means one or more connected accounts are not current. Reports keep using the last verified data until the refresh catches up. Click Review connected accounts to see which account and why, then retry the sync or reconnect it. If the Sync evidence says The saved login needs to be reconnected., see Connect Google Ads or Microsoft Ads accounts. Do not unlink the account first. ## Google Ads not working in Budget Pacer: Google says temporarily unavailable If a Google Ads account or the account picker says Google connection is temporarily unavailable on our side. We've been alerted. Please try again shortly., Google refused a request for a reason on our side. Your Google login is fine, so do not disconnect or reconnect it. The team is alerted on its own. Reports keep the last verified data, and the sync status says Last verified data was preserved. Try again shortly. ## Reconnect Microsoft Ads banner This banner means a Microsoft Ads sign-in has expired, so that account has stopped refreshing. Reports keep using the last verified data. Click Connect Microsoft Ads on the banner, pick the same sign-in you used before, and finish the sign-in. The banner goes away once the account is connected again. ## Data sync issue on the dashboard The Simple dashboard says Data sync issue when the latest refresh failed. Pacing is based on the last successful sync. Click Retry sync, which opens the Sync settings page. ## Pace looks wrong today Budget Pacer paces on completed days only, so today's spend is left out until the day is over. On the first day of a period, pace shows N/A. Both are expected. ## Dashboard data is unavailable If the Budget Pacer dashboard says Dashboard data is unavailable with Selected tracker metrics do not share one supported currency, or Selected dashboard metrics do not share the linked-account currency, the accounts behind the trackers you are viewing report in more than one currency. Budget Pacer does not convert currency. Pick one currency in the Currency menu above the tracker list, or pick Group by currency in the grouping menu, so each currency gets its own section and totals. A workspace with several currencies already shows one section per currency on All currencies. See [Track budgets in multiple currencies](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/budget-pacer/multiple-currencies/). ## This period has not started yet If the dashboard says No data yet for a period, you picked a future month or quarter. Pick the current one. ## Projections or Benchmarks say the tool isn't enabled If Projections says The Projections tool isn't enabled for this workspace, or Benchmarks says The Benchmarks tool isn't enabled for this workspace, that tool is not turned on for your workspace. The page loaded correctly, and the rest of Budget Pacer works as usual. These tools are not part of the standard plans. To ask about them, ask Albert to open a support ticket. ## Budget Pacer will not open after I sign in If Budget Pacer says We couldn't open Budget Pacer, sign-in did not finish. Click Sign in to Budget Pacer, or Back to Studio if you are already signed in there. If it keeps happening, contact support. If your company signs in with single sign-on, click Sign in with SSO on the Budget Pacer sign-in page. It takes you to the PPC Ad Editor sign-in and brings you back to Budget Pacer. ## Sync or new trackers are blocked If a sync or a new tracker is blocked because of your trial or plan limits, see the help page on plan limits and trials. ## My tracker's budget will not update from Google Ads or Microsoft Ads Hover over the label on the tracker's row in Budget Tracker. It names the reason. - Platform budget paused. The tracker no longer covers every campaign on its ad account, because some of them sit on another tracker. Put the account's campaigns back on one tracker, then click Pull account budgets. - No billing access for Google Ads or Microsoft Ads. The ad account would not let Budget Pacer read the insertion order. Ask the person who manages billing on that account for access, then pull again. - No Google Ads I/O or No Microsoft Ads I/O. No approved order matched. A pending, unlimited or open-ended order, or one in another currency, is skipped, and the month keeps its current amount. - Override. You edited a month by hand. Click Use platform value on the row to take the platform amount again. An ended Budget Pacer trial cannot pull account budgets. See the page on using the budget from your insertion order for the full list. ## I cannot find a new tracker on the dashboard If the dashboard is grouped, the tracker sits in a section. Check Ungrouped, and expand any collapsed section by clicking its heading. Choose No grouping in the grouping menu to see one flat list. --- # Ad Recap at $19 a month Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/plans/ad-recap/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 How much does Ad Recap cost? Ad Recap is $19 a month. There is no Ad Recap Pro tier. There is also a free plan with 1 ad account and the last 7 days of history. ## I need to know who changed the account That is Ad Recap. It tells you what changed in an ad account and who changed it. ## What the $19 plan includes Ad Recap covers one linked account. It captures every campaign change for that account, sends recaps by email on your schedule, and keeps unlimited change history while you're subscribed. ## How much is an extra Ad Recap account? Each extra linked account is $19 a month, with its own dashboard and emails. Add more accounts at any time. ## How many accounts can I buy at checkout? At checkout, Google Ads accounts covered sets how many accounts the plan covers. It says 1 included · each extra $19/mo. Use the minus and plus buttons to pick from 1 to 20 accounts. The discount for two or more products does not apply to extra accounts. ## How long does Ad Recap keep change history? On a paid Ad Recap plan, and during an Ad Recap trial, Ad Recap keeps unlimited history. Every change it records is kept, and nothing is deleted while you're subscribed. If your plan ends, your full history is kept for 30 days. After that, and on the free plan, only the last 7 days are kept. Older changes are deleted each night and can't be restored, so reactivate within the 30 days to keep all of it. Ad Recap Settings shows this under How long we keep your history. ## Is there a free Ad Recap plan? Yes. A workspace without a paid Ad Recap plan or trial is on the free plan: 1 ad account and the last 7 days of history, with the Dashboard, Written recap and recap email working for that account. Watching more accounts, or seeing further back, needs the $19 plan. See [Is Ad Recap free? The Ad Recap free plan](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/free-plan/). ## Is it version history? Ad Recap is a change recap for Google Ads and Microsoft Ads. It is not version history, and it does not roll a change back. ## Try it before you pay Ad Recap starts with a free trial, with no card and nothing charged. In the left menu, click AdRecap under Add to your suite. Pick the account to recap, then click Start my free trial. Only workspace owners and billing members can start it. The trial page shows the date it ends, and we email you 3 days before. ## What happens when the trial ends? When the trial ends without a subscription, Ad Recap moves to the free plan instead of locking you out. Your full history is kept for 30 days, then only the last 7 days. ## Paying with other products Ad Recap can sit on the same bill as your other products. Two products on one bill are 15% off each, and three or more are 25% off each. --- # AdScanner and AdMinerX Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/plans/research-tools/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Both come with your account at Lite, and both have a Pro plan. ## I want to see what competitors are running AdScanner looks up the ads competitors are running, from Google's Ads Transparency Center. AdMinerX keeps the ads that show on a Google search, from a results page you saved or a search Albert runs for you, and can send them into the editor as one preview. ## What is included for free? Lite is included with your PPC Ad Editor account, in both products. - AdScanner Lite collects 5 ads per capture job, with up to 3 server searches in any 24 hours. History is kept. - AdMinerX Lite collects 5 ads per job from a saved Google results page, with no daily limit on uploads. A search Albert runs for you on Lite keeps up to 5 ads, runs from New York, NY, in US English, and you get 3 in any 24 hours. History is kept. ## How much is AdScanner Pro or AdMinerX Pro? - AdScanner Pro is $19.99 a month. It removes the per-job cap, so one Pro search collects up to 50 ads, with no daily search limit. - AdMinerX Pro is $19.99 a month. It removes the per-job cap on ads from a results page. A search Albert runs for you on Pro keeps up to 50 ads, with no daily limit, and you can name its city, country and language. - Intel Pro is $29 a month. It is AdScanner Pro and AdMinerX Pro together on one line. History is kept on Lite and Pro. Pro still has a rolling 30-day search allowance in each product. ## What is Intel Pro? What do you get with Intel Pro? Intel Pro is AdScanner Pro and AdMinerX Pro sold together as one plan. Intel Pro is $29 a month. It turns on Pro in both research tools for your workspace, so you get the higher limits in AdScanner and in AdMinerX. Buying the two Pro plans separately costs $19.99 each, so Intel Pro is the cheaper way to get both. On your bill it counts as one product, like either Pro plan on its own. ## Are the limits per person or per workspace? Per person. The daily searches and the 30-day allowance count the searches you ran with your own sign-in, in every workspace, including the ones Albert ran for you. Each teammate has their own. AdScanner and AdMinerX count separately. Your plan, Lite or Pro, comes from the workspace you open the tool from. ## Can I buy Pro for competitor research from here? Yes. Pro is bought in PPC Ad Editor checkout. 1. Click Upgrade to Pro in the AdScanner or AdMinerX section of the left menu, or on AdScanner plans or AdMinerX plans. 2. Checkout opens on that Pro plan. For AdScanner Pro the note reads Lite stays free on your account at 5 ads per job. For AdMinerX Pro it says the plan works in the AdMinerX app on this account and is not a Chrome extension. 3. Click Continue to payment and pay. Only owners and billing members can buy. Two products on one bill are 15% off each, and three or more are 25% off each. AdScanner Pro, AdMinerX Pro and Intel Pro count as one product for that discount, so buying AdScanner Pro and AdMinerX Pro alone does not earn it. Intel Pro, at $29 a month, is the cheaper way to get both. ## When does Pro turn on? I bought Pro but AdScanner still says Lite If you paid for AdScanner Pro, AdMinerX Pro or Intel Pro and AdScanner or AdMinerX still says Lite, check which workspace you opened it from. Pro turns on for the workspace that bought it. Open AdScanner or AdMinerX from that workspace. The plans page then shows You are on Pro. It can take up to 10 minutes to show after checkout, so reload the page if it still says Lite. --- # Demand Gen Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/demand-gen/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 How many headlines and characters does a Demand Gen ad take in PPC Ad Editor? Up to 5 headlines of 40 characters, 5 long headlines of 90 characters, and 5 descriptions of 90 characters. A Demand Gen ad also uses images, videos, logos and a business name. It does not use keywords or sitelinks. ## Which Demand Gen ad types can I build? At the top of the Demand Gen editor, pick one of three ad types: - Single image ad: one or more image assets shown across YouTube, Discover and Gmail. - Video ad: a Demand Gen video ad built from YouTube video assets. - Carousel image ad: cards people swipe through. ## How do I build a Demand Gen carousel? 1. Choose Carousel image ad. 2. The Carousel Cards section starts with 2 cards and counts them, for example Carousel Cards (2/10). 3. Click Add Card for more, up to 10. A carousel keeps at least 2 cards. 4. Give each card an image, a Headline and a Final URL. A Mobile Final URL is optional. ## Can I export Demand Gen to Google Ads Editor? No. Demand Gen is a preview format. The editor shows no Export button for it, so it does not download as a Google Ads Editor file. Share the preview link with your client to review it, then build the campaign in Google Ads yourself. Google's own spec is at https://support.google.com/google-ads/answer/13695777. Google can change its limits, so check that page before you launch. --- # LinkedIn ads in the editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/linkedin/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 What are the LinkedIn character limits in PPC Ad Editor? The LinkedIn headline limit in the editor is 200 characters, with 70 recommended, on a Single Image/Video Ad. It has two LinkedIn formats, Single Image/Video Ad and Carousel Ad. Each field shows a recommended length and a maximum. Text past the recommended length still fits, but LinkedIn may cut it off in the feed. ## Single Image/Video Ad - Introductory Text: recommended 150 characters, max 600. - Headline: recommended 70 characters, max 200. - Description: recommended 100 characters, max 300. - Media: one image, or a video. As of 21 October 2026, the video can be an MP4, MOV or WebM file up to 100 MB, or a YouTube, public Google Drive or public Dropbox link. - Landing Page URL and a call to action. ## Carousel Ad - Introductory Text: recommended 150 characters, max 600, shared by every card. - Carousel Cards: 2 to 10. Each card has an image, a Card Headline of up to 45 characters and a Card Description of up to 70. - Card images can be JPG, PNG or GIF up to 10 MB, in 1:1, 4:5 or 1.91:1. 1080 by 1080 is the recommended size. - Each card can have its own URL. If you leave it empty, the card uses the ad's shared URL. - Carousel cards take images only, not video. ## Which call to action buttons can I pick? Apply, Download, View Quote, Learn More, Sign Up, Subscribe, Register, Join, Attend and Request Demo. A new ad starts on Learn More. ## Can I export a LinkedIn ad? No. LinkedIn formats are preview formats, so the editor shows no Export button and does not produce a LinkedIn ad file. Share the preview link with your client, then build the ad in LinkedIn Campaign Manager yourself. LinkedIn's own spec is at https://www.linkedin.com/help/lms/answer/a426070. LinkedIn can change its limits, so check that page before you launch. --- # Meta ads in the editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/meta/ Last verified: 2026-10-22 Single image or video. Up to 5 headlines at 40 characters, 5 descriptions at 25, and 5 primary texts at 125. Placements the preview knows include Facebook feed and Instagram feed. The ad can carry an image, or a video you upload (MP4, MOV, or WebM, up to 100 MB), a public Google Drive or Dropbox link, or a YouTube link. Carousel. Up to 10 cards. Each card has a headline at 40 and a description at 25. The ad has up to 5 primary texts at 125. A carousel card video takes a YouTube link only. Story or reel. Up to 5 primary texts at 125, on a 9:16 frame, shown as a Facebook story or an Instagram reel. Headline and description counts are zero on that format. It takes an image or the same video upload or link as a single ad. ## Where the full primary text shows The live preview shows primary text the way the Meta feed does. On the Facebook and Instagram mobile feeds, and on carousels, it stops after three lines, with See more on Facebook and more on Instagram. That label is not a button. To read a single image or video ad's primary text in full on the ad, pick Facebook above the live preview, then the desktop icon. The Facebook desktop feed shows all 125 characters. To read every primary text in full on any Meta format, open the Preview tab, next to Editor at the top of the editor. It lists each line of copy in full, with its character count. A client who opens your share link starts on that tab, unless the link is set to Editor, a Studio feature, which opens on Editor. Story and reel previews keep the primary text to a few lines on the 9:16 frame. Call-to-action labels in the editor include Shop Now, Learn More, Sign Up, Download, Contact Us, Book Now, Get Offer, Apply Now, Subscribe, and Watch More. The default is Shop Now. None of the Meta formats are marked exportable. The editor does not hand you a file Meta will import. Meta's ads guide is at https://www.facebook.com/business/ads-guide. Re-read it when this note is older than 90 days. The editor's counter wins for what you can type here. --- # Performance Max (PMax) Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/pmax/ Last verified: 2026-10-22 In the editor Performance Max allows 15 short headlines of 30 characters, 5 long headlines of 90, and 5 descriptions of 90. It uses images, logos, a business name, and optional videos. Does Performance Max take a video file or a YouTube link? A YouTube link. You cannot upload a video file to a Performance Max ad. It does not use keywords or sitelinks. ## Can I export Performance Max to Google Ads Editor? Yes, and images too small for the import are fixed for you. Click Export at the top right of the editor and pick Google Ads Editor (CSV). The download is a ZIP with the CSVs plus the images and logos on the ad. The images are sorted into landscape, square, and portrait folders to match the CSV, and an image smaller than Google's minimum for its shape is enlarged in the ZIP so the import accepts it. Logos are not enlarged. The editor does not submit the asset group to Google Ads. Posting it is a step you take in Google Ads Editor. Google's own spec is at https://support.google.com/google-ads/answer/10724817. Re-read that page when this note is older than 90 days. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. ## Why the preview shows a gradient instead of your images A Performance Max preview uses the images in the ad's Images section. Each placement takes only an image of its own shape. Where the ad has no image of that shape, the placement shows a blue and purple gradient instead. - Landscape placements need a 1.91:1 image, square placements a 1:1 image, and portrait placements a 4:5 image. A wide image counts as landscape, a near-square one as square, and a tall one as portrait. Each image on the ad shows its ratio in the corner of its thumbnail. - One image of the right shape is enough for all the placements of that shape. - An image in the asset library does not reach the ad on its own. On the ad, click Add Image, pick images from your asset library or upload new ones, then click Done. - Asset Status, above the preview, counts Landscape (1.91:1), Square (1:1), Portrait (4:5), and Logos. A 0 there means those placements show the gradient. Click Asset Status to open it if it is closed. Associating an asset in the asset library links it to the account, a campaign, or an ad group. It does not add an image to a Performance Max ad. The ad's Images section does that. --- # Policy basics the editor does not clear Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/policy-basics/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 Will my ad be approved by Google if it looks right in PPC Ad Editor? Not necessarily. The editor checks character counts, how many headlines or images a format takes, and which fields a format has. It does not review your ad against Google, Meta or LinkedIn ad policies, and it does not approve or submit the ad. ## What the editor checks - Character limits. Each field counts as you type, and most stop at the limit. See Character limits. - How many headlines, descriptions, images or videos a format takes. - Which fields a format has. A responsive search ad has no image field, for example. ## What the editor does not check - Trademarks. It does not know whether you have the rights to use a brand name. - Capital letters and punctuation. When you type a headline yourself, the editor does not flag ALL CAPS, an exclamation mark or repeated punctuation such as !!. - Claims, landing pages, and rules for regulated industries such as health, finance or legal. A preview can still be disapproved after someone uploads the ad in Google Ads, Meta or LinkedIn. Common refusals are a trademark you do not have rights to use, a string of capital letters, and punctuation repeated for emphasis. Those checks happen on the platform, not in this editor. ## When Albert rewrites your copy In workspaces where Albert can rewrite an ad's headlines or descriptions for you, he will not write a line that Google Ads tends to refuse. He leaves out an exclamation mark in a headline, repeated !! or ??, a line that is mostly capital letters, and a line that repeats an earlier one. He always shows you the change before it is made. That is a check on Albert's own writing, not a policy review of your ad. ## Where to check policy Google's editorial policy is at https://support.google.com/adspolicy/answer/6021546. Read the platform's own policy for anything sensitive, and let the platform's review decide. The editor does not submit the ad, and it does not clear the ad. --- # Responsive display ads (RDA) Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/rda/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 What does a responsive display ad need in PPC Ad Editor? Up to 5 short headlines of 30 characters, 1 long headline of 90 characters, up to 5 descriptions of 90 characters, images, a logo and a business name. The preview shows how Google can lay it out across the Display Network, Gmail and YouTube. ## How many images, logos and headlines an RDA takes An RDA takes up to 15 images and up to 5 logos, with these text limits. - Short headlines, up to 5, 30 characters each. - One Long Headline, 90 characters. - Descriptions, up to 5, 90 characters each. - Images, up to 15. The preview uses landscape (1.91:1), square (1:1) and portrait (4:5) crops. - Logos, up to 5. - Videos, up to 5, added as YouTube links with Add YouTube video. - A business name, a Final URL and a Call to Action. - Keywords, set on the ad group. An RDA does not use sitelinks or callouts. ## Call to Action Pick the button under Call to Action: Automated, Shop Now, Learn More, Sign Up, Get Quote, Contact Us, Apply Now, Book Now, Download, Get Offer, See More, Subscribe or Visit Site. ## See it on Display, Gmail and YouTube The live preview is called Responsive Display Ad Preview. Switch between Display, Gmail and YouTube, and between desktop and mobile, to see the ad in each place. Shuffle swaps in other combinations of your headlines, descriptions and images. ## Export and what the editor does not do RDA is one of the formats you can export as a file for Google Ads Editor. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. The editor does not submit the ad to Google Ads, and it does not check Google's ad policies. Google's own spec is at https://support.google.com/google-ads/answer/7005917. If it disagrees with the editor, the editor's counter is what a person can type. --- # Responsive search ads (RSA) Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/rsa/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 How many headlines and descriptions can a responsive search ad have in PPC Ad Editor? Up to 15 headlines of 30 characters and up to 4 descriptions of 90 characters, the same as Google Ads. Each field counts as you type. Chinese, Japanese and Korean characters count as two. ## What an RSA has in the editor - Headlines, up to 15, 30 characters each. - Descriptions, up to 4, 90 characters each. - Final URL and two display paths. - Sitelinks, callouts and structured snippets. An image on the search preview is an image extension from the asset library. - A logo and a business name. - Keywords, set on the ad group. The ad form has no image field and no video field. ## Pin a headline or description Each headline and description has a Pin position menu. Pick Only in Position 1, Only in Position 2 or, for a headline, Only in Position 3. Any Unpinned Position puts it back in rotation. The preview keeps a pinned line in its slot and rotates the rest, the way Google does. A headline pinned to position 3 does not show when Preview settings is on the two-headline layout, Standard (2H). The settings say Pinned position 3 won't show in 2-headline layout. ## See the combinations The live preview mixes your headlines and descriptions the way Google does. Pick One Ad, Three Ads or Five Ads to see several combinations, and click Shuffle for the next set. See [See your RSA variations](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/rsa-variations/). ## Export and what the editor does not do RSA is one of the formats you can export as a file for Google Ads Editor. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. The editor does not submit the ad to Google Ads, and it does not check Google's ad policies. See [Policy basics the editor does not clear](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/policy-basics/). Google's own spec is at https://support.google.com/google-ads/answer/7684791. If it disagrees with the editor, the editor's counter is what a person can type. --- # YouTube ads in the editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ppc/youtube/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 How many headlines does a YouTube ad take in PPC Ad Editor? Up to 5 headlines of 30 characters, 1 long headline of 90 characters, and 5 descriptions of 90 characters. A YouTube ad also uses a video, images, a logo and a business name. It does not use keywords or sitelinks. ## How do I add my video? 1. In the YouTube editor, click Add video. The Video section is marked Required, because a YouTube ad needs a video. 2. Paste the link under YouTube URL. Links from youtube.com, youtu.be and Shorts all work. Any other link shows Paste a valid YouTube URL (watch, youtu.be, or Shorts). 3. Click Change later to swap the video. PPC Ad Editor plays your video in the preview. It does not upload it to YouTube or Google Ads. ## What call to action options does a YouTube ad have? Call to Action offers Learn more, Shop now, Sign up, Subscribe, Get quote, Apply now, Contact us, Download, Book now and See more. ## What else can I set? - Call to Action: Learn more, Shop now, Sign up, Subscribe, Get quote, Apply now, Contact us, Download, Book now or See more. - The final URL, and Display Path 1 and Display Path 2 for the address shown on the ad. - A Companion Banner image to show alongside the video. Until you add one, it says No companion banner uploaded. - A logo with Add logo. Duplicate lines are flagged as Duplicate headline or Duplicate description, and a counter turns red when a line is over its limit. ## Can I export a YouTube ad? No. YouTube is a preview format, so the editor shows no Export button and does not produce a YouTube ad file. Share the preview link for review, then set the campaign up in Google Ads yourself. --- # Accept an invitation and find your dashboards Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/accept-an-invitation/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Open the link in your invitation email, sign in with the address it was sent to, and click Accept Invitation. The workspace that invited you then opens on its Dashboards page. Accepting is free, and the invitation works for 7 days. ## How do I accept an invitation? 1. Open the email, "You've been invited to join … on PPC Ad Editor", and click Accept invitation. 2. The page You're Invited! shows who invited you, the workspace name, your role, the date the invitation expires, and the address it was sent to. 3. If you are not signed in: - You already have an account with that email: click Login to Accept, sign in, and you come back to the invitation. - You do not have an account: click Create Account. The invited email is filled in for you. If you sign up with email and password, you join the workspace as soon as the account is made. If you sign up with Google, you come back to the invitation. 4. Signed in with the invited email, click Accept Invitation. 5. Welcome to the Team! shows, then Redirecting to dashboard.... The invited workspace opens on its Dashboards page. ## Where are my assigned dashboards after I accept? In the workspace that invited you, not in your own. Accepting switches you into that workspace and opens its Dashboards page. If you later land in your own workspace, click the workspace name at the top of the left menu, under Workspace. Pick the workspace that invited you from the Workspaces list. Each one shows your role and how many members it has. If the invitation named certain dashboards, you see only those. If a dashboard you expect is missing, ask an Owner or Admin of that workspace to add you. They open Settings, then Users & dashboards, and click Manage access on that dashboard. If you were already a member of that workspace, accepting adds the invitation's dashboards to what you can already see. ## Why does it say Email mismatch? You are signed in with a different address from the one the invitation was sent to. The page says which address is signed in and which was invited. An invitation only works for the address it was sent to. Under Choose an option to continue, click Log out and try again. Or click Login with, or Create account with, followed by the invited address. If you want to use a different address, ask the workspace to invite that address instead. ## Why does it say Invalid Invitation? The invitation can no longer be used. The page says why: - "This invitation has expired": it is more than 7 days old. - "This invitation has been revoked": the workspace cancelled it. - "This invitation has been accepted": it was already used. Sign in and look in the Workspaces list. - "Invitation not found", or "This invitation link is not valid or has expired.": the link is wrong or incomplete. Open it again from the email. Ask an Owner or Admin of the workspace for a new invitation. In Settings, under Users & dashboards, they can click Resend invite on your row while it is still waiting. That emails you the same link and gives it 7 more days. Otherwise they cancel it and invite you again. If accepting fails with "This invitation is no longer available." or "This invitation no longer reserves an editor seat", the invitation or its seat changed after it was sent. Ask for a new invitation. ## What is a Join link? A Join link adds you to a whole workspace, not one dashboard. The page says Join, followed by the workspace name. - Signed in, it shows Joining as with your name and email. Click Join workspace. - Not signed in, click Create account & join, or Sign in & join. You join as an Editor. You see Welcome to, followed by the workspace name, and then the app opens. If it opens your own workspace, switch from the Workspaces list in the left menu. If you are already in that workspace, you see "You're already a member of this workspace!". If the page says "This account-wide invite link is no longer available. Ask the workspace owner for a dashboard invitation.", ask for an email invitation instead. Invalid invite link means the link is wrong or expired. Ask your team for a new one. If the workspace has no free seat, joining stops and the owner needs more seats first. ## Where are previews shared with me? There is no separate Shared with me list. A preview someone shares by link opens from that link, with no account needed, so keep the email or message it came in. Previews in a workspace you joined are on that workspace's Dashboards page. An old Shared previews address opens Dashboards. ## What is the Who's working on this with you? step? Some new workspaces see this step right after sign-up, marked Step 3 of 4. Type addresses under Email addresses, pick Invite as Editor, Commenter or Admin, and click Send invites & continue. Or click Skip for now to go straight to building. A seat bar shows how many seats are used and left. If you joined by invitation, you skip this step. ## Does it cost anything to join a workspace? No. Accepting an invitation is free. Seats belong to the workspace that invited you. Free includes 2 seats, the owner and one teammate. If the workspace needs more seats, its Owner or Admin adds them from its plan, not you. --- # Ad formats in the editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ad-formats/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 New Preview lists every channel and format you can preview, and new channels are added there as they ship. This list is as of 21 October 2026. The editor has 15 formats across nine channels, and New Preview also has Multi-Channel. ## Which channels and formats can I preview? Pick a channel in New Preview to create a preview in one of these formats. | Channel in New Preview | Formats | | --- | --- | | Google Ads | Responsive Search Ad (RSA), Responsive Display Ad (RDA), Performance Max (PMax), Demand Gen | | Facebook / Instagram (Meta) | Single image or video, Stories / Reels, Carousel | | LinkedIn | Single image or video, Carousel | | YouTube | YouTube Ad, in-stream and skippable | | Microsoft Ads | Responsive Search Ad, previewed in Bing's layout | | ChatGPT Ads | ChatGPT Ad, a chat card | | X Ads | X Ad, a promoted post with an image or a video | | Reddit Ads | Reddit Ad, a promoted post with an image or a video | | Programmatic | Display banner, native, video, and HTML5 banner ads in one preview | Multi-Channel is one preview where you write the copy once for Google, Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube formats. See Multi-channel previews. Every channel above is available in New Preview today. For X, Reddit, and ChatGPT, see Edit a ChatGPT, X, or Reddit ad. For Microsoft Ads, see Microsoft Ads search previews. For display banners, native, video, and HTML5 banners, see [Preview programmatic ads](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/programmatic/). ## Can I preview X (Twitter) ads? Yes. Pick X Ads in New Preview. X was formerly Twitter. An X ad is a promoted post with an image or a video, and you can share it and collect comments like any other preview. ## Is X in The Lab? No. X ads are live in New Preview, so they are not in The Lab. The Lab, under Manage workspace, lists channels that are not in the app yet, such as TikTok, and you can add yourself to a list there. Pinterest is not in the app yet. The sign-up channel list marks it Soon. ## Video in Meta and LinkedIn ads As of 21 October 2026, video in a Meta single image or video, Meta story or reel, or LinkedIn single image or video preview can be an uploaded MP4, MOV, or WebM file up to 100 MB, or a YouTube, public Google Drive, or public Dropbox link. X and Reddit ads take the same video uploads, and as of 22 October 2026 a public Google Drive or Dropbox link pasted into Video URL. Video storage is capped per account by plan. A Meta carousel card and a YouTube ad take a YouTube link only, and a LinkedIn carousel has no video. Programmatic video takes MP4 or WebM uploads, up to 100 MB. ## Which formats export Responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max ads export a Google Ads Editor file. A ChatGPT ad exports an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook. The other formats preview in the editor and do not export a file the ad platform imports. X, Reddit, and Microsoft Ads previews have no export file yet. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. ## Which plan opens each format On the current Free plan, every format is open to create, including LinkedIn, Demand Gen, Programmatic, X, Reddit, ChatGPT, and Microsoft Ads. Some older Free accounts are on an earlier Free plan, where only Responsive search, Responsive display, Meta single image or video, and YouTube are open and the other formats are available with Studio. ## What is not a format Importing from a DSP is not connected yet, and there is no format for an organic post. See [What the ad editor does not support](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/not-supported/). --- # Upload a video to a Meta or LinkedIn ad Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-a-video/ Last verified: 2026-10-22 Can I upload my own video file to a Meta or LinkedIn ad? Yes. Meta single image or video, Meta story or reel, and LinkedIn single image or video previews play a video file you upload, or a public Google Drive or Dropbox link. A YouTube link still works too. The video plays in the feed, Story and Reel previews and on the share link your client opens. ## Upload a video file, such as an MP4 1. Open the ad in the editor. On a Meta ad, click Video in the media section. 2. Click Upload video and pick the file. You can also drag the file onto the empty box that says No videos added yet. 3. A bar shows the upload progress. When it finishes, the video is in the preview. Files can be MP4, MOV or WebM, up to 100 MB each. The hint next to the buttons says the same: YouTube link, a public Google Drive or Dropbox link, or an MP4, MOV, or WebM up to 100 MB. ## Add a video from YouTube, Google Drive or Dropbox 1. Click Add Video. 2. Paste the link in YouTube, Google Drive, or Dropbox link. 3. Click Add video. A YouTube link stays a link. The preview embeds it, so use a Public or Unlisted video your client can play. A Google Drive or Dropbox link is copied into your account. The box shows Importing… while the file comes in. The file has to be shared publicly: - Google Drive. In Drive, set General access to Anyone with the link, then paste the link again. If it is not shared, the editor says That file isn't shared as "Anyone with the link". - Dropbox. In Dropbox, click Share and set the link to Anyone with the link. A link to a folder does not work, only a link to one file. Under Video Library, Used in this preview and From your account list videos you added before. Click Add on one to reuse it. Change adds another video. It does not replace the first one. ## Why is my vertical video cropped in the Facebook or Instagram feed preview? Because Meta crops it that way in a feed. As of 27 October 2026, the feed preview of a Meta single image or video ad follows the shape of the file you uploaded. A tall video, such as 9:16 or 4:5, shows in a 4:5 frame and fills it, so the top and bottom of a 9:16 clip are cropped. A square video shows 1:1 and a wide one shows 16:9. The Story and Reel previews show the whole tall video full screen. To see all of a 9:16 video, check the Story or Reel placement. ## How much video can I store? Uploaded videos, and files copied in from Google Drive or Dropbox, count toward a video storage limit for the whole account. YouTube links do not count. - Free plan: 500 MB. - Paid plans: 5 GB. When a video would go over the limit, the editor says You're using, with how much you use and your limit, and This video would put the account over its video storage limit. On the Free plan the message has an Upgrade link. To make room, remove videos you no longer need from your previews. A stored video that no preview uses any more is deleted once it is 30 days old. A preview in the trash keeps its videos until the trash is emptied. ## X and Reddit video X and Reddit ads take a video upload too. Click Upload video, or Replace video on a Reddit ad that already has one. They take the same MP4, MOV or WebM files up to 100 MB, and they count toward the same storage limit. ## Can I use a Google Drive or Dropbox video link on a Reddit or X (Twitter) ad? Yes, as of 22 October 2026. Paste the link into Video URL and click Use link, or press Enter. 1. In Google Drive or Dropbox, share the video file as Anyone with the link. 2. Copy the link to the file itself, not to a folder. 3. On the Reddit or X ad, paste it into Video URL and click Use link. The video is copied into your account. It then plays in the preview and on the share link like a video you uploaded, and it counts toward your video storage. A YouTube watch, Shorts or youtu.be link plays from YouTube. Any other http(s) link plays as a video file. A Drive or Dropbox folder link, or a page that is not one file, shows "Paste a YouTube link, a public Google Drive link, or a public Dropbox link." Share the file itself and paste that link. ## Video errors and what they mean - Videos must be 100 MB or smaller. Make the file smaller and try again. - Use an MP4, MOV, or WebM video. The file is another type. - This video uses a format browsers can't play. Export it as H.264 MP4 and try again. This is common with HEVC video from a phone. - Paste a YouTube link, a public Google Drive link, or a public Dropbox link. The link is from another site. - Google Drive is rate-limiting downloads, or Dropbox is rate-limiting downloads. Wait a minute and try again. ## What video does not do - A YouTube ad still takes a YouTube link only. - A Meta carousel card takes a YouTube link only, not a file or a Google Drive or Dropbox link. - A LinkedIn carousel has no video. - The editor does not edit, trim or export a video. Downloads from the live preview are pictures. - Programmatic video ads are separate. They take MP4 or WebM uploads, up to 100 MB each. --- # Add and delete headlines and descriptions Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-and-delete-headlines/ Last verified: 2026-10-23 To add a headline, click Add Headline under the last one. To delete one, click the bin icon on its row, titled Delete headline. It goes straight away, and a message such as Headline deleted offers Undo for a few seconds. Descriptions, and long headlines where a format has them, work the same way. ## How do I delete a headline or description? 1. Open the ad in the editor. 2. Click the bin icon at the end of the headline's or description's row. 3. The line is removed at once. A Headline deleted or Description deleted message shows Undo for about six seconds. Click Undo to bring it back. ## I deleted a headline by mistake, can I get it back? Yes, if you click Undo straight away. After you delete a headline or description, a Headline deleted or Description deleted message shows Undo for about six seconds. Click Undo and the line comes back in the same place with its text. After the message is gone, click anywhere outside a text box and press Cmd+Z on a Mac or Ctrl+Z on Windows. That undoes your recent edits in the editor one at a time, newest first, and Cmd+Shift+Z or Ctrl+Y redoes them. Undo only covers edits made since you opened the preview. After you reload or leave the preview, a deleted line cannot be brought back, so type it again. A deleted headline does not go to the trash. ## Why does it ask me before deleting this one? Studio asks first only when deleting would lose more than the text. - The headline is pinned to position 1, 2 or 3. The box titled Delete headline? says it is pinned, and to which position. - The line has open comment threads. The box says how many unresolved comment threads it has, and that they will be lost. Click Delete to remove it, or Cancel to keep it. Undo still works after you click Delete. ## Why can't I add another headline? Every format has a maximum. A Google responsive search ad takes up to 15 headlines and 4 descriptions. At the maximum, the add button is greyed out and says, for example, Maximum 15 headlines reached. Delete a headline to add another. If the button says Fill or delete the empty description, one of your descriptions is still blank. Type in it, or delete it, and then add another. For the character limit on each line, see Character limits. --- # Draft copy with AI Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/ Last verified: 2026-10-14 PPC Ad Editor writes ad copy with AI in three places. Draft with AI builds a whole preview from a website or your documents. Suggest copy writes new lines beside the headlines and descriptions in the editor. Apply using AI turns a client's comment into an edit. AI drafting is on the Free tier and on Studio. ## How do I draft a whole preview with AI? 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview. Pick where you want to advertise and the format, and name the preview. You can also use Quick build. 2. Under How do you want to start?, pick Draft with AI, then click Continue to AI draft. 3. Create AI Preview opens. Enter the Website URL, or add files under Source Documents, or both. Source Documents takes PDF, DOCX, TXT, and Excel files up to 10MB each. 4. Pick the Language: Auto-detect, English, or Danish. Add Guidance if you want, such as the tone or what to avoid. 5. Click Generate Preview. Building your preview… shows four steps: Read your inputs, Built your campaign structure, Writing your ads, and Open in the editor. It takes about 20 seconds. Click Continue in background to open the editor while it keeps going. The editor opens with the same progress steps on screen instead of an empty preview, and it fills in your finished headlines, descriptions and website as soon as the draft is ready. You do not need to refresh the page. If the draft fails, an Edit the preview anyway link under the progress lets you start editing by hand. ## What does Draft with AI build? A full campaign structure, not only copy. It reads your site or documents, builds campaigns and ad groups with keywords grouped, then writes one or two ads per ad group. It also adds sitelinks, callouts, and structured snippets. Everything stays editable in the editor. ## Are sitelinks or snippets from Draft with AI cut off mid-word? No. Each sitelink, snippet value and callout that Draft with AI writes ends on a whole word. A phrase longer than the field ends at the last whole word that fits, so you never get half a word such as Experienc. A single long word that cannot fit at all is left out rather than saved in pieces. Text you type yourself into these fields is not changed. Callouts, sitelink text and snippet values fit 25 characters, and sitelink descriptions fit 35. If a sitelink's text or first description ends up empty this way, that sitelink is left out. ## What if a draft fails or I close the window? The draft keeps building if you close the window, and progress shows in the dashboard's Previews list. The bell shows Preview Ready when it finishes, or Generation Failed if it does not. A failed or stalled draft has a Retry button in the Previews list. Cancel build stops it and keeps an empty preview so you can retry. If Create AI Preview rejects the Website URL, the message says why, such as Page not found (404), Website not found, or The website took too long to respond. Try another page on the site, or add documents instead. If the site blocks automated visits, returns an error, or does not respond, Create AI Preview does not stop. The We couldn't read this page window opens, and you pick Web search, Another page, or A short description, then click Generate. The Website URL you typed stays as the ad's Final URL. If the page you give under Another page cannot be read either, the button reads Checking... while the page is tried, and the window opens again so you can choose a different source. If the first AI writer is unavailable or refuses the request, the same source is written once more automatically. You do not pick a writer and no second credit is used. ## Can I use Draft with AI for Multi-Channel or Programmatic? No. Draft with AI is greyed out for Multi-Channel and Programmatic, and those previews start from scratch. Every other channel in New Preview can use it. After a Multi-Channel preview exists, open it and use Suggest copy. If Draft with AI is missing everywhere, AI copy is turned off for you or your workspace. ## How do I use Suggest copy in the editor? Suggest copy sits beside the headlines and the descriptions. Click it, and the editor researches the ad's Final URL, writes new lines, and adds them to that section. A progress window such as Generating Headlines shows each step. On Meta ads, Suggest copy fills primary text, headlines, and descriptions, and needs a valid Website URL first. LinkedIn sections have Suggest Copy from AI. The language menu next to Suggest copy offers Auto-detect, English, or Danish. The choice is remembered for the dashboard. ## How do I choose what Suggest copy reads? Click the ··· button next to Suggest copy, which is More AI options, then Add brand context. The AI Source Data panel opens: - Landing page research reads the ad's Final URL. Without one, it says to add a Final URL to the ad. - Your documents adds brand or product docs, such as PDF, DOCX, TXT, MD, XLSX, or CSV files up to 10 MB. - Recycle existing ads reuses your Headlines or Descriptions. - Ad assets uses your Sitelinks, Snippets, Callouts, or Business names. - From picks This preview or Entire dashboard. Click Done. If nothing is selected, the panel warns that suggestions will be generic. ## What happens when Suggest copy cannot read my page? Suggest copy checks the Final URL before it writes. If the site blocks automated visits, returns an error, or does not respond, a window opens: We couldn't read this page. It asks where to write from: - Web search, marked Recommended. It searches the web for the business name and site. - Another page. A different page from their site, a store, or Facebook. - A short description. A few words on what they sell, and to whom, up to 300 characters. Nothing is picked at first, and Generate stays greyed out until you choose. Click Generate to write from that source. Cancel closes the window and changes nothing. No AI credit is used when a page cannot be read. If Another page cannot be read either, the same window opens again with that page filled in. Try a different page, or pick Web search or A short description. Enter another full web address, like yourbrand.com/page means the address is incomplete, is a placeholder, or is the page that already failed. Add a few words about what they sell means the description is too short. A page that redirects to a readable page still works. This window covers headlines, descriptions, and Suggest copy on Meta and LinkedIn ads. ## Why won't AI write my headlines? If Suggest copy will not write your headlines or descriptions, check the ad's Final URL first. When the page cannot be read, Suggest copy asks for another source, as above. It stops instead of asking for another source when: - The Final URL is still the placeholder address. Replace it with the client's real website, then try again. - The URL points to a local or private network address. Use the public website. - The URL is not a complete web address. Enter one such as https://www.example.com. ## How do I turn a client comment into an edit? Open the comments on a preview. A comment that asks for a specific text change shows Apply. Click it to make the change, and Undo to reverse it. Apply needs no AI credit. Apply using AI reads the comment with the whole ad and suggests the best edit. Click Confirm to make it, or Cancel. To work through every open comment at once, click Apply All at the top of the comments panel. AI Apply All lists a suggestion per comment. Pick the ones you want and click Apply. It handles up to 50 comments per run. You need edit access to apply changes. ## Can AI combine my documents into a Strategy Brief? Yes. In the AI Source Data panel, select two or more documents and click Distill … selected docs into one brief. Create Strategy Brief opens. Click Generate Brief, review the brief, then click Save Brief. The brief joins your documents with a Brief tag, and Suggest copy can read it. Edit it later with the pencil icon, Edit strategy brief. ## What happened to AdImprover and AI Suggest? They are now Draft with AI, built into PPC Ad Editor. Start from your landing page URL or your keywords, get headlines and descriptions to edit, and see each line counted against Google's limits. There is no separate AdImprover tool to sign in to. Draft with AI is on the Free tier, with a monthly allowance of AI credits. ## How do AI credits work? How many credits does an AI generation use? At most one. One AI generation uses one AI credit, whether it writes one field or the copy for a whole preview. Apply using AI uses one credit per comment. Asking Albert a question is free. An Albert change you approve with Do it shows its cost on the card first, and Cancel costs nothing. Your workspace shares one pool of credits: your plan's monthly amount for each member of the workspace. Credits reset at the start of each calendar month, not on your billing date. When you have used them, a Get more AI credits window opens and shows how many you have used. On the Free tier, Suggest copy can show that more suggestions are available in Studio when it trims the results to fit Free's slots. The billing page can show remaining credits in an AI Credits meter. --- # Approve a preview: how clients sign off on ads Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/approval/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Use Approval when a client needs to sign off on the ads. This is how approve works. Set the preview's share link to Approval and send it. Your client clicks Approve or Request changes on the shared page, with no account and no login. You see the answer at the top of the preview in the editor, in the Approval column of your dashboard, and in an email. Approval is a Studio feature. It is not available on the Free tier. ## How does approve work? Approve works on a share link. You set the link's Permission level to Approval and send it. Your client opens it, with no account, and clicks Approve or Request changes. Their answer, their name and any comment show at the top of the preview, in the Approval column of your dashboard, and in an email to you. Approve needs Studio. ## How do I send a preview for approval? 1. Open the preview and click Share with client. Or, right after you copy the client link, click Approve on the card that says Send to client for approval. 2. In Share preview, under Permission level, click Approval. Its line reads "Client approves or requests revisions in one click". 3. Optional. Type a Reviewer email, and a Message for reviewer of up to 500 characters. 4. Click Copy, then send the link to your client yourself, by email or chat. The line under the link then reads "Anyone with this link can view, comment, and approve". The editor shows Awaiting reviewer approval at the top of the preview. Add the Reviewer email even though you send the link yourself. It is the address Send reminder and Re-request approval write to, and the name shown beside the status until your client answers. ## Who can send a preview for approval? Anyone in your workspace who can change the preview's share link: an Owner, an Admin, an Editor or a Standard User with access to that dashboard. A Commenter cannot change share settings. ## What does my client see when I ask them to approve? The live ad, with Request changes and Approve. They do not need an account. On a computer, a dark bar across the top of the shared page holds the two buttons. - Approve opens Confirm Approval. They type their Name, an optional Email and an optional Comment, then click Confirm. - Request changes opens Request changes. They type their Name and a Comment describing the changes needed, then click Submit. The comment is required. On a phone or tablet, Request changes and Approve sit at the bottom of the screen. - Approve opens Approve this ad, with Name, Email and Comment. They tap Confirm approval. - Request changes opens Request changes, with Name and What should change?. They tap Send request. Name is required in both. After they answer, the page shows Approved by, or Changes requested by, with their name and the date, and their comment under it. Your client can also leave comments on the preview while they review. When you send a preview back after changes, the bar reminds your client of their last answer, such as Previously: You requested changes on, with the date. ## What happens after my client approves or requests changes? - The person who asked for approval gets an email. Its subject names the reviewer, then says approved, or requested changes on, followed by the preview name. The reviewer's comment is in the email, with View in dashboard. - The bar at the top of the preview in the editor changes to Approved by, or Changes requested by, with the reviewer's name. - The Approval column in your dashboard's preview list shows Approved or Changes req. The first answer is the one that counts. If someone opens the same link after it was answered, they see the answer, not the buttons. A second answer sent at the same time is refused with "This request has already been responded to". If your client typed an email when they approved, it is saved as the link's Reviewer email. ## They asked for changes. How do I send it back? 1. Make the edits in the editor. The share link always shows the current ad. 2. Click Re-request approval on the bar at the top of the preview, or in Approval details from the Approval column. 3. You see Approval re-requested. The status goes back to In review, marked (rev.) in the Approval column. If the link has a Reviewer email, the reviewer gets a new request email that says "Please review the updated version." Your client opens the same link again and sees Request changes and Approve once more, on the updated ad. Re-request approval only shows after Changes requested. Once a preview is approved, there is no button to ask again on that link. ## What if I change the link away from Approval? If you switch the link to Viewer, Commentor or Editor before your client answers, the open request is withdrawn. The buttons leave the shared page, and Awaiting reviewer approval leaves the editor. An answer your client already gave stays on record. ## Can I send a group of previews for approval? No. Approval works on a single preview's link. In Share group, the Approval option does not show. A group link can be Viewer, Commentor or Editor. Send each preview's own link for approval. A Programmatic preview is reviewed creative by creative. Your client clicks Approve or Request changes on each creative, and the Approval column shows the overall result. ## Which plan includes approval? Studio. Approval is not available on the Free tier. There Approval carries a Studio tag in Share preview. Clicking it, or clicking Approve on the card after you copy a client link, opens the Approval workflow offer for Studio. The link keeps its current permission. PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan is $149 a month. Sharing a link so a client can look and comment works on the Free tier. If a workspace leaves Studio, its approval links become comment links. Your client can still look and comment, but the Approve and Request changes buttons no longer show. ## Does approval keep old versions of the ad? No. Approval records who approved or asked for changes, and when. The share link always shows the current ad. It is not version history. Approval does not publish or push the ad to an ad platform either. --- # Approval steps and reminders Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/approval-steps/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Track every approval in the Approval column of your dashboard's preview list. Nudge a reviewer who has not answered with Send reminder, and open Approval details to see who answered and to send a preview back. Approval and its reminders are Studio features. ## What do the approval statuses mean? The Approval column shows one of these for each preview with an approval link: - In review, with how long ago you asked, such as 2 days ago: the link is waiting for an answer. - In review (rev.): you sent the preview back after changes, and it is waiting again. - Approved, with the reviewer's name: the reviewer approved. - Changes req., with the reviewer's name: the reviewer asked for changes. A dash means the preview has no approval request. Long names are shortened in the column. Open Approval details to see the full name. The bar at the top of the preview in the editor shows the same answer: Awaiting reviewer approval, Approved by, or Changes requested by, with how long ago the request was made. For a Programmatic preview, the Approval column shows the overall review of its creatives. It has no bell and does not open Approval details. ## How do I nudge a reviewer who has not answered? Where do I send a reminder to approve? From the Approval column of your dashboard's preview list. Send an approval reminder when they have not approved yet. 1. In your dashboard's preview list, find the preview that shows In review. 2. Click the bell beside the status. Its tooltip says Send reminder. 3. You see Reminder sent. The reviewer gets an email with the subject "… is waiting for your review", headed Reminder: Review requested, with Review now. The bell only shows when the link has a Reviewer email. Add one in Share preview, under Approval. If your client typed an email when they answered an earlier request, that address is used too. You can send one reminder every 24 hours for each request. Until then the bell is greyed out and its tooltip says Reminder sent today. Reminders only go out when you click the bell. Nothing is sent on a schedule. There is no bell once the reviewer has answered, because there is nothing to remind them about. ## Where do I see the reviewer's answer? Click the status in the Approval column. Approval details opens with the preview name and: - the status, In Review, Approved or Changes Requested, and when the request was made - Reviewer, with the name they typed, or the Reviewer email if they have not answered yet - a Revision tag when you sent the preview back after changes - Re-request approval, when the status is Changes Requested - Copy link, which copies the share link so you can send it again If the preview has no approval request, it says "No approval request found for this preview." The reviewer's comment is in the email you got when they answered. ## How do I send a preview back after changes? 1. Make the edits in the editor. 2. Click the status in the Approval column, then click Re-request approval. Or click Re-request approval on the bar at the top of the preview. 3. You see Approval re-requested. The column shows In review (rev.). If the link has a Reviewer email, the reviewer gets a new request email that says "Please review the updated version." If something goes wrong, you see Failed to re-request approval. Try again in a moment. ## Is the Stage column the same as approval? No. Stage is your own label for where a preview stands, such as Active, Paused or Pending. Approval is what your reviewer answered on the link. Changing the stage does not ask anyone to approve, and an approval does not change the stage. To change a stage, click the pill in the Stage column, or the stage control in the editor's toolbar, and pick one. To make your own, type a name in Add new status... and press Enter, as the hint Press Enter to create & assign says. The new stage is set on that preview and listed under Custom Statuses for every preview in the workspace. A name can be up to 50 characters. A person on an Approval or Editor share link can pick a stage, but cannot create a new one. ## Does an approval keep old versions? No. The record shows who answered and when. It is not version history. The share link always shows the current ad. --- # Asset library Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/asset-library/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 The asset library holds the sitelinks, callouts, structured snippets, calls, images, logos, and business names your ads use. In the editor, click Assets at the top right, beside the find and replace magnifier. On a narrow screen it is an icon with the tooltip Asset library · images, logos and extensions. In the classic layout it reads Asset Library. To open the library for the whole workspace, click Quick search in the left menu or press Ctrl K, type asset, and choose Asset library. The library has a tab for each kind: Sitelinks, Callouts, Structured Snippets, Call, Images, Logos, and Business Names. ## Add an asset Open the tab and click its button: New Sitelink, Add Callout, Add Snippet, Add Call Extension, or Add Business Name. On the Images tab the button is Upload image, or Add More Images in the older grid view. On the Logos tab it is Add More Logos. To add a sitelink, fill in Sitelink, the first description, and the URL, then click Save. The second description is optional. The URL box already starts with https://, so type the rest of the address. If it looks like you left out www, the form says Did you forget "www"? Click here to insert. Turn off Enabled to keep a sitelink in the library without showing it on your ads. If a field is wrong, the form shows the error on that field, such as Max 25 characters (CJK count as 2). The limits are: - Sitelink text 25 characters, each description line 35. - Callout text 25. - Business name 25. - A structured snippet needs a Header and 3 to 10 values. - A call extension needs a Country/Region and a phone number. A number that is too short for the country shows Invalid phone number format for selected country. Full-width letters use up two of the limit each. ## How do I upload images or a logo, and what files work? Images and logos can be JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP, up to 20 MB each. 1. On the Images tab, click Upload image. Upload Images opens. 2. If you opened the library for the whole workspace, choose a Destination dashboard first. Without one, it says Choose one destination dashboard before uploading images. 3. Drop images on the box or click Choose Files. You can pick several at once, and add an optional description to each. 4. Click Upload, which shows the count, such as Upload 3 Images. The box recommends 1200 × 628 pixels, the 1.91:1 ratio. A file that is too big shows, for example, "photo.png" is too large (24.0 MB). Maximum file size is 20 MB. A file of another type is refused with Use a JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP image. Logos upload one at a time from Upload Logo on the Logos tab. Some ad formats are stricter when you pick or upload from the ad. X ads and Reddit ads take JPEG or PNG, and a Reddit image can be up to 3 MB. A ChatGPT ad needs a square JPEG or PNG between 640 and 1200 pixels, and the picker offers a 1:1 crop when an image is not square. ## Can I import sitelinks from a file? Yes. You can import sitelinks, callouts, and structured snippets in bulk from a CSV or Excel (.xlsx) file, such as a Google Ads Editor CSV export. 1. Open the Asset Library and go to the Sitelinks, Callouts, or Structured Snippets tab. 2. Click Import from File. Import assets from file opens. 3. Drop your CSV or Excel file, or click to pick it, and click Continue. The file can be up to 10 MB. 4. Ready to import shows how many sitelinks, callouts, and structured snippets were found. Click Import, which shows the count, such as Import 12 assets. 5. Import complete shows what landed. Click Done, or Open Asset Library. The imported assets land in your library without a campaign or ad group. Associate them where they should show, as below. Duplicates are skipped. If nothing is found, it says No sitelinks, callouts, or structured snippets found in the file. Make sure your file uses the correct column headers. Call extensions, business names, and images are not imported this way. ## Write sitelinks, callouts, and snippets with AI On the Sitelinks, Callouts, and Structured Snippets tabs, Suggest Copy sits next to the add button. Click it and AI writes new ones and adds them straight to the list. - Open the library from the editor's Assets button. When the ad has a Final URL, the site's address shows beside Suggest Copy, and the suggestions are written from that site. - A progress window shows each step, such as Researching website..., Generating sitelinks..., Creating sitelinks..., and Populating library.... It ends with All assets added to library. - The new assets are not attached to a campaign or an ad group yet. When you opened the library from a preview, they are filed under that preview's dashboard. Associate them, as below, to show them on the ad. - Each click uses one AI credit. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/) for how credits work. - The language menu beside the button offers Auto-detect, English, or Danish. Suggest Copy only shows when AI copy is on for you and your workspace. AI drafting is on the Free tier and on Studio. ## Where images go on each format On a responsive search ad, add images, logos, sitelinks, callouts, and structured snippets in the asset library. An image added there shows on the search preview as an image extension. On a responsive display ad, a Performance Max ad, a Demand Gen single-image ad, a Meta image ad, or a LinkedIn image ad, images are a section on the ad. The button there is Add Image. A picker opens on your library, where you can also upload. Pick images, then click Done. On a YouTube ad, the form uses Add video and Add logo. ## Find an image in the Images tab The Images tab is a table with the columns Image, Size, Used in, Labels, and Uploaded by. - Type in Search images to find one. - Filter by Dashboard, Preview, Label, Uploader, or Ratio. - Sort by Recently updated, Oldest updated, Recently uploaded, Name, or Usage. - Each image shows its number of variants, the cropped versions made from it. Click Show family to see them. Cropped versions stay with the dashboard the original image belongs to. A crop made for one client's image does not show up in another client's dashboard or its previews. The ⋯ menu on a row has Crop image, Manage labels, Manage associations, and Delete image. ## Make landscape, square, and portrait versions of one image 1. On the Images tab, open the ⋯ menu on the image and click Crop image. 2. Select Image Ratios opens. Click a ratio on the left: 16:9 Landscape, 1:1 Square, 4:5 Portrait, or 1.91:1 Google Display. 3. Drag and resize the crop box, then click Add with that ratio, such as Add 1:1. 4. Add as many ratios as you need. Click Save, which shows how many, such as Save (2). Each crop becomes its own image in the library, ready to pick on any ad. The preview counts both 16:9 and 1.91:1 as landscape. ## Label assets by client or theme Asset labels are coloured tags that help you filter a big library. - To label one asset, click the tag icon on it, titled Labels, then tick a label or click Create new label. - To label several, tick them, click Label, and pick a label. The box reads Assign to 3 assets, for example. - Above the list, Labels: shows your labels. Click one to see only those assets, and All to clear the filter. Click Manage to create or edit labels in Manage Labels. ## What associating an asset means Associating links an asset to where it shows: the whole account, a campaign, or an ad group in the preview. The live preview shows the assets associated with the campaign or ad group on screen. 1. In the editor, click Assets at the top right. The library opens for this preview. 2. Click an asset. The panel on the right becomes Group Association. 3. Check the account, a campaign, or an ad group. Changes save on their own after a second. Each level is separate, and checking one does not check the levels under it. An account-level asset applies everywhere unless a campaign or an ad group has its own. A campaign-level one overrides the account, and an ad group-level one overrides both. Assets with a blue badge are already associated. The library you open from Quick search is for the whole workspace, and it cannot associate. Open the library from a preview to associate assets. ## Use an asset from another client's dashboard Assets belong to your whole account, so you can reuse a sitelink, callout, or image you made for another client. 1. Open the library from the preview that needs the asset. On the Sitelinks, Callouts, Structured Snippets, Call, Logos, and Business Names tabs, Filter by dashboard: starts on this preview's dashboard. 2. Click Add and pick the other dashboard, or click Clear All (Show All Dashboards) to see every dashboard's assets. Click a dashboard's chip to take it out of the filter. 3. Click the asset and associate it with this preview's account, campaign, or ad group, as above. A dashboard in the filter shows the assets made in it, plus the assets already associated with its campaigns and ad groups. The Images tab has its own Dashboard filter. When you pick images or a logo on an ad, the picker's Filter by Dashboard row works the same way. ## Wrong sitelinks showing? Why another client's extensions do not show in my preview The editor's live preview only uses account-level extensions and business names from this preview's dashboard. Those are the ones made in this dashboard, plus any already associated with this dashboard's campaigns or ad groups. If you keep two clients in one workspace, a sitelink or callout made in one client's dashboard does not show up in the other client's preview. To use one anyway, open the library from this preview, click Add under Filter by dashboard: and pick the other dashboard, then associate the asset with this preview's campaign or ad group, as above. ## Why the extensions change between ad cards Each ad card in a search preview shows one structured snippet, one image, and a share of your sitelinks and callouts. The rest rotate between cards, so every card shows a different set. This asset rotation happens on its own. To keep one in place, open the library from the preview, click the pin on the asset, titled Pin position, and pick a position. A sitelink or callout can be pinned to positions 1 to 4. A structured snippet, call extension, image, or logo has one position. Click the same position again to unpin it. ## Who can change the asset library? Why does a teammate see View only? Is it on the Free plan? The asset library, labels, crops, and Suggest Copy are on the Free tier and on Studio. Owners, admins, and editors can add, change, and delete assets. If you see View only, your role can comment but not change assets. Ask an owner or admin for editor access. --- # Studio price and billing Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/billing/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 How much does Studio cost? Studio Pro is $149 a month. It renews monthly until you cancel. A full refund is available when you contact support within 24 hours of your first purchase. ## Where to manage billing Where do I pay? On the Billing page. Billing lives in Settings under Plans & billing. To open it, click your workspace name at the top of the left menu, then click Billing next to Your plans. You can also press Ctrl K, type billing, and choose Billing. Old billing links open the same page. The page has two tabs, Your products and The Lab. ## What the Billing page shows - Your products lists each product on the workspace with its status, such as Active, Trial, Past due, Cancels or FREE, and its monthly price. On the Free plan, Studio Pro shows FREE and 1 dashboard · Pro removes the cap. - On the Free plan, an Ads row under Studio Pro counts your ads, such as 5 of 24, with Across all your previews. Past the limit it reads, for example, 26 ads · limit 24, and says All 26 stay live. Upgrade to Studio to create more. - Extra dashboards and Extra user seats sit under Studio Pro. Each shows how many are included, the new total, and the monthly price for one more. - Add a paid product lists products you do not have yet, with their price and Add. It notes that each one bills on its own date until you have two. Once you pay for one product it reads Add to your suite, and a new product joins your existing invoice. - A line says Invoices and receipts have their own page, with a link to Invoices & receipts. - The side card shows the Next invoice with the card on file, and Update to change the card. If you have never paid, it says No payment method and Added at your first checkout. - Below it are your Billing details, the legal entity, VAT number and billing email, with Edit details. - Delete account is at the bottom, for the owner only. ## Who can see and change billing? Only an owner or a billing member can buy a product, upgrade, or add dashboards and seats. Admins can open Billing and see the products, prices and next invoice. They can also click Update to change the card, and cancel Budget Pacer, Ad Recap or Intel Pro. Everyone else opens Invoices & receipts instead of Billing, where they see the list of invoices and can ask for a PDF. ## Where can I download a PDF of my invoice? Invoice PDFs and receipts are on the Invoices & receipts page. Open Settings and click Invoices & receipts, or pick it from your account menu at the top. Click Download invoice for the latest one, or PDF or Receipt on any row. Tick several to download them together as one ZIP, up to 24 at a time. Owners and billing members download every invoice. Admins see the amounts, and everyone else sees the list with amounts hidden. Anyone can click Ask for it on an invoice, and the owner or a billing member can share that PDF in one click. See [Invoices and receipts](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invoices-and-receipts/). ## Compare plans Compare plans in your account menu, and in the Free plan menu at the top of the editor, opens this Billing page. It does not start a checkout, so you can look at the products first. ## Upgrade to Studio Pro Upgrade plan in the left menu, Upgrade on the Studio Pro row, and the Upgrade button in the workspace menu go straight to checkout for Studio Pro. There is no in-app order page first. On the Free tier, clicking the Studio name itself in the workspace menu does not start checkout. It takes you to your Studio dashboard, or just closes the menu while you are building your first ad. If you leave checkout without paying, you see Checkout canceled. No changes were made to your subscription. ## I paid but it still says Studio isn't active yet Do not pay again. Refresh the Billing page first, and if it still says Payment received, but Studio isn't active yet, contact support. ## What happens after I pay? You see Welcome to Studio! and then You're now on the Studio plan! If you have not made a preview yet, you go straight to building your first ad. Otherwise you stay on Billing. If you see Payment received, but Studio isn't active yet, refresh Billing or contact support, and do not pay again. If you see We couldn't confirm your Studio upgrade, refresh the page. If you are still on Free, contact support and do not pay again. ## How do I add client dashboards or seats? On the Billing page, use the plus button on Extra dashboards or Extra user seats, then click Add. The button shows Add and the monthly cost, and the line beside it says it is added from your next invoice. After it saves you see Capacity updated. You can add up to 50 of each at a time. On the Free plan the same rows are there, but the button reads Upgrade to add and takes you to checkout for Studio Pro first. Only an owner or a billing member sees the plus buttons. You cannot lower extras from these rows. ## Cancel Studio Pro On the Studio Pro row, click Manage. It opens the billing portal, where you can cancel or change the card. When the subscription ends, the app shows Subscription canceled and Your access continues until with the date, and a Reactivate button. Your previews stay saved. Budget Pacer, Ad Recap and Intel Pro have Cancel on their row instead, which opens a Cancel page for that one product. See the page on cancelling a product. ## If a payment fails A failed charge shows Past due and Fix payment on the Billing page. Fix payment opens Payment failed, which names the declined card and says everything still works until the retry date. It also says the date access pauses if the invoice is still open. Click Update payment method, or click Pay this invoice when it appears. ## Why does it say Studio is read-only after a failed payment? If the invoice stays unpaid past the grace period, the workspace menu shows Studio is read-only, followed by a note that the card on file was declined, with Fix payment. Your previews are kept. Fix the payment and editing comes back. ## What you can buy Studio Pro is the paid plan for the editor, and new purchases are monthly. Older Studio plans, such as Premium, stay on the terms already recorded for that account. A new self-serve Studio account does not get a free trial of Studio Pro. Budget Pacer, Ad Recap, AdScanner Pro and AdMinerX Pro are separate products on the same Billing page. ## What needs Studio Approval and Allow export on a share link are Studio features. Free can link one Google login for Google Ads downloads, and Studio links as many as you need. Sharing a preview, comments, an AI draft, and export are available on the Free tier. --- # Put your client's logo on the preview and the share page Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/brand-logo/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 The brand logo is your client's logo at the top left of the editor and of the page your client opens from a share link, beside the client's name. Set it once for the client dashboard, or for one preview only. ## Set the client's logo 1. Open a preview in the editor. 2. Click More options, the ⋯ at the top right. In the classic layout, click the logo or letter at the top left instead. 3. Click Set as dashboard default to use the logo on every preview for this client. Or click Set logo for this preview to use it on this preview only. 4. A picker opens. Choose a logo from your asset library, or upload a new one, then click Done. ## Which logo shows - The preview's own logo, if you set one. - Otherwise the dashboard default. - Otherwise the first letter of the client's name on a purple square. ## Change or remove it - Use dashboard default removes this preview's own logo, so it goes back to the client's default. It shows only when the preview has its own logo. - Remove dashboard logo removes the client's default. ## What your client sees Your client sees the logo and the client name at the top left of the share page. This logo is for the page around the ads. The ads themselves use their own logos, such as the Profile Image on a Meta ad or the logos on a display ad. ## Is the brand logo the same as the logo in my Google Search ad? No. The brand logo sits on the page around your ads. The logo inside a Google Search ad is an ad asset. A first Search ad built from a website picks up the site's logo as that asset on its own, and you change or remove it from Assets, the library icon in the editor header. Setting a brand logo does not change the logo inside any ad. ## Why can't I change the brand logo? The logo actions show only to people who can edit the preview. Anyone else who clicks the logo at the top left sees just All clients, which goes back to your list of clients. --- # Call-only ads: show a phone number on a search ad Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/call-only-ads/ Last verified: 2026-10-17 Can I make a call-only ad in PPC Ad Editor? There is no separate call-only ad format. To mock up an ad that leads with a phone number, build a Google Search ad and add a call extension. The live preview then shows your phone number under the ad, and you share it with your client like any other preview. ## Add a phone number to a search ad 1. Open the Google Search ad, then click Assets at the top right to open the asset library. 2. Open the Call tab and click Add Call Extension. 3. Pick the Country/Region, type the Phone Number, and keep Enable Call Extension on. 4. Optional. Tick Call-Only Ads, Show only the phone number (no website link). The extension shows a Call Only tag in the asset library. 5. Click Add Call Extension. The phone number shows on the live preview, under the headlines and descriptions. To choose which call extension shows on an ad group, click the phone number on the live preview, or click Set up next to Call extension in Preview settings, the sliders icon above the preview. ## Hide the phone number again Open Preview settings, turn off Call extension, and click Apply. That only hides it in the preview. Nothing is deleted. ## What the call-only tick does not do The preview still shows your headlines, descriptions and display URL. The Call-Only Ads tick marks the call extension in your asset library. It does not turn the preview into a phone-only ad. ## Does the phone number come with the export? Yes. Export to Google Ads Editor includes the call extension's country and phone number, so the call asset comes with your ad when you import it in Google Ads Editor. PPC Ad Editor does not push ads to Google Ads. ## I came from the call-only ad page on your website That page opens sign-up with a Google Search ad picked on the first-ad screen. Build the ad, then add the call extension as above. ## Are call extensions on the Free tier? Google Search ads and call extensions work on the Free tier and on Studio. --- # Campaigns, ad groups, and ads in the editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/campaigns-and-ad-groups/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 A preview holds campaigns. Each campaign holds ad groups, and each ad group holds ads. The left sidebar of the editor lists the campaigns. Click the arrow beside a campaign to see its ad groups, and click an ad group to edit its ads. The names follow the channel. A Google preview says Campaign and Adgroup. A Meta preview says Ad Set for the ad group. A LinkedIn preview says Campaign Group and Campaign, the way LinkedIn names them. ## What does "Ad Group (4)" mean in the preview It is a count. In the Preview view of a responsive search ad, From Ad Group (4) under Sitelinks means four sitelinks are attached to this ad group. The same label shows under Callouts, Structured Snippets, Call, and Business Names, with its own count. ## What From Account and From Campaign mean above sitelinks In the Preview view, Associated Assets lists the sitelinks, callouts, structured snippets, calls, and business names this ad uses. They are grouped by where each one is attached: - From Account, attached to the whole account. - From Campaign, attached to this campaign. - From Ad Group, attached to this ad group only. - Other, with no level recorded. The number is how many are attached at that level. To change them, open Assets and check or uncheck the ad group. See [Asset library](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/asset-library/). Two other numbers you may see: - In the sidebar of the new layout, the grey number after a campaign name is how many ad groups it holds. - In a PDF export with Ad groups switched on, the table of contents shows the number of ads after each ad group, such as (4 ads). ## Add a campaign or an ad group - Click New Campaign. In the new layout it is at the bottom of the campaign list. In the classic layout it is at the top. - To add an ad group, expand a campaign and click New Adgroup, or New Ad Set on Meta. It shows in the Editor view. New ones get a name such as Untitled Campaign 2 or Untitled Adgroup 2. Ad group numbers can skip, because ad groups in trash still count. ## Rename, duplicate, or delete - Rename. Double-click the name in the sidebar, type, and press Enter. Esc cancels. You can also click the name of the campaign above the form. - The ⋯ menu on a row, shown when you hover, has Edit, Duplicate, and Delete. A campaign also has Ad Assets, except on Meta. A duplicate is named with (Copy) at the end. - Delete asks you to choose Send to Trash or Delete permanently. See Trash to bring one back. ### Duplicating an ad group with the same keyword twice Duplicate works on a campaign or an ad group that has the same keyword twice in different capitalization, such as running shoes and Running Shoes. The copy keeps one of each, so it does not fail on them. Campaigns and ad groups cannot be dragged into a different order. ## Add, rename, and delete ads The ads in an ad group show as tabs above the form. - Click + (Add new ad) to add one. It is named Ad 2, Ad 3, and so on. - Hover a tab and click the pencil (Rename ad) to type a new name. Press Enter to save. - Duplicate ad copies it. Delete ad removes it. An ad group always keeps at least one ad, so the last one cannot be deleted. An ad group holds up to 3 ads. Demand Gen is not held to 3. ## Why can't I add an ad to the sample dashboard? The sample dashboard is for looking around, so it does not take new ads, campaigns or copies. If you click + (Add new ad) or Duplicate ad there, the editor shows one note, Build your own ad in a new dashboard. Samples stay as samples. Nothing is added. Create a new dashboard and build your ad there. See Sample ad. ## Why can I not add a third ad to my ad group on the free plan? The Free plan allows 2 ads per ad group, so a third ad in the same ad group needs Studio. To make room, delete an ad in that ad group, or add the ad to another ad group. The Free tier includes 2 campaigns per preview, 2 ad groups per campaign, and 2 ads per ad group. The ad tabs show your count, such as 2/2 editable ads, and hovering it says Free includes 2 editable ads per ad group. Upgrade to edit the rest. Adding one more opens Ready to build the full ad?, with an offer to upgrade to Studio. Click Keep working in Free to close it. Studio is $149 a month and unlocks the full structure. When an AI draft builds more than the Free tier includes, the extra campaigns, ad groups, and ads stay visible and locked, with a Studio badge. Deleting one, or sending it to trash, frees its slot. --- # Carousel and gallery ads: which ones you can build Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/carousel-and-gallery-ads/ Last verified: 2026-10-17 Can I make a carousel or gallery ad, a swipeable ad with several images? Yes, a carousel. PPC Ad Editor builds three carousel ads with swipeable cards: a Facebook and Instagram carousel, a LinkedIn carousel, and a Demand Gen carousel image ad for Google. There is no Google gallery ad format. ## Build a Facebook and Instagram carousel 1. Open a dashboard and click New Preview. 2. Pick Facebook / Instagram, then Carousel. 3. Add up to 10 cards. Each card has an image, a headline of up to 40 characters, a description of up to 25 and its own link. The primary text above the cards is shared. The live preview shows the cards in the feed. Your client swipes through them on the share link. ## Build a LinkedIn carousel In New Preview, pick LinkedIn, then Carousel. A LinkedIn carousel has 2 to 10 cards and starts with 2. Click Add Card to add one. The introductory text and Landing Page URL are shared by every card, and a LinkedIn carousel has no video. See [Edit a LinkedIn ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/edit-a-linkedin-ad/). ## Build a Google carousel Pick Google Ads, then Demand Gen. In the editor, choose Carousel image ad, Create multiple image cards users can swipe through. The preview shows it on YouTube, Discover and Gmail. See Placements. ## Can I make a Google gallery ad? No. Google gallery ads are not a format in the editor. For a multi-image Google ad, use a Demand Gen carousel image ad. The Gallery Ads page on our website opens sign-up with a Meta carousel ad picked on the first-ad screen. You can switch to another channel or format there. ## Are carousels on the Free tier? On the current Free plan, every carousel format is open. On an earlier Free plan, Carousel, LinkedIn carousel and Demand Gen show a Studio badge, and Studio includes them all. --- # Character limits the editor enforces Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/character-limits/ Last verified: 2026-10-19 These are the editor's limits, not a promise about what Google, Meta, or LinkedIn will approve later. ## How many headlines can a responsive search ad have? A responsive search ad in the editor can have up to 15 headlines of 30 characters each, and up to 4 descriptions of 90 characters each. ## Limits by format Responsive search. 15 headlines at 30 characters. 4 descriptions at 90 characters. Responsive display. 5 short headlines at 30. 1 long headline at 90. 5 descriptions at 90. Performance Max. 15 short headlines at 30. 5 long headlines at 90. 5 descriptions at 90. Demand Gen. 5 headlines at 40. 5 long headlines at 90. 5 descriptions at 90. Meta single image or video. 5 primary texts at 125. 5 headlines at 40. 5 descriptions at 25. Meta carousel. 5 primary texts at 125, shared by the cards. Up to 10 cards, each with a headline at 40 and a description at 25. Meta story or reel. 5 primary texts at 125. It has no headline or description. LinkedIn single image or video. Headline max 200, recommended 70. Description max 300, recommended 100. Introductory text max 600, recommended 150. LinkedIn carousel. 2 to 10 cards. Card headline 45. Card description 70. Introductory text max 600, recommended 150. YouTube. 5 headlines at 30. 1 long headline at 90. 5 descriptions at 90. Sitelink text is 25. Each sitelink description line is 35. Callout text is 25. ## How long can Meta primary text be? The character limit Meta primary text can be up to 125 characters in the editor, on a single image or video ad, a carousel, and a story or reel. You can write up to 5 primary texts. The field stops at 125, so a longer paste is cut off there. ## Does the character limit guide on your website match the editor? Yes, for the Google formats the editor builds. The Google Ads character limit guide on ppcadeditor.com lists the same figures: responsive search headlines at 30 and descriptions at 90, sitelink text at 25 with two description lines at 35, callouts at 25, Performance Max headlines at 30 with long headlines at 90, Demand Gen headlines at 40, and YouTube headlines at 30 with descriptions at 90. Demand Gen is the format Google used to call Discovery. The guide also lists Google call-only ads. Call-only ads are not a format in the editor. To show a phone number on a search ad, add a call asset with Add Call Extension in the asset library. You do not need the guide while you write. Each field in the editor counts as you type, and most stop at the limit. The ones that let you keep typing turn red until you trim them. ## How the counter works Each field shows a count such as 28/30. It is grey while you are under the limit and turns red when you go over. On most fields, when you reach the limit exactly, a note under the field says so, such as Google Ads allows 30 characters for a headline. Chinese, Japanese, and Korean characters, and other full-width characters, count as two. Most emoji count as one. On LinkedIn, the count turns orange past the recommended length and red past the max. ## Which fields can go over the limit Most fields stop at the limit, including when you paste, so extra characters are not kept. A few let you keep typing, so you can see the whole line and trim it yourself. The field and its count turn red until you do: - Responsive search headlines and descriptions. - YouTube headlines, long headline, and descriptions. - LinkedIn headline and description, and carousel card headline and description. A description over the limit also shows a note such as Google Ads descriptions max out at 90 characters. This one is 95, so it can't be used as-is. Trim it, or use Suggest copy. Display paths have no counter in the editor. --- # Welcome back: choose the client you want to keep active Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/choose-active-workspace/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Coming back to a Free account that has more than one client dashboard? PPC Ad Editor asks which client to keep editing. Pick the one you work on most. Nothing is deleted, and your other dashboards stay in your account. ## Why do I see Choose the client you want to keep active? Free includes one editable workspace. When your Free account, or an account whose trial has ended, holds more than one client dashboard and none is picked yet, signing in opens a page headed YOUR FREE WORKSPACE with the title Choose the client you want to keep active. Your other work stays safe and visible. Upgrading to Studio makes every workspace editable again. ## Which client to keep, and how do I pick one? 1. Each client dashboard is listed with its name, how many previews it has, such as 3 previews, and when it was last edited, such as Edited Oct 12, 2026. Why does the button say Choose a workspace? Because no client is picked yet. Click one and the button changes. 2. Click the client you want to keep working on. 3. Click the Continue with button, which shows that client's name. The button shows Activating workspace… while it saves. 4. That client's dashboard opens, and you can edit there as usual. Nothing is deleted. The page says so under the button: Nothing is deleted. You can switch again after the existing cooldown. So you can switch to another client later, after the waiting period between switches. ## What if the page does not load? If you see We couldn't load your workspaces, your saved work is still safe. The page says Retry to choose your active Free workspace. Click Retry. If a choice fails, the page shows Unable to select this workspace. Try again. ## What does a new Free account see? A new Free account goes to the first-ad screen until it builds a first ad or chooses to explore on its own. After that, signing in opens the dashboard. The Free welcome address opens the dashboard too. See [Get started and build your first ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/getting-started/). ## What does Your work is safe on Free mean? After you pick a client, the dashboard can show a blue bar headed Your work is safe on Free. It says this workspace stays editable within Free's included creative slots. Any work beyond those slots stays visible but locked, and Studio unlocks every slot and additional workspaces. Click Got it to hide it. ## I pay for Studio. Why would I see this? You should not. A paid Studio account opens its dashboard directly. If you see this page while on Studio, open Billing under Manage workspace to check your plan, or contact support. --- # Client workspaces and manager accounts Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/client-workspaces/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Your workspace is your PPC Ad Editor account, with its own billing and members. Inside it, each client gets a dashboard on the Dashboards page, and each dashboard holds that client's previews. A Google Ads manager account is something else. It lists the client ad accounts you can pick from when you download an account into a preview. ## How many client workspaces do I get? Studio includes 3 client dashboards and 2 seats. Each client workspace is a dashboard on your Dashboards page. The Free tier includes 1 client dashboard, 3 previews and 2 seats. Users & dashboards, under Settings, shows how many seats and dashboards your plan has, with a link to Billing. ## Can I add more client dashboards? Yes, on Studio. An owner or a billing member opens Billing, clicks the plus button on Extra dashboards, then clicks Add. Each extra dashboard is added to your next invoice. On the Free tier the button reads Upgrade to add, and you upgrade to Studio first. Extra user seats work the same way. ## How do I switch to another workspace? Click the workspace name at the top of the left menu, under Workspace. The Workspaces list shows each workspace you belong to, with your role and how many members it has. Click one to switch. A check marks the one you are in. ## I need another workspace for a new client Add a client dashboard for the new client inside your workspace, rather than a second workspace. Studio includes 3 client dashboards, and you can add more on Billing. ## Can I create a second workspace? Not if you already own one. Each person can own one workspace, on Free and on Studio. For another client, add a client dashboard inside your workspace instead, on the Dashboards page. New workspace sits at the bottom of that menu, with Separate billing and members. It is available when you do not own a workspace yet, for example when you only belong to a team someone else owns. Otherwise it is greyed out and says why. - Free includes one workspace. Upgrade to add another. You own a Free workspace and are in it. - Only owners can create a workspace. You are in a workspace you do not own. - You already have a workspace. You own a Studio workspace and are in it. ## Can I move or copy a preview to another dashboard? No. A preview stays in the dashboard where it was made, and there is no Move or Copy to another dashboard. You can: - Duplicate a preview in the same dashboard. In the editor, open More options and click Duplicate preview, or click Duplicate on the preview's row. The copy is named after the original, with (Copy). - Duplicate a whole dashboard. On the Dashboards page, click Duplicate on the dashboard's row. You get a new dashboard named after it, with (Copy), holding copies of its previews under their original names. A dashboard with more than 25 previews cannot be duplicated in one go. If Duplicate dashboard is not working on a dashboard with 40 previews, that is why. Duplicate single previews instead. - Start a new preview inside the other dashboard. ## Does duplicating count toward my plan? Yes. A duplicated dashboard counts as one of your plan's dashboards, and its previews count toward your previews. On the Free tier, with 1 dashboard and 3 previews, duplicating a dashboard asks you to upgrade instead. If your role cannot create clients, Duplicate says Your role cannot create a client. Ask an editor or owner to create one, then open it from the dashboard. ## How do manager accounts work? When you import from Google Ads, the Import from Google Ads window lists your Google logins under Google login, and the accounts the chosen login can see under Google Ads account. A manager account shows with a Manager tag, and its client accounts sit under it. You cannot pick the manager itself. Pick one of the accounts under it, then click Next: choose campaigns. Search by name or customer ID to find one, or click Refresh list if an account is missing. If a login shows No Google Ads accounts on this login, ask the account owner to add that email in Google Ads, or click Use another Google login. ## How many Google Ads accounts can I link? Can I connect two different Google logins for two clients on Free? No. The Free plan links one Google login. Connecting a second one says Free includes 1 Google Ads account. Unlink it to connect another. Studio can link as many Google logins as you need. PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan is $149 a month. To link an account to one client, click Link Google Ads on that dashboard's row. Unlink Google Ads removes it. --- # Comment on a preview and collect client feedback Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/comments/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Click Comments in the header to open the comments panel. It starts just below any notice line at the top of the page, so its title and close button stay in view. It lists every thread, with All, Unresolved and Resolved tabs. Reply to a thread, jump to the line it is about, and resolve it when the note is done. ## How do I leave a comment? - On one line: select words in the live preview and click Comment, or Comment on followed by the field name. You can also use the comment icon beside each line on the Preview tab. - On the whole preview: type in Add a comment… at the bottom of the panel and click Post. Ctrl+Enter, or Cmd+Enter on a Mac, posts too. A comment on a line stays pinned to that field. Click a thread to jump to it. If the field was removed, the thread says Component removed or disassociated. ## How do I reply to or resolve a comment? Open the thread, type in Reply..., and press Enter. Click the circle on a thread to Mark as resolved. Click it again to Mark as unresolved. The link icon, Copy link to thread, copies a link that opens that exact thread. ## Can I edit or delete someone else's comment? Can a client delete our notes on a shared preview? No. Edit and delete only show on comments you wrote yourself. Hover your own comment and click the pencil, Edit, to change the text, or the trash icon, Delete, to remove it. On anyone else's comment, a teammate's or a client's, there is no pencil and no trash icon, so their note stays as they wrote it. The same goes for a client on a share link. They can edit and delete their own comments, and they cannot edit or delete your notes. If a comment is no longer needed, reply to it or mark it as resolved. ## How does client commenting work on a share link? 1. Share the preview with the link set to Commentor. Your client opens it in a browser with no account. 2. They click Comments, or click a headline, a description or the primary text to comment on that line. That includes the line that says No primary text added yet. On a view-only link, the click says This link is view-only and asks them to have the sender turn on comments. Images, the logo, the button and the URL are not click targets, so they use a general comment for those. 3. The first time they post, Join the conversation asks for Your name. They can click Start commenting, or click Skip to browse without commenting first. 4. Their comment carries a Guest badge with the name they typed, and it lands in your Comments panel. Your client can comment on a line, reply and resolve threads. They cannot edit the ad on a Commentor link. On a ChatGPT ad, a comment on the title or the description shows on that line in the shared preview, the same as a comment on a Google headline. ## Does my client get an email when we reply? Yes, when they left an email. Join the conversation shows an Email field marked Optional, with a note that we'll email them when the team replies. When a signed-in member of your workspace replies in a thread your client commented in, your client gets New reply to your comment. View the reply opens their own link at that thread. Your client gets no reply email when: - they left the Email field empty, or the form did not show an Email field - the reply came from another guest on a share link, not from your team - they clicked Unsubscribe from reply emails in an earlier reply email - their link was regenerated or paused since they commented ## Who gets an email about a new comment? - The person who created the preview, for every comment that is not their own. The email goes to each address ticked under Receive notifications on their Profile. - The workspace owner, for a client comment when there is no creator to email. - Anyone mentioned in the comment. - The Also notify address, if one is set in Share preview under Notify when viewed. It is notified in addition to the Profile addresses. A client comment arrives as Your client commented on, followed by the preview name. The link in the email opens that thread, even on a busy preview with hundreds of threads. Several quick posts from one person within a few seconds send one email. If your workspace has Slack notifications connected, a comment that sends these emails also posts to your Slack channel. ## Can a reviewer suggest the new wording? Yes. On a comment thread, a reviewer clicks Add proposed revision, types the replacement under Suggest replacement copy…, and clicks Save proposal. A counter shows the field's character limit. The thread then shows Proposed revision, Suggested by and the reviewer's name, with the old and new text side by side. Someone with edit access clicks Apply to put the new text in the ad, and Undo to restore the previous text. After Apply, the thread still says Suggested by and the name of the person who wrote the proposal, and a badge reads Applied by and the name of whoever applied it. Applying a client's suggestion never makes it look like yours. The remove icon, Remove proposal, deletes it without applying. A client on a Commentor link can write a proposal but cannot apply it. If two people edit the same proposal at once, you see This proposal was updated by someone else, with Overwrite and Use theirs. Sitelinks, callouts, structured snippets, keywords and the business name have no auto-apply, so an editor makes the change by hand. ## How do I clear a pile of comments at once? Click Apply All at the top of the comments panel. AI suggests an edit for each open comment, up to 50 per run. Tick the changes you want and click Apply. The edits go into the ad and those threads are resolved. It uses one AI credit per comment and needs edit access. See Clear a pile of comments at once with Apply All. ## How do I mention a teammate? Type @ in a comment, or click the Mention icon, then pick a person from your workspace. They get an email that you mentioned them. Clients on a share link cannot be mentioned. Mentions are a Studio feature, and they are off on the Free tier. ## Are comments on the Free tier? Yes. Comments are available on the Free tier and on Studio. On the Free tier, a preview takes up to 3 guest comments. Your client sees how many are used, such as 1 of 3 guest comments used. When the limit is reached they see Comment limit reached, with Notify Account Owner and Got it. Studio has no guest comment limit. The limit counts comments and replies posted by guests on a share link. Comments from you and your teammates do not count, and a guest comment that was deleted no longer counts. ## What happens when my client clicks Notify Account Owner? The person who created the preview gets an email titled Comment limit reached on a shared preview. If that person is no longer active, an Owner or Admin of the workspace gets it. Your client sees The account owner has been notified. One email goes out per preview every 24 hours, so a second click in that time says The account owner was already notified recently. To lift the limit, move the workspace to Studio. On a view-only link, clicking Comments shows Comments are not enabled, with the same Notify Account Owner button. ## Why is the comments panel title hidden behind the reconnect banner? It should not be. The panel starts just below any notice line at the top of the page, so its title and close button stay visible. ## Why does the panel say Loading all comments…? A preview with many comments loads them in batches, and every thread loads. Until the last batch is in, the count on the Comments button and on the tabs ends in +, such as 50+, and the panel says Loading all comments… instead of a total. It takes a second or two. After everything has loaded, hover the Comments button to see a summary such as 3 open comments, or 12 comments, all resolved. If some comments fail to load, the panel says "Some comments didn't load. Counts may be low." Click Retry. ## Comment threads won't load when I'm signed in to another account Open the client link again. A link from another workspace now opens with that link's permission while you are signed in to your own account, and its comment threads load. --- # Contact support and talk to a person Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/contact-support/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 Albert answers questions in the app. To reach a person on the PPC Ad Editor team, send a support ticket from inside the app, or ask Albert to open one. The team answers by email. ## Contact support from the editor 1. In the PPC Ad Editor editor, click your initials at the top right, next to Ask Albert. 2. Click Contact support. 3. In Contact Support, write a Subject and a Description of what happened. 4. Click Submit Ticket. The app shows Ticket Created! and the team replies by email. Your account information goes with the ticket, so you do not need to look up your plan or your workspace. Albert's first screen in the editor also has Contact support, which opens the same form. So does Need a human? Open support ticket under Albert's greeting. ## I want to speak to a human You can speak to a human on the support team through Albert. Click Ask Albert and tell him you want to talk to a person. He also does this when you have a billing or refund problem he cannot solve, or when you keep asking the same thing. Albert opens a support ticket with your conversation, so you do not have to repeat yourself. He gives you the ticket number and says the support team will reply by email. Under his reply, a box asks Anything else the team should know? Add details, links, or what you already tried, then click Add to ticket. It goes on that same ticket, and Albert shows Added to ticket and its number, then The team will see it. Click No thanks to skip it. The ticket stays open either way. If Albert already opened a ticket for you in the last 30 minutes, he gives you that ticket's number instead of opening another. When you report a bug, Albert files a support ticket too and gives you its ticket number. The support team replies by email, and you can quote that number. If he says he couldn't file a ticket, use Contact support instead. For a request to delete your account, or a question about Copy client link, Albert gives you the steps instead of opening a ticket. ## Ask for a feature or a format the app does not have Tell Albert what you need. His answer can end with a Request a feature row. Click Request, check the Subject and What you are trying to do, and click Send request. The row turns to Requested with a ticket number. The team replies to the email you sign in with. To see your requests and their status, open Conversations and requests in Albert's header, then Your requests. See Ask Albert for every step. ## If your plan is managed for you When Billing says Plan managed by administration, click Contact Support to Change Plan. It opens the same Contact Support form. ## If you cannot sign in The ticket form needs you to be signed in. If you cannot sign in, use the contact page at https://www.ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/. Most PPC Ad Editor emails end with a Contact support link to the same page. ## How long until support replies, and where does the answer go? The support team replies by email. The ticket number Albert gives you, such as Support ticket #1234 is open with the support team, is the one to quote if you write again. You do not need to open a second ticket while one is open: if you ask Albert again within 30 minutes, he gives you the ticket that is already open. ## What to include Say which preview or dashboard the question is about, and the exact message you saw. For billing, give the email on the account and the date of the charge. --- # The cookie banner: Accept or Reject Google Analytics cookies Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/cookie-banner/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Why is there a cookie banner at the bottom of PPC Ad Editor? If you open PPC Ad Editor from the European Union, the wider European Economic Area, the UK or Switzerland, a small banner at the bottom of the screen asks about analytics cookies. It reads We use Google Analytics cookies to understand how PPC Ad Editor is used and to measure our ads. They are only set if you accept. It has two buttons, Reject and Accept. ## What happens if I click Reject? Google Analytics cookies are not set, and the banner goes away. Everything in PPC Ad Editor works the same, so you can sign in, build previews, share them and pay as normal. Rejecting only turns off Google Analytics measurement for your browser. ## What happens if I click Accept? Google Analytics cookies are set, so we can see how PPC Ad Editor is used and measure our ads. The banner goes away. ## Why don't I see the banner? The banner only shows to visitors in the EU, the EEA, the UK and Switzerland. Everywhere else it does not appear. Where you are comes from your connection, so a VPN or travel can change whether you see it. If we cannot tell where you are, you see the banner. ## Can I change my answer? Your choice is saved in your browser for about six months, and then the banner asks again. To change it sooner, clear this site's cookies in your browser and reload the page, and the banner shows again. A different browser or device asks separately. ## Does the banner come back every time? No. Once you click Reject or Accept it stays away in that browser until your choice expires after about six months, or until you clear this site's cookies. --- # Copy client link Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/copy-client-link/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Copy client link is the blue button on the live preview frame. One click copies the public link for this exact preview, so you can paste it to your client. ## What happens when I click Copy client link? The link is copied and the button shows Copied. A card appears under the preview that says "Link copied" and explains that it opens the live ad with no login. Your client opens the page in a browser with no account. The page stays current as you edit the ad. The card also offers next steps under Send to client for approval: - Approve opens Share preview with Approval picked, so your client can sign off. Approval is a Studio feature. - Export opens the export options for this preview. ## Can PPC Ad Editor email the link for me? Yes. After you copy a link, the card asks "Who's reviewing this one?" until you answer or skip it. Type an email address and click Email the link. That person gets the same link by email. Click Skip (I'll send it myself) to hide the question. Client or teammate, it is the same link either way. - When the email goes out, you see Link emailed, with the address it was sent to. - Enter a valid email means the address is not a full email address. Check for a typo and try again. - Couldn't send the email means the email did not go out. You can still copy the link and send it yourself. ## What can my client do on the link? That follows the link's permission: Viewer, Commentor, Approval or Editor. Change it in Share preview, under Permission level. Approval and Editor are Studio features. See [Share link permissions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/). ## What does Client preview link above my ad mean? It marks the frame around the live preview your client will see. The frame is labelled Client preview link, with the caption Copy the client link to send this exact page, followed by a note that it needs no account and is always current. Right after your first ad is built, the caption reads First ad generated, followed by a prompt to copy the client link to send it. They don't need an account. Click Not now to hide that reminder. ## Does it make a copy of my ad? No. The button copies an address. It does not duplicate the preview, and the link always shows the latest version. ## Why did Copy client link ask me to upgrade? On the Free tier, one preview at a time can have a client link. Copying a link for a second preview opens the Studio offer. The first link stays live. Moving the shared preview to Trash frees the slot. --- # Create a new preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/create-a-preview/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 To create a preview, open a dashboard and click New Preview. It walks you through three steps: where you advertise, the format, and how you want to start. For a faster start, use Quick build next to it, a menu where you pick a channel, a format, and a start in three clicks. ## How do I make a new ad preview, step by step? 1. Open a dashboard and click New Preview. 2. Under Where do you want to advertise?, pick a channel card. The cards are grouped: - Search & AI Answers: Google Ads, ChatGPT Ads, and Microsoft Ads. - Social feeds: Facebook / Instagram, LinkedIn, X Ads, and Reddit Ads. - Video & display: YouTube and Programmatic. - Multi-Channel sits apart at the bottom, because it builds previews for several channels at once. A card marked Coming soon is shown but cannot be picked. Click Continue with, which names the channel you picked. 3. Under Pick a format, choose one, for example Responsive Search Ad, then click Next, which names the format you picked. YouTube, Multi-Channel, Programmatic, ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, Reddit Ads, and Microsoft Ads have one format, so they skip this step. 4. Under Name your preview, the name is filled in from your choices, such as Google Ads followed by Draft, and marked auto. Type over it if you like, up to 100 characters. 5. Under How do you want to start?, pick one. Which cards you see depends on the channel. - Draft with AI, marked Recommended. It drafts headlines, descriptions, and sample visuals for image ads from your site or a few notes. - Start from scratch, marked Fastest. A blank ad, pre-filled with a realistic example. - Import from Google Ads. Pull a live campaign straight from your Google Ads account. - Import from file. Drop CSVs, zips, briefs, or images, and each file is fitted into the format. - Import from Meta Ads, on Facebook / Instagram only. Download live campaigns into the Meta preview. 6. Click the button at the bottom right. It reads Continue to AI draft, Create preview, Connect & import, or Import files, depending on your pick. While it works you see Creating your preview, opening the editor, and the editor opens with the new preview. Back returns to the step before. Cancel or the close button closes New Preview. If you changed something, it asks before it discards your choices, with Discard Changes. Clicked New Preview twice? You still get one preview. After you click the last step, the New Preview button reads Creating preview… and stays busy until your new preview opens, so a second click does not make two previews. If you start another New Preview during that short pause, the format you picked second is the one that opens, and only one preview is created. If a new preview opened in a different format than you expected, check whether you picked a second format before the first one opened. ## Which start options does each channel have? - Google Ads: Draft with AI, Start from scratch, Import from Google Ads, and Import from file. On Demand Gen the two imports are greyed out. - Facebook / Instagram: Draft with AI, Start from scratch, and Import from Meta Ads. Import from file is shown greyed out. - Microsoft Ads: Draft with AI and Start from scratch. - LinkedIn and YouTube: Draft with AI and Start from scratch. Import from Google Ads and Import from file are shown greyed out. - Multi-Channel and Programmatic: Start from scratch. Draft with AI and the imports are shown greyed out. - ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, and Reddit Ads: Start from scratch only. If Draft with AI is missing everywhere, AI copy is turned off for you or your workspace. ## How do I create a Meta (Facebook or Instagram) ad? 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview. 2. Pick Facebook / Instagram and click Continue with Facebook / Instagram. 3. Pick a format. Single Image / Video is the classic feed ad, marked Recommended. Carousel has swipeable cards with one link each. Story / Reels is full-screen vertical. 4. Click Next, then name the preview. 5. Pick Draft with AI, Start from scratch, or Import from Meta Ads, then click Continue to AI draft, Create preview, or Connect & import. See Import from Meta Ads for the download steps. On the current Free plan, Single Image / Video, Carousel, and Story / Reels are all open. On an earlier Free plan, Carousel and Story / Reels show Studio. You can also start a Meta ad from Quick build, under Facebook / IG. ## Why can't I pick TikTok, Google Shopping, or Amazon Ads? TikTok is not in the app, and neither are Google Shopping or Amazon Ads. New Preview lists them as Coming soon cards that cannot be picked, and we cannot give a date. Every channel you can build is a card you can click. ## Which formats can I create on the Free tier? On the current Free plan, every channel and format is open, including Multi-Channel, Programmatic, ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, Reddit Ads, and Microsoft Ads, so you will not see a Studio badge. What Free limits is how many previews you have. The current Free plan includes 3 previews in total. Duplicating a preview counts as a new one. Some older Free accounts are on an earlier Free plan, which includes Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, Meta Single Image / Video, and YouTube. On those accounts other formats and channels show a Studio badge. Clicking one opens a window that says it is available with Studio and that Free includes RSA, RDA, Meta Single, and YouTube. Duplicating a preview in a Studio format on those accounts asks you to upgrade too. ## My free previews are full. What happens at the Free preview limit? When your Free previews are full, clicking New Preview or Quick build opens a window that says Your free previews are full, with a count such as 3 of 3 free previews used and a list of your current previews. From there you can upgrade to Studio, click Delete an old preview instead, or click Not now. Delete an old preview instead takes you to the dashboard with a reminder that trashing a preview frees a slot. A trashed preview's share link stops working. Studio is $149/mo and has no preview limit. ## Can I use Draft with AI on a Multi-Channel preview? No. Draft with AI is not available for Multi-Channel. When you pick Multi-Channel, the Draft with AI card is greyed out, Start from scratch is selected, and the button reads Create preview. That opens Select Ad Formats, where you choose formats across Google, Meta, and LinkedIn. Next, Enter Ad Content lets you fill in copy grouped by channel, or skip it and fill it in the editor later. Then Name Your Previews sets a base name, and each preview gets its format added to the name. Each format becomes its own preview, and on Free each one counts toward your preview limit. Once the previews exist, open one and use Suggest copy beside its headlines and descriptions. See Multi-channel previews. ## Why is Draft with AI or an import greyed out? - Draft with AI is greyed out on Multi-Channel and Programmatic. Those start from scratch. - Import from Google Ads and Import from file work on Google Ads formats only. On Demand Gen they are greyed out too. - ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, and Reddit Ads show Start from scratch only. Microsoft Ads has no import cards. - If Draft with AI is missing, AI copy is turned off for you or your workspace. ## Why does my new ChatGPT, X or Reddit ad already have text in it? That is example copy, so the ad does not open as an empty card. When you pick Start from scratch for a ChatGPT, X or Reddit ad in New Preview, the editor opens with a short example written from the dashboard's name. A ChatGPT ad gets a title and a description. An X or Reddit ad gets the post text. Each line already fits the field's limit. Type over it, or delete it, the same as any other line. This happens on every plan. The web address is left empty for you to fill in, and no picture is added. Start from scratch on other formats is unchanged. Programmatic still opens empty. ## What happens when I pick Programmatic? Programmatic starts from scratch. Draft with AI is greyed out, the button reads Create preview, and the programmatic editor opens empty. On the current Free plan Programmatic is open. On an earlier Free plan it shows Studio. See Programmatic ads for the rest. ## Can I start a new preview from inside the editor? Yes. Click + New next to the preview name at the top of the editor, or press N when you are not typing in a field. The preview switcher menu also has New preview. Each opens the same New Preview steps for that dashboard. ## How do I duplicate a preview? On the dashboard's Previews list, click the Duplicate icon on the preview's row, or open the row's menu and click Duplicate. The copy lands in the same dashboard, named after the original with (Copy) at the end, and Preview duplicated successfully appears. On Free, the copy counts toward your preview limit. If your role can only view and comment, Duplicate is not offered. ## Why can't I see New Preview? If your role in the workspace can only view and comment, New Preview and Quick build do not show. If you reach New Preview another way, a message says Your role cannot create a new preview. Ask an editor or owner to create one, then open it from the dashboard. ## What does Start from scratch put in the ad? A blank ad, pre-filled with a realistic example, so the preview looks real straight away. Replace the example copy with your own. On a search ad, Preview settings can show placeholder extensions until your client's assets arrive. See [Show or hide extensions in the preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-settings/). ## Does importing change my Google Ads or Meta account? No. Import from Google Ads downloads a campaign into a preview. The Free plan can import from one linked Google Ads account, and Studio can link as many as you need. It does not send edits back to Google Ads. Import from Meta Ads reads your Meta ad account the same way and does not change anything in Meta. See [Download a Google Ads account into a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/) and Import from Meta Ads. --- # Create ad previews from an AI assistant Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/create-previews-from-an-ai-assistant/ Last verified: 2026-10-20 You can ask an AI assistant such as Claude, Cursor or Windsurf to build an ad preview. Without an account it shows you a mockup with a link to save it. With an API key it can also hand you a share link straight away. In the ChatGPT and Claude chat apps you can also see the ad as a mockup inside the chat, with no account, and click Save & share to keep it. See [Preview an ad inside ChatGPT or Claude](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-ads-in-chatgpt-or-claude/). It works through pcade-mcp, a small connector you add to the assistant once. The assistant writes the ad, PPC Ad Editor builds the preview, and you get a link you can open and send. ## How do I set it up? 1. Add pcade-mcp to your assistant's MCP settings. The setup steps for each assistant are on ppcadeditor.com/mcp/. For most assistants the command is npx -y pcade-mcp. 2. Fully quit and reopen the assistant. Connectors only load when it starts. 3. Ask for an ad, for example a Google Search ad for a local bakery with its website. The assistant looks up the ad format rules first, then builds the preview. You need Node.js installed for npx to work. If the assistant says npx: command not found, install Node.js and restart it. ## What does the assistant get back? It depends on whether the connector has your API key. - Without an API key, the assistant can do two things: look up the ad format specs, which cover field counts, character limits and supported media, and show a mockup of the ad. With the mockup comes a save link. Open it within 7 days and save the ad to a free PPC Ad Editor account to edit it, share it with a client, or collect comments. - With an API key, the assistant can also create and share the preview in one step. You get a link to the shared preview and a link to open it in your dashboard. Long lines are cut to each field's character limit. If the assistant sends more headlines, descriptions or long headlines than the format takes, only the first ones the format allows are used and the rest are left out of the preview and the saved ad. The assistant is told which lines were left out, so it can tell you. ## Which ad formats can an AI assistant build? An AI assistant can build these: Google Search, Google Display, Performance Max and Demand Gen, YouTube, Meta (Facebook and Instagram) single image, carousel and story ads, and LinkedIn single image and carousel ads. It can look up the specs of more formats than that, but it cannot build ChatGPT, X, Reddit, Microsoft Ads search or Programmatic ads. Build those in the editor with New Preview. See [Ad formats in the editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ad-formats/). ## Do I need an account? How many previews can I make without one? No account is needed to see a mockup. Without an API key the assistant shows the ad and gives you a save link, and chat previews have a daily limit. Without a key, the assistant cannot make a share link for you. If it tries, it is told that this step needs a PPC Ad Editor API key and to show the ad as a mockup instead. Save the mockup to a free account to get your share link. To have the assistant create share links directly, sign in with an API key. API keys are on Enterprise workspaces. On other plans the API Keys pane in Settings says API access requires Enterprise. See Product settings. ## Can I keep a guest preview? Yes, if you save it. Open the save link the assistant gave you within 7 days and save it to a free PPC Ad Editor account, which gives you your own dashboard. After 7 days an unsaved mockup is deleted, so ask the assistant for a new one. See [Preview an ad inside ChatGPT or Claude](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-ads-in-chatgpt-or-claude/). ## Does it send ads to Google Ads? No. It builds previews. PPC Ad Editor does not push ads to Google Ads. To get a file for Google Ads Editor, open the preview in the editor and click Export. --- # Your client and preview lists: columns, Created by, and resizing Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/dashboard-lists/ Last verified: 2026-10-14 PPC Ad Editor has two lists. The Dashboard page lists your client dashboards. Open a client to see its Previews list. Both are tables you can search, and both have a Created by column you can make wider or narrower. ## What "Resize Created by column" does It is the thin handle at the right edge of the Created by column heading. It makes that column wider or narrower, so long email addresses fit. - Drag the handle left or right with the mouse. - Or press Tab until the handle is selected, then press the Left or Right arrow key. Each press changes the width a little. It only changes the layout on your screen. Your browser remembers the width next time. On the Dashboard page you can also resize Name and Link. On the Previews list, drag the right edge of a column heading, and click Reset columns to go back to the starting widths and order. ## What the Created by column shows The email address of the person who created that client dashboard or preview. It says Unknown when no creator is recorded. ## The Dashboard page The Dashboard page at the top of the app lists each client dashboard with these columns: Name, Created by, Link, and the actions. - Filter by name... searches the name, the creator's email, and the linked account. - The list is always in A to Z order by name. The headings do not sort. - Link shows the Google Ads account linked to the client, or No link. - New Dashboard adds a client. On the Free tier it also shows how many clients you use, such as 1 of 1 clients used. The buttons on each row are Rename, Duplicate, Link Google Ads or Unlink Google Ads, and Delete.... Tick rows and click Delete selected to delete several. When there is more than one page, Show 10, 25, 50, or 100 per page sets the page size. ## What does the Dashboard page show with only one client? That client is first on the list. Its row is taller and has an Open button, with a count under the name such as 1 preview. A client that is archived or locked, or a view-only login, does not get this row. On the Free tier, a line at the bottom says how many clients you use, such as 1 of 1 clients used on Free, with an Add more clients with Studio button. To build from a website, click Create dashboard from wizard at the top. ## I built a client from the wizard. Why is it not on the list? It should be there as soon as you go back to Dashboards. A client you create from the wizard or from the first-ad screen shows up in the list, and in the left menu under Dashboards with its real name, without reloading the page. ## What is the paid plan limit message? The window titled Add more client dashboards is the dashboard limit of your paid plan. It appears when every client on the plan is in use. It names how many your plan includes and offers another as a monthly extra. On Studio, running out of clients never opens a second Studio checkout. Add a client on the first-ad screen, and the limit message from the wizard, both open Add-ons on the Billing page, where Extra dashboards adds one. ## Where did the Budget Pacer banner go? It no longer sits above the list. While you are on the Dashboard page with the left menu open, it shows under Budget Pacer as Mockups approved? Track the budget behind them. with a Try Budget Pacer button. A row marked Archived is a client you cannot edit on the Free tier right now. See [Welcome back: choose the client you want to keep active](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/choose-active-workspace/). ## The Previews list inside a client Open a client to see its Previews. The columns are Name, Ad Type, Last Updated, Created by, Stage, and Approval, then the actions. Columns you add for your own attributes show after Name. - Filter by name... searches the name, the ad type, and the creator's email. - The newest updated previews come first. The headings do not sort. - Drag a heading between Ad Type and Approval to change the column order. - The icons at the top switch between Card view and List view. Your browser remembers the choice. - Stage shows Active, Paused, Pending, or a stage you named. - Approval shows In review, Approved, or Changes req. when an approval was asked for, and a dash when not. The bell sends a reminder. Approval is a Studio feature. The buttons on each row are Settings, Duplicate, Create for other channels, and Move to Trash. In Card view, the same actions are in the ⋯ menu on each card. Tick previews to delete several at once. ## Turn a Google ad into a Meta or LinkedIn preview: Create for other channels Create for other channels copies a preview's text, images, logos, videos, and call to action into new previews in other formats. It shows on Google, YouTube, Meta single, Meta story, and LinkedIn single previews. Click it on a preview row. In Create for Other Channels, tick the formats under Select target formats:, then click the Create button, such as Create 2 Adapted Previews. Each format becomes its own preview in the same client. Pins reset, so check each new preview. Create for other channels is a Studio feature. You can also ask Albert, for example convert this to a Meta Feed ad. Where his Do it cards are switched on for your workspace, he makes one new version next to the original, with copy rewritten for that format and the images, logo and business name carried over. See Ask Albert to do it for you. --- # The demo editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/demo/ Last verified: 2026-10-27 The demo at /demo is a sample editor you can try without an account. It opens the real editor filled with a made-up business, so you can click around before you sign up. It is not your workspace. Your own previews, sharing, and billing live in your account at the dashboard. ## What can I do in the demo? You can open sample dashboards and previews and edit the sample ads. Some copy and image slots are locked and show Studio. Clicking a locked slot opens a window that explains what Studio adds, with Keep exploring the sample to go back. In the demo, New Preview and Quick build only offer Start from scratch. ## How do I keep what I built in the demo? Create a free account. In the demo, creating, renaming, duplicating, or deleting a dashboard opens Ready to make this workspace yours?, which says a free account keeps what you've built. Click Create a free account. It needs no payment details. ## Why does the demo say Ready to make this workspace yours? when I add something? Any change the demo would have to save to an account opens that same window, for example adding a campaign or uploading an image. The demo has nowhere to keep it, so it asks you to create a free account instead of showing an error. The edits you already made in the sample ads are carried into your new account when you sign up from that window. ## I'm signed in. Does the demo change my real account? No. The demo never writes to your account, even when you are signed in on the same browser. A change that would save opens Ready to make this workspace yours? instead. Asking Albert and contacting support still work from the demo. To work on your own ads, open your dashboard. ## Why does an action in the demo ask me to upgrade? The demo has no account behind it, so sharing, exporting, approvals, team invites, the asset library, and Suggest copy open an upgrade window instead. Click Keep exploring the sample to close it. What your own account can do depends on its plan, not on the demo. ## Why does Shuffle stop working in the demo? The demo allows 3 shuffles in a preview, then opens Ready for unlimited variations?. The window says Free includes 3 shuffles, but that cap is the demo's only. In your own account, Free tier included, Shuffle has no limit. Reload the demo to start the count again, or sign up to keep going. ## Is the demo the same as Demo workspace? No. Demo workspace is a choice on the first-ad screen, under I'll explore on my own. On the Free tier and during a trial it builds a sample dashboard and preview inside your own account, with ad copy, images, and extensions. On a paid plan it opens a blank dashboard of your own instead, because paid plans build real ads. The demo at /demo needs no account at all. See The sample ad. --- # Download a Google Ads account into a preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 Import from Google Ads downloads live campaigns from your Google Ads account into a new preview, with their ad groups, keywords, ads, and extensions. The Free plan can link one Google Ads account, and Studio can link as many as you need. It only downloads. It never changes budgets, pauses ads, or sends edits back to Google Ads. ## How do I import a campaign from Google Ads? 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview. Pick Google Ads, then Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, or Performance Max. Name the preview, pick Import from Google Ads, and click Connect & import. In Quick build, pick Google Ads, the format, then Import from Google Ads. On the first-ad screen, pick the Import from Google Ads card and click Connect & import. 2. One window called Import from Google Ads opens, headed "to" and your client's name. If you have not connected before, it says Sign in with Google to see your ad accounts. Click Continue with Google and sign in to the Google account that can see the ads. While you are on Google, the window says Waiting for Google, and it brings you straight back. 3. Your Google login and your Google Ads account sit side by side in that window. Pick a Google login, or click Use another Google login. Pick the account from the list, or search by name or customer ID. If the login has only one account, it is already selected. 4. Click Next: choose campaigns. The window lists the campaigns for the format. Switch between Search, Display, and Performance Max, check the campaigns you want, and leave Include account extensions checked to bring sitelinks and callouts too. Removed campaigns are hidden. Click Show 2 removed, with the real number, to see them, and Hide removed to hide them again. 5. Click Import campaigns. The button shows how many you picked, such as Import 3 campaigns. If you only want to connect an account, click Link Google Ads on a dashboard row. The same window opens as Link Google Ads and the button reads Link account. Afterwards you can click Import campaigns, or Done. Importing shows each step, from Connecting to Google Ads to Creating preview. It keeps going if you close the window, and the preview appears in your client. Click Continue in background to go back to the dashboard while it runs. When it finishes, the window says, for example, 3 campaigns imported, and Open preview opens it. In the background, the Previews list shows the import's progress, and a notice says the preview was imported from Google Ads. A Google login that has lost its connection shows Disconnected · Reconnect on its row in the window. Reconnect there, and the window reopens on that login. If you sign in as a different Google account than the one you meant to reconnect, the row says which one you signed in as and which one to use. ## Which ad types can I import? Responsive Search Ads, Responsive Display Ads, and Performance Max. Responsive search and display import campaigns that contain that ad type. Performance Max imports Performance Max campaigns. Demand Gen, Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, Multi-Channel, and Programmatic cannot be imported, so Import from Google Ads is greyed out for them. ## How do manager (MCC) accounts work? A manager account shows as a header with a Manager tag, and its client accounts are listed under it. You pick a client account, not the manager. Click the arrow on the header to collapse it. Only the client accounts directly under a manager are listed. ## Can I use more than one Google account? Yes. Each Google login you connect is saved, and the Google login list in the window lets you pick one each time. The one you used last is marked Last used. Each dashboard links to one Google Ads account at a time. On the Dashboards list, the Link column shows each dashboard's Google Ads link. Use the icon on a dashboard row to Link Google Ads or Unlink Google Ads. Unlinking happens straight away. Settings, under Integrations, lists your Google Ads connections. ## Does importing again update my preview? No. Each import creates a new preview in the dashboard you started from. There is no sync button inside an existing preview. To bring in newer copy, import again and work in the new preview. ## Large imports A big import can take 10 minutes or longer. There is no second question before it starts. Click Continue in background and keep working. The import carries on and the preview shows up in the client when it is done. ## What if the import fails? - No Google Ads accounts on this login means that Google login has no Google Ads accounts. Click Refresh list, or use another Google login. - Google Ads access wasn't allowed means the login was connected without the Google Ads permission. Reconnect and allow Google Ads access. - Google is limiting requests means Google asked us to slow down. Wait a minute, then try again, or pick fewer campaigns. - Couldn't load accounts means we could not reach Google Ads. Try again in a moment. - Authentication error means the Google connection may have expired. Unlink and link the dashboard again, then click Try again. - Permission denied means your login cannot see those campaigns. If you use a manager account, check it has access to the client account. - A sync job is already in progress means an earlier download did not finish. Try fewer campaigns or refresh the page. - A failed or stalled import in the Previews list has Retry and Dismiss. - If a linked Google login is disconnected, the notification bell shows Google Ads disconnected, naming the account, with a Reconnect link. It is no longer a bar across the top of the dashboard. - Google Ads import is part of Studio appears with Upgrade to Studio if your plan cannot load accounts or import campaigns. Click Try again on the error screen to return to the campaign list. ## What does You denied access mean after I connect Google Ads? If you click Cancel or do not allow access on Google's screen, you come back to PPC Ad Editor with You denied access. Please try again if this was a mistake. Click Connect again and allow Google Ads access. Any other problem on the way back from Google shows Google Ads didn't finish connecting. Please try again. ## What does Pick campaigns to import before metrics can sync mean? A dashboard that has a Google Ads account linked but no campaigns imported yet shows Google Ads is connected. Pick campaigns to import before metrics can sync. Import campaigns from that account as above and the line goes away. ## Can I import on the Free tier? Yes, from one Google Ads account. On the Free plan you can link one Google login and import campaigns from it. To use a different Google login, go to Settings, then Integrations, and click Unlink next to the linked account. Then connect the new one. If you try to connect a second Google login while one is linked, you see Free includes 1 Google Ads account. Unlink it to connect another. with an Upgrade link. Studio has no limit on Google logins. ## How do I see or remove my linked Google Ads account? Go to Settings, then Integrations. The Google Ads card lists each linked account with its email, and says Accounts used to import campaigns and refresh metrics. Click Connect to link one, or Unlink to remove one. Pick the account and it shows up on the card as connected. Unlinking removes the login and clears the link on any dashboard that used it. Previews you already imported stay in the editor. ## Can I connect Google Ads before I have any clients or dashboards? Yes. Connect Google Ads in Settings, then Integrations, even with no clients or dashboards set up yet. The linked account waits on the Google Ads card, ready for your first import. ## Can I send my edits back to Google Ads? No. The import is one way, from Google Ads into the editor. To use your edited ads, export them from the editor and upload the file in Google Ads Editor yourself. --- # Edit a ChatGPT, X, or Reddit ad: profile image and creative image Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/edit-a-chatgpt-x-or-reddit-ad/ Last verified: 2026-10-26 ChatGPT, X, and Reddit ads each have their own editor. This page covers what people ask about most. That is how long the text can be, the profile image on the ad, the square image on a ChatGPT ad, exporting a ChatGPT ad as active, and the context hints on a ChatGPT ad. ## How many characters can a ChatGPT ad title and description have? A ChatGPT ad has one Title of up to 24 characters and one Description of up to 48 characters. The counter beside each label shows how many you have used, and the box stops taking letters at the limit. Under the fields, the editor notes that OpenAI recommends 16 to 24 characters for a title and 32 to 48 for the description, and that the bulk template allows up to 24 and 48. These limits keep the ad ready to export as an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook. The Ad name above the fields is only for you and your client. It needs 3 to 1000 characters, or the editor says Ad name must be between 3 and 1000 characters. ## How long can an X post or a Reddit headline be? An X ad has one Post of up to 280 characters. A Reddit ad has one Headline of up to 300 characters. ## Why did the profile picture on my X, Reddit, or ChatGPT ad change my dashboard logo, and how do I change it? In the ad's editor, find Profile logo on a ChatGPT ad. Click Choose, or Replace when one is already set, on an X or Reddit ad. On a ChatGPT ad the button reads Choose logo, or Replace when one is set. Then pick or upload an image. Setting the profile picture on one of these ads used to change the dashboard logo for everything. It no longer does. The image belongs to that one ad. It does not change the logo at the top of your dashboard, and it does not change any other ad. Under the image, the line reads This ad only. If you have not set one, the line reads Dashboard logo, and the ad uses your brand logo. To go back to the brand logo, click Use dashboard logo. The ad then shows your dashboard logo again. To change the dashboard logo itself, see Brand logo. ## What size does a ChatGPT ad image need? The Square creative image must be square, between 640×640 and 1200×1200 pixels, as a JPEG or PNG. Click Choose image, or Replace image, to open your asset library. Images that do not fit are hidden from the choices. ## How do I export a ChatGPT ad as active instead of paused? A ChatGPT ad exports as paused unless you choose otherwise. In the ChatGPT ad's editor, under Preview updates live in the preview pane., check Export this ad as active. The box stays checked, and the next export marks that ad active. Uncheck it to export the ad as paused again. You need edit access to change it. ## I uploaded an image and it did not appear. Why? Uploads go into your asset library first. What happens next depends on the picture: - A square image a little over 1200 pixels is shrunk to fit as you upload it. It is selected right away. - An image that is not square is saved to your library, and a notice says it is not square and what size the ad needs. Click Crop to 1:1 in the notice to make a square version. - A square image that is too small, or a file type the ad cannot use, is saved to your library with a notice that says what to use instead. - A file that cannot be read as a picture is turned away with We couldn't read this image. Save it again as a JPEG or PNG and try again. You can also open the picker and use the Need a square version? strip to create a 1:1 crop from an image you already have. Crops are made at or below the largest size the ad allows, and they are never enlarged. The square version is then selected for the ad. ## What are context hints on a ChatGPT ad? A ChatGPT ad has no keywords. Instead, the tab next to Ads is called Context hints. Context hints describe the conversations where the ad is relevant. 1. Open the ChatGPT ad in the editor and click Context hints. 2. Type one hint per line, such as comparing team collaboration tools. 3. Click Save context hints. Context hints saved confirms it. Each ad group has its own hints, up to 250 lines of up to 500 characters each. If a line breaks a limit, a message says what to fix and nothing is saved. On the Preview tab, the hints are listed under Context hints, or the section says No context hints added yet. You and your client can comment on them there. --- # Edit a LinkedIn ad Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/edit-a-linkedin-ad/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 Can I make a LinkedIn ad on the Free plan? Yes. LinkedIn single image or video and carousel ads are open on the current Free plan. On an earlier Free plan they show a Studio badge. A LinkedIn ad in the editor has a company logo, a company name, introductory text, a headline, a description, a landing page URL, a call to action, and images or a video. The live preview shows it in the LinkedIn feed. LinkedIn single image or video and LinkedIn carousel are Studio formats. ## Add the company logo Under Company Logo, click Add Logo, or click the No company logo selected box. That box only means no logo is set yet. Choose a logo from your asset library, or upload one, then click Done. Click Change to swap it. To remove it, hover over the logo, click the remove icon on it, titled Remove logo, then click Remove. On a carousel that icon removes it straight away. Until a logo is set, the preview shows a grey circle with the first letter of the company name. ## Set the company name The name comes from the Business Name section, below the call to action. Click Add Existing or Create New, then click the name to use. Pick No Business Name to hide it. The preview then shows the landing page's domain, or Company Name. ## Write the text A single image or video ad has one of each: - Introductory Text. Recommended 150 characters, max 600. The count turns orange past 150 and red past 600. A paste that would take it past 600 is not added. - Headline. Recommended 70 characters, max 200. - Description. Recommended 100 characters, max 300. The headline and description can run past their max while you edit. The field and its count turn red until you shorten it. ## Landing page and call to action Type the page the ad opens in Landing Page URL. Pick the button under Call to Action: Apply, Download, View Quote, Learn More, Sign Up, Subscribe, Register, Join, Attend, or Request Demo. New ads start on Learn More. ## Add images or a video Click Add Image. A picker opens on your asset library, where you can also upload. Pick your images, then click Done. Images can be JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP, up to 20 MB each. A single image or video ad takes up to 10 images. The LinkedIn preview shows images at their own shape, without cropping. As of 21 October 2026, a single image or video ad can play a video. Click Upload video and pick an MP4, MOV, or WebM file up to 100 MB, or drag it onto the No videos added yet box. To use a link, click Add Video, paste a YouTube, Google Drive, or Dropbox link, and click Add video. A YouTube video should be Public or Unlisted so your client can play it. A Google Drive or Dropbox file is copied into your account and must be shared as Anyone with the link. Video storage is capped per account by plan, and a YouTube link does not count toward it. A LinkedIn carousel has no video. See [Upload a video to a Meta or LinkedIn ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-a-video/). ## Build a LinkedIn carousel A carousel has 2 to 10 cards and starts with 2. The introductory text and Landing Page URL are shared by all cards. - Click Add Card to add one, up to 10. Carousel Cards shows the count. - Drag a card tab to change the order. - On a card, Duplicate card copies it and Remove card deletes it. You cannot go below 2 cards. - Each card has a Card Headline, up to 45 characters, a Card Description, up to 70 characters, and an optional Card URL. A card with no Card URL uses the shared Landing Page URL. ## See it on desktop and mobile Click the desktop or mobile icon above the live preview. LinkedIn ads open in the mobile feed. ## Why my introductory text ends in ...more The preview shows the first 150 characters of introductory text, then ...more, the way LinkedIn cuts long posts. Click ...more in the preview to read it all, and show less to fold it again. Your full text is saved. ## Save a picture of the ad Copy as image copies the view on screen. Download PNG saves it as a picture. LinkedIn ads do not export as ads you import on LinkedIn. --- # Edit a Meta ad for Facebook and Instagram Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/edit-a-meta-ad/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 A Meta ad in the editor has a profile image, a profile name, primary text, headlines, descriptions, a website URL, a call to action, and images or a YouTube video. The live preview shows it on Facebook and Instagram as you type. Meta single image or video, carousel, and story or reel are all open on the current Free plan. On an earlier Free plan, only Meta single image or video is open. ## Logo missing on a Meta ad: what does No profile image selected mean It means the ad has no profile image, its logo, yet. It is not an error, and the ad still previews. Until you pick one, the preview shows a coloured circle with the first letter of the profile name. To add one, click the No profile image selected box, or click Add Logo under Profile Image. A picker opens. Choose a logo from your asset library, or upload a new one, then click Done. The logo shows as the round page picture on the ad. - To swap it, click Change. - To remove it, hover over the round picture, click the remove icon on it, titled Remove logo, then click Remove. A Logo deleted message offers Undo for a few seconds. ## Set the profile name The name beside the profile picture comes from the Business Name section, below Call to Action. - With no name yet, it says No Business Name Added. Click Add Existing to pick one from your library, or Create New to type one. - With names added, click one to use it. The one in use is tagged PRIMARY. Manage opens the list. - Pick No Business Name to hide yours. The preview then shows Your Brand on Facebook and yourbrand on Instagram. If you never picked a name, the preview uses the domain of your website URL. ## Copy the profile image and name to my other ads What does Apply to next to the logo do on a Facebook or Instagram ad? It copies this ad's profile image and name to your other ads. Changing the profile image or name edits this ad only. To use the same ones on more ads, click Apply to beside the logo button. The menu is headed Profile image and profile name and offers three choices: - This ad only, which is ticked and changes nothing else. - All ads in the ad set name, which copies both to every other ad in the same ad set. If the ad set has no name it reads All ads in this ad set. - All campaigns in this preview, which copies both to every other ad in the preview. A message confirms, such as Profile applied to 4 ads. If there are no other ads it says There are no other ads to update. On the Free plan, ads whose profile you cannot change are left alone, and the message says how many locked on the Free plan were skipped. Apply to is greyed out until the ad is saved, and it does not show on a share link or when you only have view access. It works on single image or video, carousel, and story or reel ads. ## Write the primary text, headlines, and descriptions On a single image or video ad you can add up to 5 of each: - Primary text, up to 125 characters each. - Headline, up to 40 characters each. - Description, up to 25 characters each. The section heading counts them, such as Headline (2 of 5 used). Click Add for another. These fields stop at the limit, including when you paste, so extra characters are not kept. At five, Add is greyed out and shows Limit reached. Delete one to add a different one. Click the shuffle icon above the preview, Shuffle ad variations, to see other combinations. A story or reel ad has primary text only, up to 5 at 125 characters. It has no headline or description. ## Website URL and call to action Type the page the ad opens in Website URL. A link that is not a full web address shows Enter a valid URL (e.g. https://www.example.com). Pick the button text under Call to Action: Shop Now, Learn More, Sign Up, Download, Contact Us, Book Now, Get Offer, Apply Now, Subscribe, or Watch More. New ads start on Shop Now. ## Add images Click Image, then Add Image. A picker opens on your asset library, where you can also upload. Pick your images, then click Done. Images can be JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP, up to 20 MB each. A single image or video ad, and a story or reel, take up to 5 images. The feed preview shows each image square or wide, by its shape, and fills the frame. A tall 4:5 image shows cropped to a square. A story or reel fills a 9:16 frame. Carousel cards are square. A video file you upload follows its own shape in the Facebook and Instagram feed previews. A wide video shows 16:9, a square one 1:1, and a tall one, such as 9:16 or 4:5, shows in a 4:5 frame, cropped top and bottom the way Meta crops it in a feed. A story or reel shows the video full screen. ## Add a video As of 21 October 2026, a Meta single image or video ad, and a story or reel, play a video file you upload or a video from a link. - To upload, click Video, then Upload video, and pick an MP4, MOV, or WebM file up to 100 MB. You can also drag the file onto the No videos added yet box. A bar shows the upload. - To use a link, click Video, then Add Video. Paste a YouTube, Google Drive, or Dropbox link in YouTube, Google Drive, or Dropbox link, and click Add video. YouTube links from youtube.com, youtu.be, and YouTube Shorts work. A YouTube link stays a link, so use a Public or Unlisted video your client can play on the share link. A Google Drive or Dropbox file is copied into your account, and it must be shared as Anyone with the link. If the link is from another site, it says Paste a YouTube link, a public Google Drive link, or a public Dropbox link. Uploaded videos count toward your account's video storage, which is capped per account by plan. A YouTube link does not count. See [Upload a video to a Meta or LinkedIn ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-a-video/). Under Video Library, Used in this preview and From your account list videos you added before. Click Add on one to reuse it. Change adds another video. It does not replace the first one. Use Remove video to take one off. A carousel card takes a YouTube link only, not a file or a Google Drive or Dropbox link. ## Build a carousel A carousel has shared primary text above the cards, up to 5 at 125 characters, and one Call to Action for all cards. Each card has its own image or video, Headline (40 characters), Description (25 characters), and Destination URL. - Carousel Cards shows how many you have, up to 10. Click Add to add a card. New carousels start with one. - Click a Card tab to edit it. On a card, Add Image or Add Video URL sets its media. Picking one replaces the other. A card's video is a YouTube link. - To delete a card, click its trash icon, then Remove card. A carousel always keeps at least one card. Cards cannot be reordered. ## See it on Facebook and Instagram Above the live preview, click Facebook or Instagram, then the desktop or mobile icon. Single image or video and carousel ads open on Facebook, mobile. The views are the Facebook mobile feed, the Facebook desktop feed, and the Instagram feed. A story or reel ad has FB Story and IG Reel, on a phone only. The preview shows the profile name and Sponsored at the top and the call to action at the bottom, the way the story does. It does not draw safe-zone guides. ## Why my primary text ends in See more In the feed previews, primary text shows three lines. Past 110 characters it adds See more on Facebook and more on Instagram, the way the real feed cuts long text. Your full text is still saved. Put the important words first. ## Save a picture of the ad Copy as image copies the view on screen, ready to paste into a slide. Download PNG saves it as a picture. These are pictures. Meta ads do not export as ads you import on Meta. --- # Edit the same preview with a teammate at the same time Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/edit-together/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Want to work on a preview together, live? Can my teammate and I edit the same ad at the same time? Yes. When two people in your workspace open the same preview, edits sync between you as you type. You do not need to refresh, save or take turns. This is part of every plan, Free tier included, for teammates who have a seat in your workspace. ## How do I see who is editing? When a teammate clicks into a field, a small coloured label with their name, such as Sam is editing, appears just above that field. It shows only while they are in the field, and it hides while you are typing in that same field yourself. If someone has no name on their profile, the label says Anonymous User is editing. ## Can I see my teammate's cursor? Are there live cursors? No. You do not see your teammate's mouse pointer or text cursor. You see the name label above the field they are in, and their changes as they type. ## What if we both change the same field? Avoid typing in the same field at once. Watch for the is editing label and pick a different headline or description. On X ads and Reddit ads, if you both changed the same field, a note says Someone else updated this field. Your text is still here. Click Keep mine to keep what you typed, or Use the latest to take your teammate's version. See Troubleshooting. ## Can a client edit with us? Only if you send them a share link set to Editor. A share link set to Viewer, Commentor or Approval lets the client look, comment or approve, but not change the ad. Editor lets them view and edit the ad copy, and Editor is a Studio feature. For someone who works in the ads every day, invite them to your workspace as a teammate instead. Free includes 2 seats. See [Share link permissions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/) and Team members. --- # Export or download a preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Export is on every plan, Free tier included. In the editor, click Export at the top right, then Google Ads Editor CSV. The export dialog opens. Pick a format, then click its export button. In the classic layout, Export is an icon with the tooltip Export to Google Ads Editor. ## What the export dialog offers The dialog is titled Export with the preview's name, and says Pick a format, then export. It opens with Google Ads Editor (CSV) already selected. After your first export it offers your last settings instead, such as Last time: CSV · Google Ads Editor, with a prompt to use it again. Click that to pick the same options. - Google Ads Editor (CSV). Tick Include keywords with match types and Include ad assets (extensions) as needed, then click Export CSV. You get a ZIP of Google Ads Editor CSVs with pins kept, ready to bulk import. - Download PDF, on a responsive search ad only. Choose a PDF style, Client review or Internal detail, then click Export PDF. See below. - PPC Ad Editor Template (Excel), on a responsive search ad only. One workbook with campaigns, ad groups, ads, keywords, and extensions, which imports back into PPC Ad Editor. Tick Include keywords in a separate sheet if you want them. Click Export Excel. - Apple Template (Excel), an Apple Search Ads template. It appears only when it is turned on for your workspace. If the preview has no campaign yet, the dialog says No campaigns found for this preview yet. Create a campaign before exporting. When the file is on its way, the footer says Export successful! Download starting…. If an export fails, the dialog says Failed to export. Please try again. ## Why does Download PDF say Select at least one section? Every chip under Include in the PDF is off. The dialog says "Select at least one section to include in the PDF." Click at least one chip, such as Ads, then click Export PDF again. ## How long does a PDF or Excel download stay available? A PDF or PPC Ad Editor Template file builds in the background and downloads on its own when it is ready. Click Download Export to save it again. The line Download expires, with a date and time, says when that download link stops working. After that, export again from the same dialog. ## Export a PDF for a client Pick Download PDF. Under PDF style, pick one: - Client review is clean and branded, for the client to sign off. - Internal detail shows ad groups, keywords, and labels, for a full check by your team. Under Include in the PDF, click the chips to add or remove Ads, Keywords, Sitelinks, Callouts, Snippets, Call ext., and Ad groups. Pick at least one. Open Header & footer to add an optional line at the top or bottom of each page. Click Export PDF. A progress view shows while the PDF builds, and the PDF downloads as a file when it is ready. Your editor tab stays open. ## Are images and logos in the export Yes. The Google Ads Editor ZIP holds the CSVs plus the images and logos on the ads. On Performance Max, the images are sorted into landscape, square, and portrait folders, to match the CSV. Images smaller than Google's Performance Max minimums are enlarged in the ZIP so the import accepts them: 600 by 314 for landscape, 300 by 300 for square, and 480 by 600 for portrait. Logos are not enlarged. ## Which previews can export Export shows on responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max previews. A ChatGPT ad preview exports too. Its Export menu reads OpenAI Ads Manager workbook, and the dialog offers only that format. Click Export workbook to get an Excel (.xlsx) file that matches the bulk-upload template. Demand Gen, Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, Programmatic, X, Reddit, and Microsoft Ads previews have no Export button, and they do not download as ads you import on those platforms. On responsive display and Performance Max, the dialog offers Google Ads Editor (CSV) only. Download PDF and PPC Ad Editor Template (Excel) are for responsive search ads. PPC Ad Editor does not push ads to Google Ads. The download is a file. Posting it is a step you take in Google Ads Editor. ## Download pictures of the ad These save pictures, not ads you can import. They work on the same plans as export, Free tier included. - Responsive search ad. Download variations as ZIP, the download icon at the end of the bar above the live preview, saves one PNG per combination. See your RSA variations. - Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube. Download PNG, the download icon above the live preview, saves the view on screen as a PNG, at double size, for the platform and device you picked. - Copy as image, beside them, copies the view on screen so you can paste it into a slide. ## What your client can download A client on a share link cannot use Export unless the link allows export. The Export icon is greyed out with the tooltip Export disabled by owner. On a responsive search ad, Download variations as ZIP does not show either. Allow export on a share link is a Studio feature. To let your client download, open Share preview and check Allow export, "Clients can download this preview". On the Free tier, Allow export carries a Studio tag and clicking it opens the Studio offer instead. Your own Export in the editor stays on, on every plan. --- # Export a ChatGPT ad to OpenAI Ads Manager Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export-a-chatgpt-ad/ Last verified: 2026-10-26 How do I get my ChatGPT ad into OpenAI Ads Manager? Export the ChatGPT ad preview as an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook (.xlsx), then upload that file in Ads Manager yourself. PPC Ad Editor does not publish or push the ad to OpenAI. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. ## How do I export a ChatGPT ad? 1. Open the ChatGPT ad preview in the editor. 2. Check each ad. In the ad's editor, the line under Square creative image should read Ready for OpenAI Ads Manager export. 3. Click Export at the top right. 4. Pick OpenAI Ads Manager workbook. The dialog says it downloads an .xlsx workbook with the official OpenAI Ads Manager sheets: campaigns, adgroups, and ads. 5. Click Export workbook. The file downloads, named after the preview with openai_ads and the date. 6. In OpenAI Ads Manager, use bulk upload and choose the downloaded workbook. ## What is in the workbook? Three sheets, campaigns, adgroups and ads, in the layout of OpenAI's bulk-upload template. - The ads sheet has one row per ad with its ad group, Title, Description (as copy), destination link, image link and status. Any tracking parameters on the ad are added to the link. - The adgroups sheet has each ad group's name, its campaign and its context hints. The maximum bid is left empty. - The campaigns sheet has one row per campaign. Every ad exports as paused, unless you checked Export this ad as active in that ad's editor. See Edit a ChatGPT, X, or Reddit ad. ## Do I need to set the budget and objective before I upload? Yes, check them. PPC Ad Editor has no fields for a ChatGPT campaign's budget, dates, objective or countries. A new ChatGPT ad preview's campaign row starts with a daily budget of 1.00, the Views objective, and no target countries. Change the campaign's budget, dates, objective and countries, and add each ad group's maximum bid, in the workbook or in Ads Manager before the ads go live. ## Why did the export fail with a list of problems? The export checks every ad first. When an ad would be refused by Ads Manager, nothing downloads and the dialog lists each problem, one per line, starting with the ad group and ad name. The messages are: - Title must be 3 to 24 characters. - Copy must be 1 to 48 characters. - Enter an http or https URL. - Replace the placeholder URL with your website. - Choose one square PNG or JPEG image, 640 to 1200 px wide. When an image is the wrong shape or size, the line says so first, for example The image is 1200 × 628, not square. Fix each ad in its editor, then click Export workbook again. ## Can my client export the workbook from a share link? Only if you allow export on that share link. Allow export on a share link is a Studio feature. See [Share link permissions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/). ## Does PPC Ad Editor publish ChatGPT ads? No. The workbook is a file. You upload it to OpenAI Ads Manager, and OpenAI reviews and runs the ads there. --- # Ad editor FAQ Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/faq/ Last verified: 2026-10-22 Common questions about the PPC Ad Editor editor: where things are, sharing, previews, AI copy, and export. ## Where is the Share button in the editor? In the PPC Ad Editor editor, Share with client is the blue button at the top right. The first click takes you to Copy client link above the live preview. If that is already on screen, the click opens Share preview, where you choose what the link allows. Share settings, under More options, opens the same dialog. ## Does my client need an account to open the link? No. The PPC Ad Editor client link opens the preview in a browser with no login. It always shows the current version, so edits you make later appear on the same link. To see the page the way your client does, click the See what they see icon on the live preview. It opens the client page in a new tab. ## Where do I export to Google Ads Editor? In the PPC Ad Editor editor, click Export at the top right, then Google Ads Editor CSV. In the dialog, pick Google Ads Editor (CSV) and click Export CSV. Export appears on responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max previews. A ChatGPT ad exports an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook instead. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. If Export is missing, check the format. Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, X, Reddit, and Microsoft Ads previews have no export file. PPC Ad Editor does not push ads to Google Ads. ## Where is the asset library? In the PPC Ad Editor editor, click the asset library button at the top right. It reads Assets on wide screens. It opens the library for that preview, with tabs for Sitelinks, Callouts, Structured Snippets, Call, Images, Logos, and Business Names. ## How do I make another preview? In the PPC Ad Editor editor, click New at the top left, next to the preview name. On a dashboard, click New Preview. Pick where you want to advertise and the format, name the preview, and choose how to start: Draft with AI, Start from scratch, Import from Google Ads, or Import from file. ## Can I import from Google Ads on the Free plan? Yes. On the Free tier you can link one Google Ads account and import from it. Studio links as many Google Ads accounts as you need. See [Download a Google Ads account into a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/). ## How do I rename, duplicate, or delete a preview? In the PPC Ad Editor editor, open More options, the three dots at the top right. It has Rename preview, Duplicate preview, and Delete preview. You can also double-click the preview name to rename it. Delete preview moves the preview to that dashboard's trash. You can restore it from there. Previews in the trash are deleted for good after 30 days. ## How do I get AI to write the ad copy? When you create a preview in PPC Ad Editor, pick Draft with AI under How do you want to start?. It reads your site, builds campaigns and ad groups with keywords, and writes the ads, sitelinks, callouts, and structured snippets. In the editor, click Suggest copy beside the headlines or descriptions for new lines in that section. The menu next to it has Add brand context. AI drafting is on the Free tier. If you see Replace the placeholder URL, put the real final URL on the ad first. ## Can my client approve the ad from the link? Yes, on the Studio plan. In Share preview, set the link to Approval. Your client sees Approve and Request changes, adds their name, and confirms. Approval is a Studio feature. It is not included on the Free tier, where the Approval option shows a Studio lock. ## Can I preview programmatic ads or organic posts? Programmatic ads, yes. Programmatic is available with Studio. In New Preview, pick Programmatic. Click Create ad and pick Display banner, Native, Video, or HTML5 banner. You can upload display banners (JPG, PNG, or GIF), video ads (MP4 or WebM), or a ZIP of an HTML5 banner, or build a native ad with an image, a logo, a headline, and a call to action. Each banner, video, or ZIP file becomes its own ad. See [Preview programmatic ads](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/programmatic/). Importing ads from a DSP such as DV360, The Trade Desk, StackAdapt, Adform, or Amazon DSP is not connected yet. Organic social posts are not in the editor. The Lab, under Manage workspace, lists channels that are not in the app, such as TikTok. You can add yourself to a list there. To ask for something else, tell Albert what you need and he sends it to the product team. ## Where can I read the full primary text of a Meta ad? In the PPC Ad Editor editor, open the Preview tab, next to Editor at the top. It lists every primary text in full with its character count. The mobile feeds in the live preview stop after three lines with See more, or more on Instagram, the way Meta does. ## How does client commenting work on a share link? Set the share link to Commentor in Share preview. Your client opens the link with no account, adds their name the first time they post, and can click a headline, description, or primary text to comment on that line. Their comments show up in your Comments panel with a Guest badge, and the preview's creator gets an email about each new comment. --- # Find and replace: change a word or brand name everywhere in your ads Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/find-and-replace/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Find & Replace changes a word or phrase in every ad at once, instead of editing each headline by hand. Open it with the magnifier icon at the top right of the editor, or press Ctrl F (Cmd F on a Mac) while the editor is open. ## Open Find & Replace 1. Open the preview in the editor. 2. Click the magnifier icon at the top right, beside Assets. Its tooltip reads Find & replace (⌘F). Or press Ctrl F, or Cmd F on a Mac. In the editor this opens Find & Replace instead of your browser's own find. 3. The Find & Replace panel opens with the cursor in the Find... box. Press Esc, or click the close icon at the top right of the panel, to close it. ## Find a word Type in Find.... The box shows which match you are on and how many there are, such as 2/7. It shows 0 in red when nothing matches. - Click the down arrow, or press Enter, for the next match. Click the up arrow, or press Shift Enter, for the previous one. The editor jumps to that ad and highlights the field. - Click List to see every match. Each line names the field, such as Headline 3, Long Headline 1, Description 2, Primary Text or Primary Text 2, Final URL, or Display Path 1, with the words around the match. Click a line to jump to it. - Aa is Match Case. Turn it on to match capital letters exactly. - W is Whole Word. Turn it on so that "car" does not match "cards". ## Choose where it looks Scope sets which ads are searched: - Ad Group, the ad group on screen. This is where it starts. - Campaign, every ad group in the campaign on screen. - Entire Preview, every campaign in the preview. ## Replace one match or all of them Type the new text in Replace with.... - Replace changes the current match only. The shortcut is Ctrl Enter. A message names the field it changed, such as Replaced in Headline 3. - All replaces every match in the scope. The shortcut is Ctrl Shift Enter. A Replace All? box shows how many occurrences will change, the old and new text, and the scope. Click Replace All to confirm, or Cancel. A message then says how many were replaced, such as Replaced 4 occurrences. Replace and All stay grey until there is a match and something typed in Replace with.... The hint line at the bottom of the panel lists the keys: Enter Next, Shift+Enter Prev, and for editors Ctrl+Enter Replace. ## What do Nothing to replace and That row is locked mean? - Nothing to replace means there is no current match. Type in Find... first, or check Scope, Aa and W. - That ad is no longer available means the ad with the match was deleted or moved while the panel was open. Search again. - That row is locked means the line belongs to a row you cannot change, so Replace leaves it as it is. When every match is in such a row, All says Nothing was replaced, followed by a note that those rows are locked. ## What it searches Find & Replace searches the ad copy in the editor: headlines, long headlines, descriptions, primary text, the final URL, and both display paths. It does not search keywords, or sitelinks, callouts, and other assets. Change those in the asset library. ## Why I can find but not replace The Replace with... row only shows for people who can edit the preview. A viewer can search but cannot replace. --- # First-ad screen: channels, website, and build problems Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/first-ad/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 The first-ad screen opens after you sign up and says Welcome. Let's build your first ad. You give a client or business name, an optional website, an optional business type, an ad language, and where the ad runs first. Then the Build button, which names your format, such as Build Google Search ad, creates it in the editor. A live preview of the ad sits under the form and fills in as you type, for every channel and format. Build and Look around first stay in a bar at the bottom of the screen while you scroll. This page explains each choice and what to do when the site cannot be read. ## What do I fill in on the first-ad screen? - Client or business name. Working for yourself? Use your own business, since it is just the brand in the ad. You can leave it empty. With a website, the name is taken from the site's address. Without one, the name from your signup is used. - Their website. Any public page works, such as a landing page, a Shopify store, or a Facebook page. A website on its own is enough to build. - Business type (optional). Pick one from the list, such as Food & drink, Online store, Home services, Software & apps, or Nonprofit, or type your own, up to 60 characters. Leave it blank and the ad builds exactly as it would have. It is saved with your first ad, and it does not change the copy that is written. - Ad language: Auto-detect, English, or Danish. It is a small menu on the same line as the heading Who it's for. - Where does it run first? The channel tile. Build needs a business name, either the one you type or the one read from the website you entered. If both are empty, Build does not make an ad. It keeps you on the setup screen, says Add a business name to continue, and puts the cursor in the name field. It never makes a placeholder My business preview. If the website you typed is one of our sample sites, the screen says That website is a sample. Type your business name first. If the website is not a public address, the field says Fix the website, or clear it, to continue, and Build takes you to the website field without making an ad. Clicking the preview under the form also selects the name or website field and rings it. With a name or a website, the screen says Ready. Build creates the ad, and adds from your site when it is working from the website alone. ## Can I import my existing campaigns at the start? Yes, on Free and on Studio. Two cards sit above the form. One builds a new ad, such as Build a new Google Search ad, or Build your Google Display ad with Picked from the page you came from when you arrived from a website tool. The other is Import from Google Ads, with Bring in the campaigns you already run. Pick the import card and the account picker opens right away, with no second click. If you are not signed in to Google Ads yet, Continue with Google takes you to Google and back to this same window, so you can pick an account without starting over. Its steps are in [Download a Google Ads account into a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/). When the import finishes, setup counts as done and you land on the imported preview. Connect sets up an empty client called Google Ads import, and a second Connect & import or Build reuses it. Free links one account, so a second Google login asks you to unlink the first. Click Build a new ad instead to go back to the form. The two cards do not show during a trial, as a guest, or with a view-only login. ## Can I use the ad text I typed in a free tool? Yes. If you filled in a free tool on ppcadeditor.com with your own business name and website, or your own headlines or descriptions, and then signed up, you skip this screen. It says Building your ad from your draft… for a few seconds and opens your ad in the editor. If the tool had your copy but no business name, it asks for the Business name shown on your ad, with Build ad. If building takes too long, it says We couldn't finish building your ad. Your draft is filled in below, and the form below holds your draft. See Free tools on our website. When you do see the form after a free tool, such as when you only typed a business name, the first-ad screen carries your text into your first ad. When the business name you type matches the tool, they come along on their own. When it is a different business, the screen asks Use the ad text from the free tool? Click Apply and it says We'll use the ad text from the free tool when you build. Click Dismiss and the editor writes fresh copy for the business you typed. See Free tools on our website. The lines you typed in the tool stay in the ad as you wrote them, and the editor writes the rest around them, so the ad does not open with blank required headlines or descriptions. A sample line from the tool that you never edited, such as Shop Today on the Performance Max generator, is left behind. If you added a picture in the tool that could not come across, the first-ad screen says Your images from the free tool didn't come across, followed by a prompt to add them here. The same line shows in the image section of a Responsive Display or Performance Max ad in the editor. ## Which channels can I pick for my first ad? The step Where does it run first? is one card with a row of channel tabs: Google, Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, Programmatic, ChatGPT, X, Reddit, and Microsoft. Use the arrow keys to move between tabs, and Space or Enter to pick one. Google, Meta, and LinkedIn have a second row to choose the exact format: - Google: Search, Display, Performance Max, or Demand Gen. - Meta: Single image / video, Carousel, or Story / Reels. - LinkedIn: Single image or Carousel. A line under the tabs tells you where that format previews, for example Search previews on Google Search results. The main button names your pick, such as Build Google Search ad or Build Meta carousel ad, and it stays on screen while you scroll on a phone. Build keeps the format you picked. It does not swap it for a nearby one. On the current Free plan and on a Studio plan, every tab and format is open. During a trial, and on an earlier Free plan, Google Search, Google Display, Meta single image or video, and YouTube are open. The other formats show a lock. You can leave and come back to this setup. What you typed is kept for your own account in this browser, so reloading brings your business name and website back. Signing out, or signing in as a different account, starts the screen blank, and nothing you typed shows for the other account. If you came from a responsive display, Performance Max, or LinkedIn tool on the PPC Ad Editor website, the tab shows the page you came from, such as Google Display, and keeps that format. Pick something else and a Back to … link brings the original one back. An HTML5 banner page opens as Google Display. ## How do I vote for TikTok or request another channel on the first ad screen? Click Need another channel? Vote on what's next. You can vote for Google Shopping, Amazon Ads, or TikTok, and click + Request another channel to type a different one. These are votes only. Those channels are not in the editor, and we cannot give a date. The ad language list has a similar request link when yours is missing. ## What happens when I click a locked channel? This only applies if you see a lock on a tile. The first click selects the tile and says that channel is a Studio channel, and that Free ads run on the open channels. Picking a locked tile never builds an ad by accident. While it is selected, the main button changes to Unlock … with Studio, with the channel name in it, and it opens the Studio window. Start free on, followed by the format name, takes you back to the last open channel and format, so you can build your first ad on Free. ## What does "Finish your first ad" mean? If you leave the first-ad screen with Look around first before an ad exists, a note says Your first ad is still waiting, with a Finish your first ad button that takes you back to the first-ad screen. Once you have an ad open, or the setup is done, the note goes away and the button no longer sends you back to the setup screen. ## Can I build another ad from a website later? Yes. On your dashboard, click Create dashboard from wizard, next to Trash. The same screen opens with the title Build another ad and the line Same workspace. We'll write it from the name and website. The main button reads Build this ad. You see the link when you can add clients, and it is not in the demo. The new ad goes into a new client when your plan allows another one. On a Free plan with one client, it goes into that client, or into your one empty client first. If you have several clients and are at the limit, Build opens the upgrade window instead of picking a business for you. ## What does Build make for each channel? - Google Search, Google Display, Performance Max, and Demand Gen write starter copy from the name and site, then the real draft while you look around the editor. - Microsoft Ads writes Search copy the same way. - Meta feed, Carousel, and Story / Reels generate their images first, then draft the copy around them. - YouTube generates a short video preview first, then the title and description. If no video of your own is found, a short sample clip plays in the preview, and Add video lets you swap in yours. - LinkedIn, single image or carousel, writes copy from the name and site, the same way. - X, Reddit, ChatGPT, and Programmatic write the copy from the name and site and add an image from the website, so the ad opens with lines already in it. When you build from a website, the main image is a photo from that page, not the logo or a site graphic. The logo stays in the logo slot. A mostly blank picture is left out so it cannot fill an image slot. ## Does my first Google Search ad include my logo? Yes, when you build it from a website. A Google Search first ad picks up your site's logo and one large hero image from your homepage and adds them to the ad as image assets. They show in the preview, on the share link, and in the export. To remove or replace either one, click Assets, the library icon in the editor header beside Find and Replace. Both files have to meet Google's minimum sizes, and nothing is stretched to fit: - Logo: square at 128 by 128 pixels or larger, or wide 4:1 at 512 by 128 pixels or larger. A logo is never cropped. - Image: wide 1.91:1 at 600 by 314 pixels or larger, square at 300 by 300 or larger, or portrait 4:5 at 480 by 600 or larger. A large hero in another shape is trimmed from the center to the nearest of these, but only when the trim keeps at least half of the picture. A file that is too small, an SVG or icon file, or an animated image is left out. A logo is never used as the hero image, and a flat graphic or mostly blank picture, such as a logo card, is not used as the image either. If you start without a website, or your homepage cannot be read in time, the Search ad still opens, with no logo or image, and you can add them from Assets. ## Are headlines in my first ad cut off mid sentence? No. Every headline, description, and primary text in the new ad is a whole phrase that fits its field. A line that would have to be cut is left out, and the next real line takes its place. Names such as Mr. Rooter stay in one piece. You will not see ALL-CAPS headings, repeated lines, or empty text fields in the opening ad. On Performance Max, Demand Gen, and Meta, a long headline or link description does not repeat a headline unless nothing else fits. When you build from a website or a business name, every channel opens with copy. Start from scratch, with no website, still opens a blank ad for you to write. While copy is being written, a note at the bottom of the editor says a closer draft for the business is still writing and can take a few minutes. The ad is usable in the meantime, because the lines already in it are real sentences you can edit. If you built the ad with a business name and no website, the editor stops saying it is still writing after about 90 seconds and keeps the starter lines. A box then says "Add your website for copy written from your site." Type the site in the box and click Write from site, and the editor starts writing copy from that site. A message says Writing copy from your site. If it cannot start, you see Couldn't start copy from that site, and you can try again. When the written copy is ready, it replaces those opening lines on its own, with no reload needed. This includes Programmatic ads. If the drafted copy cannot be used, the editor shows Using starter copy for now and offers Retry. ## My new ad is still loading, or says Taking longer than usual or Couldn't check the draft The closer draft has taken more than about three minutes. The note at the bottom of the editor changes to Taking longer than usual for the business, and says Your starter lines are ready to edit. If the draft can no longer be checked at all, it says Couldn't check the draft for the business. Edit the lines already in the ad. Either way the ad already holds real starter lines, so you can edit them or add lines. Close the note with its dismiss button. On the dashboard card, the same wait shows Taking longer than usual, with Open in the editor and Dismiss. If you trash the ad while it is still building, the card goes away on its own. ## Why does my first YouTube ad show a video I did not add? That is a short sample clip. When no video of your own is found on your website, your first YouTube ad plays a sample so you can see the layout. Click Add video to swap in your own. ## What does Look around first do? Look around first sits under the main button on the first-ad screen. If you typed a business name, it builds their first ad for you and opens your dashboard instead of the editor. The button reads Setting up and the name while it works, and the screen says we'll build it while you look. On the dashboard, a card named Your ad for the business shows the ad with a BUILDING tag while the headlines and descriptions are written, usually within a few minutes. When it is done the tag changes to READY, and the card offers Open in the editor, Share for comments, and Dismiss. The card only says READY once the ad really has its lines. If you have moved to another page by then, a message says Your ad for the business is ready, with an Open button. If the first draft comes back with too few lines to show a real ad, we try once more and then fill a short starter set. A Search ad needs three headlines and two descriptions before it can be previewed. Until it has them, the card shows SHORT DRAFT and says The draft does not have enough lines to preview yet. Open it and add a few headlines before you share. Share for comments appears only once the ad has enough lines. The card says the copy was written from your site only when at least one headline came from the site. If the ad only has starter lines from the business name, it says it was written from the business name. Starter headlines taken from your website skip people's names, such as a team or staff list, and short section headings, so the first lines you see read as ad copy. If you have not typed a name or a website, the same button reads Show me a sample. It opens a filled-in sample ad for a sample coffee shop, marked as a sample, so you can try the editor before you add your own business. Hover the button and it says Open a sample ad. It does not use a preview slot. While it opens, the button says Opening sample…. The sample does not take one of your Free previews or a client, and it cannot be shared with a client. See The sample ad. With a name or a website typed in, the button reads Look around first and says We build the ad while you look around. When you open the first-ad screen again from Start from my website or Build another ad, the same button reads Back to dashboard, and hovering it says Skip for now and explore your dashboard. It takes you back to your dashboard without creating anything, not even a sample. The Make your first ad form asks for a Business name and an optional Website, and Show my ad builds it. If you land on an empty dashboard before your first ad is built, the form there is already filled in with the business name and website you typed, and the setup brings you back to the same first-ad screen. If you came from a responsive display, Performance Max, or YouTube page on the PPC Ad Editor website, your ad keeps that format here too. On an earlier Free plan or during a trial, Performance Max still needs Studio. The name you type is the one that gets built. ## No Show me a sample button after I paid After you buy Studio, the first-ad screen builds a real ad you can share, so it does not offer the sample. With no business name typed, the button under Build reads Skip for now, and hovering it says Open your dashboard. Your first ad is here when you're ready. Type a business name and click Build to make your first ad. ## Why is Dashboards greyed out in the left menu? Until your account has a dashboard, Dashboards in the left menu is greyed out and says After your first ad. Click or hover it and it says This unlocks after you finish your first ad. Build your first ad, or click Look around first, and it becomes a link once the dashboard exists. ## What if the website cannot be read? If Build times out on the website, the screen shows We couldn't read and the site's address. The site blocked the visit or took too long. This happens with some large stores, and nothing is wrong on your end. - Try again builds with the same website. If the site still cannot be read, the copy is written from a web search for the business. - If you change the channel or format and build again, the new ad is added to the same dashboard. You do not get the first ad back. - Build from the name only builds without the website. - Or try a product or landing page instead. The website field says Couldn't read this page. Try a product or landing page instead. If the address itself is not valid, the field says Enter a public website such as yourbrand.com. Fix it, or clear it to build without a website. ## I typed example.com, mybrand.com or another example website Studio does not read a placeholder address as your business. That covers example.com, test.com, mybrand.com, yourbrand.com, yourcompany.com, mybusiness.com, yourwebsite.com, mysite.com and other fill-in addresses, as well as localhost or an IP address. A real site with a similar name, such as mybrandshop.com, still works. The field says That looks like a placeholder, not your site. Enter your real website, or clear it and continue without one. Type your real website to have the copy written from it, or leave the field empty and build from the business name. After the ad exists, Suggest copy in the editor can still write from another source. If it cannot read the Final URL, We couldn't read this page lets you pick Web search, Another page, or A short description. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/). ## This workspace is full If the Free tier's previews are all in use when you open the first-ad screen, the bar at the bottom says This workspace is full, with how many previews you have, such as 3 of 3 previews, and Open one you already have, or upgrade to add another. Two buttons sit beside it. - Open my previews takes you back to the workspace you were already in, with your existing previews. If you have no workspace yet, it opens your list of workspaces. - Upgrade opens the Studio offer. Studio has unlimited previews. To make room on the Free tier instead, move a preview you no longer need to the trash. See Trash. ## Other build problems - That took too long means building timed out. Try again usually works. - You've used your free dashboard means the Free tier already has its one client dashboard. Click Upgrade to add another client, or explore your workspace or the demo. - Your session expired means you need to sign in again. Click Sign in again. - Something went wrong on our side means the ad was not created. Click Try again, or look around and come back. - If your first ad looks wrong, such as the wrong image or lines that do not fit your business, open it in the editor and change the image or any line. Your first ad is an ordinary preview you can edit. Your name and channel are saved, so you can finish this setup later. Under or explore on your own, Blank canvas opens your workspace and Demo workspace builds a sample ad in your account. --- # Get started and build your first ad Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/getting-started/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Just signed up and not sure what to do now? Build one ad for one client, then send them the link. Right after signup, PPC Ad Editor opens a screen that says Welcome. Let's build your first ad. You pick where the ad runs, type the business name, and click Build. The editor opens with the ad written for you, and you copy a link your client can open without an account. ## Sign up. Signed up? What now, where do I begin Go to /register. Click Continue with Google, or fill in Your Name, Company name (optional), Work email, Password and Confirm Password, then click Create account. A password needs at least 8 characters, a lowercase letter, a capital letter and a number. The form ticks off each rule as you type. After the security check, the first-ad screen opens on its own. ## Build your first ad 1. Under Where does it run first?, pick a channel: Google, Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, Programmatic, ChatGPT, X, Reddit or Microsoft. Google, Meta and LinkedIn show a second row where you pick the format, such as Search, Display, Performance Max or Demand Gen. 2. Under Who it's for, type the Business name. It is yours or a client's, and it is the name shown in the ad. If you signed up with email and entered a company name, it may already be filled in. 3. Add a Website if you have one. It is optional, and any public page works, such as a landing page. The editor reads it to write the copy. 4. Leave the language on Auto-detect to match the website, or pick English or Danish. 5. Watch the live preview on the right fill in as you type. Then click the Build button. It names the format, such as Build Google Search ad →. 6. The editor opens with the ad. A note at the bottom may say a closer draft is still writing, which can take a few minutes. You can edit the lines already in the ad meanwhile. 7. If Which voice feels most like them? appears, pick a voice, or close it. Then edit any headline or description on the left. The preview updates as you type. On a Free account, the first-ad screen also offers Import from Google Ads at the top, next to the Build card. Pick it and click Connect Google Ads → to bring in campaigns you already run instead. Free links one Google Ads account, and Studio links as many as you need. See [Download a Google Ads account into a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/). ## Messages on the first-ad screen - Enter a public website such as yourbrand.com. The website is not a real address. Fix it, or clear it to continue without one. - Couldn't read this page. Try a product or landing page instead. Try another page from the same site. - If the message says the site blocked our reader, Build still works. It writes from the business name and a web search. - That website is a sample. Type your business name to continue. - This workspace is full. Free holds 3 previews. Click Open my previews to work on one you have, or Upgrade. - If a channel shows Studio, it is a Studio channel on your plan. The message says you can preview it now and publish when you upgrade. Click Use Google Search instead, or the name of another open format, to keep going on Free. On the current Free plan every channel is open. For more on build problems, see [First-ad screen: channels, website, and build problems](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/first-ad/). ## Send the first ad to your client 1. After your first edit, the link address appears above the live preview with a blue Copy client link button. Click Copy client link. 2. Paste the link into your email or chat. Your client opens it in a browser with no account, and it always shows the current ad. 3. The first time you copy, a card offers to email the link. Type an address under Who's reviewing this one? and click Email the link, or click Skip (I'll send it myself). Share with client at the top right of the editor leads to the same link. On Free, one preview at a time can have a client link. Approval on the link is a Studio feature. ## Find your first ad again Build saves the ad in a dashboard named after the business, as a preview whose name ends in first ad. Open Dashboards in the left menu, then open that dashboard. Its Previews list shows the ad, and New Preview starts the next one. ## What can I do on Free after the first ad? Free gives you 1 client dashboard, 3 previews, and 2 seats, so you can invite one teammate. Every ad format and export are included. Studio is $149 a month and adds unlimited previews, 3 client dashboards, client links on every preview, and approval. See [Studio, the ad editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/overview/) for the full list. ## Look around first with Show me a sample - With a business name typed, Look around first builds the ad and opens your dashboard while it writes. - With no business name, Show me a sample opens a sample ad. It does not use one of your preview slots. - Dashboards and Settings in the left menu open those pages, and you stay there. The first-ad screen does not pull you back. Browser Back from the first-ad screen does not show the signup form. - Start another ad any time with New Preview or Quick build on a dashboard. ## Where did the dashboards go after I joined a team or accepted a workspace invite? The dashboards belong to the workspace that invited you, not to your own. Accepting switches you into that workspace and opens its Dashboards page. If you land in your own workspace later, click the workspace name at the top of the left menu and pick the one that invited you. A Standard User sees only the dashboards they were given, so if one is missing, ask an Owner or Admin to add you. See [Accept an invitation and find your dashboards](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/accept-an-invitation/). ## If the welcome screen looks different - If you see What would you like to do first?, click Build an ad preview under Ad Mockup Studio. Set up Budget Pacer opens Budget Pacer, which is a separate product. - If you joined a teammate's workspace with a role that can only view and comment, the welcome screen says You can view and comment. Click Go to dashboard to open that workspace's previews. --- # Group previews: share several ads with one link Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/group-previews/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Can I bundle my ads together and send my client one link with all of them? Yes. Group two to ten previews from the same client dashboard, such as a search ad, a Meta ad and a video ad, and share the group with one link. Your client switches between the ads from that link. Each preview in the group stays its own preview, and you edit each one on its own. ## How do I group previews I already made? 1. Open the client dashboard and find its Previews list. 2. Tick the box on two to ten previews. A Group button appears next to Previews, with the number you ticked, such as Group 3. 3. Click it. Group 3 previews opens. Type a Group name, up to 100 characters. It starts as the first preview's name plus Group. 4. Click Create group. The message says Group created with 3 previews. Click View Group to open it. The Group button only shows when two to ten previews are ticked. Programmatic previews cannot go in a group, and the app says Programmatic previews stay out of format groups. You can also group previews as you make them. In New Preview, pick Multi-Channel, and on the last step leave Group these previews ticked. See Multi-channel previews. ## How do I share the group? In the Previews list, the group has its own row with three buttons: - Copy group link copies the link. The message says Group link copied. - Share settings opens sharing for the group link. - Group settings lets you rename the group and change which previews are in it. Send the copied link to your client. They see one tab for each ad in the group and switch between them. When you edit a preview, the group link shows the change, so you do not send a new link. Approval is part of the Studio plan, and it works on a single preview's link, not on a group link. To collect a sign-off on Studio, share each preview that needs approval on its own. See Approve a preview. ## How do I add another preview to a group, or remove one? 1. In the Previews list, click Group settings on the group's row. 2. Under Members, the count shows how many are in the group, such as 3 / 10. 3. To add one, type in Search previews to add... and pick a preview. When the group has ten, the box reads Max members reached. 4. To take one out, click Remove from group next to it. 5. Click Save Changes. The message says Group updated. Inside an open group, the tab bar at the top also has Add preview to group, and Remove from group on each tab. Removing a preview from a group does not delete the preview. It stays in the dashboard's Previews list. ## What does a group not do? - A group holds at most ten previews, all from one dashboard. - It does not merge the ads. Each preview keeps its own copy, comments and status. - A group link cannot collect approval. On Studio, use the single preview's link for that. --- # Get client sign-off on an animated HTML5 banner Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/html5-banner-sign-off/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Can my client approve an animated HTML5 banner? Yes. Upload the banner's ZIP to a Programmatic preview, and your client watches it play and approves it from a share link. This is the step-by-step. ## Before you start - You need the banner as a ZIP. The ZIP holds an HTML file such as index.html, at most 200 files, up to 10 MB, and no more than 20 MB once unpacked. The HTML should state the banner's width and height, for example with an ad.size meta tag, and a click variable such as clickTag. - The HTML5 Preview page on our website shows a sample banner only. It has no upload. To preview your own banner, use the editor. - On the current Free plan, Programmatic and HTML5 banners are open. Your client can view and comment on a Free plan. The Approval link, where your client clicks Approve, is a Studio feature. ## Upload the banner 1. On your dashboard, click New Preview. 2. Under Where do you want to advertise?, pick Programmatic, then click Continue with Programmatic. 3. Click Create ad, then pick HTML5 banner. 4. Upload the ZIP. Each ZIP becomes its own HTML5 ad, and it plays in the placements that fit its size. 5. If you like, add a headline, a description, the advertiser, and a final URL on the ad card. There is no call to action field, because the button is part of the ZIP. ## Send it for approval 1. Click Share with client. 2. In Share preview, under Permission level, pick Approval, which is a Studio feature. Pick Commentor instead if you only want comments, which works on the Free tier too. 3. Copy the link and send it to your client. Your client adds their name, then sees the banner play. On an Approval link they click Approve, or Request changes, type what should change, and click Send request. The person who created the preview gets an email when your client approves or asks for changes. Each ad shows Approved or Changes requested. ## If the banner changes after approval Replace the ZIP or save a change to an approved ad, and its status goes to Review Required. Send the same link again so your client can approve the new one. Approval links need Studio. ## What this does not do HTML5 banners do not export, and AI drafting is off for them. The editor previews the banner in publisher placements. It does not upload it to an ad platform. --- # Import from Meta Ads: download live Meta campaigns into a preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/import-from-meta-ads/ Last verified: 2026-10-16 Import from Meta Ads pulls your live Facebook and Instagram ads in. It downloads the ads from your live Meta campaigns into a Meta preview, so you can show a client what is running without rebuilding it. It reads your Meta ad account. It does not change, pause or publish anything in Meta. Import from Meta Ads is not open to every workspace yet. If it is not on for yours, sign-in stops with Meta ads is not enabled for this account. ## Pull your Facebook and Instagram ads in, step by step 1. On a client dashboard, click New Preview. 2. Under Where do you want to advertise?, pick Facebook / Instagram and click Continue with Facebook / Instagram. 3. Pick the format, single image or video, carousel, or story or reel, and click the Next button. 4. Under How do you want to start?, pick Import from Meta Ads, Download live campaigns into this Meta preview. Click Connect & import. 5. The Import from Meta Ads window opens. The first time, click Sign in with Meta and sign in with the Facebook login that can see your ad account. You come back to the same dashboard. 6. Under Ad account, pick the account from Choose an account. 7. Tick the campaigns to download. A campaign list that says No campaigns in this account has nothing to bring in. 8. Click Download. A progress bar shows how far the download is. When it finishes, the preview opens. In Quick build, Import from Meta Ads, Download live campaigns, opens the same window. ## What comes in - Each ad set becomes an ad group named after the ad set, with its ads inside. - Ads keep the text options set in Ads Manager, such as the primary text and headline. - Images come in at full size, not as small thumbnails. - Single image or video ads, carousels and stories or reels each get their own preview, because a preview holds one format. When a download finds more than one kind, the previews are put in a group named after the download, and the format tabs show how many ads each one has. - Carousel ads come in with their cards. ## Why does it say Meta ads is not enabled for this account? Import from Meta Ads is turned on workspace by workspace. When it is not on for yours, the card still shows in New Preview, but clicking Sign in with Meta or Download says Meta ads is not enabled for this account. Build the Meta preview from scratch instead, or contact support to ask about it. ## Other messages - Could not list Meta ad accounts or Could not list Meta campaigns. The Meta sign-in could not read that account. Close the window and try again, or sign in with a login that has access to the ad account. - Could not download this Meta campaign. The download stopped. Open Import from Meta Ads again and pick the campaign again. ## Which plan Import from Meta Ads works on the Free tier and on Studio, where it is on for the workspace. A download makes previews, so the Free tier's preview and format limits apply to it. ## What it does not do Meta previews stay previews. A downloaded preview cannot be sent back to Meta, and Meta ads do not download as files Meta imports. --- # Import CSV, XLSX, and ZIP files into a preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/imports/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 You can build a Google Ads preview from files you already have: a Google Ads Editor export, a spreadsheet, a zip of images, or a brief. Start it from New Preview or Quick build with Import from file. Sitelinks, callouts, and structured snippets have their own bulk import in the Asset Library. ## I have a spreadsheet of ads. Can I use it? Yes. Import your spreadsheet of ads into a Google Ads preview, for Responsive Search, Responsive Display or Performance Max. Start a new preview, pick Import from file, and drop in the CSV, XLSX or XLS file, as in the steps below. A Google Ads Editor export, or a workbook from our template, is read straight away and keeps your campaign and ad group names. Any other spreadsheet of ads goes to AI, which drafts a preview from what it can read. On the Free tier one file brings in up to 5 ads. See Is there a template I can fill in? ## How do I import a file? 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview. Pick Google Ads and a format: Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, or Performance Max. Name the preview, pick Import from file, and click Import files. In Quick build, pick Google Ads, the format, then Import from file. 2. Import your files opens. Importing into: shows the channel and format, with change to go back and pick another. 3. Drop up to 10 files at once, or browse. A file past the tenth says Up to 10 files per import. Pick the ad language if you want, such as Auto-detect, English, or Danish. 4. Each file gets a row that says what will happen to it, such as ✓ parsed (marked free & instant), AI reading…, or needs a route. 5. Click the button at the bottom. It counts what was found, such as Review what we found, followed by a count like 12 ads · 4 assets. With nothing counted yet it reads Continue with what we found. While files are read it says Reading… or Working with AI…. 6. Building your preview… shows Read your file, Kept your structure, Writing your ads, and Open in the editor. The editor then opens on the new preview. ## Which files can I import? CSV, XLSX, XLS, TSV, and ZIP files, PDF, DOC, DOCX, and TXT briefs, and PNG, JPG, WEBP, or GIF images. - A Google Ads Editor export, or a workbook exported from PPC Ad Editor, is read straight away. Its row says ✓ parsed and is marked free & instant. Your campaigns and ad groups keep their names. - A spreadsheet with no campaigns in it, or one that cannot be read as a Google Ads sheet, goes to AI, which drafts a preview from what it can read. - A brief also goes to AI, which drafts starter headlines and descriptions. Plain-text files such as TXT are read for the copy. For copy from a PDF or Word brief, use Draft with AI instead and add it under Source Documents. - A zip of images, or a single image, goes onto your ad by aspect ratio, or to the asset library. An image named like a logo is used as the logo. - A file the import cannot open, such as a Numbers file, says needs a route. Click Export as CSV & re-drop for how to save it as a CSV, then drop it again. ## Can I import into Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, Microsoft Ads, or Demand Gen? No. Import from file works on Google Ads Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, and Performance Max. It is greyed out on Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, Microsoft Ads, Programmatic, ChatGPT, X, Reddit and Multi-Channel previews, and on Demand Gen. Start those from scratch, or with Draft with AI where it is offered. For Microsoft Ads, see Microsoft Ads search previews. ## What if my file has errors? If a Google Ads export still has problems after the automatic fix, a review step lists them, such as a headline over the character limit or a missing Final URL. The Fix for … with AI button, which names your format, shortens over-length headlines and strips keyword inserts for you. Download Error Report (CSV) saves the list and keeps you in the review, and Fix and re-upload then shows beside it. When it is ready, click the Import button, which shows the number of ads. If AI has fixed your file, Cancel asks Discard the AI fixes and leave this import? and closing the window asks Close and discard the fixes AI applied to this file?. Click Cancel in that box to keep working. While the import is running, cancelling asks Cancel this import? This also clears the uploaded file. You can start again with a new file. After you add a file, you can still click the drop zone to pick a different one. If the import fails, Import failed offers Try Again. Cancel build stops it, and you can retry from the file you already uploaded. ## Is import on the Free tier? Yes. On the Free tier, one import brings in up to 5 ads per file. If your file has more, the editor says Imported 5 of … ads (free plans import up to 5 per file). Upgrade to import the rest. Upgrade to Studio to import the rest. Today's Free plan imports into Responsive Search, Responsive Display and Performance Max. On an earlier Free plan, Performance Max needs Studio. Using AI to fix or draft copy uses AI credits. ## Is there a template I can fill in? Yes, two ways. The Downloads page on our website, ppcadeditor.com/downloads/, has an Excel bulk sheet, PCADE_bulksheet_demo_template.xlsx. It was made for our earlier editor, so only part of it imports today. Import reads its Responsive Search Ads sheet, and its Keywords, Sitelinks, Callouts and Snippets sheets. The Expanded Text Ads, Call Only Ads and Calls sheets are not imported. Keep the header row in each sheet as it is, and replace the sample rows with your own. Or export a responsive search preview as PPC Ad Editor Template (Excel), which gives you a workbook you can fill in and import again. It holds campaigns, ad groups, ads, keywords, and extensions, and it imports back cleanly. Apple Template (Excel) is an export for Apple Search Ads that only shows when it is turned on for your account. Contact support to ask about it. ## How do I bulk import sitelinks, callouts, and snippets? 1. Open the Asset Library and go to the Sitelinks, Callouts, or Structured Snippets tab. 2. Click Import from File. Import assets from file opens. 3. Drop a CSV or Excel file up to 10MB, such as a Google Ads Editor CSV export or a PPC Ad Editor Excel template, and click Continue. 4. Ready to import shows what was found. Click the Import button, which shows the number of assets. The assets land in your Asset Library unassigned. Attach them to campaigns and ad groups any time. Duplicates are skipped. If nothing is found, check that your file uses the right column headers. ## Does importing change my Google Ads account? No. Importing a file only builds a preview in the editor. Nothing is sent to Google Ads. --- # Invites, roles, and guests Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invites-roles-guests/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Need a coworker or another person in your account? Invite them into your workspace as a teammate from Settings, under Users, with Invite teammate. A teammate signs in and works in your workspace. A guest is someone you send a share link to. A guest needs no account and only sees what that link shares. ## How do I invite someone to my workspace? 1. In the left menu, under Studio, click Settings, then Users. You can also search Invite teammate in quick search. 2. Click Invite teammate. Add member opens. 3. Under Enter team member email addresses, type one address or several, separated by commas. 4. Under Select role, pick Admin or Standard User. An Owner also sees Owner. 5. Under Dashboard access, pick All dashboards or Selected dashboards only. With Selected dashboards only, check each dashboard under Assign dashboards. 6. Click Send invite. Each person gets an email invitation, and the footer says Invite sent. Owners and Admins see Invite teammate. Members with the Billing role do not, and cannot change roles or dashboard access. You can invite teammates on the Free tier too. Free includes 2 seats, you and one teammate. Studio also includes 2 seats, plus 3 client workspaces, and extra seats can be added on the Billing page. ## What can each role do? - Owner: full control over the account and all settings. Invite users, delete users, manage billing, and view and assign dashboards. - Admin: manage users and dashboards. Invite and delete users, and view and assign dashboards. Billing stays with the Owner. - Billing: some members have this role so they can handle payment. It is not one of the roles you pick in Select role. They see Plans & billing and Invoices & receipts, and can buy, change or cancel a plan. They do not see Invite teammate and cannot change roles or dashboard access. - Standard User: view assigned dashboards only. They can work on previews in the dashboards they are given, and cannot invite or remove people. Owners and Admins always see every dashboard. A Standard User sees the dashboards you assign. With All dashboards they see every dashboard, including ones made later. With Selected dashboards only they do not see dashboards made later. Change access later with Manage access. See Users and dashboards. Someone who was just invited, or whose role just changed, may be blocked from a few sensitive actions for two to three days. That protects your account. ## Who can make someone an Owner? Only an Owner can invite someone as Owner, make a teammate an Owner, or change an Owner's role. An Admin does not see Owner in Select role. Every account keeps at least one Owner. If you try to change the only Owner to another role, you see "Every account needs at least one Owner. Make someone else Owner first." Make another teammate Owner, then change the first one. If an Admin tries to change an Owner's role, Edit permissions says "Only an Owner can change Owner roles." ## Can an Admin invite an Owner? No. Only an Owner can invite someone as Owner or resend an Owner invite. If an Admin tries, the invite is not sent and the message says Only an Owner can invite someone as Owner. or Only an Owner can resend an Owner invitation. An Owner invite also stops working if the person who sent it is no longer an Owner when it is accepted. The person you invited sees This Owner invitation is no longer valid. Ask an account Owner to invite you again. An Owner then sends a new invite. When a role change, an invite or a removal is refused, you see the reason once. Studio does not send the same request again, so a refused invite never turns into a second invite. ## What is a guest versus a teammate? - A teammate is invited by email, takes a seat, signs in, and sees the dashboards their role allows. - A guest opens a share link in a browser with no account and no seat. They see only the preview or group on that link, and only what the link allows: view, comment, approve or edit. Each comment they post carries a Guest badge. To let a client review one ad, send a share link instead of inviting them. ## Does a client on a share link use one of my seats? No. A client who opens a share link is a guest and does not use one of your 2 seats on Free, or any seat on Studio. Only teammates you invite by email take a seat. ## What can a guest do on the Free tier? On Free, can a client approve stuff or just look? Just look and comment. A guest on a Free share link can view, or view and comment when the link is set to Commentor. A preview takes up to 3 guest comments on the Free tier, and one preview at a time can have a client link. Approval and Editor links are Studio features, so on the Free tier a guest cannot approve or edit. Studio has no guest comment limit, and every preview can have its own link. Guests never use one of your seats on either plan. ## How do I resend or cancel an invite? An invite that has not been accepted shows the email address with a Pending tag and Invite sent, with how long ago. Click the three-dot menu on that row. - Resend invite sends the email again. A note says Invite resent to, with the address. - Cancel invite withdraws it after you confirm. An invitation link works for 7 days. Resend invite gives it another 7 days. ## Why can't I invite anyone? - "No seats left", followed by a prompt to add a seat in Billing. Every seat is in use. Add a seat in Billing, or remove someone. - "This workspace can't buy team access online. Contact support to add users." - "Team access could not be verified". Refresh the page before inviting, changing or removing members. - You are a Standard User or have the Billing role, so Invite teammate does not show. Ask an Owner or Admin. The note at the bottom of Users says how many seats and dashboards your plan has, with a link to Billing. --- # Invoices and receipts Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invoices-and-receipts/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 Where do I download my invoices and receipts? On the Invoices & receipts page. Everyone in a workspace can open it. Owners and billing members download every invoice PDF and receipt. Everyone else sees the list and can ask for a PDF. ## Open Invoices & receipts Any of these opens the page: - Open Settings, and click Invoices & receipts under Workspace. - Click your account menu at the top and click Invoices & receipts. It shows your latest invoice date and amount under it. - Press Ctrl K and type invoice. You can also pick Download latest invoice, or an invoice by month, straight from there. Plans & billing no longer lists invoices. It has one line, Invoices and receipts have their own page, with a link to Invoices & receipts. ## Download an invoice PDF or a receipt If you are the owner or a billing member: 1. Open Invoices & receipts. Your latest invoice is at the top with its amount and status, Paid or Unpaid. 2. Click Download invoice for the PDF, or Receipt for the payment receipt. A receipt is there once the invoice is paid. 3. For an older invoice, find it under All invoices and click PDF or Receipt on its row. When you have invoices from more than one year, click a year to see that year's list. To download several at once, tick them and click Download, such as Download 3 PDFs. You get one ZIP file. You can download up to 24 at a time. Before your first payment the page says No invoices yet. The first one appears after your first payment. If your workspace is invoiced by our team, the page says Your account team sends invoices for this workspace by email. ## Change the address or tax ID on an invoice Owners and billing members see an Addressed to card. It shows the billing address on your invoices. If it says No tax ID on file, add one and it prints on every new invoice. Click Edit billing details to change them. ## Who can see what - Owners and billing members see amounts and download every PDF and receipt. A shared invoice shows Shared with and the person's name. - Admins see the amounts. To get a PDF they ask for it. - Everyone else sees the list of invoices with amounts shown as Hidden. Invoices & receipts in Settings has a lock next to it. The page says who keeps the PDFs, such as the owner's name, under Who can download invoices. ## Ask for an invoice PDF If you are not an owner or billing member: 1. Open Invoices & receipts. 2. On the invoice you need, click Ask for it. Or click Ask next to the person under Who can download invoices. 3. Choose an invoice if one is not picked yet, and add a note if you want. Click Send request. That person gets an email and can share the PDF with you in one click. The row then says Asked with their name. Once they share it, the row says Shared by with their name, and that one invoice unlocks for you. Other invoices stay hidden. Need every invoice, every month? Under the list, click Ask, followed by the owner's name, to make you a billing member. A billing member sees and downloads every invoice. ## Answer a request Owners and billing members see requests at the top of Invoices & receipts, and get an email for each one. - Click Share with the invoice number and the person's name to unlock that one invoice for them. - Click Make them a billing member to give them every invoice. Only an owner or an admin can do this. A billing member can share a single invoice but cannot change anyone's role. - Click Dismiss to close the request. ## Old payments A payment made on an older version of PPC Ad Editor may not be on this page. To get that receipt or invoice, contact support with the date, the amount, and the email you paid with. --- # Keywords: add, bulk paste, and suggest keywords for an ad group Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/keywords/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 Each ad group has its own keyword list. Keywords are on Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, and Microsoft Ads search previews. Open the ad in the editor and click the Keywords tab, next to Ads. The panel shows the count, such as Keywords (12). You can add one keyword, bulk paste or upload a list of thousands, or let AI suggest keywords. Keywords work on the Free tier and on Studio. On a ChatGPT ad, the same tab is called Context hints. See Edit a ChatGPT, X, or Reddit ad. ## How do I add a keyword? Click Add keyword. A new row appears with the text New keyword, match type Broad, and status Active. Click the text to type over it. Click Add keyword again before renaming it and the next row is New keyword 2, then New keyword 3, so you can add several in a row. Press Enter or click away to save, and Esc to cancel. A counter shows how many of the 80 characters you used. Pick Exact, Phrase, or Broad in the row's match type list. The match type saves as soon as you pick it. ## Why does it say the keyword is already in this ad group? An ad group cannot hold the same keyword twice with the same match type. Capital letters and spaces at the ends do not count, so Running Shoes and running shoes are the same keyword. If you type or rename a keyword to one that is already there, you see That keyword is already in this ad group. Edit the existing one or use a different name. Nothing is lost: change the text, pick a different match type, or edit the keyword that is already in the list. ## How do I bulk paste or upload a list of keywords? 1. Click Bulk add keywords. 2. Paste your list into the box, one keyword per line, or click Upload file and pick a CSV or XLSX file with a Keyword column. 3. To set a match type, press Tab after the keyword and type exact, phrase, or broad. The short forms e, p, and b work too. A keyword in [square brackets] is added as Exact, and one in "quotes" as Phrase. If you copy two spreadsheet columns, keyword and match type, the tab is already there. 4. A line with no match type is added as Broad. 5. Under the box you see how many keywords are ready, how many duplicates were removed and how many were skipped. Click See keywords to check each line, then click Add, such as Add 200 keywords. A paste of more than 500 lines turns into an attachment called Pasted text. Click Show keywords to look through it. Every added keyword starts as Active. Cancel closes the box without adding anything. ## Which pasted keywords are skipped? The editor checks the list before anything is saved and shows a Result for each line, such as Ready, Duplicate, Already in this ad group, or skipped. - Duplicates in the paste, and keywords already in this ad group, are removed. - Lines over 80 characters are skipped. In a big list you can pick Trim to 80 instead of Skip. - Lines with more than 10 words are skipped. - Lines with symbols such as ! @ % have the symbols removed. You can pick Skip instead. - A line that starts with a minus sign, a negative keyword, is skipped. After a big list is saved you can click Download skipped to get the skipped lines as a CSV. ## How do I add thousands of keywords at once? Paste or upload the list as above. When 200 or more keywords are ready, How do you want to add them? offers two choices. - Add all keeps every keyword. It saves them in batches of 500 and sorts them into themes, such as Water heater or Drain cleaning, from the words your keywords share. - Clean up with AI first suggests what to remove, merge or add, using this ad and its landing page. Each suggested change has a tick, and nothing is saved until you confirm. Click Check with AI to start. While a big list saves, the Keywords panel shows Adding 5,000 keywords with how many are done and how many batches are left. You can keep editing. Keep the tab open until it finishes. Cancel stops it, and the keywords already added stay saved. Click Add the other to finish the rest. If a batch fails, Retry adds what did not save, and Download gives you the unsent keywords as a CSV. ## How do I work through a long keyword list? The list shows 50 keywords at a time, with page controls such as 1–50 of 3,200. Type in the search box to narrow it. When an ad group has 200 or more keywords, you can group the list by Theme, Match type, or None. Click a group on the left to see only those keywords. Regroup sorts the keywords into themes again. Themes come from the words your keywords share and do not use AI. ## Can AI clean up a keyword list I already saved? Yes. When an ad group has 200 or more keywords, click Clean up with AI at the top of the Keywords panel. It reads your list against this ad and its landing page, then suggests what to remove, merge, or add. Tick the changes you want and confirm. Nothing changes until you do, and a message offers Undo. The check reads the list in batches of 100 keywords. Each batch uses one AI credit. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/) for how credits work. Clean up with AI shows only to people who can edit the preview. ## Can AI suggest keywords? Yes. Click Suggest keywords at the top of the Keywords panel. The editor reads the ad's Final URL and its headlines and descriptions, then adds new keywords to the list as Broad and Active. The button reads Suggesting… while it works. - When it is done, you see a message such as Added 12 suggested keywords. - Keywords already in your list are skipped. If every suggestion is already there, the message says All suggested keywords are already in your list. - If nothing comes back, the message says No keyword suggestions were returned. Add a Final URL or more ad copy, then try again. Each click uses one AI credit, the same as Suggest copy. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/) for how credits work. ## How do I change the match type or status of many keywords? Tick one or more keywords, or tick the box in the header row to select every keyword on the page. To pick every keyword across all pages, click Select all. A bar then offers: - Status sets Active, Paused, or Removed. - Match type sets Exact, Phrase, or Broad. - Move to theme moves them to another theme, when the list is grouped. - The bin deletes them. Each row shows its status as a coloured badge. ## How do I show a keyword in the phone preview's search bar? Each saved keyword has an eye button. Its tooltip says Show in preview search bar. Turn it on for the keywords you want. In Mobile view, the search ad then shows one of them typed into the search bar above the ad, and Shuffle moves to the next one. Only Active keywords show there. With none turned on, the search bar reads Search Google..., or Search the web... on a Microsoft Ads preview. Click the eye again, Remove from preview search bar, to take a keyword out. ## Can my client comment on a keyword? Yes. Each saved keyword row has a comment button. A comment there is pinned to that keyword, and the thread is labelled with the keyword and its match type, such as Keyword: "running shoes" (Exact). See [Comment on a preview and collect client feedback](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/comments/). ## How do I delete a keyword? Click the bin on its row. The keyword is removed, and a message such as Deleted "running shoes" offers Undo for a few seconds. To delete several at once, tick them and click the bin in the bar. Deleting more than 50 asks you to confirm first. ## Limits and other details - A keyword can be up to 80 characters and up to 10 words. - An ad group holds up to 20,000 keywords. If a list would go over, the box says how many fit, and only those are added. If the ad group fills up while a list is saving, the message says This ad group is full., or Only 120 more keywords fit in this ad group. with the real number. - Viewers and share links see the list but no edit buttons. Keywords cannot be changed in the demo. - Find & Replace does not search keywords. - Keywords leave the editor in the Google Ads Editor (CSV) export when you tick Include keywords with match types, and in the PPC Ad Editor Template (Excel). A PDF lists up to 200 keywords per ad group, then says how many more there are. See [Export or download a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export/). --- # Lifetime deals and accounts from the old version Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/lifetime-and-older-accounts/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 If you bought a lifetime deal, or used PPC Ad Editor before the current version, this is where to find your plan and your receipts. ## I bought a lifetime deal (LTD) but it says Free A lifetime deal belongs to the workspace it was set up on. In that workspace, the Studio row in the left menu shows the deal's plan name instead of Free. On the Billing page, Studio shows Lifetime access, and the side card says Nothing is invoiced on this plan. If you see Free, you are signed in to a workspace without the deal. 1. Check that you signed in with the email you used for the deal. 2. Click your workspace name at the top of the left menu. If another workspace is listed, switch to it. 3. If the deal is still missing, contact support and give the email you bought it with. The support team can set the plan on your workspace. A lifetime plan is not changed from checkout. Its row on the Billing page has Contact us, which sends your request to the team. ## Your account from the old version (V1) PPC Ad Editor moved to a new version. Sign in with the same email you used before. If you cannot find your workspace, your previews, or your plan, contact support with the email you used on the old version. Moving an account from the old version is done by the support team, not from a screen in the app. A paid plan from the old version keeps the terms already recorded for your account. ## What happened to Project Pass? Project Pass is gone. An old Project Pass no longer unlocks a dashboard, adds seats, or gives an upgrade credit. Your past checkout stays on record, and its invoices stay on Invoices & receipts. ## Find a receipt or invoice Invoices & receipts, in Settings and in your account menu, lists past invoices with a PDF and a receipt for each. Owners and billing members download them. Anyone else in the workspace sees the list and can click Ask for it on an invoice. On an older paid plan, the Billing History list also downloads a PDF. See [Invoices and receipts](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invoices-and-receipts/). A payment made on the old version may not be on that list. To get that receipt or invoice, contact support with the date of the payment, the amount, and the email you paid with. --- # Copy a shared preview into your own workspace Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/make-it-yours/ Last verified: 2026-10-16 When someone sends you a preview link and allows copying, Make it yours puts your own editable copy in your workspace. You do not need to go through the setup wizard. ## How do I copy a preview someone shared with me? 1. Open the link. If you see Make it yours, the owner allows copying. On a phone it sits in the bar at the bottom. On a computer it sits in the header of the shared page. 2. Click Make it yours. If you are not signed in, Sign in to copy this preview opens. It goes into your own workspace, and if you are new, this creates your account. Continue with Google or use your work email. 3. If you belong to more than one workspace, pick the one to copy into. 4. A card says Copying to and your workspace name while it works. Then the copy opens in the editor, ready to edit. The owner's original does not change. The note on the button explains it: "Copy this preview into your own workspace and edit it. No setup needed." ## I do not see Make it yours. Why? The owner has to turn on Allow copying for that link, and it is off until they do. Copying is also not offered on a link for a group of previews or for a Programmatic preview. If you clicked it and the page said copying is turned off for this link, ask the owner to turn it on. ## What comes with the copy? The ad, its images and logo. Comments come along only when the owner left Include comments ticked, and they arrive still open. Copied comments do not send notification emails. ## What if my workspace is full? A Free workspace holds 3 previews. When it is full, the page says your workspace is at its Free limit and offers two choices. Upgrade to Studio, or Replace a preview, which swaps one of your existing previews for this copy. If the shared ad uses a format that is part of Studio, the page says This format is part of Studio and offers an upgrade. ## What if the copy does not work? - Too many copies in a short time means you reached 10 copies in an hour. Try again in a few minutes. - If it says nothing was added to your workspace, the link still works. Try again. - If you open your own link and click Make it yours, it opens your preview instead of copying it. ## How do I let my own client copy a preview? In Share preview, tick Allow copying. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). --- # Connect the PPC Ad Editor MCP server Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/mcp-server/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 PPC Ad Editor has an MCP (Model Context Protocol) server that lets an AI assistant such as Claude, Cursor or Windsurf build ad previews for you. The assistant writes the ad copy, and PPC Ad Editor checks it against the format's character limits and lays it out like the real ad. You need no PPC Ad Editor account to see a mockup. With an API key, the assistant can also save the preview to your workspace and hand you a share link. ## What is the server URL? There are two, and they do different jobs. - https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp/preview is the one to paste in the Claude chat apps. It shows an ad mockup and looks up ad format specs, and it treats everyone as a guest, even if you add an API key. - https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp is the full server. Without an API key it does the same two things. With an API key it adds a third tool that creates and shares previews in your workspace. The pcade-mcp connector, which you run with npx in tools such as Cursor, connects to https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp for you. ## How do I connect it? In Claude on the web or the desktop app: 1. Go to ppcadeditor.com/mcp/claude/ and click Connect to Claude. It opens the PPC Ad Editor listing in Claude's connector directory. 2. Add the connector from the listing. There is no PPC Ad Editor sign-in step. 3. In a chat, check that PPC Ad Editor is switched on in the tools menu, then ask for an ad, for example a Google Search ad for your bakery's website. To add it by URL instead, open Settings, then Connectors in Claude, choose Add custom connector, name it PPC Ad Editor and paste https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp/preview. In Cursor, Windsurf, Claude Code or Claude Desktop, add pcade-mcp to the assistant's MCP settings. The setup for each one is on ppcadeditor.com/mcp/. For most of them the command is npx -y pcade-mcp. Fully quit and reopen the assistant afterwards, because connectors only load when it starts. You need Node.js 18.13 or later for npx to work. ## Which AI assistants does it work with? Setup steps on ppcadeditor.com/mcp/ cover Claude (web and desktop), Claude Code, Cursor and Windsurf. Other assistants that support MCP can use the same pcade-mcp connector. In Claude, and in ChatGPT, the mockup shows inside the chat itself. In other assistants, the assistant gets a short description of the mockup and the save link to pass on to you. ## What tools does the MCP server have? - **preview_ad** shows a realistic mockup of one ad in one format, with a save link. No account needed. - **get_ad_formats** returns the specs for each ad format: how many headlines and descriptions it takes, the character limits, and the media it supports. No account needed. - **create_and_share** creates previews in your PPC Ad Editor workspace and returns a share link and a link to open them in your dashboard. It needs an API key, and it is only on https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp. The assistant can build Google Search, Google Display, Performance Max and Demand Gen, YouTube, Meta (Facebook and Instagram) single image, carousel and story ads, and LinkedIn single image and carousel ads. It cannot build ChatGPT, X, Reddit, Microsoft Ads search or Programmatic ads. Build those in the editor. See [Ad formats in the editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ad-formats/). ## What works without an account, and what needs one? Without an account or API key, the assistant can show a mockup and look up format specs. Each mockup comes with a save link. Open it within 7 days and save the ad to a free PPC Ad Editor account to edit it, share it with a client, or collect comments. After 7 days an unsaved mockup is deleted. If the assistant tries to create a share link without a key, it is told that this needs a PPC Ad Editor API key and to show the ad as a mockup instead. With an API key, the assistant can also create the preview in your workspace and give you its share link straight away. ## Which plan do I need, and are there limits? Mockups and format specs are free and need no account. Saving a mockup works on a free account, and your plan's usual limits apply when you save. API keys are Enterprise only. On other plans, the API Keys pane in Settings says API access requires Enterprise. See [Do you have an Enterprise plan?](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/enterprise-plan/) Chat mockups have a daily limit. When you reach it, the assistant says Daily preview limit reached. With an API key, creating previews is limited to 10 a minute and 500 a day for each workspace. ## Does the MCP server change my ad accounts? No. It builds previews only. It does not publish ads to Google Ads, Meta or LinkedIn, and it does not change anything in your ad accounts. It only gets what the assistant sends for the ad, such as the copy, the web address and image links. See [Your ad content](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/your-ad-content/). --- # Microsoft Ads (Bing) search previews Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/microsoft-ads/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Bing ads? Yes. You can preview a Microsoft Ads (Bing) responsive search ad in the editor. The preview shows your ad the way it looks in Bing search results, on desktop and on mobile. It is a preview for review and sharing. Nothing is sent to Microsoft Advertising. ## How do I start a Microsoft Ads preview? 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview. 2. Under Search & AI Answers, pick Microsoft Ads. Its card says Reach high-intent search audiences across Microsoft's search network. 3. Click Continue with Microsoft Ads. The format is always Responsive Search Ad, so there is no format step. 4. Pick Start from scratch or Draft with AI, then create the preview. Importing from Google Ads or from a file is not offered for Microsoft Ads. To reuse copy from a Google search ad, paste it into the headlines and descriptions. ## Is Microsoft Ads on the Free plan? Yes. The current Free plan includes every format, Microsoft Ads among them. Studio has it too. On an older Free plan, the card opens a window that says Microsoft Ads is available with Studio. Free includes RSA, RDA, Meta Single, and YouTube. ## What can I edit in a Microsoft search ad? - Headlines. Add 3 to 15, each up to 30 characters. The editor says Add 3–15 headlines. Microsoft will mix and match them. - Descriptions. Add 2 to 4, each up to 90 characters. - Final URL, Display Path 1, and Display Path 2. The Final URL starts empty, so type your landing page. - A business name and a logo. - Keywords. - Extensions from your asset library: sitelinks, callouts, structured snippets, a call extension, and an image. When you reach the limit, the field says Microsoft Advertising allows 30 characters for a headline. Microsoft counts some characters, such as Chinese, Japanese, and emoji, as two. The editor counts them the same way, so a headline in one of those scripts fits fewer characters. Microsoft allows up to 15 characters for each display path. The editor does not count display path characters, so check the length yourself. ## How do I pin a headline in a Microsoft ad? Click the pin beside a headline or description, titled Pin position. Choose Only in Position 1, 2, or 3 for a headline, or Only in Position 1 or 2 for a description. Any Unpinned Position removes the pin. The editor reminds you that pinning limits which headlines and descriptions Microsoft can assemble. A pinned asset is not guaranteed to show, and every headline position still needs an eligible asset. ## Why does the preview show different headlines each time? A responsive search ad mixes your headlines and descriptions, so each ad card shows a different combination. - Click Shuffle above the preview to see new combinations. - Switch between One Ad and Five Ads to see one card or five. - Use Desktop view and Mobile view to see both layouts. Each card shows up to 8 sitelinks, 4 callouts, 1 structured snippet, 1 call extension, and 1 image, and the set rotates between cards. Under the preview it says Microsoft may combine responsive assets differently depending on the search and placement, so the real ad can differ. Your client does not see that note on the share link. ## Can I export a Microsoft Ads (Bing) preview to a CSV? No file export. A Microsoft search preview has no Export button and no bulk upload file, and nothing is sent to Microsoft Advertising. To show it to a client, use the share link. To paste it into a deck or an email, click Copy as image above the preview. Download variations as ZIP makes images in the Google search layout, so use Copy as image when you need a Bing-style picture. --- # Preview on mobile and desktop Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/mobile-preview/ Last verified: 2026-10-16 The live preview has a desktop view and a mobile view for almost every format. Two icons above the preview switch between them. On a desktop browser your client can switch them on the share link too. ## Find the mobile preview toggle In the PPC Ad Editor editor, look at the bar above the live preview. The monitor icon is Desktop view. The phone icon is Mobile view. Hover over an icon to see its name. Click the phone icon to see the ad on a phone, and the monitor icon to go back to desktop. The dark icon is the view on screen. The bar stays at the top of the live preview while you scroll. On a responsive search ad, the two icons sit next to Shuffle, on the same bar as One Ad, Three Ads, and Five Ads. ## What each format shows - Responsive search ads open in Desktop view. Mobile view shows the ad in a phone frame under a Google search bar. When the preview has keywords, the search bar shows one of them, and Shuffle moves to the next one. - Responsive display, Performance Max, and Demand Gen open in Desktop view. Pick a channel tab, such as Display or Gmail, then the desktop or mobile icon. Some channels show on one device only. On the Discover tab, Desktop view says Discover ads are not available on desktop devices, so switch to Mobile view. - Meta single image or video and Meta carousel open on Facebook in Mobile view. Pick Facebook or Instagram, then the device. - Meta story or reel is mobile only, on a 9:16 frame. Pick FB Story or IG Reel. It has no desktop view. - LinkedIn single image or video and LinkedIn carousel open in Mobile view. - YouTube opens in Desktop view. The device icons hide on the All and Shorts tabs. In-stream, in-feed, bumper and Shorts previews fill the width of the Ad Preview panel. In-feed has Search results and Home feed buttons to switch between the two placements. - Programmatic ads preview in publisher placements instead, such as Mobile feed. The view you pick only changes your screen. It is not saved on the preview, and it goes back to the format's starting view when you reload. ## Can my client check the mobile version from the share link? Yes. On a desktop browser, your client clicks the phone icon, Mobile view, above the ad on the share link. On a phone or tablet the share link opens in the mobile layout on its own. ## What your client sees on a phone Your client opens the share link in the phone's browser, with no account. On a phone or a tablet the page shows the ad first, with one set of actions pinned at the bottom. This works for every format and channel, so a Meta, LinkedIn, YouTube, search or display ad each stays readable. The campaign list on the left is hidden. - When the preview has several ads or ad groups, your client swipes left or right to move between ads, and picks an ad group from the chips near the top. Ad text opens in a sheet they can drag closed. - If they refresh the page, it opens on the same ad they were on. - The phone's Back button closes an open sheet or Comments first, instead of leaving the page. - A YouTube ad opens on the placement you saved it on, so a Shorts ad opens on Shorts and fits the phone screen. - While comments load, a sheet shows a loading placeholder. When a guest clicks Send, it shows Sending… until the comment is posted, so a double tap does not post it twice. - On a link set to Commentor or Editor, the bottom bar has Comment with the number of comments. On a Viewer link with copying off, there is no bottom bar. - On a link set to Approval, Request changes and Approve stay pinned to the bottom. Approve opens Approve this ad, and Request changes asks what needs to change. Once answered, the bar shows Approved or Changes requested, with Comments. Approval links are a Studio feature. - More opens Share…, Copy link and Export. Export reads Off for this link when you left Allow export off. - When you turned on Allow copying, the bottom bar also has Make it yours. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). A desktop browser keeps the wider layout, with the live preview and the ad's fields side by side. ## Check the phone view yourself Open the client link on your own phone, or click Mobile view in the editor. When you open the editor itself on a phone and the preview has more than one ad group, an Ad group menu at the top switches between them. To see the page the way your client does, click the See what they see icon on the live preview. It opens the client page in a new tab. --- # Multi-channel previews: write the copy once for Google, Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/multi-channel-previews/ Last verified: 2026-10-13 Multi-Channel builds several previews at once from one set of copy. You pick the formats, type the headlines and descriptions once, and change the copy for one channel when that channel needs different words. Each format becomes its own preview in the same client dashboard, and you can group them behind one link. Multi-Channel is part of the Studio plan. ## How do I start a multi-channel preview? 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview. 2. Under Where do you want to advertise?, pick the wide Multi-Channel card, One preview, every platform at once. Click Continue with Multi-Channel. 3. Name your preview. This name becomes the base name for every preview in the set. Click Create preview. 4. Select Ad Formats opens. The setup has three steps, and the footer shows Step 1 of 3. On the first two steps, the footer has Back and Next. In Quick build, pick Multi-Channel, then Start from scratch, to open the same setup. Draft with AI and the two imports are greyed out for Multi-Channel, because it starts from scratch. Once the previews exist, open each one and use Suggest copy. ## Which formats can I pick? Select Ad Formats lists eight formats by channel: - Google Ads: Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, Performance Max, and Demand Gen. - YouTube: YouTube Ad. - Facebook / Instagram: Single Image/Video Ad and Story / Reel Ad. - LinkedIn: Single Image/Video Ad. Tick formats one at a time, click Select all on a channel, or click Select All Formats at the top. The count shows your picks, such as 3 of 8 selected, and a line under the list names the previews that will be created. Next stays greyed out until you pick at least one format. Carousels, Programmatic, ChatGPT, X, Reddit, and Microsoft Ads are not in Multi-Channel. Start those from New Preview on their own channel. ## What do I fill in on Enter Ad Content? Enter Ad Content says Fill in content grouped by channel, or skip to fill in the editor later. Every field is optional, so you can click Next and write the copy in the editor afterwards. - Shared Info: Business Name and Final URL. Business Name reads Profile Name when you picked only Meta and LinkedIn formats. Pick a name from your asset library, or type one under Or type a custom business name, up to 25 characters. - Media, when you picked anything besides a Responsive Search Ad: Logo / Profile Image and Images, each with Select from Asset Library, and Videos, with Add YouTube Video. - Ad Content: Headlines, Long Headlines, Descriptions, and Primary Texts, depending on your formats. Small tags beside each field name show which formats use it, such as RSA, PMAX, Meta, or LI. A count such as 3/15 shows the lines you have and the most any of your formats takes. Click Add headline, or the matching button, for another line. - Display Paths, marked Google only. Two paths, up to 15 characters each. - Call to Action, marked Meta / LinkedIn. Pick No CTA, Shop Now, Learn More, Sign Up, Contact Us, Download, Get Offer, Book Now, Apply Now, Subscribe, or Get Quote. ## Does a line fit every channel? Each line counts its characters against the longest limit among your formats, and the count turns red when the line is over it. Under the line, a dot for each format shows whether the line fits there. The dot is green when it fits and red when it is too long, labelled with the channel and its limit, such as Google 30ch or Meta 40ch. A headline of 35 characters fits a Meta ad but not a Google search ad, so you see one green dot and one red dot. ## How do I change the copy for one channel without touching the rest? Use Per-Channel Overrides. It appears under Ad Content when your formats span two or more channels, with a row for each of Google Ads, Facebook / Instagram, and LinkedIn that you picked. 1. Click a row, such as Customize Google Ads content. It opens with your shared copy already in it, and says Overrides unified content for this channel. 2. Edit, add, or remove lines. Only that channel's previews get these lines. Every other channel keeps the shared copy. 3. A field you leave alone in the override keeps following the shared copy. 4. Click the row again to close it. Closing it drops that channel's changes, and the channel goes back to the shared copy. The counters inside an override only show the formats on that channel. YouTube always uses the shared copy. After the previews are made, each one is its own preview. Editing one in the editor does not change the others. ## How do I name the previews and group them? On Name Your Previews: - Base Name is required, up to 100 characters. Each preview will be named: Base Name - Format Name, for example Summer Campaign - Responsive Search Ad. The list under The following previews will be created: shows every name. - With two or more formats, Group these previews is ticked for you, with the line Share all formats with a single link. Group Name starts as the base name. Untick it if you only want separate previews. - Click the create button, such as Create 3 Previews. The step shows Creating 3 previews... while they are made. ## What happens after I click Create? All Done! says how many previews were created successfully. Each one has Open in Editor. If you grouped them, Group Share Link shows the link with Copy, and a line that says reviewers can toggle between every format in the group from that single link. Open Group Editor opens the group, with a tab for each format. Approval works on one preview's link, not on a group link. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). Create Another Set starts the setup again for the same dashboard. Close ends it. ## Which plan includes Multi-Channel? Multi-Channel is part of the Studio plan. If your plan does not include it, the Multi-Channel card shows a lock, and clicking it says Multi-Channel is available with Studio. To turn one existing preview into other formats instead, use Create for other channels on its row. See Your client and preview lists. Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube previews stay previews. They do not download as files those platforms import. --- # You don't have a workspace yet: signed in but no workspace Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/no-workspace/ Last verified: 2026-10-17 You see You don't have a workspace yet when you signed in, but your login does not own or belong to any workspace. It often happens after your workspace was deleted, or after you were removed from a team you were in. Your sign-in worked. You just need a workspace to work in. The screen shows the address you are signed in as. You have two choices. ## Create a new workspace 1. Check the Workspace name. It is filled in from your email, such as yourname's Workspace. Change it if you like. It needs at least 2 characters. 2. Click Create workspace. The button reads Creating… while it works. 3. You see Workspace created, and the dashboard opens. The new workspace starts on the Free tier. It is empty, so earlier dashboards and previews from a deleted workspace do not come back. ## Sign in with another address Click Sign out, then sign in with the email that already owns a workspace, or the one your team invited. If someone invited you, open the invitation email and accept it instead. See Accept an invitation. ## Why does Continue with Google keep sending me back to login? It should not any more. Signing in with Continue with Google on a login that has no workspace now stays on You don't have a workspace yet, so you can create one. If you still land on the login screen, sign out, sign in again, and choose Create workspace. ## Error messages - Enter a workspace name of at least 2 characters: the name is too short. - You already have a workspace: your login already owns one. Reload the page and you go to your dashboard. - Sign-in expired. Please sign in again.: click Sign out and sign in again. - Could not create the workspace: try again in a moment. If it keeps happening, contact support. --- # What the ad editor does not support Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/not-supported/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 The channels and formats you can preview are the ones listed in New Preview. These are the things people ask for that the editor does not do. ## Organic posts The editor previews ads only. Organic social posts are not a format, on any channel. Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube previews show your copy as a sponsored ad. ## Video files The editor does not make, edit, or export a video file. - A YouTube ad shows a video you add by its YouTube URL. Use a Public or Unlisted video so clients can view it on the share link. - As of 21 October 2026, Meta single image or video, Meta story or reel, and LinkedIn single image or video play a video you upload, an MP4, MOV, or WebM up to 100 MB, or a YouTube, public Google Drive, or public Dropbox link. A Meta carousel card takes a YouTube link only, and a LinkedIn carousel has no video. See [Upload a video to a Meta or LinkedIn ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-a-video/). - X and Reddit ads take the same video uploads. - Programmatic video ads take MP4 or WebM uploads, up to 100 MB each. ### Links from other video sites Only YouTube, Google Drive, and Dropbox links work. A link from another site, such as Vimeo, says Paste a YouTube link, a public Google Drive link, or a public Dropbox link. Download the file and upload it instead. A Dropbox folder link does not work, only a link to one file. Downloads from the live preview are pictures. Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube previews have Copy as image and Download PNG. A responsive search ad has Download variations as ZIP, a ZIP of PNG pictures. Export to Google Ads Editor covers responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max ads. ## Is the app available in another language, such as Chinese or Spanish? Can I use the editor in another language? The editor's screens are in English. There is no setting to switch the interface to another language. Ad copy you type can be in another language. When AI writes copy, its language menu offers Auto-detect, English, or Danish. Auto-detect writes in the language of the landing page, then of your existing ad copy, and in English when it cannot tell. ## Ad networks the editor does not preview TikTok, Pinterest, Snapchat, Quora, Amazon, CTV, and AI Overview ads are not in the app. Every channel you can preview is listed in New Preview. ## Ask for something we do not do Tell Albert what you need, and he offers to send your request to the product team in your own words. The Lab, under Manage workspace, lists channels that are not in the app, such as TikTok. You can add yourself to a list there. --- # Notifications: the bell in the top bar Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/notifications/ Last verified: 2026-10-27 The bell at the top right of PPC Ad Editor opens Notifications. It shows what is new in the product and your recent alerts, such as a new comment on the preview you have open or an export that is ready to download. ## What does the Notifications button do? Click the bell. In the editor its tooltip reads Notifications and what's new. A dot or a number on the bell means there is something you have not seen. The panel shows: - Your notifications, newest first, each with a time such as 5m ago. - What's new, the latest product updates, in the editor's version of the panel. When there is nothing to show, it says No notifications and You're all caught up! ## What kinds of notifications show up? - New Comment: someone else commented on the preview you have open. Click View to open it. - Preview Ready: a preview finished generating. Generation Failed means it did not. - Export Ready: a download is ready. Click Download. The line shows Expires in, with the hours left, and then Link expired. - Import Complete: an import from an ad platform finished. Click View Preview. - Import Failed: an import from an ad platform did not finish. The line says what went wrong. - Google Ads disconnected: a linked Google Ads account lost its connection. The line names the account and its Google login and says it is disconnected from Google Ads. Click Reconnect to sign in to Google again. ## Google Ads disconnected: where did the reconnect bar go? As of 27 October 2026, a Google Ads account that needs to be reconnected shows up in the bell, not as a bar across the top of the dashboard. Open the bell and find Google Ads disconnected. Click Reconnect on it. You land on your dashboard and Google's sign-in opens. Sign in with the same Google login as before, and the notice goes away once the account is connected again. ## Google Ads keeps saying disconnected The Google login behind a linked Google Ads account stopped working, so Studio can no longer read that account. The bell keeps the Google Ads disconnected notice until you reconnect. Click Reconnect on it and sign in with the same Google login. If you sign in with a different Google account, the window says which one you used and which one to use. In Ad Recap or Budget Pacer, reconnect from that product's own Accounts screen. If Google Ads is connected but you have not imported any campaigns yet, a thin line at the top of the dashboard still says Google Ads is connected. Pick campaigns to import before metrics can sync. See [Download a Google Ads account into a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/). ## Why didn't I get a comment notification? The bell only catches a comment posted while you have that preview open in this browser. A comment posted while you were away reaches you by email, when you are the preview's creator or someone mentions you. The bell does not show your own comment. ## How do I mark notifications read or dismiss them? - Mark all read marks every notification as read. - Hover over one and click Dismiss to remove it. - Clear all notifications, at the bottom, empties the list. The list is kept for this browser tab, up to the last 50. A new browser tab starts with an empty list. ## Does the bell send me emails? No. The bell only shows in the app. Emails come separately: comment emails, Notify when viewed on a share link, and replies to your clients. See Comment on a preview. ## Can I get comment alerts in Slack? Yes, on plans that include Slack notifications. Open Settings in the left menu, then Integrations. The Slack notifications card says Included in your plan when you can use it. 1. In Slack, create an incoming webhook in your Slack workspace settings and copy its address. 2. Paste it into Webhook URL. Channel name is optional and only for display. 3. Click Connect Slack. A test message goes to your channel, and you see "Slack connected! A test message was sent to your channel." Each comment, reply or mention that sends a comment email then posts to that channel too. Click Disconnect to stop. If the card says Connection lost, the webhook stopped responding. Disconnect and add the webhook again. Slack notifications are not part of the Free tier or of Studio. On those plans the card shows a Premium lock, and Connect Slack is greyed out. --- # Studio, the ad editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/overview/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Studio is the PPC Ad Editor. You use it to build a realistic preview of an ad before it runs, check the copy against each format's character limits, and send a link your client can open and comment on without an account. It does not run or publish ads. It never sends changes to your ad accounts. ## What does this app do? What can I use the ad editor for? - Mock up new ads for a client pitch or a campaign launch, so the client sees how the ad looks in the real placement. - Write and check headlines, descriptions and other text against each format's character limits as you type. - Send a client link and collect comments on the ad. On Studio, the client can also approve it on that link. - Pull live campaigns from a linked Google Ads account into a preview, so you can review or rework what already runs. This only reads from Google Ads. - Draft ad copy with AI from a website. - Export responsive search, responsive display and Performance Max ads as a Google Ads Editor file, a PDF, or a PPC Ad Editor Template spreadsheet. A ChatGPT ad exports an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook. ## Which ad types can I preview? The editor has 15 formats. - Google Ads: responsive search, responsive display, Performance Max, and Demand Gen. - Microsoft Ads search, previewed in Bing's layout. - Meta: single image or video, carousel, and story or reel. - LinkedIn: single image or video, and carousel. - YouTube. - Programmatic. One Programmatic preview holds display banners, native ads, video ads and HTML5 banners. - ChatGPT, X, and Reddit. Every format is on the Free plan. New channels show up in New Preview when they ship. ## Free plan and Studio compared, previews, seats and limits | | Free | Studio | | --- | --- | --- | | Price | Free | Studio plan, $149 a month | | Seats | 2 (you and one teammate) | 2, with extra seats to buy | | Client dashboards | 1 | 3, with extra dashboards to buy | | Previews | 3 | Unlimited | | Inside a preview | 2 campaigns, 2 ad groups per campaign, 2 ads per ad group | Unlimited campaigns and ads | | Client links | 1 preview at a time | Every preview | | Comments from guests on a link | 3 per preview | Unlimited, plus @mentions | | Approval on a client link | No | Yes | | Export | Yes | Yes | | Google Ads accounts to import from | 1 | As many as you need | | Every ad format | Yes | Yes | When you reach a Free limit, the editor says so and offers Upgrade. Upgrading opens checkout for Studio. See [Studio price and billing](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/billing/). ## How do I start? Open Dashboards in the left menu, open a dashboard, and click New Preview. Pick a channel and a format, then name the preview. Changes in the editor save as you work. If you just signed up, see [Get started and build your first ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/getting-started/). --- # Placements: every size and channel in the live preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/placements/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 The live preview shows a Google display, Performance Max, Demand Gen, or YouTube ad in each place it can run. Tabs above the preview pick the channel, the Desktop view and Mobile view icons pick the device, and each placement card shows its name and size, such as Leaderboard 728×90. All four are on today's Free plan, as well as on Studio. On an earlier Free plan or during a trial, responsive display and YouTube are included, and Performance Max and Demand Gen need Studio. ## How many placements a responsive display ad shows 25 placements. Tabs are All, Display, Gmail, and YouTube. Desktop view has 12: ten display sizes, Gmail Desktop, and YouTube Display Ad. Mobile view has 17: fourteen display sizes, Gmail Mobile, YouTube Display Ad, and YouTube Discovery Ad. A few sizes, such as Medium Rectangle 300×250, show in both views. ## What channels does the Performance Max preview cover Search, Display, YouTube, Discover, and Gmail, with 33 placements plus the search result on the Search tab. Tabs are All, Search, Display, YouTube, Discover, and Gmail. There is no Maps tab. Desktop view has 8 display sizes, 3 YouTube placements, and Gmail Desktop. Mobile view has 10 display sizes, 8 YouTube placements, 3 Discover placements, and Gmail Mobile. The All tab shows everything except Search. ## Demand Gen and YouTube placements Demand Gen has the tabs All, YouTube, Discover, and Gmail. The placements follow the ad type you picked: Single image ad, Video ad, or Carousel image ad. YouTube shows 4 placements: In-Stream, In-Feed, Shorts, and Bumper, plus All. It opens on the ad's own type, or In-Stream. Bumper uses the first 6 seconds of your video. A placement is never dropped for a missing image or logo. It shows a placeholder until you add one. ## Desktop and mobile Click the monitor icon for Desktop view or the phone icon for Mobile view. Display, Performance Max, Demand Gen, and YouTube open in Desktop view. Discover is mobile only, so on desktop it says Discover ads are not available on desktop devices. On YouTube, the device icons hide on the All and Shorts tabs. The view you pick is not saved. See [Preview on mobile and desktop](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/mobile-preview/). ## Hide a placement your client will not run On responsive display, Performance Max, and Demand Gen, you can hide a placement so your client does not review it. 1. Make sure the toggle at the top says Editor, not Preview. 2. Hover over the placement and click the eye icon in its top-right corner. Its tooltip is Hide this variation. 3. The card dims and shows Hidden from preview. Hidden placements disappear in the Preview view and on client links that open in Preview. When every placement on a tab is hidden, that tab greys out and says, for example, All Display variations are hidden. To bring one back, switch to Editor and click the eye on the dimmed card, Show this variation. The choice is saved on the preview, for every ad in it and for your teammates. A duplicate of the preview keeps it. Search ads and YouTube ads do not have this. ## Check your images and text The Asset Status panel beside a responsive display, Performance Max, or Demand Gen preview counts what the ad has, such as Headlines, Descriptions, Business Name, Landscape (1.91:1), Square (1:1), and Logos. Click Asset Status to open or close it. A count in amber or red is missing. To make a landscape, square, or portrait version of one image, crop it in the asset library. See [Asset library](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/asset-library/). ## Safe zones on Shorts The Shorts preview shows the video full height with Like, Dislike, and Share over it, the way YouTube does. It does not draw separate safe-zone guides. --- # Preview an ad inside ChatGPT or Claude Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-ads-in-chatgpt-or-claude/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 You can ask ChatGPT or Claude for an ad and see a mockup of it right in the chat, with no PPC Ad Editor account. The assistant writes the copy, the PPC Ad Editor connector fits it to the format's character limits and lays it out like the real ad. Click Save & share on the mockup to keep it in a free PPC Ad Editor account and get a link for your client. ## How do I add the connector to Claude? The quickest way is Claude's connector directory, where PPC Ad Editor has a Community listing. You need a Claude account. No PPC Ad Editor account is needed. 1. Go to ppcadeditor.com/mcp/claude/ and click Connect to Claude. It opens the PPC Ad Editor listing in Claude's connector directory. Sign in to Claude if it asks. 2. Add the connector from the listing. There is no PPC Ad Editor sign-in step. 3. In a chat, check that PPC Ad Editor is switched on in the tools menu, then ask for an ad, for example a Google Search ad for your bakery's website with sitelinks. ### Add it by URL instead On ppcadeditor.com/mcp/claude/, Add by URL shows the manual steps. Use Claude on the web or the desktop app. 1. In Claude, open Settings, then Connectors. 2. Choose Add custom connector. 3. Name it PPC Ad Editor and paste https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp/preview as the URL. 4. Choose Add. There is no sign-in step. On Claude Team and Enterprise plans, an owner may need to add the connector for the organization first. ## Which connector URL do I use? In the Claude chat apps, use https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp/preview. That connector has two tools: it shows an ad mockup and looks up ad format specs. Neither one writes to an account, and it treats everyone as a guest, even if you add an API key. If you added the connector earlier with https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp, it still shows mockups. In developer tools such as Claude Code or Cursor, PPC Ad Editor customers with an API key connect to https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp instead, which adds a tool that saves previews straight into the workspace and returns a share link. See [Create ad previews from an AI assistant](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/create-previews-from-an-ai-assistant/). ## What does the mockup show? One ad in one format, laid out the way our share page shows it. In a wide window you see the campaign and ad group names, the ad's fields with character counters, and Ad Preview with One Ad, Three Ads or Five Ads, Shuffle, and desktop or mobile. In a narrow chat you see the phone layout, and Ad text shows the fields. If you do not name a platform, the assistant usually makes a Google Search ad. For another format, ask again and name it, for example now show it as an Instagram story. The connector does not create images. The assistant can pass a link to a picture on your own website, and the mockup shows it in the chat, including Claude on the web. The link must be a public https address to a PNG, JPEG, GIF or WebP file of up to 4 MB that answers within about 5 seconds. Otherwise the mockup shows a grey box that says Image couldn't load. Images stored in PPC Ad Editor and YouTube thumbnails always show. For a picture on any other website, PPC Ad Editor's servers fetch the image so the chat can show it, so that website sees a request from our servers, not from your device. The image is not saved to your workspace. When you save, the preview keeps the original image address. ## Why are the callouts on my Google ad in the chat mockup? In a Google Search mockup, callouts show after the description on the same line, separated by dots, up to four of them. They are not part of the description text, and the description keeps its own 90 character limit. ## Does a Facebook or Instagram mockup need a description? No. On a Facebook or Instagram single image or carousel ad, the description is the optional short link line under the headline, and the mockup leaves it out when there is none. The body of the post is the primary text. ## How do I keep the ad or send it to a client? 1. Click Save & share on the mockup. The chat may ask you to confirm before the link opens in your browser. 2. The Save your ad page opens. Click Create free account, or Sign in if you already have one. 3. The page says Saving your ad…, then Your ad is saved with a Share link. Click Copy and send the link to your client to review and comment. 4. Click Open in editor to keep working on it in PPC Ad Editor. Your plan's usual limits apply when you save. If a limit stops the save, the page says We couldn't save this ad, with See plans and Try again. ## How long does the mockup last? An unsaved mockup can be saved for 7 days, then it is deleted. After that the save page says This preview has expired. Ask the assistant to make the mockup again for a new link. ## Is there a limit on chat previews? Yes, chat previews have a daily limit. When you reach it, the assistant says Daily preview limit reached. Save a preview to a free PPC Ad Editor account to keep working there. On a very busy day a mockup can show without a save link. If the assistant says PPC Ad Editor previews are paused for now. Try again later., previews are paused for a short time. ## Does the connector post my ads or see my chat? No. It builds mockups only. It does not publish ads or change anything in your ad accounts. It only gets what the assistant sends for the ad, such as the copy, the web address and image links, and nothing is saved to a workspace until you sign in and save. See [Your ad content](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/your-ad-content/). ## The assistant does not use PPC Ad Editor Check that PPC Ad Editor is switched on in the chat's tools menu, then ask again and name it, for example Use PPC Ad Editor to preview this ad. To remove it, open Settings, then Connectors in Claude, choose PPC Ad Editor and remove it. --- # Show or hide extensions in the preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-settings/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Preview settings controls what a search ad's live preview shows: which extensions appear, your own assets or sample ones, how many snippet values show, and two or three headlines. It is the sliders icon in the bar above the live preview. ## Open Preview settings On a responsive search ad, the sliders icon sits in the bar above the live preview, after the Desktop view and Mobile view icons. Hover over it to see Preview settings. Click it, make your changes, then click Apply. Cancel closes it with no change. On Performance Max, the same icon has switches for Sitelinks, Callouts, and Structured snippets, Values shown per snippet, and on the Search tab the headline choice too. Performance Max has no Asset source choice. Demand Gen and the other formats do not have Preview settings. To hide a whole placement instead, such as a Gmail or Discover view, see Placements. ## How do I turn off callouts or sitelinks in the preview? Turn off callouts, sitelinks or any other extension in Preview settings. Click the sliders icon above the live preview, switch off Callouts or the row you want hidden, then click Apply. Under Ad extensions there is a row each for Sitelinks, Callouts, Structured snippets, Call extension, Image assets, and App extension. Turn a switch off to hide that extension in the preview, then click Apply. Turn it back on to show it again. Each row counts the ones that show for the campaign or ad group on screen, such as 3 added. When there are none, the row says Not set up and has Set up instead of a switch. Click Set up to add one. App extension always has a switch. With Asset source set to Placeholder, the counts are for the sample extensions. When you have turned a row off, the sliders icon is amber with a dot. New previews start that way, because App extension starts off. Hiding an extension only changes the preview. It does not delete anything. A hidden extension is also left out of Copy as image and Download variations as ZIP. If a row said Not set up and you then add or check one of that extension for the ad group, the row turns itself back on. A row you turned off while it still had extensions stays off until you turn it on. ## Who sees my Preview settings? Everyone who opens the preview. The extension switches, Asset source, and Values shown per snippet are saved on the preview, so your teammates and your client see the same thing. The headline choice is the exception, see below. Your client cannot change Preview settings from a client link. They see the sliders icon only when something is hidden, and it is greyed out. If saving fails, the preview shows Couldn't save preview settings. Please try again. If your workspace is view-only, Preview settings cannot be changed. ## Choose which extensions show on an ad group Click a sitelink, callout, or snippet on the live preview, or click Set up in Preview settings. On a search ad, hovering over one shows Click to edit. A list opens, such as Sitelinks on this ad group, with the subtitle Check the ones that should show on this ad group. Check the ones that should show, then click Apply to ad group. The footer counts how many will be associated and how many will be de-associated. One you leave unchecked stays off that ad group, even when it is shared with the whole account. To add another, click + New sitelink, or the matching button for that extension. The pencil on a row edits it. The list holds the extensions that belong to this dashboard: the ones created in it, and the ones already used by its campaigns or ad groups. ## Why an extension edit does not show - Its switch is off. Open Preview settings and check its row. - Asset source is set to Placeholder. Placeholder shows sample extensions instead of yours. Pick Actual assets and click Apply. - It is not checked for the ad group on screen. The preview only shows the extensions set for the campaign or ad group you are looking at. Click one on the preview to open its list, check it, and click Apply to ad group. You can also check its association in Assets. - It belongs to another dashboard. The live preview only loads extensions and business names that belong to this preview's dashboard, meaning the ones created in it plus the ones used by its campaigns or ad groups. One you made in another client's dashboard does not show here, even when it is shared with the whole account, until you use it on a campaign or ad group in this dashboard. - It is in rotation. Each ad in the preview shows one structured snippet, one image, and a share of your sitelinks and callouts. The rest rotate between ads. Click Shuffle, or show Three Ads or Five Ads, to see the others. To keep one in place, pin it from its card in the asset library with Pin position. ## Remove Install app from a search ad The Install app line on a search ad preview is the App extension. It is a sample app-download button, not one of your assets, and its text cannot be edited. To remove it, open Preview settings, turn off App extension, and click Apply. New previews start with it off. ## How many snippet values show When structured snippets are on, Values shown per snippet sets how many values each snippet shows. Default is each placement's standard, all values on desktop and up to 4 on mobile. Use the minus and plus buttons to step from Default to 3, then up to 10, then All. A number shows the first that many values everywhere. All shows every value in the snippet. The control only appears while Structured snippets is switched on and has at least one snippet. ## Show two or three headlines Under Headlines shown in preview, pick Standard (2H) for two headlines or Expanded (3H) for three, then click Apply. Standard is how most Google ads appear. Expanded is shown when Google finds the ad eligible. A headline pinned to position 3 does not show in the two-headline layout, and the card says Pinned position 3 won't show in 2-headline layout. Unlike the extension switches, this choice is saved in your browser, not on the preview, so a teammate keeps their own choice. A client link you copy while Standard (2H) is on opens with two headlines. --- # Set a preview's status: Active, Paused, Pending, or your own stage Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-status/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 How do I change a preview's status, or add my own status like In review? Every preview has a status. It starts as one of Active, Paused, or Pending, and you can make up your own, such as In review or Sent to client. The status is a label for your team. It does not change the ad on Google, Meta, or anywhere else. ## Where do I change the status? - In the editor, the status pill sits at the top left of the bar above the ad, before the format name. It shows a coloured dot and the status, for example Active. - On a dashboard, the Stage column of the Previews list shows the same pill on every row. Click the pill to open the list, then click the status you want. The pill changes straight away, in the editor and in the list. ## How do I add my own status? 1. Click the status pill. 2. At the bottom of the list, type a name in Add new status... It can be up to 50 characters. 3. Press Enter, or click the add button beside the box. The new status is set on that preview, and it is added under Custom Statuses in the list, so you can pick it on other previews too. If a status with that name already exists, the preview simply takes that status. ## Why can't I click the status? When you cannot edit the preview, for example as a viewer, the pill only shows the status, with no list. On a client the Free tier cannot edit right now, the Stage column shows the status greyed out. Ask someone who can edit the preview to change it. ## Does my client see the status? The status is for your team. Changing it does not send anything to your client and does not change the share link. Your client does see the status pill on the shared page. On a Viewer or Commentor link it only shows the status and opens no menu. On an Approval or Editor link, which are Studio features, your client can change it. To collect a client's yes or no, use approval on the share link, which is on the Studio plan. See Approve a preview. --- # Product tip emails: why you get them and how to stop them Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/product-tip-emails/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Why am I getting emails with tips about my preview? On the Free tier, PPC Ad Editor sometimes sends a short product tip email about the next step with an ad you started, for example sharing your preview with your client, letting your client leave a comment, or exporting your ad when it is ready. You can stop them at any time with the unsubscribe link at the bottom of the email. ## What are these emails about? Each tip is about something you have already started in the app. The tips sent today are: - Share your preview with your client, when your first ad is ready. - Your preview link is ready to share, when you made a share link and have not sent it. - Let your client leave a comment, when your link is set to Viewer. It asks you to choose Commentor under Permission level. - Your first ad is still waiting, when you created an account and have not built an ad yet. Its Build my first ad button opens the first-ad setup, and we draft the first ad with you. A tip can also end with a short card, such as Export your ad when it's ready. Every tip is under 90 words. Some end with up to two short cards under More you can do. ## Reminder email: Your first ad is still waiting. What does Build my first ad do? That reminder email means your account has no ad of its own yet. The Build my first ad button in the email opens the first-ad setup. Click it, or open the app and go to the first-ad setup. Pick a channel, add your business name and website, and the editor drafts the ad for you. See First-ad screen. If you already built an ad, it may have been before the tip went out, and you can ignore it. ## Too many emails from you? How do I stop product tip emails? Getting too many emails from PPC Ad Editor? Click the unsubscribe link at the bottom of any tip email. That stops product tips for your address, and they do not start again. The unsubscribe covers product tips only. Tip emails also carry a one-click unsubscribe, so many mail apps show their own Unsubscribe button beside the sender's name. Click it and the tips stop, with no sign-in. If that link opens a page in your browser, it asks Unsubscribe from product tips? Click Unsubscribe, and the page says You're unsubscribed. ## The unsubscribe page says This link doesn't work The link was cut short or changed on its way to you. Use the unsubscribe link in your most recent tip email. If the page says Something went wrong, open the link again in a minute. ## How often do they come? Rarely. After two tips that you did not act on, the tips pause until you do something in the app again. If tips ever start bouncing or someone reports one as spam, all tips stop until a person on our team has checked what went wrong. ## Do paying customers get them? No. Tips go to Free tier accounts. Anyone on a paid plan, and enterprise and contract accounts, do not get them. ## Why does a teammate get tips and I don't? Not every Free account gets tips. Some accounts are set aside and get none, so we can see whether the tips really help. Nothing is wrong with your account, and every part of the app works the same. ## Are these the same as the bell in the app? No. The bell shows activity on your previews inside the app and never sends email. Comment emails are separate too. See Notifications. --- # Preview programmatic ads Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/programmatic/ Last verified: 2026-10-16 Programmatic is its own channel in New Preview, for display banners, native ads, and video ads. You upload or build the ads, see them in publisher placements, and share them for review. ## Which plan includes programmatic On the current Free plan and on Studio, Programmatic is open to create. Some older Free accounts are on an earlier Free plan, where Programmatic shows a Studio tag and opens the upgrade window. Approval links for your client are a Studio feature. ## Start a programmatic preview In New Preview, under Where do you want to advertise?, pick Programmatic, then click Continue with Programmatic. The preview is named Programmatic followed by Draft until you rename it. Start from scratch is the only way in. AI drafting and imports are not available for programmatic, and programmatic is not part of a multi-channel preview. ## Add ads Click Create ad, then pick Display banner, Native, Video, or HTML5 banner. - Display banner. Upload JPG, PNG, or GIF files, up to 50 at a time and 10 MB each. Each file becomes its own banner ad, named after the file. - Native. Fill in the advertiser, headline, description, call to action, image, and final URL. The logo is optional. The advertiser, headline, image, and a final URL that starts with http or https are required. The headline holds 90 characters, the description 200, and the call to action 30. - Video. Upload MP4 or WebM files, up to 100 MB each. Each file becomes its own video ad. You can add a title, a description, the advertiser, and a final URL. A video ad has no call to action. - HTML5 banner. Upload a ZIP of your HTML5 ad, up to 10 MB. Each ZIP becomes its own HTML5 ad. The ZIP needs an HTML file such as index.html, at most 200 files, and no more than 20 MB once unpacked. The entry HTML should declare the banner's width and height, for example with an ad.size meta tag, and a click variable such as clickTag. You can add a headline, a description, the advertiser, and a final URL. An HTML5 ad has no call to action (CTA) field, because its button is part of the ZIP. A missing CTA on an HTML5 banner is added in the ZIP itself. A display banner cannot be an SVG file. ## How big can an HTML5 ZIP be? An HTML5 ZIP in Programmatic can be up to 10 MB, with at most 200 files and no more than 20 MB once unpacked. ## Edit the ad text Type into a field on the ad card. The text saves when you click or tab out of the field. On an HTML5 banner, pressing Enter in a field also saves it. The headline, description and advertiser stay on the ad after you reload. A display banner is the image only, so it has no ad text. ## Where the ads show A display banner previews in the placements that fit its size. Sizes are in pixels, width by height. - 300x250: Desktop Article, In Content, Mobile, and Feed. - 336x280: Desktop Article, In Content, and Feed. - 728x90, 970x90, and 970x250: In Content. - 160x600 and 300x600: Desktop Article. - 320x50 and 320x100: Mobile. Another size uses the placements its shape fits. A size that fits none shows on a generic page, scaled down. Native ads preview in News Feed, Recommendation, Mobile Feed, and Compact. Video ads preview In Stream, in an Article, and in a Mobile Feed. Appearance still varies by publisher and placement. ## Track the review Each ad shows its status: Draft, Ready for Review, Changes Requested, Approved, or Review Required. Saving a change to an approved ad, or replacing its file, sets it to Review Required. Filter the ads by type, including HTML5, and by Approved, Changes requested, or Not reviewed. Comments has a count in the header. ## Share for review Click Share. On a Commentor link your client can comment on each ad. On an Approval link your client can also click Approve, or Request changes with a reason, and can approve several selected ads at once. A Viewer link is look only, and an Editor link does not let a client edit programmatic ads. Your client adds their name before they comment or review. The person who created the preview gets an email when a client approves an ad or requests changes. Approval links are a Studio feature. On a phone, your client sees each native ad in full, with the headline, description, call to action, advertiser, image and logo, across the width of the screen. Display, video and HTML5 ads are scaled to fit. The Live at this link bar and the note that changes update before you save are only on your own editing screen, not on your client's. ## Not available yet Importing ads from a DSP is not connected yet: StackAdapt, Adform, The Trade Desk, DV360, and Amazon DSP. Programmatic ads do not export, and AI drafting is off for them. Each native ad has one headline and one description. --- # Quick build: start a preview from one menu Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/quick-build/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Quick build is the fastest way to start a preview. It sits next to New Preview at the top of a dashboard's Previews list. It opens a menu with three columns, Channel, Format, and Start with. Pick one of each and the preview starts. There is no name step. ## Where is Quick build? Open a dashboard. At the top right of the Previews list there are two buttons, Quick build and New Preview. An empty dashboard shows the same two buttons. Hover Quick build to see Pick a channel, format and how to start. If your role in the workspace can only view and comment, neither button shows. On the Free tier, when your free previews are full, Quick build shows the same Your free previews are full window as New Preview, and the menu does not open. ## How do I start a preview with Quick build? 1. Click Quick build. 2. Under Channel, hover or click a channel: Google Ads, Facebook / IG, LinkedIn, YouTube, Multi-Channel, Programmatic, ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, Reddit Ads, or Microsoft Ads. 3. Under Format, click a format. Google Ads lists Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, Performance Max, and Demand Gen. Facebook / IG lists Single Image / Video, Stories / Reels, and Carousel. LinkedIn lists Single Image and Carousel. A channel with one format row picks it for you: YouTube is In-stream & skippable, Multi-Channel is Google + Meta + LinkedIn, Programmatic is Display, native & video, ChatGPT Ads is Chat card, X Ads and Reddit Ads are Promoted post, and Microsoft Ads is Responsive Search Ad. 4. Under Start with, click how you want to start. Until a format is picked, this column says Pick a format to choose how to start. ## What does each start do? - Draft with AI, marked Recommended, opens the AI draft screen, where you give a website or files. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/). - Start from scratch opens the editor right away with a blank ad with a realistic example. - Import from Google Ads opens the Google Ads connect step. The Free plan can link one Google Ads account, and Studio links as many as you need. - Import from file opens the file upload, for CSVs, zips, briefs, or images. - Import from Meta Ads, on Facebook / IG only, opens the Meta download window. See Import from Meta Ads. - On Multi-Channel, Start from scratch opens the Multi-Channel setup at Select Ad Formats. ## Which starts does each channel offer? - Google Ads: Draft with AI, Start from scratch, Import from Google Ads, and Import from file. - Facebook / IG: Draft with AI, Start from scratch, and Import from Meta Ads. - Microsoft Ads: Draft with AI and Start from scratch. - LinkedIn and YouTube: Draft with AI and Start from scratch, with Import from Google Ads and Import from file shown greyed out. - Multi-Channel and Programmatic: Start from scratch, with Draft with AI and the two imports shown greyed out. - ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, and Reddit Ads: Start from scratch only. ## What is my Quick build preview called? Quick build names the preview for you from the channel, the format, and the start, such as Google Ads · Responsive Search Ad followed by Draft, or by AI draft. A channel with one format leaves the format out, such as YouTube followed by Draft. Rename it any time. ## Why is a start greyed out? Hover a greyed-out row to see why. - Draft with AI says Not available for this channel on Multi-Channel and Programmatic. Those start from scratch. - Import from Google Ads and Import from file say Google Ads only on LinkedIn, YouTube, Multi-Channel, and Programmatic. - On Demand Gen, the two imports say Not available for this format. - If Draft with AI is not in the list at all, AI copy is turned off for you or your workspace. ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, and Reddit Ads never show it, because they start from scratch. ## Why does a channel or format show Studio? On the current Free plan, every channel and format is open, so you will not see a Studio tag. Free limits how many previews you have, 3 in total, not which formats. On an earlier Free plan, only Responsive Search Ad, Responsive Display Ad, Facebook / IG Single Image / Video, and YouTube are open. Other formats, and the LinkedIn, Multi-Channel, Programmatic, ChatGPT Ads, X Ads, Reddit Ads, and Microsoft Ads channels, show a Studio tag. Hovering a Studio channel does nothing. Clicking one opens the Studio upgrade window instead of starting a preview. ## Can I use the keyboard? Yes. Up and down arrows move within a column, and left and right arrows move across columns. Right arrow picks the channel or format you are on. Enter picks the highlighted channel or format, or starts the highlighted start row. Escape closes the menu, and so does clicking outside it. ## What is the difference between Quick build and New Preview? Quick build creates the preview from three clicks and names it for you. New Preview opens the guided setup at step one, with nothing carried over from Quick build. Use New Preview when you want to type the name before you create the preview. Quick build opens on the channel you last started a preview from. --- # See your RSA variations Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/rsa-variations/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 A responsive search ad's live preview builds combinations of your headlines and descriptions, the way Google mixes them. You can show one, three or five combinations at once, shuffle to new ones, and download them as pictures. ## Show one, three, or five ads At the top of the live preview, pick One Ad, Three Ads, or Five Ads. Each card is a different combination of your headlines and descriptions, with your extensions under it. The preview does not list every combination at once. It shows up to five at a time, and Shuffle moves through the rest. The preview needs at least one headline with text. Descriptions are optional, so an ad with headlines only still shows. ## Shuffle the variations to see more ad combos Click Shuffle, the orange button next to the Desktop view and Mobile view icons. The preview moves to the next set of combinations, as many as you are showing. Lines that have shown less often are more likely to come up next, so shuffling works through all the headlines and descriptions you wrote. A pinned headline or description stays in the position you pinned it to. Sitelinks and callouts rotate too. In Mobile view, when the preview has more than one keyword, each shuffle also moves the phone's search bar to the next keyword. Most other previews have a Shuffle button as well. It swaps in other copy or media for that format. ## Is there a Shuffle limit on the Free plan? No. Signed in, you can shuffle as many times as you like on every plan, Free tier included, and so can a client on your client link. Only the sample editor at /demo stops after 3 shuffles in a preview and opens a window titled Ready for unlimited variations?. That cap belongs to the demo, not to your account. ## Why does my ad show only two headlines? Preview settings is set to Standard (2H). Open Preview settings, the sliders icon above the live preview. Under Headlines shown in preview, pick Standard (2H) for two headlines or Expanded (3H) for three, then click Apply. Standard is how most Google ads appear. A headline pinned to position 3 does not show in the two-headline layout. This choice is saved in your browser, not on the preview, so each teammate keeps their own. A client link you copy while Standard (2H) is on opens with two headlines. On Performance Max, the same choice is on the Search tab. ## Download the variations Click Download variations as ZIP, the download icon at the end of the bar. You get a ZIP with one PNG picture per combination, in the desktop search layout, for the number of ads you picked: one, three, or five. The pictures use your two- or three-headline choice and the extensions that show on the preview for this ad group. An extension you hid in Preview settings is left out. If the ad has no business name, the pictures say Your Business. Download variations as ZIP works on the same plans as export, Free tier included. Copy as image, beside it, copies the preview on screen as a picture you can paste. A message says Copied as image when it is on your clipboard. Both buttons are greyed out until the ad has at least one headline with text. ## What your client sees on a client link Your client can pick One Ad, Three Ads, or Five Ads, click Shuffle, and use Copy as image. Your client cannot change Preview settings. Your client sees Download variations as ZIP only when Allow export is on for the client link. Allow export is under Sharing options when you share, and it is a Studio feature. ## What it does not do The preview shows combinations of what you wrote. It does not predict which combination Google will serve or how often, and it does not show performance. --- # The sample ad: try the editor without using a Free preview Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/sample-ad/ Last verified: 2026-10-27 Does the sample ad use one of my Free previews? No. Show me a sample on the first-ad screen opens a filled-in sample ad for a sample coffee shop, marked as a sample, so you can look around before you add your own business. It does not use one of your Free previews, and it does not take a dashboard slot. The sample is never counted as your client either. The sample is offered on the Free tier and during a trial. On a paid plan such as Studio, the first-ad screen does not offer Show me a sample. You build a real ad straight away, or click Skip for now to open your dashboard first. ## How do I turn the sample into my own ad? What does Make this a real ad do? Click Make this a real ad. It shows up whenever the sample refuses something, for example when you try to share it or add an ad or a campaign to it. It copies the sample preview into a new dashboard of your own, with its campaigns, ad groups, ads, copy and images, and opens the copy in the editor. While it works you see Making a real copy of your ad…, then Your real ad is ready. The sample itself stays as it was. The copy is a real preview, so it counts toward your plan's limits like any other. If you are at your limit, the upgrade window opens instead. If the copy fails, you see Couldn't make a real copy and can try again. ## How do I open the sample ad? 1. On the first-ad screen, leave Business name and Website empty. 2. Click Show me a sample, under the main build button. Hover it and it says Open a sample ad. It does not use a preview slot. 3. The button says Opening sample… while the sample is built, then the sample opens. If you have typed a name or a website, the same button reads Look around first and builds your own ad instead. If the website you typed is not a public address, Show me a sample asks you to clear the website or enter a public site such as yourbrand.com. ## Can I share the sample ad? No. A sample cannot be shared. Open Share on the sample and the window says Samples can't be shared. Build your own ad to share it., with a Make this a real ad button. Click Copy client link on the sample and you get the same message as a note, with Make this a real ad beside it, instead of Couldn't copy the link. No link is made for the sample. Click Make this a real ad, then share the copy it opens. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). ## Does the sample count as my Free client? No. The sample coffee shop, Juniper Coffee Co., stays in your dashboards list, labeled as a sample, so you can open it any time. It does not fill your Free client, it is never picked as your default workspace, and it cannot be made your active client. If you try, you see A sample workspace can't be the active client. Your first real dashboard is the one that counts. ## Can I add my own ad to the sample dashboard? No. Samples stay as samples. If you try to add an ad or a campaign to the sample, duplicate an ad in it, or put your own business into it, you see one note that says Build your own ad in a new dashboard. Samples stay as samples. Nothing is added and nothing went wrong, so there is no error to report. Click Make this a real ad on that note to copy the sample into your own dashboard, or build your ad from the first-ad screen or New Preview instead. Why did I get several error messages when I added an ad to the sample? Before 26 October 2026, a refused add or duplicate on a sample dashboard could show the same refusal more than once. It now shows that one note. If you copy the sample preview, or start a new preview in the sample dashboard, the copy goes into a new dashboard of its own, named after the preview, and that dashboard is a real one. It counts toward your dashboard limit like any other. If you are at your limit, the upgrade window opens instead. As of 22 October 2026, the editor checks the format and your plan's limits before it opens that new dashboard. If you pick a format your plan cannot create, the upgrade window opens and no dashboard is made, so your Free client is not used up. If the new preview fails for any other reason, the dashboard it opened is removed again and the slot is yours. ## Why didn't Build another ad open a sample? When you come back to the first-ad screen from Build another ad or Start from my website, the button next to Build reads Back to dashboard. It takes you back to your dashboard and creates nothing, not even a sample. To make another ad there, type the name and click Build. ## My Free previews are full. Can I still open the sample? If all of your Free previews are in use, Show me a sample opens the upgrade window instead of a sample. Move a preview you no longer need to the trash to free its slot, or upgrade to Studio for unlimited previews. See PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan. ## Is this the same as the demo at /demo? No. The demo at /demo needs no account and is not saved anywhere. The sample ad is built inside your own account, marked as a sample. See [The demo editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/demo/). --- # Share a preview with your client Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 Share a preview with a link your client opens in a browser. They do not need an account, and the link always shows the current version of the ad. ## How do I share a preview? 1. Open the preview. Click Copy client link on the live preview frame. The link is copied, ready to paste into an email or a chat. 2. Or click Share with client at the top right. In the classic layout the button reads Share with your client. 3. Send the link to your client. ### Why does Share with client need two clicks? When the Copy client link frame is entirely above or below the edge of your screen, the first click on Share with client scrolls to it and highlights it, and a second click opens Share preview. When any part of the frame is on screen, even partly cut off, the first click opens Share preview. That includes a responsive search ad, Responsive Display and Performance Max. ## What is in the Share preview dialog? - Permission level: Viewer, Commentor, Approval or Editor. See [Share link permissions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/) for what each one allows. On the Free tier, Commentor reads "Can view and add comments · up to 3 per preview on Free". - Share link: the address, with Copy. Under it, a line says what anyone with the link can do, such as "Anyone with this link can view only." - Sharing options: Allow export, which lets your client download the preview, Allow copying, and Notify when viewed. Allow copying shows only on a single preview's link. A group link and a Programmatic preview do not have it. - Regenerate link, which makes a new address. The old link stops working. Changes auto-save. The footer reads Changes auto-save, then Saving… and Saved while it saves. If a save fails, it says Failed to save, with Retry. Click Done to close. Share settings, under More options at the top right, opens the same dialog. Approval, Editor and Allow export are Studio features. Viewer and Commentor work on the Free tier. Without Studio, the dialog shows a Free plan tag at the top. Approval, Editor and Allow export carry a Studio tag until you upgrade. Clicking one of them opens the Studio offer and a side-by-side comparison of the two plans. The setting itself does not change. ## Why does Share preview say Samples can't be shared? The preview is a sample ad, not one you built. The dialog says "Samples can't be shared. Build your own ad to share it." Click Make this a real ad to turn it into your own preview, then share that one. ## Can my client open an ad image bigger on the share link? Yes. On Display, Performance Max and YouTube previews, clicking an ad image opens it full size. Press Esc, click outside the image, or click Close to go back. When the ad has several images, Previous ad and Next ad arrows step through them, and the arrows stop at the first and last one instead of jumping back to the start. The small info mark on the preview explains itself when you hover or tap it. Clicking the logo does not zoom. ## Can I get an email when my client opens the link? Yes. In Share preview, check Notify when viewed. The person who created the preview gets an email the first time someone opens the link. Check Include repeat views to hear about later visits from the same person too. These emails go to every address you ticked under Receive notifications on your Profile, not only your login email. Receipts stay on your default address. See Send view and comment emails to the right address. To send these emails to another address as well, type it in the Also notify box under Notify when viewed. That address gets comment emails for the preview too, in addition to the ones ticked on your Profile. ## Can my client copy the preview into their own workspace? Yes, when you allow it. In Share preview, check Allow copying, "Signed-in viewers can copy this preview into their own workspace". It is off until you turn it on. Under it, Include comments is on by default, and the copy arrives with your comments, still open. Untick it to leave them out. A line under it says each copy is emailed to the addresses ticked on your Profile. The line under the link then says viewers can view and copy it, or view, comment and copy it. Your client sees Make it yours on the shared page, with the note "Copy this preview into your own workspace and edit it. No setup needed." They sign in, or create an account, and pick a workspace if they have more than one. The preview is copied there and opens in the editor without the setup wizard. The copy is theirs. Your original does not change. - A Free workspace holds 3 previews. When it is full, they can Upgrade to Studio or Replace a preview with the copy. - A Studio-only format shows This format is part of Studio when they copy into a Free workspace. - If you open your own link and click Make it yours, it opens your preview instead of copying it. - One person can make 10 copies an hour. After that the page says Too many copies in a short time. - If you turn Allow copying off, a viewer who clicks Make it yours is told copying is turned off for this link. - If a copy fails, nothing is added to their workspace and the link still works. ## How do I share a group of previews? In the dashboard's preview list, a group row has Copy group link and Share settings. Share settings opens Share group. A group link can be Viewer, Commentor or Editor. Approval, a Studio feature, works only on a single preview's link, so a group has no Approval option and no Regenerate link. Inside a group, the Send for approval button opens the same Share group dialog. ## Can my client comment on the share link without an account? Yes. Your client opens the public preview link with no account and no sign-in, and can comment when the link is set to Commentor. See Comments. ## Is a share link on the Free tier? How many previews can I share? On the Free tier, one preview at a time can have a client link, and that link stays live. Moving that preview to Trash frees the slot and pauses its link. A link for a second preview is a Studio feature. On Studio, every preview can have its own link. When you try to share a second preview on the Free tier, you see Ready for your next client?, with "Free covers one client link, and yours stays live. Studio lets you send a live link for every client you take on." It lists the preview that already holds your link. Opening Share preview does not show this. Clicking Copy, or Copy client link, on a second preview does. ## Does my client see PPC Ad Editor branding on a Free link? Yes. A share link from a Free workspace shows the PPC Ad Editor logo at the top of the shared page. Share preview says "This link carries a small PPC Ad Editor watermark", with Remove watermark, which opens Studio checkout. On a paid Studio plan the PPC Ad Editor logo does not show on your client's page. During a trial it still shows. This is not a white-label link, and you cannot put your own logo or domain on the link. ## What happens when I click Made with PPC Ad Editor on my own shared preview? The ads on a Free share link carry a small Made with PPC Ad Editor band. When you open your own link while signed in to PPC Ad Editor, even in a new tab, clicking the band opens Studio checkout for the workspace that owns the link. If checkout cannot start from the shared page, you land on the Studio checkout page in the app instead. Give the page a moment to recognise you after it opens. When your client, or anyone who is not signed in to that workspace, clicks the band, it opens ppcadeditor.com. It never charges them or changes your plan. ## What does my client see when a link no longer works? A page that says This link no longer works. It was turned off or replaced with a new one. Ask the person who sent it for a fresh link. This happens after you regenerate the link or delete the preview. Send them the current link from Copy client link. ## What does a System link mean? Share preview can show a System row marked view only, under the share link. Only you have that address. It lets you see what a client sees. Click Delete to remove it. ## Is there a password or a branded link? No. There is no password-protected share link, and there is no white-label share link. --- # Share link permissions Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 A share link has one permission: Viewer, Commentor, Approval or Editor. You pick it in the Share preview dialog, under Permission level, and it applies to everyone who opens that link. Viewer and Commentor work on the Free tier. Approval and Editor are Studio features. ## What can someone do with the link I sent? - Viewer: "Can view the preview only (read-only)". The line under the link reads "Anyone with this link can view only." - Commentor: "Can view and add comments". They can view, comment on a line, reply, and resolve threads. They cannot edit the ad. - Approval: "Client approves or requests revisions in one click". The line reads "Anyone with this link can view, comment, and approve." - Editor: "Can edit ad copy in the shared preview". The line reads "Anyone with this link can view and edit." When Allow copying is on, the line adds "and copy it", such as "view and copy it". A person on an Approval or Editor link can also change the preview's stage, such as Active or Paused. On a Viewer or Commentor link the stage pill only shows the stage. Clicking it opens no menu. Approval and Editor are Studio features. ## How do I change what a shared link allows? 1. Open Share preview. Click Share with client, or Share settings under More options. 2. Under Permission level, click Viewer, Commentor, Approval or Editor. 3. The change saves on its own. The footer shows Saved. The same link now follows the new permission, so you do not need to send it again. Switching a link away from Approval withdraws any approval request that is still open. Approval and Editor need Studio. ## Which permissions are on my plan? Viewer and Commentor work on the Free tier. On the Free tier, a Commentor link allows up to 3 guest comments per preview, and its line reads "Can view and add comments · up to 3 per preview on Free". Approval and Editor are Studio features. They are not available on the Free tier. Allow export is a Studio feature too. ## I clicked Editor in the share dialog and it didn't change Approval, Editor and Allow export are Studio features, and until you upgrade they carry a Studio tag. Clicking one does not change the link, it shows an upgrade box instead. It opens the Studio offer, titled Approval workflow for Approval and Unlock collaboration for Editor, and shows a side-by-side comparison of the two plans in the dialog. The link keeps its current permission. If a workspace leaves Studio, an Approval or Editor link opens as a Commentor link. Your client can still look and comment, but cannot approve or edit. ## What happens when my client hits the guest comment limit? On the Free tier, once a preview has 3 guest comments, your client sees Comment limit reached, "This preview has reached its limit of 3 guest comments." They can click Notify Account Owner, which emails the person who created the preview, or an Owner or Admin of the workspace if that person is no longer active. The email is titled Comment limit reached on a shared preview. One such email goes out per preview every 24 hours. A second click in that time says The account owner was already notified recently. Studio has no guest comment limit. ## Can my client copy the preview into their own workspace? Only when Allow copying is on, in Share preview under Sharing options. It is off by default and works with any permission level on a single preview's link. A group link does not have it. Your client sees Make it yours. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/) for what happens when they click it. ## Can my client download the ad from the share link? Only when Allow export is on. In Share preview, under Sharing options, check Allow export, "Clients can download this preview". Your client then gets the Export button on the shared page. When it is off, their Export button is greyed out and says Export disabled by owner. Allow export is a Studio feature. ## What does my client see on a view-only link? Clicking Comments shows Comments are not enabled, with Notify Account Owner. Clicking a line shows "This link is view-only. Ask the sender to turn on comments if you want to mark a line." Change the link to Commentor to let them comment. ## Do share links expire? No, a link does not expire on its own on the Free tier or on Studio. A link stops working when you regenerate it or delete the preview. While the preview is in Trash, its link shows This preview isn't available. Restore the preview from Trash and the same link works again. ## How do I stop an old link from working? Open Share preview and click Regenerate link. Confirm "Regenerating the URL will invalidate the old link. Continue?". The old link stops working, and the preview gets a new address. A link for a group of previews has no Regenerate link button. ## Why does my client see This link no longer works? The link was turned off or replaced with a new one, for example because you regenerated it or deleted the preview. The page says to ask the person who sent it for a fresh link. Send them the current link from Copy client link. A different load problem shows This share link isn't available instead. If they see This client link is paused, the workspace that owns the preview is view-only. The link works again after the owner restores access in Billing. ## Why does my client's share link not open, or say This preview isn't available? A share link that cannot open now says why, instead of a general error. - This link no longer works: the link was turned off or replaced. Send the current link from Copy client link. - This client link is paused: the workspace that owns the preview is view-only. It works again once the owner restores access in Billing. - This preview isn't available: the link is wrong or incomplete, or the preview, group or dashboard it points to is in Trash or deleted. It says Ask the person who shared it for a new link, and never says the workspace needs to upgrade. Restore it from Trash, or copy the link again from Copy client link and resend it. - A short hiccup on our side is tried again on its own, twice, before the page gives up. If your client still sees an error, ask them to reload the page in a minute. ## I'm signed in to another account. Can I still use a client link? Yes. A link from another workspace opens with that link's permission, and its comment threads load, even while you are signed in to your own account. If you are a member of the workspace that owns the preview, the link opens with your own access instead. ## Can I add a password or my own branding to the link? No. There is no password-protected share link, and there is no white-label share link. --- # Asset Library on a shared link Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/shared-asset-library/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Can a client manage assets from a client link? Yes, when the link is set to Editor. Someone with an Editor share link can open the Asset Library for your workspace without signing in, and add, edit or delete sitelinks, callouts, snippets, call extensions, images, logos and business names. This page covers how they get there, what they see and what they can change. ## Can a client open the Asset Library from a client link? Only a link set to Editor. The page is titled Asset Library and shows an EDITOR tag beside the title. A Viewer, Commentor or Approval link cannot manage assets, and the page says You don't have permission to manage assets. Editor links are a Studio feature. See [Share link permissions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/) to change a link's permission. The shared preview has no Asset Library button. To open it, add /assets to the end of the client link. Click Back to Preview to return to the shared preview. If the link is wrong or has expired, the page says This share link is invalid or has expired. If it was switched off, it says This share link has been disabled. A paused link shows This client link is paused. If the preview was deleted, it says This preview isn't available. Ask the person who shared it for a new link. ## What can they do there? The tabs down the left are Sitelinks, Callouts, Snippets, Call, Images, Logos, and Business Names, each with a count when it has assets. Pick a tab and use the search box to find an asset. On Images, Filter by ratio narrows the list by shape. Each card shows its number of associations. - Add: the button reads Add Sitelink, Add Callout, Add Snippet, Add Call Extension, Add Image, Add Logo, or Add Business Name. - Edit: the pencil opens Edit Asset. Images and logos have no edit, so replace them with a new upload. - Delete: the bin removes one asset after a confirmation. Tick several and click Delete to remove them together. When an asset is used in ads, the confirmation says Delete asset used in ads? and deleting it removes it from those ads. ## Will a new asset show on the shared preview? Not until it is checked for the ad group. An asset added on the shared Asset Library is not put on any campaign or ad group. To show it, go back to the preview, click a sitelink, callout or snippet on it, check the new one in the list, and click Apply to ad group. An Editor link can do that from the preview itself. Clicking an extension on the shared preview opens the list for that ad group, where your client can check or uncheck them and click Apply to ad group. From that list they cannot create a new one or edit one. That is done on the Asset Library page. ## Our callouts were deleted on the client link. Is that deleted for me too? Yes. The shared page works on the same assets as the editor's Asset library, so an asset someone adds, edits or deletes there is added, edited or deleted for you too, everywhere it is used. The shared Asset Library lists every asset in your workspace, not only the ones on the shared preview or its dashboard. If you keep several clients in one workspace, an Editor link shows them all, and deletes from it reach every dashboard. Send an Editor link only to people you trust with your assets. --- # Sign in Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/sign-in/ Last verified: 2026-10-23 PPC Ad Editor, Budget Pacer, and Ad Recap use the same sign-in. If you opened a preview link and landed on login, you get back to that preview after you sign in. The same is true for a share link or a checkout. You are not left on a blank login screen. ## The sign-up page says Welcome back If you have signed in to PPC Ad Editor on that browser before and open the sign-up page from a free mockup tool, it says Welcome back. Sign in to save this mockup, with Use the Google account you signed up with, or sign in with email. Click Continue with Google or Sign in with email to get back into your account with your mockup. Create a new account opens the sign-up form, if you really want a second account. The browser keeps only that you have been here, not your email. ## Sign in with Google, Microsoft or email On the login screen, click Continue with Google, or enter your email and password under or sign in with email. Tick Keep me signed in to stay signed in on that browser. Click Forgot password? to get a reset link. Continue with Microsoft shows on login and register only while Microsoft sign-in is turned on. If you do not see the button, sign in with Google or with your email and password. If your browser blocks the Google window, a message says Continuing in this tab, and Google's sign-in opens in the same tab instead. Finish it there and you come back signed in. If you land back on the login page with a red message, see Sign-in didn't finish for what each message means. ## Can I sign in with my Microsoft account? Yes, while Microsoft sign-in is turned on. Sign in with your Microsoft account by clicking Continue with Microsoft on the login or sign-up page. It works with a personal or work Microsoft account. If the Continue with Microsoft button is not there, Microsoft sign-in is off for now. Use Continue with Google, or your email and password, instead. A Microsoft Ads connection in Budget Pacer or Ad Recap is a separate sign-in. See Signing in to Google Ads or Microsoft Ads below. ## Password not accepted, or can't get back in? You may have signed up with Google Can't get back in with your password? You may have signed up another way. If your email and password do not work, the login page says Incorrect email or password. If you signed up with Google, use Continue with Google above. You can also email yourself a sign-in link below. Where Continue with Microsoft shows, it says If you signed up with Google or Microsoft, use that button above. If you signed in on that browser before, the message names the way you used last time, for example You last signed in on this device with Google. Use Continue with Google above. The browser keeps only which button you used, not your email. If you are not sure which way you signed up, email yourself a sign-in link from the login page. It works whichever way you signed up. ## It says This email already has an account that uses a different sign-in method That means the email you used with Google or Microsoft already signs in another way. Nothing is merged or linked. On the login page the message stays on screen with your email filled in, and names the ways back in, for example Sign in with Microsoft or with your email and password, whichever you used before. Not sure? Email yourself a sign-in link below. On the sign-up page it asks you to sign in instead. When the browser remembers how you signed in last time, the message names that method. ## Google sign-in on my phone sends me back to the login page On a phone or in an in-app browser, Continue with Google only signs you in, or signs you up, when Google has verified that email address. Verified Google emails sign in as before. If Google has not verified the address, you land back on the login page and nothing is opened or created. Verify the address in your Google account, or sign in with your email and password. On a phone, Google opens in the same tab instead of a pop-up, and you come straight back. If you clicked Create a new account on the login page, that choice is kept, so you are not asked again. ## I'm already signed in. Why don't I see the login form? If you open Log in or Sign up free while you already have a session on that browser, PPC Ad Editor takes you straight into your workspace. The screen says Opening your workspace… for a moment, then opens your dashboard. If you were on your way to a preview, a share link, a checkout, or the ad you just built on our website, you land there instead. The sign-in form and the Google window no longer stay on screen. On ppcadeditor.com, the header knows you are signed in on that browser. Log in reads Open Studio and opens your dashboard, and the main header button does the same instead of opening sign-up. If Opening your workspace… stays on screen for more than a few seconds, the login form comes back after about six seconds, and the sign-in buttons stay greyed out until your session check finishes. Reload the page. If it keeps happening, sign out and sign in again. ## How do I log in as a different person? Sign out first, then open Log in and sign in with the other login. While you are signed in, Log in sends you straight to your workspace. An invitation link still shows the form, so you can accept it. ## Sign in with SSO If your company uses single sign-on, click Sign in with company SSO. It sits under the Continue with buttons. Enter your Work email and click Continue with SSO. If that company is not set up, the screen says SSO isn't set up for your company and tells you to sign in with email or Google. If your email already has an account, the screen asks you to sign in with Google or your password once, and SSO is then connected to that account. If it cannot be connected, contact support and the team links them. Google and email sign-in stay available, and Microsoft too while it is turned on. Company SSO is its own login, so Continue with Microsoft is for a personal or work Microsoft account that is not set up for company SSO. The password field stays on the email form. Budget Pacer's login can send you here for the same SSO sign-in. ## Continue with Google says No account for that email Continue with Google on the login page only signs you in to an account you already have. If no account uses that Google email, it does not create one for you. Instead the login page says No account for, then the email, with two buttons. - Create a new account makes the account with that Google email and signs you in. - Try another method closes the message, so you can use Continue with Google with a different Google account, or sign in with your email and password. If you meant to sign in, you may have used a different Google account or email last time. Click Try another method and pick the address you signed up with. Sign up free on the register page still creates the account in one click, and so does Continue with Google from a shared preview's sign-up. ## Moved from the old version of PPC Ad Editor? Set your password If your account was created for you from the earlier version of PPC Ad Editor, you set a new password before your first sign-in. The page for that is titled Set your password, under a note that says Welcome to PPC Ad Editor 2.0! Your account has been created. 1. Type the email address your account uses under Email. 2. Click Set my password. The button says Sending... while it works. 3. The page says Check your email. Open the email and choose your password there. It follows the same password rules as sign-up. 4. Click Back to login and sign in with your email and the new password. Already set it? Click Sign in under the form. If no email arrives, check your spam folder, or use Forgot password? on the login page. If your login email is a Google or Microsoft account you sign in with, you can click Continue with Google or Continue with Microsoft on the login page instead. ## Create an account On the login screen, click Sign up free. Click Continue with Google, or enter your details and click Create account. If Continue with Google is greyed out, the page says Google and Microsoft sign-in need Safari or Chrome. Open the page in Safari or Chrome, or sign up with email. ## What are the password rules? A password needs at least 8 characters, a lowercase letter, a capital letter and a number. The sign-up form lists the four rules under Password before you type: At least 8 characters, A lowercase letter, A capital letter, A number. Each one gets a tick as you type. If Confirm Password does not match, it says Passwords do not match straight away. If you click Create account with something missing, every problem shows at once and a message says Please review the highlighted fields and try again. Choosing a new password from a reset email uses the same rules. ## The security check on sign-up will not finish Sign-up runs a short security check in the background. If you click Create account before it is done, it says Completing security check... or Security check is still loading. We'll create your account when it finishes. Sometimes it says Check the box below to continue. If the check times out, Studio tries again on its own twice, giving the check a little more time each try, before it shows a message. On a slow phone that can take about half a minute, and the Retry link is there the whole time. Clicking Create account while the check shows an error also starts the check again, and your account is created once it passes. Then you see one of these, with a Retry security check button: - Security check timed out. Try again. Click Retry security check. - Security check didn't load, try again. Turn off any content blocker for the page, then click Retry security check. Continue with Google, and Continue with Microsoft where it shows, stay available while the check runs and do not wait for it. ## What if Microsoft sign-in fails? If you close the Microsoft window, nothing happens and you can try again. If your browser blocked the window, you see Your browser blocked the Microsoft sign-in window. Click Continue with Microsoft again, or allow pop-ups for this site. A second click usually gets through. If you see Microsoft sign-in didn't finish because access wasn't approved, Microsoft did not give PPC Ad Editor permission to sign you in. With a work account, your company may only let an IT admin approve new apps. Ask your IT admin to approve PPC Ad Editor, or continue with Google or your email instead. Trying again on its own will not help. Otherwise the screen says Failed to sign in with Microsoft. Please try again. Sign in with Google or email instead if it keeps failing. If Microsoft sign-in is turned off, the Continue with Microsoft button is not shown. If you clicked it and see Microsoft sign-in isn't available right now. Continue with email or Google., use Continue with Google, or your email and password, until it is back. ## Continue with Google sends me to You don't have a workspace yet That screen means you signed in, but your login does not own or belong to a workspace any more, for example after your workspace was deleted. Google sign-in now stays on that screen instead of sending you back to login. Type a Workspace name and click Create workspace, or click Sign out and sign in with the address that already owns a workspace. See You don't have a workspace yet. ## Signing in to Google Ads or Microsoft Ads Connecting an ad account is a separate sign-in, on Google's or Microsoft's own screen. If you cancel that screen, you come back to the app, not to an error page. In Budget Pacer, Connect Microsoft Ads asks how you sign in to Microsoft Ads. A work or school Microsoft account from any company can sign in with Work or school Microsoft. For Hotmail, Outlook.com or Live, pick Personal Microsoft account. If you cancel the Microsoft screen, you land back on Accounts in Budget Pacer. --- # Sign-in didn't finish: what the message on the login page means Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/sign-in-didnt-finish/ Last verified: 2026-10-23 Google sign-in sent you back to the login or sign-up page with a red message? The message says why sign-in did not finish and what to do next. Nothing was created or changed. The message shows once. If you refresh the page, it goes away, so you can try again on a clean page. ## What each message means - Google sign-in was cancelled. Try again when you're ready. You closed the Google window or clicked Cancel on Google's screen. Click Continue with Google again. - That sign-in expired. Try again. You took a while on Google's screen, or came back to an old tab. Click Continue with Google again. - That sign-in didn't finish. Try again. Something broke between Google and PPC Ad Editor, for example the page was opened in a different browser or the link was reused. Start again from the login page. - Google sign-in didn't finish. Try again. Google did not complete the sign-in. Try again, or sign in with your email and password. - Verify your Google email, or sign in with email and password. Google has not verified that email address yet. Verify it in your Google account, or use your email and password. - Google didn't share an email address. Try again, or sign in with email and password. Pick a Google account that has an email address, or allow it to be shared. - Google sign-in isn't available right now. Sign in with email and password, or contact support. Google sign-in is down on our side. Use your email and password for now. - Sign-in didn't finish. Try again, or contact support if it keeps happening. Anything else went wrong. Try once more. If it keeps happening, contact support. ## It keeps happening 1. Open the login page in a fresh tab, in Safari or Chrome. 2. Turn off any content blocker for the page, and allow pop-ups. 3. Click Continue with Google and finish on Google's screen without switching tabs. 4. Still stuck? Click Forgot password? or email yourself a sign-in link from the login page. That works whichever way you signed up. If none of that works, contact support and say which message you saw. --- # Users and dashboards: manage team members and dashboard access Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/team-members/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Users & dashboards is where you see your team, change roles, and choose who can see each client dashboard. Open it from the left menu: under Studio, click Settings, then Users. Users & dashboards is a Studio feature. ## What does 1 of 1 person has access mean? Each dashboard row under Dashboards says how many people can open it. The second number is everyone in your workspace, counting invites that are not accepted yet. The first number is how many of them can open this dashboard. So 1 of 1 person has access means you are the only person in the workspace, and you can see that dashboard. 2 of 3 people have access means one person in your workspace cannot see it. No one has access yet means nobody can open it so far. Owners and Admins can open every dashboard. A pending invite counts as having access only when the invite named that dashboard. The faces on the right of the row are the people who can open it. ## How do I choose who can see a client's dashboard? To stop a teammate from seeing one client's dashboard, or to give them access, use Manage access. 1. Under Dashboards, click Manage access on the dashboard's row. 2. Dashboard access opens with everyone in the workspace. Check a person to give access. Uncheck them to take it away. 3. Click Save access. The footer says Dashboard access updated. Owners and Admins stay checked, and you cannot change them. A teammate who can see every dashboard shows All dashboards beside their name. Unchecking them takes away this dashboard only, and they keep the others. Pending invites cannot be changed here until they are accepted. Owners and Admins see Manage access. ## What do I see in the Users list? Each person shows their name, email and role. A Pending tag means the invite is not accepted yet. A 2FA off tag means two-factor is not marked as on or required for them. The line under the name says Active now, Last seen with how long ago, or Never signed in. The count beside Users shows seats, such as 1 of 2 seats used. When it ends in full, every seat is taken. Invite teammate then says No seats left and tells you to add a seat in Billing. ## How do I change someone's role? Click the three-dot menu on their row, then Change role. Edit permissions shows their current role. Pick Admin or Standard User, then click Save changes. Only an Owner sees Owner in that list, and only an Owner can change another Owner's role. Owners, Admins and legacy Editors see the three-dot menu. The Billing role does not. If a change is refused, Edit permissions shows why in red and stays open. "Every account needs at least one Owner. Make someone else Owner first." means you tried to change the only Owner. If you change your own role, the menu shows your new role straight away, with no reload. If a change to who can see a dashboard is refused, the message says why. ## How do I remove someone or require two-factor sign-in? Click the three-dot menu on their row: - Require 2FA marks that person as needing two-factor sign-in. A note says Two-factor now required for them, and their 2FA off tag goes away. Sign-in does not ask them for a second step yet, because setting up two-factor authentication still shows Coming soon under Login & security. - Remove from workspace takes them out after you confirm. You cannot remove the Owner or yourself. ## Where did the Team page go? The old Team address now opens Users & dashboards in Settings. Everything about team members is on that one screen. --- # Why is my ad text cut off with "…" or See more in the preview? Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/text-cut-off-in-preview/ Last verified: 2026-10-31 My Facebook, Instagram or LinkedIn ad text is cut off in the preview. Is it lost? No. Your full text is saved. The preview shortens long text the way the feed does on a phone or a desktop screen, so you and your client see what a person sees before they tap to read more. Click the field in the editor to see and edit every word. Your client sees the same shortened preview on a share link. ## Where the preview shortens Meta text In a Meta single image or video ad, use Facebook or Instagram above the preview, and the desktop and phone icons, to switch the view. - Facebook on a phone: the primary text shows up to three lines. When it is longer than 110 characters, See more appears under it. The headline shows up to 48 characters and the description up to 30, then "…". - Instagram: the caption shows up to three lines, with more under it when the primary text is longer than 110 characters. The headline shows up to 48 characters, then "…". - Facebook on desktop: the primary text shows up to 125 characters, the headline up to 40 and the description up to 25, then "…". - Carousel cards on Facebook and Instagram: each card's headline shows up to 48 characters, and on Facebook each card's description up to 30. - Story or reel: the primary text shows up to 180 characters, then "…". ## Where the preview shortens LinkedIn text In a LinkedIn single image or carousel ad, the introductory text shows up to 150 characters, then ...more, on both the phone and desktop views. ## Do Japanese, Chinese or Korean characters cut off sooner? Yes. Wide characters, such as Japanese, Chinese and Korean, take the space of two, so the preview cuts them off after about half as many characters. ## Is this the same as the character limit? No. The preview cut-off only shows how much of the text people see before they tap. The character limit is how long a field can be, and the counter under each field shows it. A primary text can be well inside its limit and still end in See more. See [Character limits the editor enforces](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/character-limits/). ## Should I shorten the text? That is your call. People read the first line or two before they tap, so put the offer and the most important words first. Then check the preview on the phone view, where the text is shortest. --- # Trash: restore a deleted preview, client, or ad Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/trash/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 When you delete a client dashboard, a preview, a campaign, an ad group, or an ad, you choose Send to Trash or Delete permanently. Send to Trash keeps it for 30 days, so you can restore it. Delete permanently removes it at once and cannot be undone. ## I deleted something by mistake Deleted by mistake? A preview, a client dashboard, a campaign, an ad group or an ad goes to the trash, and you can restore it for 30 days. The steps for each are below. ## How long do things stay in trash? 30 days. The delete box says Recoverable for 30 days. Each item in the trash shows how many days it has left, such as Expires in 12 days or 3 days left. After that it is deleted for good. ## Restore a deleted preview 1. Open the client dashboard the preview was in. 2. Click Trash in the left menu, under that client. On a small screen, the Trash button is on the Previews list. 3. Find the preview and click Restore. Tick several and click Restore at the bottom to restore them together. Use Filter by name to find one. You see one message for the whole restore, Preview restored for one or, for example, 3 previews restored for several. Click Undo on that message to send every preview you just restored back to Trash. The preview goes back to the Previews list. When you click Send to Trash, the preview shows in Trash straight away. If the list cannot be loaded, the page says Trash did not load with Try again, instead of showing an empty trash, so reload before you assume it is gone. Delete forever, the bin icon on a row, removes one for good after you confirm. Empty trash removes every preview in this trash after you confirm. ## Restore a deleted client dashboard In the left menu, Trash sits under Dashboards. It shows a count when something is in it, and it stays there after you delete your last client, so you can always get back to it. Clicking it opens the Dashboard page with Trash Bin open. You can also click Trash at the top of the Dashboard page. It shows a count, such as Trash (2). If every client is in trash, the page says All dashboards are in Trash. Click Open Trash. In Trash Bin, click Restore on the client. The bin icon removes one for good with no second question. Empty Trash Now removes everything after you click OK. When you delete a client, the delete box can also say Deleting this client frees your client slot so you can create another. Restoring it from trash needs an open slot. ## I typed /dashboard/trash and nothing opened That address opens your dashboards list with the client Trash Bin open. Restore a client there, or open a client and click Trash to restore a preview. ## Restore a deleted campaign, ad group, or ad In the editor, click Trash at the bottom of the left sidebar. It shows a count, such as Trash (3). It lists the campaigns, ad groups, and ads deleted from this preview, each with the campaign and ad group it came from, such as Untitled Campaign 1 / Untitled Adgroup 1 / Ad 2. Click Restore to put one back. An ad group or ad shows here only while the campaign and ad group above it are not in trash. The editor will not delete the last ad in an ad group, and says Cannot delete the last ad. It will not permanently delete the last campaign in a preview either, and says Cannot delete the last campaign. ## Why did my ad come back after I sent it to Trash? If moving an ad to Trash cannot be saved, the ad stays where it was, still selected, and you see one message that says why. Nothing is lost. On a sample, the message is Build your own ad in a new dashboard. Samples stay as samples. See The sample ad. ## Why can't I restore or empty the trash? The workspace is view-only, for example after a failed payment. The preview Trash says This workspace is read-only. Restore and permanent delete are paused. Your trashed items are kept. Fix the payment on the Billing page, then restore. A member whose role cannot edit cannot restore either. ## Does trash count toward my Free limits? No. On the Free tier, anything in trash is left out of your limits. That covers the client dashboard, its previews, its client share links, and the campaigns, ad groups, and ads inside it. So after you trash a client, you can create a new client, make a new preview, and share it. While a preview, group or client dashboard is in Trash, its client link says This preview isn't available. Ask the person who shared it for a new link. It does not tell your client the workspace needs to upgrade. Restore it and the same link works again. ## Why does restore ask me to upgrade? Restoring brings the item back into your Free limits. If there is no room, an upgrade box opens instead, and the item stays in trash. - A client dashboard, when you already have your one Free client: Client dashboards are full. - A preview, when your 3 Free previews are in use: Your free previews are full, with Delete an old preview instead. - A client whose share link would come back next to another live client link: Ready for your next client? - A campaign, ad group, or ad past the Free number for that spot: Ready to build the full ad? Delete or trash something else to make room, then restore again, or upgrade to Studio. Studio is $149 a month. ## Deleting the whole workspace Trash is for things inside a workspace. Closing the whole workspace is different, and it does not go to trash. There is no trash icon on the workspace menu. Only the owner can delete the workspace, with Delete account at the bottom of Billing in Settings. The subscription is canceled first. --- # Studio troubleshooting: when something in the editor looks broken Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/troubleshooting/ Last verified: 2026-10-21 Fixes for common problems in the PPC Ad Editor editor. ## A field turns red or will not take more text Check its count, such as 28/30. Most fields stop at the limit, including when you paste, so extra characters are not kept. Responsive search headlines and descriptions, YouTube text, and LinkedIn headlines and descriptions let you type past the limit instead. The field and its count turn red until you shorten it. See [Character limits the editor enforces](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/character-limits/). ## An AI draft failed or stalled If a whole-preview draft fails, the bell shows Generation Failed. The Previews list shows Generation Failed or Generation Stalled with a Retry button. Click Retry, or start again with a different Website URL. If Suggest copy says Replace the placeholder URL, put the real final URL on the ad first. If a Get more AI credits window opens, you have used this month's AI credits. ## Export or Approval is missing Export is on every plan, Free tier included. It shows only on responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max previews, and not for someone who can only view the preview. Approval is a Studio feature. It is not included on the Free tier. ## My video will not upload or add As of 21 October 2026, Meta and LinkedIn video takes an MP4, MOV, or WebM file up to 100 MB, or a YouTube, Google Drive, or Dropbox link. A Drive or Dropbox file must be shared as Anyone with the link. If the editor says This video uses a format browsers can't play, export it as H.264 MP4. If it says This video would put the account over its video storage limit, the account has used its video storage, which is capped per account by plan. A YouTube link does not count. Removing a video from a preview does not free its space straight away: a stored video no preview uses is deleted once it is 30 days old. See [Upload a video to a Meta or LinkedIn ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-a-video/) for every message. A Meta carousel card and a YouTube ad take a YouTube link only. Any other link there says Paste a valid YouTube URL (watch, youtu.be, or Shorts). ## An image will not upload If your picture or logo says too large, it is over the limit. Images and logos must be JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP, up to 20 MB each. A bigger file shows a message that ends Maximum file size is 20 MB. Make the file smaller and try again. SVG logos are not accepted. A file that is not a picture, such as a PDF or a renamed document, is turned away with Use a JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP image. Export the picture in one of those formats and upload it again. If you see That upload could not be verified. Try again., the upload did not finish reaching your account. Upload the same file again. Nothing was saved from the failed try. ## An X or Reddit field says someone else updated it When you and a teammate edit the same X ad or Reddit ad at once, a field you did not change no longer replaces their newer text. If you changed the field too, a note says Someone else updated this field. Your text is still here. If you and a teammate edited the same ad at the same time and got a warning, this is it. Click Keep mine to keep what you typed, or Use the latest to take your teammate's version. ## A placement is missing from the preview It may be hidden. On responsive display, Performance Max, and Demand Gen, switch the toggle at the top to Editor. A hidden placement shows dimmed with Hidden from preview. Click the eye on it to show it again. See Placements. ## I cannot add another campaign, ad group, or ad The Free tier includes 2 campaigns per preview, 2 ad groups per campaign, and 2 ads per ad group. One more opens Ready to build the full ad?. Delete or trash one to free its slot, or upgrade to Studio. See [Campaigns, ad groups, and ads in the editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/campaigns-and-ad-groups/). ## Restore asks me to upgrade Restoring from trash brings the item back into your Free limits. If there is no room, an upgrade box opens and the item stays in trash. See Trash. ## The Google Ads import stops If the window says Google Ads access wasn't allowed, reconnect that Google login and allow Google Ads access, then pick the account again. If it says Couldn't load accounts, try again in a moment. If it says No Google Ads accounts on this login, click Refresh list or use another Google login. If a login row says Disconnected · Reconnect, click it to reconnect in the same window. The import only downloads into a preview. The Free plan can import from one linked Google Ads account, and Studio can link as many as you need. ## My client opened the share link on a phone and sees no ad Share links opened on a phone or a tablet show the ad first, in every format. A link that showed an empty page or only a loading screen on a phone before 16 October shows the ad now. Ask your client to reload the page. If a sheet or the comments seem stuck over the ad, the phone's Back button closes them. If the page still shows no ad, open the same link on your own phone. On a Programmatic preview, a placeholder shows until the ads load. Check that the preview still has ads. A page that says This link no longer works means the link was replaced, so send the current one from Copy client link. ## My preview or share link shows example.com instead of my website When an ad has no business name, the preview and the share link show the domain of the Final URL you typed, such as yourbrand.com. They no longer fall back to example.com after you change the Final URL. To show a name instead of the domain, type a Business name on the ad, or pick one from the asset library. A new ad can start with https://www.example.com in the Final URL. Replace it with your own page. A ChatGPT, X, Reddit or Microsoft Ads search ad starts with the Final URL empty instead. ## A preview says Couldn't load this. Please retry shortly. The preview could not load on our side. It is not something you did, and your work is not lost. The problem is reported to the team automatically. Wait a minute and reload the page. If it keeps happening, contact support. --- # What you can use the ad editor for Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/use-cases/ Last verified: 2026-10-13 Five ways to use PPC Ad Editor with your clients and your team, the screens to use for each, and the plan each step needs. ## Mock up a search ad for client sign-off Show a client the exact search ad before it runs. In PPC Ad Editor, open the client's dashboard, click New Preview, and pick Google Ads, then Responsive Search Ad. Under How do you want to start?, pick Draft with AI or Start from scratch. Edit the headlines and descriptions in the editor, then click Copy client link above the live preview and send it. Your client opens the ad without an account. Sharing and comments work on the Free tier. To record a sign-off, open Share settings under More options and set the link to Approval. Your client then sees Approve and Request changes. Approval is a Studio feature. ## Check character limits before the ad goes live Catch lines that run too long before launch. In the PPC Ad Editor editor, each headline and description on a responsive search ad shows a count such as 28/30. A line can run past the limit there, and the field turns red until you shorten it. On other formats the field stops at the limit, including when you paste. To change a word everywhere, use Find and replace, the magnifier at the top right. This works on the Free tier and on Studio. The limits are the editor's, not a promise that the platform will approve the ad. ## Make previews for several channels from one ad Show the same message on Google, Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube. In New Preview, pick Multi-Channel, choose formats under Select Ad Formats, enter the copy once under Enter Ad Content, and set a base name under Name Your Previews. Tick Group these previews to keep them in one grouped editor with a tab for each format. Its Send for approval button shares the whole group with one link. To start from an existing preview, open its menu in the dashboard's Previews list and click Create for other channels. The original stays as it was. Multi-Channel and Create for other channels are Studio features. Meta, LinkedIn, and YouTube previews do not download as ads those platforms import. ## Hand a Google Ads Editor file to whoever launches Give the person who builds the campaign a file to import instead of retyping. In the PPC Ad Editor editor, click Export at the top right, then Google Ads Editor CSV. In the dialog, pick Google Ads Editor (CSV) and click Export CSV. Export shows on responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max previews. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. The download is a file, and PPC Ad Editor sends nothing to Google Ads. The person imports the file in Google Ads Editor. ## Pull a running Google Ads campaign into a preview Review ads that are already running without copying by hand. In New Preview, pick Google Ads and a search, display, or Performance Max format. Under How do you want to start?, pick Import from Google Ads and click Connect & import. Connect the Google account, pick the ad account, click Next: choose campaigns, tick the campaigns, and click the Import button, which shows how many you picked, such as Import 3 campaigns. You get a preview with the campaigns, ad groups, keywords, and extensions. The Free plan can import from one linked Google Ads account, and Studio can link as many as you need. It changes nothing in Google Ads. --- # What's new: recent updates to the ad editor Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/whats-new/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Wondering what changed lately, or what's new this week? These are the recent updates to the PPC Ad Editor editor, newest first. They cover changes released through November 3, 2026. ## November 2026 - 3 Nov: Clicking Add keyword again before you rename the first row now adds New keyword 2, then New keyword 3, instead of failing. A keyword that is already in the ad group shows a clear message instead of an error. See Keywords. - 3 Nov: When a big keyword list fills an ad group, the message now says This ad group is full., or how many more keywords fit. See Keywords. - 3 Nov: Clicking Made with PPC Ad Editor on your own shared preview opens Studio checkout for that workspace, even when you open the link in a new tab. Your clients still go to ppcadeditor.com. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). - 3 Nov: Pictures linked from your own website in Claude and ChatGPT ad mockups can be up to 4 MB. See Preview ads in ChatGPT or Claude. - 2 Nov: Cropped versions of an image stay with the dashboard the image belongs to, so another client's crops no longer show up in this dashboard's previews. See [Asset library](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/asset-library/). - 2 Nov: Signing in to Budget Pacer now carries into the editor, so opening Dashboards does not ask you to sign in a second time. - 2 Nov: Ad mockups in Claude and ChatGPT show Google Search callouts after the description, let Facebook and Instagram ads skip the short link line, and show a picture hosted on your own website instead of a grey box. See Preview ads in ChatGPT or Claude. - 2 Nov: A failed check on whether you copied a share link no longer holds back every product tip email for that hour. - 1 Nov: Selecting or highlighting text no longer opens an Ask Albert about this button over your ad copy. To ask about something, click Ask Albert in the top bar, or press Cmd+J or Ctrl+J. See Ask Albert. - 1 Nov: Visitors in the EU, the EEA, the UK and Switzerland now see a small cookie banner with Reject and Accept for Google Analytics cookies. Everything works the same whichever you pick. See The cookie banner. - 1 Nov: The business name list and the ad preview no longer flash back to a loading skeleton while your assets refresh in the background. They stay on screen as they update. ## October 2026 - 31 Oct: Continue with Google from a free tool on our website now takes you straight to Google's account chooser in the same tab. You no longer land on the sign-up form and click the button again. See Free tools on our website. - 31 Oct: If you keep two clients' dashboards in one workspace, the editor's live preview now only shows the extensions and business names from this preview's dashboard. See Wrong sitelinks showing? on the Asset library page. - 30 Oct: An ad you filled in on a free tool on our website now opens in the editor after you sign up. You only see the setup form when there is nothing of yours to build from. See Free tools on our website. - 30 Oct: Start from scratch on a ChatGPT, X or Reddit ad now opens with example copy written from the dashboard's name, instead of an empty card. Edit it or type over it. See Create a preview. - 30 Oct: Draft with AI no longer cuts sitelinks or snippets mid-word. A phrase that is too long ends at the last whole word that fits. See Draft with AI. - 30 Oct: The logo and picture on a first Search ad now follow Google's asset sizes and shapes. A large picture in another shape is trimmed from the center, and an SVG, icon, animated image or flat graphic is left out. See [First-ad screen: channels, website, and build problems](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/first-ad/). - 30 Oct: If you signed up but have not built an ad yet, you may get one tip email, Your first ad is still waiting, with a Build my first ad button that opens the setup. See Product tip emails. - 29 Oct: A first Search ad built from your website now includes your site's logo and a hero picture. See First-ad screen: channels, website, and build problems. - 29 Oct: Programmatic native ads show in full on a client's phone. See [Preview programmatic ads](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/programmatic/). - 28 Oct: On the Free plan, Your free previews are full now lists the previews that really use your free slots, with the dashboard each one is in, even when you start from the sample dashboard. See PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan. - 28 Oct: The export dialog opens on Google Ads Editor (CSV), and Export PDF downloads the PDF as a file instead of replacing your editor tab. See [Export or download a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export/). - 28 Oct: Share with client opens the share dialog on the first click on a Google search preview, whenever part of the preview is on screen. - 28 Oct: On a Viewer or Commentor share link, the status pill only shows the status. Approval and Editor links can still change the status. See Set a preview's status. - 28 Oct: Take the tour on a Meta, LinkedIn, Reddit, ChatGPT or X preview now says The guided tour isn't available for this ad type yet, instead of doing nothing. - 28 Oct: Continue with Google in a free mockup tool's sign-up box now starts Google sign-in straight away, with your mockup kept. If you signed in on that browser before, the sign-up page says Welcome back. Sign in to save this mockup instead of showing a new-account form. See Free tools on our website. - 28 Oct: On the Free plan, Delete an old preview instead opens a dashboard that holds one of your free previews, so deleting there frees a slot. See PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan. - 28 Oct: Canceling the file window while adding a video to an X or Reddit ad leaves you on the ad you were editing. - 28 Oct: Product tip emails have a one-click unsubscribe that mail apps can show as their own Unsubscribe button. See Product tip emails. - 28 Oct: The Budget Pacer, Ad Recap and AdScanner plan text in checkout now matches those apps. Ad Recap's paid plan keeps change history with no time limit, Budget Pacer lists projected spend and trackers, and Budget Pacer no longer offers extra accounts, trackers or history, which no checkout sells. Ask Albert to open a support ticket for higher Budget Pacer limits. - 27 Oct: After Albert makes a preview, the finished-action card keeps the name on one line, with Open and Undo underneath. See Ask Albert to do it for you. - 28 Oct: Ask Albert can do the work in Studio for you, where Do it cards are switched on for your workspace. Ask him to rename a preview, add sitelinks or images, make a client link or a PDF, invite a teammate, or build a multi-channel preview. You see the card first, it happens when you click Do it, and Undo puts it back. When your plan does not include something, the card shows See plans. See Ask Albert to do it for you. - 28 Oct: Ask Albert can make a new preview with copy he writes, or convert a preview to another format, such as a search ad to a Meta Feed, Story or Reel ad. The new version keeps the images, logo and business name, not only the copy. - 28 Oct: When Albert's main AI provider cannot be reached, he answers on a backup instead of showing an error. - 27 Oct: A disconnected Google Ads account shows as Google Ads disconnected in the notification bell, with Reconnect, instead of a bar across the top of the dashboard. See Notifications. - 27 Oct: Click a Go to button in Ask Albert and it shows Opening… until the page arrives. The message box no longer shows a scrollbar. See Ask Albert. - 27 Oct: Your first ad keeps the lines you typed in a free tool and fills the blank required lines around them. Sample lines you did not edit are left behind, and a picture that could not come across is called out. See Your first ad. - 27 Oct: A tall video in a Meta feed preview shows in a 4:5 frame, the way Meta crops it, instead of a 16:9 box. See [Upload a video to a Meta or LinkedIn ad](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-a-video/). - 26 Oct: A sample offers Make this a real ad, which copies it into your own dashboard so you can share it. See The sample ad. - 26 Oct: A refused move to Trash leaves the ad in place with one message. Restoring several previews shows one message with Undo. See Trash. - 26 Oct: Sign-up on a phone goes straight through, and a slow security check retries by itself. See [Sign in](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/sign-in/). - 26 Oct: The demo at /demo does not save to an account. See [The demo editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/demo/). - 26 Oct: Adding or duplicating an ad on a sample dashboard now shows one note, Build your own ad in a new dashboard. Samples stay as samples., instead of several error messages. See The sample ad. - 22 Oct: If Google sign-in does not finish, the login or sign-up page now says why, for example Google sign-in was cancelled. Try again when you're ready. or That sign-in expired. Try again. See Sign-in didn't finish. - 22 Oct: Continue with Google opens the Google window as part of your click. If the browser still blocks it, sign-in continues in the same tab instead of stopping. See Sign in. - 22 Oct: Moving a shared preview, group or dashboard to Trash no longer makes its client link say the workspace needs to upgrade. The link says This preview isn't available. Ask the person who shared it for a new link. See [Share link permissions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-link-permissions/). - 22 Oct: Only an Owner can invite someone as Owner or resend an Owner invite. An Owner invite stops working if the person who sent it is no longer an Owner. See [Invites, roles, and guests](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invites-roles-guests/). - 22 Oct: When a role change, an invite or an upload is refused, Studio shows the reason once and does not send the same request again. - 22 Oct: Deleting a headline or description happens straight away, with Undo. A line that is pinned or has open comments still asks first. See [Add and delete headlines and descriptions](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/add-and-delete-headlines/). - 22 Oct: On the Free tier, clicking the Studio name in the workspace menu stays in Studio. Only the Upgrade button opens checkout. Until your first ad is finished, Dashboards stays locked and says This unlocks after you finish your first ad. - 22 Oct: If your first ad's full draft takes more than about three minutes, the note in the editor and the dashboard card say Taking longer than usual, and your starter lines stay ready to edit. See First-ad screen: channels, website, and build problems. - 22 Oct: Ad text you typed in a free tool on our website can fill your first ad. If the business you type is different, the first-ad screen asks Use the ad text from the free tool? with Apply and Dismiss. See Free tools on our website. - 22 Oct: In the file import, clicking the drop zone after you add a file still opens the file picker. Download Error Report (CSV) keeps you in the review, and Cancel asks before it throws away fixes AI made. See Import CSV, XLSX, and ZIP files. - 22 Oct: The card that offers to open your first ad goes away when that preview or dashboard is deleted. - 22 Oct: Reddit and X ads take a public Google Drive or Dropbox video link. Paste it into Video URL and click Use link. The video is copied into your account and plays in the preview and on the share link. See the page on uploading a video. - 22 Oct: Only an Owner can make someone an Owner or change an Owner's role, and every account keeps at least one Owner. If a role or dashboard-access change is refused, you see why. Your own role updates in the menu straight away. The Billing role no longer sees Invite teammate. See Invites, roles, and guests. - 22 Oct: Picking a format your plan can't create from the sample dashboard no longer uses up your one client. See The sample ad. - 22 Oct: If an image upload can't be confirmed, you see That upload could not be verified. Try again. instead of a server error. - 21 Oct: The sample ad stays a sample. It does not count as your Free client, does not become your default workspace, and Share on the sample says Samples can't be shared. Build your own ad to share it. instead of an error. Copying the sample puts the copy in a new dashboard of its own. See The sample ad. - 21 Oct: Sign in with a wrong password and the login page names the way back in. It says If you signed up with Google, use Continue with Google above, and names the method you last used on that browser when it knows it. See Sign in. - 21 Oct: On sign-up, clicking Create account after the security check failed runs the check again and creates your account when it passes. - 21 Oct: Google sign-in from a phone or an in-app browser only opens an account when Google has verified that email address. - 21 Oct: The play button on an uploaded or Drive video in Facebook and Instagram previews stays on top, so a click or tap starts the video. - 21 Oct: Albert lists every ad channel you can preview, and says an AI generation uses at most one AI credit. - 21 Oct: Product tip emails stop going out on their own if they start bouncing or someone reports one as spam. - 21 Oct: Single image or video ads, stories and reels play an uploaded MP4, MOV, or WebM video, or a public Google Drive or Dropbox link. See the page on uploading a video. - 21 Oct: Invoices & receipts has its own page. Owners and billing members get every PDF and receipt. Others can ask for a PDF. See [Invoices and receipts](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invoices-and-receipts/). - 21 Oct: A ticket Albert opens for something broken gives you a ticket number, and the team replies by email. - 21 Oct: A new AI preview shows in the list right away, even after Continue in background. - 21 Oct: The PPC Ad Editor connector in the Claude directory uses https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp/preview. It shows ad mockups and format specs only, and does not write to an account. Developer tools that sign in with an API key keep using https://studio.ppcadeditor.com/api/mcp. See [Preview an ad inside ChatGPT or Claude](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/preview-ads-in-chatgpt-or-claude/). - 20 Oct: Continue with Google on the login page asks before it creates an account. If no account uses that Google email, it says No account for the email, with Create a new account and Try another method. Sign up free still creates the account in one click. - 20 Oct: Show me a sample on the first-ad screen opens a sample ad that does not use one of your Free previews or a client. A sample cannot be shared. On Build another ad, Back to dashboard returns to the dashboard without creating anything. See The sample ad. - 20 Oct: Example websites such as mybrand.com, yourbrand.com, yourcompany.com and mybusiness.com are treated as placeholders on the first-ad screen, so it asks for your real site instead of writing copy from them. - 20 Oct: Starter headlines taken from your website skip people's names and short section headings. - 20 Oct: After you create a preview, New Preview stays busy until the preview opens, so only one preview is created. - 20 Oct: An AI draft left running in the background fills in its headlines, descriptions and website when it finishes, with no refresh. - 20 Oct: Connect Google Ads in Settings works before you have any dashboards. - 20 Oct: Without an API key, an AI assistant using our connector shows a mockup with a save link. Creating a share link straight from the assistant needs an API key. Extra headlines or descriptions past what a format takes are left out, and the assistant is told. See [Create ad previews from an AI assistant](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/create-previews-from-an-ai-assistant/). - 19 Oct: Ask ChatGPT or Claude for an ad and see a mockup of it inside the chat, with no account. Click Save & share to keep it in a free account and get a share link. See Preview an ad inside ChatGPT or Claude. - 19 Oct: The sign-up form lists the password rules before you type and ticks each one off. A mismatch in Confirm Password shows straight away, and one click on Create account shows every problem together. A password reset uses the same rules. - 19 Oct: If the sign-up security check times out, Studio retries once on its own, then shows a message with Retry security check. Google and Microsoft sign-up do not wait for it. - 19 Oct: Look around first with no business name opens a filled-in sample ad, marked as a sample, instead of an empty dashboard. - 19 Oct: A placeholder website such as example.com, test.com, localhost or an IP address is no longer read as your site. The first-ad screen asks for your real website, or lets you continue without one. - 19 Oct: Connecting Google Ads and importing campaigns, ad groups and performance works again, after Google stopped accepting the older version of its connection. - 19 Oct: On a shared preview, only the person who wrote a comment can change or remove it from their own device. - 19 Oct: Edit and delete show only on comments you wrote, for you and for your client on a share link. - 19 Oct: Comments on a ChatGPT ad's title or description show on that line in the shared preview. - 19 Oct: Login, sign-up and shared preview links open faster. - 19 Oct: Open my previews goes back to the workspace you were in. Look around first reads Back to dashboard when you return from Start from my website. - 18 Oct: On the first-ad screen, Build needs a business name, typed or read from your website. With both empty it says Add a business name to continue and puts you in the name field, instead of making a My business preview. - 18 Oct: On a ChatGPT ad, Export this ad as active now stays checked, so the ad exports as active when you choose that. - 18 Oct: When you apply a client's proposed revision, the comment still says Suggested by with their name, and a badge shows Applied by with the name of whoever applied it. - 17 Oct: Ask Albert uses the preview you have open. Where his change cards are on, a request to copy this preview, change an ad or list keywords uses the preview on screen and names it on the card. If he cannot finish, he tells you what he still needs. - 17 Oct: Where did the editor tips go? The preview, comment and share tips that popped up while you edited an ad are gone, so the editor stays clear while you write. The cursor still starts in the first headline. - 17 Oct: If your login has no workspace, for example after your workspace was deleted, Continue with Google now stays on You don't have a workspace yet, where you can create a new one, instead of sending you back to login. - 17 Oct: Already signed in? Opening Log in, or a sign-up button on our website, takes you straight to your dashboard or to the ad you just built. The screen says Opening your workspace… for a moment. The sign-in form and the Google window no longer stay on screen. - 17 Oct: Continue with Microsoft shows on login and register only while Microsoft sign-in is turned on. If you do not see it, sign in with Google or your email. - 17 Oct: When an ad has no business name, previews and share links show the domain of the Final URL you typed instead of example.com. - 17 Oct: Duplicating a campaign or an ad group that has the same keyword twice in different capitalization works again. The copy keeps one of each. - 17 Oct: If a preview cannot load on our side, it now says Couldn't load this. Please retry shortly. instead of saying a deployment is in progress, and the problem is reported to the team. - 17 Oct: Save & get a share link on the Performance Max generator never replaces a Performance Max ad you built yourself in the editor. - 17 Oct: A share link that cannot open now says why, such as This client link is paused or This preview isn't available, and a short outage is tried again before the page gives up. - 17 Oct: Bulk add keywords takes thousands of keywords without freezing the editor. Paste a list or upload a CSV or XLSX, check what is ready, skipped or a duplicate, and add it in batches of 500. Big lists sort into themes, show 50 at a time, and can be cleaned up with AI before or after you add them. An ad group holds up to 20,000 keywords. - 16 Oct: Save & get a share link on the free Performance Max generator on our website opens that ad in the editor, with the headlines, long headline, description, call to action, image and logo you entered. It skips the first-ad screen. - 16 Oct: Share links opened on a phone or tablet show the ad again, with readable text in every format. Back closes an open sheet or Comments, and a Shorts ad opens on Shorts and fits the screen. Guest comments show Sending… and cannot be sent twice. - 16 Oct: On an HTML5 banner in Programmatic, the headline, description and advertiser name stay on the ad after you reload. Tabbing out of a field or pressing Enter saves it. - 16 Oct: Going back to the dashboard list no longer leaves the last client open in the left menu. A client shows there only while you are inside it. - 15 Oct: Shared previews fit a phone or tablet. The ad comes first, with one set of actions pinned at the bottom for every format and channel. Swipe between ads, drag sheets closed, and a refresh keeps the same ad open. - 15 Oct: Allow copying in Share preview lets a signed-in viewer click Make it yours to copy that preview into their own workspace and edit it, with no setup wizard. It is off until you turn it on. Include comments sends your comments along. - 15 Oct: Each confirmed address on your Profile has a Receive notifications tick. View and comment emails go to every ticked address. Receipts stay on your default. - 15 Oct: In-stream, in-feed, bumper and Shorts YouTube previews fill the Ad Preview panel. In-feed switches between Search results and Home feed. - 15 Oct: Upload confirmations appear at the top of the screen, so Done and Cancel stay clickable. Performance Max channel filters, asset status and the mockup sit in one scrolling list, and desktop search previews shrink to show the start of each line. - 15 Oct: Albert's Show me and Not now sit in the Ask Albert button instead of covering the page. - 15 Oct: Back from the first-ad screen no longer reopens it. Clicking the selected Build your ad card moves you to the field that blocks the build. Late AI copy now reaches Meta Story first ads. Connecting Google Ads right after an interrupted mobile sign-in no longer drops you on the start screen. - 14 Oct: Choosing Import from Google Ads on the first-ad screen opens the account picker right away, and coming back from Google's sign-in stays in that window. - 14 Oct: A Studio workspace that is full on clients opens Add-ons on Billing when you add another client from the wizard. It no longer offers a new Studio checkout or the Free limit message. - 14 Oct: A client you build from the wizard shows in the dashboard list and the left menu without a page reload, under its real name. - 14 Oct: Continue in background on an AI draft keeps the progress on screen, and the preview opens with the finished copy. - 14 Oct: Clicking or selecting text in a headline, description or other field no longer opens the Ask Albert about this popup. The popup has a dismiss ×, and Esc closes it. - 14 Oct: The comments panel starts below the Google Ads reconnect notice, so its title and close button are visible. - 14 Oct: On a Meta single image or video, carousel, or story or reel ad, Apply to beside the logo button copies the profile image and name to the other ads in the ad set, or to every ad in the preview. Free plan ads that are locked are skipped and counted. - 13 Oct: A business name you type on the first-ad screen now stays with your own account in this browser. Signing out or signing in as another account starts the screen blank, and reloading your own account brings the name back. - 13 Oct: The Free plan can link one Google Ads account and import campaigns from it. To switch, unlink it in Settings, then Integrations, and connect another. Studio links as many as you need. A first ad also keeps the opening lines from the website you entered, and on Build another ad a channel vote or a language request stays on the page. When free previews are full, Delete an old preview instead opens that dashboard's preview list. - 13 Oct: On the first-ad screen, Build now works with the name field empty. It uses the business name from your signup, or My business, and keeps the format you picked. - 12 Oct: A first ad built from a business name alone no longer says it is still writing for minutes. After about 90 seconds it keeps the starter lines and asks for your website. Type it and click Write from site to get copy written from that site. The Look around card only says the copy came from your site when it did. A comment on a shared link quotes the line that was clicked, and clicking the website in a YouTube or Meta setup preview selects the website field. - 12 Oct: The first-ad screen has an optional Business type. Pick one from the list or type your own. Leaving it blank builds the same ad as before. - 12 Oct: When your free previews are full, the message now lists what Studio adds: unlimited previews, no watermark, 3 client dashboards, unlimited campaigns and ads, and approvals plus unlimited comments. It no longer lists LinkedIn, which the Free plan already includes. - 10 Oct: Your first ad opens with a photo from your website as the main image, not the logo, and with complete lines instead of cut-off website text. When the written copy is ready it replaces the opening lines without a reload. Performance Max exports enlarge small images to the sizes Google Ads accepts, and Send to Trash puts the preview in Trash straight away so you can restore it. - 9 Oct: The first-ad screen is one card with a tab for each channel and a format row for Google, Meta, and LinkedIn. Build keeps the format you pick, including Demand Gen, Meta carousel and story, LinkedIn carousel, and Microsoft Ads. - 9 Oct: In a ChatGPT ad, an image you upload now appears and is selected, or a notice offers Crop to 1:1. A profile image set on an X, Reddit, or ChatGPT ad stays on that ad and no longer changes your dashboard logo. Use dashboard logo puts it back. - 9 Oct: On the first-ad screen, a website alone is enough to build, and Company name is optional when you sign up. X, Reddit, ChatGPT, and Programmatic first ads built from a website now open with copy and an image, and Google Search no longer loses all its headlines when a site is thin. - 8 Oct: You can register and sign in with Continue with Microsoft, the same way as with Google. Company single sign-on is still its own login, now labelled Sign in with company SSO. - 8 Oct: On the dashboard, Start from my website opens the first-ad screen again as Build another ad, so you can build a new ad from a name and website. - 8 Oct: Settings has one menu on the left with three groups, Account, Workspace and Studio. The page and the plan details are unchanged. - 8 Oct: Profile has a Display name you can edit, shown on your comments and approvals. Receipts and mail can go to another confirmed address with Add email and Make default. Only your login email signs in. - 8 Oct: Create AI Preview no longer stops when a site blocks the visit or does not respond. Choose Web search, Another page, or A short description, and the preview still builds. - 8 Oct: On Look around first, a draft with too few lines shows SHORT DRAFT instead of Share for comments, until it has three headlines and two descriptions. - 8 Oct: Deleting a workspace now cancels the subscription first, and removes dashboards, previews and data only after the cancellation is confirmed. - 8 Oct: In an X ad or a Reddit ad, a field you left alone no longer replaces a teammate's newer text. If you both changed it, choose Keep mine or Use the latest. - 8 Oct: A file that is not a picture is turned away when you upload an image or logo, with Use a JPEG, PNG, GIF, or WebP image. - 7 Oct: On the current Free plan, every ad channel and format is open to create, including LinkedIn, Demand Gen, Programmatic, and Microsoft Ads. Some older Free accounts stay on Responsive search, Responsive display, Meta single image or video, and YouTube. - 7 Oct: Images and logos upload up to 20 MB each, and GIF files are accepted. SVG logos are not. - 7 Oct: My Profile can hold another email address for receipts and product mail. Add it with + Add email, confirm it, then click Use for mail. Sign-in and password reset stay on your signup address. - 7 Oct: The first ad opens with whole starter lines instead of cut-off ones, and a YouTube ad plays a short sample clip when no video is found. The note at the bottom of the editor says a closer draft can take a few minutes, and you can edit the lines already in the ad. - 7 Oct: On a client review link, clicking a headline, a description, or the primary text starts a comment. - 7 Oct: An empty video box on Meta, LinkedIn, Display, Performance Max, and Demand Gen opens Add Video. - 7 Oct: Microsoft Ads is a new channel under Search & AI Answers. Preview a Responsive Search Ad in Bing's layout. It is a Studio channel and not exportable. - 7 Oct: New Preview groups channels under Search & AI Answers, Shopping, Social feeds, and Video & display. Cards marked coming soon cannot be picked yet. - 7 Oct: On the first-ad screen, picking a locked channel no longer builds an ad. Start free on a format takes you back to a Free channel. - 7 Oct: On Free, Google Ads import now says it is part of Studio, with Upgrade to Studio, instead of Unable to load accounts. - 7 Oct: Add Video on Meta and LinkedIn takes a YouTube link (from 21 Oct also an upload or a Drive or Dropbox link), and the trash dialog says items are recoverable for 30 days. - Look around first on the first-ad screen now builds the ad from the business name and website, then opens your dashboard while the copy is written. A card shows BUILDING, then READY, and Open in the editor takes you to the ad. - Until you have a dashboard, Dashboards in the left menu is greyed out and says After your first ad. - When Suggest copy cannot read your page, pick Web search, Another page, or A short description. No credit is used. - Programmatic is a first-ad channel on Studio, and it opens blank. - Quick build sits next to New Preview. Pick a channel, a format, and how to start, and the preview opens. - Answers from Ask Albert can end with Go to, Request, and up to three Ask next questions. Clear chat (the trash icon) empties the chat, and Undo brings it back for 5 seconds. - You can add a note to a support ticket Ask Albert opens. Feature requests get a ticket number and show under Your requests. - When you ask Ask Albert about a format you have no preview for, it offers Start a new preview with that format picked. - On Free, a preview holds 2 campaigns, 2 ad groups per campaign, and 2 ads per ad group, up to 24 ads across your previews. Deleting or trashing an ad group frees its slots. - On Free, a client in the trash no longer counts toward your limits. You can start a new client, build a preview, and share it again. - Share with client now opens on responsive display and Performance Max previews. - Client links from another workspace now load comments while you are signed in to your own account. - Every comment thread now loads, even on previews with more than 50 threads. - When the Email field shows on a share link, a client who leaves an email with a comment gets an email when your team replies. - Client comments show the name your client typed. Owners and Admins can take a teammate off a single dashboard. - Compare plans opens Billing instead of starting checkout. - If the sign-up security check times out, click Retry security check. - Buying Studio Pro together with another product now gets the multi-product discount at checkout. - In programmatic, Replace file keeps the ad's copy, logo, and a name you typed. New Preview starts programmatic from scratch and opens the programmatic editor. - Upgrade screens no longer list export as a Studio extra, and the cancel dialog no longer lists it as something you lose. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. - Programmatic is a new channel in New Preview, for display banners, native ads, and video ads. You see them in publisher placements and share them for review. Programmatic is available with Studio. - Ask Albert can put up to three buttons under an answer. Each one takes you to the place the answer describes. - 13 Oct: Importing from Google Ads happens in one window. Continue in background lets you continue. - 13 Oct: The first-ad screen offers Import from Google Ads, and keeps Build and Look around first in a bar at the bottom. - 13 Oct: The Finish your first ad reminder goes away once you are in your ad. - 13 Oct: With one client, its row shows an Open button. Start from my website is now Create dashboard from wizard. - 13 Oct: Trash now sits in the left menu, even after you delete your last client. - 13 Oct: Click an image on a shared link to see it full size. - 13 Oct: Project Pass is gone and no longer unlocks anything. ## September 2026 - Sending a dashboard to the trash, or deleting it, frees its place under your plan's dashboard limit. A dashboard in the trash stays closed until you restore it, and it leaves the left menu. - On a search ad, an extension you uncheck for an ad group stays off that ad group, even when it is shared with the whole account. - A business name set in Shared Info on Multi-Channel now shows on each channel's preview. - If your role cannot delete a dashboard, the dialog stays open and says You don't have permission to delete this dashboard. Owners can empty the trash. - On a phone, the editor stays within the screen. - Draft with AI is not offered for Multi-Channel previews. A single-channel preview still has it. - Sign in with SSO sits under Continue with Google. Enter your work email. If your company is not set up, sign in with email or Google instead. - If a preview, share, or checkout sent you to sign in, you return to that page after you sign in. - On the Free tier, Upgrade plan in the left menu and Upgrade in Settings open Stripe checkout for Studio. - Dashboards, Settings, and Scans on the first-ad screen open those pages and leave you there. - YouTube headlines in the editor stop at 30 characters, and descriptions and the long headline stop at 90, including when you paste. - If your role in a workspace can only view and comment, New Preview is hidden, and the app says to ask an editor or owner to create the preview. - Opening your client's view of a preview from the editor keeps the editor tab signed in. - The Studio row in the left menu shows your workspace's plan, such as Free. Upgrade plan appears there only on the Free tier. - Billing now has one page, Billing under Manage workspace. It lists your products, the next invoice, the card on file, and past invoices with a PDF of each. Old billing links open this page. - The first-ad screen shows the left menu on a desktop, so you can move to another product before you build. - If you sign up from a responsive display or Performance Max tool on the PPC Ad Editor website, your first ad keeps that format. Performance Max needs Studio. - While the first ad's copy is written, the note at the bottom of the editor says it is still writing, which can take up to a minute. If the drafted copy cannot be used, the editor shows Using starter copy for now and offers Retry. ## August 2026 - A Copy client link button sits above the live preview in the editor. The first time you copy, a card lets you email the link to your reviewer with Email the link. - When your client's view is already on screen, Share with client opens the share dialog on the first click. - New campaigns and ad groups you add to a preview carry its logo, business name, final URL, images, and extensions. - A link set to Approval always shows your client the Approve and Request changes buttons. Approval is a Studio feature. - Multi-Channel in New Preview creates previews again. It opens Select Ad Formats, and the name you typed becomes the base name. Multi-Channel needs Studio. - Suggest copy stops when the ad's final URL is still the placeholder, and asks you to replace it. - Signing up with email opens the first-ad screen already signed in, with your company name filled in as the client or business name. - If you built an ad on a PPC Ad Editor website tool before signing up, the first-ad screen carries over its business name, website, channel, and headlines. - See a sample ad on the first-ad screen shows a finished example without saving it. --- # Delete a workspace or account Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/workspace-deletion/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 The workspace owner deletes the account with Delete account at the bottom of the Plans & billing page. Deleting it cancels the Studio subscription first. The workspace's dashboards, previews and data are removed only after that cancellation is confirmed. It cannot be undone. There is no separate control that deletes your login. ## How do I close or delete my account? 1. Open the Plans & billing page. Click Manage workspace at the bottom of the left menu. Or click your workspace name at the top of the left menu, then click Billing next to Your plans. 2. Scroll to Delete account at the bottom of the page. It says deleting the account closes this workspace, that the subscription is canceled first, and that dashboards, previews and data are removed only after that cancellation is confirmed. 3. Click Delete account. 4. The confirmation asks Delete, then the workspace name. Click Delete account to confirm, or Cancel to stop. ## What happens after I delete it? - The workspace, its dashboards, previews and data are gone for everyone in it, including teammates and anyone you invited. - Client links to its previews stop working. - If you belong to another workspace, you land on that workspace's dashboards. - If it was your only workspace, you are signed out and taken to the login page. ## I don't see Delete account Only the owner sees Delete account. Admins, billing members and other roles do not. Ask the workspace owner to delete it. There is no trash icon in the workspace menu. ## Delete account shows an error - This workspace still has a paid product subscription. Cancel that subscription before deleting the workspace. Budget Pacer, Ad Recap or another product is still billed on this workspace. Cancel it from its row on the same page, then try again. If you already cancelled it and still see this message, contact support. - We couldn't confirm the subscription was canceled, so this workspace was not deleted. Try again. Nothing was removed. Try again in a moment. - Workspace deletion is temporarily unavailable. Try again shortly. Nothing was removed. Wait a few minutes and try again. ## I only want to stop paying To stop paying and keep your work, cancel the product instead of deleting the workspace. Studio Pro is cancelled with Manage on its row on the Billing page. Your previews stay saved after a cancellation. --- # After you pay Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/after-checkout/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Just paid? Here is what happens now. After checkout you land on a confirmation page. What it says depends on how you bought. ## I bought a product. What does the confirmation page mean? After checkout in the app, the Confirmed page opens. - Payment is being confirmed means your card is being charged now. Everything unlocks the moment the invoice clears, usually in a few seconds. Nothing else is needed from you. - The product name followed by is live means it is ready. For two or more products, the title reads You're on, then the product names. - When you added a product to an existing bill, the page says how much was charged to which card, and what your monthly bill is from the next renewal date. - When a multi-product discount applies, the page says the discount is on your next invoice. For two products it reads Both products are active, and the 15% multi-product discount is on your next invoice. - When a promo code is still running on your bill, the page says the code continues until a date and the multi-product discount starts after it ends. - Otherwise it says Everything unlocked straight away. Your next invoice shows the prorated amount. Click Back to where I was to return to the thing you were doing before checkout, or to the product you bought. Click View billing to open the Billing page. On the Billing page, a product that is still settling shows Payment pending and Unlocks as soon as the invoice clears. ## I closed the payment page without paying. Did it charge me? Nothing is charged. Back on Billing, a message says Checkout canceled. No changes were made to your subscription. If you started checkout from a preview, you go back to it. ## I upgraded to Studio Pro. Where do I land? You come back to Billing in Manage workspace and see Welcome to Studio!, then You're now on the Studio plan!. If it says Payment received, but Studio isn't active yet, refresh Billing or contact support, and do not pay again. If it says We couldn't confirm your Studio upgrade, refresh the page. If you are still on Free, contact support and do not pay again. ## I just paid. Why did it take me to the first-ad screen? If you bought Studio before building a real ad, Studio takes you from Billing to the first-ad screen, with a note that you're now on your new plan and Let's build your first ad. A sample ad does not count as a real ad. If you already have a real preview, or you started checkout from a preview, you stay on Billing or go back to that preview. ## I paid from the demo without an account Checkout from the demo opens a Finishing setup page with your receipt and a short checklist. 1. The receipt first reads Confirming your payment…, then Payment confirmed with the plan, the monthly price and receipt emailed. For Studio Pro the receipt shows $149/mo. 2. Workspace created means your ad and your purchase are saved to your email. 3. Under Choose a password for next time, type a password and click Save & open my ad. A good password has 8+ characters with a capital letter and a number. You are already signed in on this browser. The password is only for coming back. 4. Your ad opens in the editor, where you left it in the demo. ## The email I paid with already has an account The checklist says Purchase attached to your account. Under Sign in to open it, enter that account's password and click Sign in & open my ad. Signing in never re-charges anything. Click Forgot password? to get a reset link. ## Setup is taking longer than usual If the page says Confirming your payment is taking longer than usual, or Signing you in is taking longer than usual, nothing is lost. The page keeps trying in the background and moves on by itself when it works. You can also click Email me a sign-in link, click Sign in with password instead, or click Message support to have the team finish it with your order attached. --- # Budget pacing calculator on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/budget-pacer-calculator-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-26 The Budget Pacer page on ppcadeditor.com, at /tools/budget-tracker/, has a free pacing calculator. Type a monthly budget and what you have spent so far, set the day of the month, and it shows your pace, where spend lands at month end, and how much to spend each day to land on budget. It needs no account and does not connect to your ad accounts. ## How do I use the pacing calculator? 1. Open ppcadeditor.com/tools/budget-tracker/ and scroll to the calculator. 2. Type your Monthly budget and the amount Spent so far. 3. Drag the slider to the day of the month. The label reads Today is day 9 of 30, for example. 4. Read Spend vs ideal pace, Projected month-end, Current pace and the daily amount to spend for the rest of the month. Your numbers stay in your browser, so they are still there when you come back. ## How does the calculator work out pace? It uses straight-line pacing over a 30-day month. Today does not count yet, so on day 9 it compares your spend with the ideal spend for 8 full days. Pace between 95% and 105% reads On pace. On day 1 there are no full days yet, so it shows No completed days yet. ## Which pace words does the website calculator use? The calculator now uses the same five words as Budget Pacer. Between 95% and 105% of ideal pace it says On pace. Between 105% and 115% it says Spending a bit fast, and between 80% and 95% it says Spending a bit slow. Above 115% it says Spending too fast, and below 80% it says Spending too slow. The stamp on the card reads ON PACE, A BIT FAST, A BIT SLOW, TOO FAST or TOO SLOW to match. ## Why does Budget Pacer show a slightly different pace from the calculator? The bands are the same, but the calculator counts every month as 30 days. Budget Pacer uses the real number of days in the month and reads your real spend from your ad accounts, so its percentage can differ by a point or two near the edge of a band. ## What happens when I click Track this automatically? A sign-up window opens, See this dashboard with your real numbers. Click Continue with Google, or type your work email and click Create account. After you sign up, PPC Ad Editor shows Setting up Budget Pacer... and takes you to Budget Pacer instead of the ad editor, where you connect Google Ads or Microsoft Ads and build trackers. The numbers you typed in the calculator do not carry over, because Budget Pacer reads your real spend from your ad accounts. ## Does the calculator change my campaigns? No. The calculator only does math on the numbers you type. Budget Pacer itself reads spend from your ad accounts and never edits campaigns, budgets or bids. --- # Cancel a product or end a trial Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/cancel-a-product/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Want to stop paying for Ad Recap, Budget Pacer or another product? You can cancel one product and keep the others. Budget Pacer, Ad Recap and Intel Pro have Cancel on their row on the Billing page. Studio Pro is cancelled in the billing portal. ## How do I cancel a product? 1. Open Billing under Manage workspace. Click your workspace name at the top of the left menu, then click Billing. 2. On the product's row in Your products, click Cancel. 3. The Cancel page says the product stays available until the end of the period you paid for, then stops renewing. Everything it produced stays saved and viewable. Cancelling removes the subscription, never your work. 4. Read What changes, then pick a reason under Why are you cancelling? if you want to. The reasons are Not using it enough, Too expensive, Missing something I need, and Using another tool instead. 5. Click Cancel at period end. To stop, click Keep and the product name. A message confirms the date the product ends. Back on Billing, its row shows Cancels and Ends with that date · no further charges. ## Will cancelling change what I pay for the other products? It can. When you pay for two products, each one is 15% off. Three or more are 25% off each. The What changes panel shows the price you stop paying, the Multi-product discount line, and Your bill before and after. The discount line reads Unchanged, Drops to 15% with the number of paid products left, or Ends when only one paid product is left. With no discount on the bill, it reads No discount applies. The discount stays until the cancelled product ends, and then your remaining products are billed at the new price. ## Where is Cancel for AdScanner Pro or AdMinerX Pro? Their rows show Upgrade instead, which moves you to Intel Pro, the two together on one line. To cancel AdScanner Pro or AdMinerX Pro on its own, contact support. When one of them is cancelled while you still pay for the other, the other keeps working as it does today. ## How do I cancel Studio Pro? On the Studio Pro row, click Manage. It opens the billing portal, where you cancel the subscription. If you try to cancel Studio Pro from the Cancel page while you pay for other products, it says Cancel Studio Pro in the billing portal, with Open billing portal. ## Why does it send me to the billing portal? When the product is your last paid product, the Cancel page says This is your last paid product and tells you to cancel the subscription in the billing portal. Click Open billing portal and cancel there. Some older accounts see Manage this subscription in the billing portal for the same reason. ## End a free trial, or remove an ended Budget Pacer trial A product on a trial has End trial on its row. The End trial page says the product stays saved for 30 days after you end the trial. Nothing is billed, and a trial cannot be started again on this workspace. Click End trial. After a trial has ended, the row has Remove instead. The page and its button read Remove and the product name. Removing deletes the trial data. Nothing is billed, and a trial cannot be started again on this workspace. A message confirms the product was removed from this workspace. ## Why is there no Cancel on a past-due product? A product whose payment failed shows Past due and Fix payment instead of Cancel. Fix the payment first. See [My payment failed](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/payment-failed/). ## Who can cancel? An owner, an admin, or a billing member. Anyone else sees You can't cancel billing on this workspace, with Ask an owner, admin, or billing member to cancel a product. --- # ChatGPT Ads Manager guide on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/chatgpt-ads-guide-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-27 I read your ChatGPT Ads Manager guide. What can I do in PPC Ad Editor? Build the ChatGPT ad card for a client, share one link for review, and export an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook that you upload to Ads Manager yourself. The guide is at ppcadeditor.com/chatgpt-ads-manager/. Facts about OpenAI's own Ads Manager, such as countries, who sees ads and minimum budgets, come from OpenAI. Check OpenAI's help center for the current rules. ## Where does Build a ChatGPT ad on the guide take me? Build a ChatGPT ad opens sign-up for PPC Ad Editor. It does not carry anything from the guide into the editor. After you sign up, the first-ad screen asks Where does it run first? Click the ChatGPT tab to start a ChatGPT ad. Already signed up? Open New Preview and pick ChatGPT. See Your first ad. ## Why does PPC Ad Editor stop my title at 24 characters when the guide says Ads Manager allows 50? The editor keeps a ChatGPT ad's Title to 24 characters and its Description to 48, the top of OpenAI's recommended ranges, so the ad exports cleanly in the bulk-upload workbook. The editor notes under each field that OpenAI recommends 16 to 24 characters for a title and 32 to 48 for the description. If you want a longer title or copy, edit it in Ads Manager after you upload. ## Can my client approve the ChatGPT ad from the link? Your client can open the share link in a browser with no account and comment on the ad. Recording a client's sign-off with Approval is a Studio feature. See Approval. ## Will OpenAI change my ChatGPT ad later? It can, unless you opt out in OpenAI Ads Manager. Our guide explains that OpenAI turns on creative enhancements by default from October 30, 2026. With them on, OpenAI may reword the headline and description, resize the image or send the click to another page of the site, without showing each version first. That setting lives in Ads Manager under Manage settings, not in PPC Ad Editor. The preview and share link in PPC Ad Editor show the ad exactly as you wrote it. They do not show versions OpenAI may make later. If your client agreed to exact wording, opt out in Ads Manager before the campaign starts. ## Can I export the ChatGPT ad on the Free tier? Yes. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. Pick OpenAI Ads Manager workbook in the export dialog and click Export workbook. See [Export a ChatGPT ad to OpenAI Ads Manager](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export-a-chatgpt-ad/). ## Does PPC Ad Editor run my ChatGPT ads? No. PPC Ad Editor does not connect to OpenAI Ads Manager or publish ads. You upload the workbook in Ads Manager, and OpenAI reviews and runs the ads there. --- # Negative Keywords, Insights, Performance Anomaly: not available yet, and their pages on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/coming-soon-tools-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 I joined the waitlist for Negative Keywords on your website. Can I use it? Not yet. Negative Keywords, Insights, Performance Anomaly: these three tools are not available in PPC Ad Editor today. They are tools we are considering, and we do not give a date. Their pages on our website, under Tools, carry a Coming Soon badge in the tools directory, and each page says the tool is coming soon. ## Is there a waitlist for these tools? No. There is no waitlist and no early access list. ## What does the Create a free account button on a coming-soon tool page do? The pages for Negative Keywords, Insights, Performance Anomaly are for tools that are not available yet, and their Create a free account button opens the PPC Ad Editor sign-up page. It creates a Free PPC Ad Editor account, so you can keep building ad previews in the meantime. It does not put you on a list for that tool, and it does not reserve or lock in a price. ## What did Join the Waitlist do? Until 2 November 2026 the same button said Join the Waitlist. It always opened the PPC Ad Editor sign-up page and created a Free account. It did not add you to a list or lock in founding member pricing. If you signed up from one of those pages, your Free account is a normal account, and you can use it today. ## What are the prices on these pages? The pages show a Planned pricing section. Those are prices planned for launch of a tool that is not available yet. You cannot buy these tools today, and nothing is charged. ## How do I tell you I want one of these tools? Inside the app, once you are signed in: 1. Click the grid icon in the top bar, for example on your Dashboards page. 2. Under the line you see Insights, Negative KW, Performance Anomaly, which are not available yet. Each has a Notify me button. 3. Click Notify me on the one you want. The button changes to Notified. That only tells us you would use it. Nothing is added to your plan or your bill. You can also vote on the roadmap page of our website for Insights, Negative Keywords or Performance Anomaly, which are not available yet, or send us the idea with Suggest a feature. See [Roadmap and feature votes on our website](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/roadmap-on-our-website/). ## Can I find wasted search terms or add negative keywords in the editor today? No. The editor does not read your search terms report and does not suggest negative keywords. The editor previews ads. When you paste a keyword list into an ad group, a line that starts with a minus sign is skipped. See [Keywords: add, bulk paste, and suggest keywords for an ad group](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/keywords/). ## What can I use today to watch spend and account edits? Yes. Budget Pacer shows settled spend against expected spend for each tracker and emails you when a tracker paces over or under. Ad Recap shows what changed in your Google Ads and Microsoft Ads accounts and who changed it. See I do not know which product I need. --- # Do you have an Enterprise plan? Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/enterprise-plan/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Yes. Enterprise is arranged with our sales team, not bought in checkout. Start on the Enterprise page of our website, ppcadeditor.com/enterprise/. It has two buttons: - Contact Enterprise sales opens an email to our sales team in your mail app. - Book an Enterprise Demo opens our contact page, ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/, so you can ask for a walkthrough first. ## Can I buy Enterprise in checkout? No. Our team agrees the terms and the price with you. Checkout in the app does not sell Enterprise, and there is no Enterprise button on the Free plan's upgrade screens. When you click Upgrade on Free, checkout sells Studio at $149 a month. ## What is the difference between Studio and Enterprise? Studio is the self-serve plan you can buy yourself from the app. Enterprise is for larger teams that need more than Studio and want it set up with our help. Two things in the app point to Enterprise: - API keys. In Settings, the API Keys pane is for Enterprise workspaces. On other plans it says API access requires Enterprise. - White Label, your own domain and logo on every preview. It is set up by hand, not self-serve. Request it from Manage workspace, then The Lab. For what Studio includes, see PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan. ## Can I see the product before I talk to sales? Yes. Sign up free and build a preview, or open the sample editor at /demo in the app with no account. Book an Enterprise Demo if you want our team to walk you through it. ## What does Billing show on an Enterprise workspace? An Enterprise workspace is billed on a contract, so its Billing page works differently from self-serve checkout. - Your products shows Studio · Enterprise with a Contract badge. Other products on the contract show In contract and Included. - The heading note reads Changes go through your account manager. The footer shows the contract total and, when you are invoiced, Net 30. - Products you do not have yet show Contract rate and Contact us instead of a price and Add. Clicking one opens a message to our team, and the page then says We'll be in touch within one business day. - The payment card reads Paid by bank transfer, Card on file, or Plan managed by administration. To add a product, seats or dashboards, or to change the contract, click Contact us. A checkout link on a contract workspace says This workspace is on a contract. Contact us to change what is included. ## I already have an older plan that lists Enterprise Some older paid plans show a plan list with Starter, Premium and Enterprise. Enterprise there has Contact Us instead of a price. Clicking it opens a window to contact our team. The website buttons above work too. --- # Try the products before you sign up: the Examples page Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/examples-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-19 Want to try PPC Ad Editor without an account? The Examples page on ppcadeditor.com, at /examples/, lists live examples of the editor, Budget Pacer, Ad Recap, AdScanner and AdMinerX that you can open with no login. ## What kinds of examples are there? Each card has a badge that says what it opens. - OPENS THE EDITOR. Click Try it live → to open the sample editor at /demo on that format or screen, such as the RSA Editor, Display Ads Editor, Performance Max Editor, Demand Gen Editor, YouTube Editor, Meta Single, Meta Carousel, Meta Story, LinkedIn Single and LinkedIn Carousel. Others open a screen, such as Grouped Previews, Multi-Channel Previews, Adaptive Preview, Client Commenting, Dashboard Overview and One-Click Export. - READ-ONLY SAMPLE. Click See the sample → to look at a sample screen you cannot change, such as the Budget Pacer Pacing dashboard and Budget tracker, the Ad Recap Monday digest and Change summary, and the AdScanner Competitor scan. - EXTENSION WALKTHROUGH. Click Run a Lite search → for the Search ads capture walkthrough. The card notes Local pulls need the Chrome extension. Use the chips at the top, All, Build, Preview, Review, Ship and Run, to show only the examples for one step of the job. ## Is the example my own workspace? No. The editor examples open the demo, a sample editor filled with a made-up business. Nothing you do there is saved to an account, and sharing, exporting and approvals open an upgrade window instead. To keep working on your own ads, create a free account. See [The demo editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/demo/). ## How do I go from an example to my own ad? Create a free account from the site, or from the demo's Create a free account button. You land on the first-ad screen, where you type your business name or website and click Build. What your account can do depends on its plan, not on the example. --- # The Facebook and Instagram ad mockup page on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/facebook-and-instagram-mockup-page-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Is there a free Facebook ad mockup generator? Yes. The Facebook and Instagram ad mockup generator page on our website shows what a Facebook or Instagram ad mockup looks like in PPC Ad Editor, and you build the real mockup in the editor on the Free plan. The page itself does not build or share an ad. ## What can I do on the Facebook and Instagram ad mockup page? Under the heading are three boxes, Your brand, yourbrand.com and One headline. Type your brand name, your website and one headline. When you sign up from that page, they come with you into PPC Ad Editor and start your first ad. You can also open the live demo without signing up. ## Which Facebook and Instagram formats can I mock up? In the editor you can mock up the Facebook feed on mobile, the Facebook feed on desktop, Facebook Stories, the Facebook carousel, the Instagram feed, the Instagram carousel and Instagram Reels. Each one has its own layout, so pick the one that matches where the ad will run. Messenger, Audience Network, Marketplace and right column placements are not included. See Edit a Meta ad. ## Where does my Facebook ad copy get cut off in the mockup? In the Facebook feed mockup, primary text stops after 3 lines with See more, the headline is cut at 48 characters with an ellipsis, and the description is cut at 30 characters. That shows you where your copy breaks before your client sees it. ## Is the Facebook mockup free? Yes. The Free plan for new accounts includes every format, Facebook and Instagram included, with 3 previews, 1 shared preview at a time and 3 guest comments per preview. Accounts on an earlier Free plan do not get every format. Studio Pro is $149 a month and removes those caps. ## Can my client comment on a Facebook ad mockup without an account? Yes. Send the preview's share link. Your client opens it without an account and clicks the part of the Facebook feed ad they want to talk about, the profile image, the business name, the primary text, the image, the URL, the headline, the description or the call to action button. Their comment stays on that part. See Comments. ## Can my client approve the Facebook ad or edit the copy? Only on Studio. On Studio, set the share link to Approval and your client can click Approve or Request changes, or set it to Editor and they can edit the copy in the shared preview. On the Free plan both stay locked, and your client can still open the link and comment. See Approve a preview. ## What size is an Instagram ad mockup? Pick the layout first, Instagram feed, Instagram carousel or Instagram Reels, and the mockup uses that layout. The page does not list pixel sizes or aspect ratios. Check Meta's current ad specs before you upload final creative to Ads Manager. ## Where did the old Facebook mockup blog posts go? Two older posts about making Facebook ad mockups now open this page instead. Old links and bookmarks to them still work and land here. ## What does this page not do? It does not publish ads to Facebook or Instagram, and it does not connect to your Meta ad account. To pull existing ads from a Meta ad account into a preview, see Import from Meta Ads. --- # The Features page on our website, How it works Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/features-page-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 What is on the Features page, the how it works page of our website? It is the page linked as Features in the website's header, at ppcadeditor.com/how-it-works/. It walks one client job in five steps, with the product that does each one: 1. Pitch with their ad. AdScanner or AdMinerX pulls the ads a prospect is running so you can rebuild one. 2. Build it and preview it, in the editor. 3. Send one link, so your client comments on the ad itself. 4. Get the yes. Export the file. Your client approves on the same link, and you export a file for Google Ads Editor. 5. Pace it and recap it, with Budget Pacer and Ad Recap. Below the steps are short answers, a card for each product, and a price calculator. ## The Features page says export needs Studio Pro. Is export free? Yes, export is free. The Features page says approval and export need Studio Pro, but in the app Export is on every plan, Free tier included. You can export a Google Ads Editor CSV or a PDF on Free. Approval is the part that needs Studio. See [Export or download a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export/). ## Is Ad Recap still in beta? No. The Features page shows a Beta badge on Ad Recap's card, but Ad Recap is not in beta. It is a full product at /adrecap. See [What Ad Recap does](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ad-recap/overview/). ## Does the editor publish my ads to Google Ads? No, and the Features page says the same. The editor exports a file that you import into Google Ads Editor yourself. Budget Pacer reads spend and never changes your account. Ad Recap reports what changed and who changed it, and it cannot undo a change. --- # Free ad mockup tools on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/free-tools-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 Yes, ppcadeditor.com has free ad mockup tools that run in your browser, with no account. You type your copy and the mockup changes as you type. The website tools do not save your work, create a share link, or download a file. To keep an ad, send it to a client, or keep editing it, click Build your first mockup free. That opens sign-up for a free PPC Ad Editor account, and the details you typed come with you. ## Which free tools are on the website? Open ppcadeditor.com/tools/ and click See the free tools, or scroll down to Free tools. Each generator there is a form with a live mockup beside it. - Google Ads Generator, YouTube Ads Generator, Facebook Ads Generator, Instagram Ads Generator, LinkedIn Ads Generator, X (Twitter) Ads Generator, Reddit Ads Generator, ChatGPT Ads Generator, and Microsoft Ads Generator. These channels are also in the editor. In the editor, Microsoft Ads is a search ad. - The Google AI Overview, Google Shopping, Pinterest, TikTok, Snapchat, Quora, Amazon, Apple Search Ads, and Connected TV generators are not formats in the editor. They are mockups on the website only. The Performance Max ad mockup generator has its own page, linked as Performance Max in the site's menus. It shows one asset group in Google's placements. The ChatGPT Ads Generator opens the ChatGPT ads mockup page, which shows a sponsored card under a sample ChatGPT answer. ## What can I do in each tool? - Google Ads Generator. Type headlines, descriptions, a display URL, and extensions such as sitelinks and callouts. Switch between Mobile and Desktop. Each headline and description shows its character count, and a line over Google's limit turns red. - Performance Max ad mockup generator. Type a Business name, headlines, descriptions, a Call to action, and a Final URL, and add a product image and a logo. Switch between Search, YouTube, Display, Discover, Gmail, and All. Shuffle combination shows other mixes, and after 8 shuffles it opens a sign-up window. Locked slots, Save & get a share link, Export PNG, and See all side-by-side open the same window. Nothing is saved or downloaded there. Click a headline, a description, the business name, the button, the image or the logo on the preview and the matching field opens for typing. - ChatGPT Ads Generator. Fill in Brand Name, a logo, Title (up to 50 characters), Description (up to 100), Link, and Image. Switch between Ad Only, Mobile, and Desktop. In Mobile and Desktop, click a suggested chat in the sidebar, or the question at the top of the chat, to see the ad under a different sample conversation. Start free in PPC Ad Editor takes your brand, link, title and description into a ChatGPT ad in the editor. The editor's ChatGPT ad is shorter, so the title is cut to 24 characters and the description to 48. - YouTube Ads Generator. Under Ad Placement, pick In-Stream (Skippable), In-Stream (Non-Skippable), or Discovery (In-Feed). Add a Video Thumbnail (16:9) and a profile image, then type a Headline, two description lines, your channel name, a view count, a CTA button and its link. Switch between Mobile and Desktop. Each field shows its character count. Build your first mockup free opens sign-up, and the channel name, link, headline and descriptions you typed come with you to your first ad. - LinkedIn Ads Generator. Under Choose your ad format:, pick Single Image, Video Ad, or Carousel. Single Image is the one you can type into: fill in Profile Settings (a logo, a company or person name, a follower count, and Show verified badge), Post Content, and Image Ad Details (an image, Your headline, and a link). Video Ad and Carousel show a locked sample that says LinkedIn video ads are free in a workspace, or LinkedIn carousel ads are free in a workspace. Click it to sign up and build that ad in the editor, where LinkedIn video and carousel ads are on the Free plan. - Facebook and Instagram ad mockup page. Type your brand, your website, and one headline in the three boxes under the heading. They come with you when you sign up from that page. ## I click a sample field on a tool and nothing happens The free mockup tools on the website do not make a share link. To show a client, take a screenshot, or build the ad in PPC Ad Editor, where share links and client comments cover ChatGPT ads too, and your client can comment on the title or the description. The tool fields start with sample text. Clicking in a field puts the cursor where you clicked, so you can edit part of a line. To replace a whole line, select it and type over it. This works the same on the Performance Max and ChatGPT ads pages. The tools, including the Budget Tracker and the Budget Pacer sample, fit a phone screen without cutting off numbers. ## What happens when I click Build your first mockup free? All sign-up buttons on a mockup page carry your ad details, including Build your first ad at the top of the page. 1. The PPC Ad Editor sign-up page opens. Click Continue with Google, or fill in the form and click Create account. The Free plan needs no card. 2. If you filled in the tool with your own business name and website, or your own headlines or descriptions, you skip the setup form. The screen says Building your ad from your draft, naming the format, such as Building your ad from your Google Display draft…, and then the editor opens with your ad. The Display Ads page builds Google Display, the Performance Max page builds Performance Max, the Gallery Ads page builds a Meta carousel ad, and the ChatGPT Ads Generator builds a ChatGPT ad. 3. If you typed headlines but no business name, the screen shows your ad and asks for the Business name shown on your ad. Type it and click Build ad. When a name can be read from your website, a Use button offers it. 4. If you only typed a business name, or left the tool's sample text in place, the first-ad screen opens with the name, website, channel and format filled in. Check them and click the build button. It names the format, such as Build Google Search ad. A placeholder website, such as example.com or yourbrand.com, is not used to name your business. ### I clicked Continue with Google on the mockup tool The Google button on our site's mockup tools signs you up with Google. Some mockup tools open a sign-up box with Continue with Google and a work email field. Click Continue with Google there and the PPC Ad Editor sign-up page opens and takes you straight to Google's account chooser in the same tab, with your mockup kept. No pop-up window opens, so a pop-up blocker does not stop it, and you do not pick Google a second time. If you come back to the sign-up page with your browser's Back button, or Google sign-in did not finish, Google does not start again on its own. The button is highlighted and reads Continue with Google to save your mockup. Click it to go on. If you have signed in to PPC Ad Editor on that browser before, the sign-up page says Welcome back. Sign in to save this mockup, with Use the Google account you signed up with, or sign in with email. Click Continue with Google, or Sign in with email. Click Create a new account only if you want a second account. The browser keeps only that you have been here, not your email. The headlines and descriptions you typed go into the new ad first, and they stay when the written draft arrives, as long as you build it for the same business name or website. ## I signed up from a free tool and the editor opened straight away That is expected. When you filled in a free tool with your own details, PPC Ad Editor builds that ad for you after sign-up and opens it in the editor, so you do not see the setup form. Your ad is in your workspace like any other, and you can edit every line. If the format you used in the tool is not one your plan can build, the ad starts on the closest format you can use, and one line at the top of the editor says which. For example, a LinkedIn, X or Reddit draft starts as a Meta feed ad, a ChatGPT draft as a Google Search ad, and a Programmatic draft as a Google Display ad. On today's Free plan every editor format can be built, so this happens on an earlier Free plan or during a trial. A draft from a tool whose format is not in the editor, such as TikTok or Pinterest, starts as a Google Search ad. Close the line with its X. If building takes too long or fails, the screen says We couldn't finish building your ad. Your draft is filled in below. Your details are on the first-ad form, so click the build button to try again. A build that finishes late still opens the editor. ## My headlines from the website disappeared, or it asks Use the ad text from the free tool? If you type a different business on the first-ad screen, it asks Use the ad text from the free tool? Click Apply to use your tool headlines and descriptions anyway. The screen then says We'll use the ad text from the free tool when you build. Click Dismiss and the editor writes fresh copy for the new business. If you left the tool's sample brand in place and type your own business, your typed headlines still come along. - The sample brand shown on our pages is never filled in for you. Only what you type comes along. A sample headline or description you did not edit, such as Shop Today or Free Local Delivery on the Performance Max page, is left behind, and the editor writes fresh lines in its place. - The lines you typed stay as you wrote them, and the editor fills the rest, so no required headline or description is left blank. - Images and logos you added on the website do not come along, except from Save & get a share link on the Performance Max page. Add them again in the editor. If a picture could not be sent across, the first-ad screen says Your images from the free tool didn't come across, followed by a prompt to add them here. ## What happens when I click Save & get a share link on the Performance Max generator? Save & get a share link on the Performance Max generator opens your ad in the editor, not the first-ad screen. It opens the sign-up window first, and its button can say Saving images… for a moment while your product image and logo upload. The generator starts uploading a product image or logo as soon as you add it, so they are usually ready by the time you click. 1. Sign up, or sign in if you already have an account. 2. PPC Ad Editor skips the first-ad screen and opens the Performance Max ad in the editor. 3. Your business name, website, headlines, long headline, description, call to action, product image and logo are already filled in. The editor does not write its own copy over them. 4. To send it to a client, click Copy client link in the editor. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). - You need a Business name on the generator for this. Without one, you land on the first-ad screen like any other sign-up. - Click Save & get a share link again later and the editor rewrites the same Performance Max ad with your new copy, instead of making a second one. It only ever rewrites the ad the generator made for you. A Performance Max ad you built yourself in the editor is never replaced. - Already signed in to PPC Ad Editor on that browser? The button skips the sign-up window and opens the ad in the editor straight away. - The other buttons on the Performance Max page, such as Locked slots, Export PNG and See all side-by-side, open the normal sign-up. They take you to the first-ad screen with Performance Max picked, and the image and logo do not come along. - On an earlier Free plan, Performance Max needs Studio, so you land on the first-ad screen instead. - If the ad cannot be opened, the first-ad screen shows We couldn't open the ad. You can build it from here. Check the details and click Build Performance Max ad. - From a generator for a channel that is not in the editor, the business name and website still come along, and the first-ad screen opens on Google Search. Pinterest is not a format in the editor, so the Pinterest pages open on Google Display. You can pick any other channel there. - The HTML5 Preview page shows a sample and has no upload. Signing up from it opens the first ad as Google Display. - Already have an account and signed in on that browser? A sign-up button takes you into your workspace, not to a sign-up form. In the website's header, Log in and the main button read Open Studio and open your dashboard. To build another ad from a website tool, click Create dashboard from wizard on your dashboard. The page First-ad screen: channels, website, and build problems covers the channel tabs, locks, and build problems. ## Which website pages only show a sample? Guide pages such as Google Ads Overview, Responsive Search Ads, Display Ads, YouTube Ads, HTML5 Preview, and the Google ad preview show a sample ad and explain the format. You cannot type into them. Their Build your first mockup free button works the same way, with the channel and format picked for you. The Google Ads Validator page, listed on the tools page as Character counter, shows a sample check. It does not check your own copy. To count characters, use the Google Ads Generator. On the LinkedIn Ads, Carousel Ads, and Story & Reel Ads pages, the main button is Open the live demo. It opens the sample editor on that format, with no account. The demo editor page explains what you can do there. ## Is Adcelerator still free? Adcelerator became Draft with AI, and it is inside the editor now. The website page has no copy generator of its own. Draft your Google Ads copy free opens sign-up. In the editor, Draft with AI writes copy from a website or your documents, on the Free plan too. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/). ## Can I share or download a mockup from the website? No. The website tools have no share link and no download, and nothing is saved to an account. The questions at the bottom of the YouTube Ads Generator page mention Export PNG, Export JPG and a Share Link button. The page has none of those buttons. Take a screenshot to keep a quick copy. To send a link your client can open, build the ad in PPC Ad Editor and click Copy client link, which works on the Free plan. See [Share a preview with your client](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/share-a-preview/). ## I clicked Get Studio on the Performance Max page. Why is my account on Free? Get Studio and the sign-up window on that page open the normal sign-up, so a new account starts on the Free plan. To pay for Studio, click Upgrade plan in the left menu. See PPC Ad Editor on the Studio plan. ## Why isn't TikTok in the editor when the website has a mockup? The TikTok, Pinterest, Snapchat, Quora, Amazon, Apple Search Ads, Connected TV, Google Shopping, and AI Overview mockups are website pages only, and they are not formats in the editor. Every channel you can build is listed on the first-ad screen and in New Preview. To ask for one, open Need another channel? Vote on what's next on the first-ad screen. You can vote for Google Shopping, Amazon Ads, or TikTok, or click + Request another channel and type your own. A vote is a request, not a release date. --- # Give feedback or suggest a feature Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/give-feedback/ Last verified: 2026-10-20 How do I give feedback, suggest a feature, or tell you what to add? Click Give feedback at the top right of Budget Pacer, Ad Recap, AdScanner or AdMinerX. Pick a rating from 1 to 5, write what you would change or add, and click Send feedback. Every signed-in user sees the button, on every plan. ## How do I send feedback? 1. Open Budget Pacer, Ad Recap, AdScanner or AdMinerX and sign in. 2. Click Give feedback in the bar at the top of the page, on the right. It has a small dot beside it. 3. The Give feedback box opens and says We read every note. 4. Pick a rating from 1 to 5, or type in What should we change or add?, or both. A note can be up to 2,000 characters. 5. Click Send feedback. The box says Thanks, we got it. Send feedback stays greyed out until you pick a rating or type a note. Press Escape or click the close button to shut the box without sending. ## I want to tell you what to add Click Give feedback. Type what you want us to add or change under What should we change or add? and click Send feedback. Your note goes to the team that builds that page. ## Who reads my feedback? The team that builds the page you sent it from. A note sent in Budget Pacer reaches the Budget Pacer team, and the same goes for Ad Recap, AdScanner and AdMinerX. ## Will someone reply to my feedback? Give feedback is for ideas and ratings, and it does not open a support request. If something is broken or you need an answer, ask Albert or contact support. See Ask Albert and Contact support. ## I don't see Give feedback - You need to be signed in. The button does not show on a signed-out page. - In AdScanner and AdMinerX it sits at the right end of the bar above the tool, the one that shows the page name. - The editor in Studio does not have a Give feedback button. To tell us about the editor, ask Albert or contact support. --- # Is PPC Ad Editor Google's Ad preview and diagnosis tool? Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/google-ad-preview-and-diagnosis/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 No. Google's Ad preview and diagnosis tool and PPC Ad Editor do different jobs. Google's tool lives inside your Google Ads account and checks ads that are already running. PPC Ad Editor previews an ad before it runs, so a client can see it and comment on it before anything goes into Google Ads. ## What does Google's Ad preview and diagnosis tool do? It is part of Google Ads, not part of PPC Ad Editor. In your Google Ads account, open Tools, then Troubleshooting, then Ad preview and diagnosis. Type a search term, and it shows whether your live ad is showing for that search, why not if it is not, and how the ad looks on the results page. Google recommends it over searching for your own ad, because it does not add impressions. For help with it, see Google Ads Help. ## How do I preview an ad that is not running yet? A new ad you are still pitching is not in your Google Ads account, so Google's tool has nothing to show. Build it in PPC Ad Editor instead. 1. On a dashboard, click New Preview, pick Google Ads and the format, such as Responsive Search Ad, and type the headlines and descriptions. 2. The preview shows the ad the way Google lays it out on a results page. Click Mobile view to see it on a phone. 3. On a responsive search ad, click Shuffle to see other headline and description combinations, and pick One Ad, Three Ads or Five Ads to see several at once. 4. Click Share with client and send the link. Your client opens it in a browser with no account and comments on the exact headline. 5. Once the ad is approved, export a Google Ads Editor file and import it there. Building, sharing and this export are on the Free tier. Recording a client's sign-off with Approval is a Studio feature. ## Is there a Google AdWords preview tool or an anonymous ad preview tool? Those are Google's tools, not part of PPC Ad Editor. AdWords is the old name for Google Ads, and the preview tool Google documents is the Ad preview and diagnosis tool, under Tools, then Troubleshooting, in your Google Ads account. It only shows ads that are already in your account. To preview a new ad before it is in your account, build it in PPC Ad Editor and send your client the link. For Google's own tools, see Google Ads Help. ## Can I shuffle as often as I want on Free? No. Signed in, Shuffle has no limit on any plan. Only the sample editor at /demo stops after 3 shuffles. See Responsive search ad variations. ## Does PPC Ad Editor show whether my live ad is showing? No. PPC Ad Editor does not check live search results, diagnose why an ad is not showing, or count impressions. It does not publish ads to Google Ads either. Use Google's Ad preview and diagnosis tool for a running ad. ## Can I bring my live ads into PPC Ad Editor to show a client? Yes. In New Preview, Import from Google Ads downloads your live campaigns into a preview. It only downloads, and it changes nothing in your Google Ads account. The Free plan can link one Google Ads account, and Studio can link as many as you need. See [Download a Google Ads account into a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/download-from-google-ads/). --- # What PPC Ad Editor does not do Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/guardrails/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 What can't PPC Ad Editor do, and what are its limitations? This page lists the limitations of the editor and what PPC Ad Editor does not do today, so you know before you plan around it. PPC Ad Editor is not SOC 2 certified. PPC Ad Editor is not GDPR certified. PPC Ad Editor is not HIPAA certified. There is no $42 price. There is no 4.9 star rating. There is no published count of 150 reviews. ## No pushing ads to Google Ads PPC Ad Editor does not push ads to Google Ads. Export downloads a file. A person imports that file in Google Ads Editor. ## Other things it does not do There is no version history. There is no rollback of a preview, so you cannot roll back your own edits. The one exception is a change Albert makes for you: Undo on Albert's receipt puts that ad back, unless someone has edited it since. A Free share link is not a clean share link. There are no live cursors, so you do not see a teammate's cursor. Real-time editing together does work: when teammates open the same preview, edits sync as they type, and a field shows when a teammate is editing it. PPC Ad Editor does not export Meta, LinkedIn, or YouTube ads. Those formats preview in the editor. Export downloads a Google Ads Editor file for Google responsive search, responsive display, and Performance Max ads, and an OpenAI Ads Manager workbook for a ChatGPT ad. There is no customer-readable audit log. There is no password-protected share link. There is no white-label share link. White Label, your own domain and logo on every preview, is set up by hand. Request it from Manage workspace, then The Lab. It is not self-serve. There is no in-editor translation. PPC Ad Editor does not publish a time-saved percentage. There is no named testimonial to quote. Export is on every plan, Free tier included. It is a plan feature, not a trial. A client on a share link cannot download the preview unless the link allows export, and Allow export on a share link is a Studio feature. --- # The Knowledge Base page on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/knowledge-base-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 Where is your help center, and is the knowledge base on your website the same as Ask Albert? Yes. The Knowledge Base on our website, ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/, is the help center. It holds the same help pages Ask Albert answers from, as articles you can read and search without signing in. Inside the app, Ask Albert is the quickest way to the right answer. ## What is on the Knowledge Base page? The page opens with How can we help? and a search box. Below it are cards, one per section, each with how many articles it holds: - Studio - Budget Pacer - Ad Recap - AdScanner - AdMinerX - Account, billing and Albert - Plans and pricing - PPC basics Under the cards, Common questions opens short answers in place. At the bottom, Contact support opens our contact form and View FAQ opens the FAQ page. Each article shows its title, the kind of page, such as How-to guides or Troubleshooting, and a Last verified date, which is the day it was last checked against the app. A long article has an On this page list. Related links to the next pages to read, and a menu on the side lists the other articles in that section. ## How do I search the knowledge base? Type in Search the knowledge base, at the top of the page or of any article. Matching articles show as you type, with their section under the title. Click one to open it, or use the arrow keys and Enter. - No matching pages. Try fewer or different words. means nothing matched. Use one or two words, such as share link or invoice, or ask Albert in your own words. - Search is not available right now. means the search list did not load. Reload the page, or browse the section cards instead. ## The knowledge base articles did not open, or the search box did nothing Before 3 November 2026 the Knowledge Base page was a list of topics, its article titles did not link anywhere, and its search box did not search. That page has been replaced. Reload ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/ and you get the real articles and a working search. ## Where do I find the knowledge base or help center? - On our website, go to ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/. The footer links to it as Knowledge base, the Contact us page as Help Center, and the Downloads page as Knowledge Base. - In Studio, click Ask Albert in the top bar, or press Cmd+J on a Mac or Ctrl+J on Windows. - In Budget Pacer and Ad Recap, click Ask Albert at the bottom of the left menu. ## How do I reach a person? Click Contact support at the bottom of the Knowledge Base page, or Contact support under Still stuck? at the end of any article. Both open the form on ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/. Inside the app, ask Albert to pass your question to support, or use Contact support. See [Contact support and talk to a person](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/contact-support/) for where the reply goes. ## Is the knowledge base up to date with the app? Each article is checked against the app before it is published, and the Last verified date says when. If an article and what you see in the app differ, the app is right. Ask Albert, or tell support which article it was. --- # Change your password: Login & security Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/login-and-security/ Last verified: 2026-10-29 Want to change your password while you are signed in? Open Settings, click Login & security, then click Change password next to your email. Login & security also shows every way you sign in to your account. ## How do I change my password? 1. In the left menu, open Studio, AdScanner or AdMinerX and click Settings. 2. Under Account, click Login & security. 3. Next to the email that says Password · reset links go to this address, click Change password. 4. Change password opens. Type your Current password. 5. Type a New password, then type it again in Confirm new password. Click the eye icon to show or hide what you typed. 6. Click Update password. A note says Password updated. A new password needs at least 8 characters, a lowercase letter, a capital letter and a number. It must be different from your current password. ## I forgot my current password In Change password, click Forgot current password? We email a reset link to your login email, and a note says Check your email for a password reset link. Open the email and choose a new password there. Signed out? Click Forgot password? on the login page instead. See [Sign in](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/sign-in/). ## Why is there no Change password button? Change password shows only next to a login that uses a password. If your login says Google SSO or Microsoft SSO, you sign in with that account and have no password here to change. Change it in your Google or Microsoft account instead. A login marked Login is the one you signed up with. One marked Linked is another way into the same account. ## What the Change password messages mean - Current password is incorrect. Type your current password again, or click Forgot current password? - That password is too easy to guess. Use at least 8 characters with a mix of letters and a number. - Passwords do not match. New password and Confirm new password are different. - New password must be different from your current password. - Too many attempts. Please try again later. Wait a few minutes before you try again. - Please enter your current password again to confirm this change. - We couldn't verify this account. Sign in again and retry. - You're not signed in. Refresh the page and try again. - We couldn't change your password. Try again. ## Can I change the email I sign in with? Not on this page. Only your login email signs in and gets password reset links. To send receipts and product mail somewhere else, add and confirm another address under Profile, then click Make default. See [Settings for a product](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/product-settings/). ## Can I turn on two-factor authentication? Not yet. Login & security shows Two-factor authentication with ON or OFF for your account, and its button reads Coming soon. Sign-in does not ask for a second step today. A workspace Owner or Admin can click Require 2FA on your row in Users & dashboards. That turns this line to ON, but it does not add a second sign-in step yet. --- # The five products Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/overview/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 PPC Ad Editor is a suite of five products under one sign-in. The signed-in app opens on Studio, the ad editor. The left menu also lists Budget Pacer, AdRecap, AdScanner, and AdMinerX. ## What each product does - Studio is where you build ad previews, share them with clients, and collect comments and sign-off. - Budget Pacer tracks spend against a budget across your linked ad accounts, with pacing alerts and projected spend. - Ad Recap, shown as AdRecap in the left menu, captures every campaign change per account and sends recaps by email. - AdScanner captures competitor ads from Google's Ads Transparency Center. - AdMinerX extracts search ads from a saved Google results page and can send it into the editor as one preview. Albert can also run an AdMinerX search for you. ## Which tools come with my account? Which products do I already have with my account? Every account already has these. Studio starts on the Free plan, which includes 2 seats. AdScanner and AdMinerX are included at Lite with every account. Budget Pacer and Ad Recap start with a free trial with no card. When an Ad Recap trial ends, Ad Recap moves to its free plan. Products you do not have yet sit under Add to your suite in the left menu. ## One bill for everything? How billing works across the products Billing for every product is on one Billing page in Manage workspace. Your products lists each product with its status, such as FREE, Trial, Active, Past due or Cancels. Two or more paid products on one bill get a multi-product discount: 15% off each for two, 25% off each for three or more. Owners and billing members buy products and start trials. Owners, admins and billing members can cancel one product and keep the others. See Add a product, Cancel a product, and My payment failed. ## What is not a product Insights, Negative KW, and Performance Anomaly are not available. They are listed in the grid menu at the top with Notify me, which only adds you to a list. Formats and channels that are not in New Preview are not available in the editor, even when the marketing site has a page for them. --- # Partner and affiliate program on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/partner-program-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Do you have an affiliate or partner program? Our website has a Partner page at ppcadeditor.com/partner/. The old affiliate address, ppcadeditor.com/affiliate/, opens the same page. It describes three kinds of partnership: affiliates, agencies, and technology partners. Every button on it, such as Join Affiliate Program, Apply for Agency Program, Explore API Docs and Contact Partnership Team, opens our contact form at ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/. ## How do I become an affiliate or a partner? 1. Open ppcadeditor.com/partner/. 2. Click Join Affiliate Program, Apply for Agency Program, or Explore API Docs. 3. The contact form opens. Say which program you want and tell us about your audience or your agency. 4. The team replies by email with the terms. There is no sign-up inside the app, and no affiliate dashboard or referral link in your account settings. Commission, payouts and agency pricing are agreed with the team, not set in the app. Albert cannot quote them or open a partner account. ## Is White Label part of the agency program? No. The Partner page lists it as an agency perk, but it is not part of any program. White Label, your own domain and logo on every preview, is a separate request that the team sets up by hand. Request it from Manage workspace, then The Lab. See [Do you have an Enterprise plan?](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/enterprise-plan/) and What PPC Ad Editor does not do. ## Can I build an integration with your API? You can connect an AI assistant such as ChatGPT or Claude to PPC Ad Editor, and create previews from it with an API key. See [Create ad previews from an AI assistant](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/create-previews-from-an-ai-assistant/). For anything beyond that, use the contact form from the Partner page. --- # My payment failed Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/payment-failed/ Last verified: 2026-11-01 Did your card get declined? Your products keep working while we retry the charge. Update the card or pay the open invoice before the date the page names, and nothing is lost. AdScanner and AdMinerX are the exception: they drop to Lite until the invoice is paid. ## How do I know a payment failed? A yellow bar runs across the top of the Billing page and checkout. It reads Payment failed, the date, and how much is unpaid, then says Everything keeps working until a date. When AdScanner or AdMinerX is past due, it also says AdScanner and AdMinerX are on Lite with server search paused until it's paid. The bar does not go away until the invoice is paid. On the Billing page, the product's row shows Past due and Invoice open, with a note that the product keeps working while we retry. For AdScanner, AdMinerX or Intel Pro the row reads Invoice open, with a note that it is on Lite and server search is paused until paid. The row's button reads Fix payment instead of Cancel. In Studio, a bar at the top of the app can also read Payment failed, with Update your payment method to avoid losing access and the number of days left. Owners and admins see Update Payment on that bar, which opens the billing portal to change the card. ## How do I fix a failed payment? 1. Click Fix payment on the yellow bar, or on the product's row on the Billing page. 2. The Payment failed page says We couldn't charge, then the card brand and its last four digits. It shows the invoice amount, the date it was declined, the reason the bank gave, the date we retry, and the date access pauses if the invoice is still open. 3. Click Update payment method to add a new card. The retry then charges it. 4. Or click Pay this invoice, when it shows, to pay the open invoice right away. If something looks wrong, the page names the invoice number and an email address to write to. When every invoice is paid, the same page says Nothing is overdue and Every invoice on this workspace is paid. There is nothing to fix here. Click Back to Billing. ## What still works while the invoice is open? - Studio keeps working until the date the page names. If the invoice is still open then, Studio can no longer be edited. A red bar reads Read-only mode and Your subscription has ended. Upgrade to edit and create content again. Your previews stay saved and viewable. - Budget Pacer and Ad Recap keep working while we retry. - AdScanner and AdMinerX drop to Lite straight away and server search is paused. Your history and uploads stay. Server search comes back once the payment goes through. ## Who can fix a failed payment? Owners, admins, billing members and editors can open the Payment failed page and update the card. A teammate who cannot sees Ask an owner or billing manager to update payment and billing details. On the Studio bar, everyone except owners and admins sees Contact your account admin to update payment. A billing member can still fix it from the Billing page. ## Can I buy another product while a payment is open? Checkout still opens, with the same yellow bar on top. If an earlier checkout is still waiting for payment, checkout says A previous checkout is still waiting for payment. Finish that invoice or wait for it to expire before starting another. --- # Pharma ad copy generator on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/pharma-ad-copy-tool/ Last verified: 2026-10-23 The pharma ad copy generator is a free tool on ppcadeditor.com, at /tools/pharma-ad-compliance/. It writes a first draft of Google responsive search ad copy for a prescription drug: 15 headlines, 4 descriptions and 4 sitelinks, within Google's 30 and 90 character limits. It is a starting point. Your Medical, Legal and Regulatory (MLR) team still has to review and approve every line before it runs. ## How do I use the pharma ad generator? 1. Open ppcadeditor.com/tools/pharma-ad-compliance/. 2. Fill in Brand Name (include ® or ™ if it applies), Generic Name, Full Indication (paste the approved indication text from the prescribing information) and Target URL. 3. Pick an Audience: Healthcare Provider, Direct to Consumer, Payor / Payer, or Other. 4. Pick an Ad Type. Reminder Ad uses the brand and generic name only, with no indication or efficacy claims. Product Claim Ad is a full ad with the indication, efficacy and the required fair balance. 5. Answer Boxed Warning (Black Box)? with Yes or No. 6. Click Generate RSA Assets. ## What do I get back? Generated RSA Assets lists the headlines, descriptions and sitelinks, with a sample Google search ad you can show or hide. Copy one line with the copy button next to it, or click Copy All. Save a headline or description you like and it stays when you generate again, while the rest are rewritten. Validation Warnings flag lines that may break a rule or a limit, and Compliance Notes explain the choices the tool made. ## Why can't I make a Reminder Ad? If you answer Yes to Boxed Warning (Black Box)? and pick Reminder Ad, the tool stops and says Reminder Ads are not allowed for drugs with a Boxed Warning. Switch to Product Claim Ad and generate again. ## How many times can I use it, and why does it ask for my email? The first generation needs nothing. After that the tool asks for your work email under Unlock More Generations before it continues. You get up to 10 generations a day, and the counter under the button shows how many are left today. The count is kept in your browser and starts again the next day. A missing field stops the tool with a message such as Generic name is required. ## Does it come into PPC Ad Editor? No. The pharma tool has no button that carries the copy into the editor, and nothing you generate is saved to an account. Click Copy All, then paste the lines into a responsive search ad in PPC Ad Editor, where reviewers can comment on and approve each line. ## Is the copy approved or guaranteed to pass review? No. The tool follows common rules for pharma search ads, but its output is not legal or regulatory advice and is not a clearance from Google or a regulator. Have your MLR team review every line before you publish the ad. --- # The pricing page bundle builder on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/pricing-page-bundle-builder-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-28 The pricing page on ppcadeditor.com, at /pricing-plans/, has a bundle builder. Tick the products you want and it shows what each one costs, the bundle saving, and your monthly total. Click the button under the total to sign up, and PPC Ad Editor checkout opens with those products already in the cart. Every price there is billed monthly in US dollars. ## Which products can I put in a bundle? - Studio Pro, $149 a month. - Budget Pacer, $49 a month. This is Budget Pacer Starter. - Ad Recap, $19 a month. - Intel Pro, $29 a month. It is AdScanner Pro plus AdMinerX Pro. Only need one research tool? Open that line and pick AdScanner Pro or AdMinerX Pro, $19.99 a month each. Either one replaces Intel Pro in your bundle. Choosing both switches you to Intel Pro, which costs less than the two separately. ## How much does a bundle save? The saving depends on how many product families you pick. The four families are Studio, Pacer, Recap and Research, and all research plans count as one family. - One family: the standalone price. - Two families: 15% off each. - Three or more: 25% off each. The **Your suite** panel lists each product with its price before and after the saving, then **Standalone total**, **Bundle saving** and **Your monthly total**. Checkout applies the same 15% or 25%. ## The starting points at the top of the page Above the builder, three starting points fill it in for you: - **Create & get approved**: Studio Pro on its own. - **Research & create**: Studio Pro and Intel Pro. - **The complete workflow**: Studio Pro, Intel Pro, Budget Pacer Starter and Ad Recap. The builder opens on this one. Click **Customize this bundle** to change the products in the builder, or **Choose this starting point** to go straight to sign-up with it. ## What happens when I click Get started with my suite? 1. The button reads **Get started with my suite**, or **Get Studio Pro** when Studio Pro is the only product you picked. 2. If you are not signed in, the PPC Ad Editor sign-up page opens. Create your account, or sign in. 3. Checkout opens with the products you picked already ticked. Confirm them and pay there. Taxes are added where they apply. If you are already signed in, the button goes straight to that checkout. Products your workspace already owns are left out of the cart, so nothing is billed twice. With no product ticked, the button reads **Start free** and opens a free workspace with no card. ## Can I share my bundle with someone? Yes. Click **Copy my bundle link**. It says **Bundle link copied**, and the link opens the pricing page with the same products ticked. If your browser does not allow copying, it says **Copy the address in your browser to share this bundle.** ## The pricing page lists more Budget Pacer tiers and add-ons Under **Need more accounts, workspaces or seats?**, the pricing page shows larger Budget Pacer tiers and add-ons, such as extra ad accounts, extra trackers and extended history. PPC Ad Editor checkout does not sell them today. Budget Pacer checkout sells Starter only, with 3 linked ad accounts and 10 trackers. If you need more, ask Albert to open a support ticket, or use the contact page at https://www.ppcadeditor.com/contact-us/. See Budget Pacer plans. --- # Settings for a product Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/product-settings/ Last verified: 2026-11-03 Each product's Settings page holds your profile, the people on the workspace, integrations, and API keys. Prices and the payment method for every product live on Plans & billing. Invoice PDFs and receipts have their own page, Invoices & receipts. ## Where are my settings, and where is Plans & billing? In the left menu, open Studio, AdScanner or AdMinerX and click Settings. The page title reads Settings. Budget Pacer and AdRecap have their own Settings rows inside each product. The menu on the left of the page has three groups: - Account holds Profile and Login & security. - Workspace holds Plans & billing and Invoices & receipts. Plans & billing shows to owners, admins, billing members and editors. Only owners and billing members can buy or change capacity there, so an admin can see Plans & billing but not buy anything. Invoices & receipts shows to everyone. If you cannot download invoices, it has a lock next to it. - Studio holds Users & dashboards, Integrations and API Keys. The first one shows how many seats are in use. Plans & billing is where prices and the payment method live. You can also reach it with Manage workspace in the left menu. Invoice PDFs and receipts are on Invoices & receipts. See [Invoices and receipts](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invoices-and-receipts/). ## Change my name Open Profile. Display name is shown on your comments and approvals. Type a name and click Save, or press Enter. Discard puts the old name back. Name saved confirms it. A name can be up to 100 characters, and Save stays off while the box is empty. ## Send receipts and product mail to a different email Profile has an Emails card. It lists the address you sign in with, which says it signs in and resets your password, or that you sign in with Google or Microsoft. Receipts and product mail go to your default. Only your login email signs in. A profile can hold up to 5 extra addresses, and they do not add a seat. 1. Click Add email, type the address, and click Send confirmation. The address shows a Pending tag and says Confirmation sent. Click the link in that inbox. 2. Open the email we send to that address and click the link. A page shows the address and a Confirm email button. Click it. The link only shows the address until you press the button. If the email did not arrive, click Resend. It then reads Sent again. 3. Once the address is confirmed, click Make default. It then shows a Default tag, and a note says receipts and product mail now go to that address. Click Make default on your login email to send mail there again. Click Remove to take an extra address off the profile. Removing the default sends mail back to your login email. Sign-in and password reset stay on the address you signed up with. Login & security shows how you sign in and has Change password for password sign-in. Two-factor authentication shows Coming soon. These messages can appear when you add or confirm an address. That address is already in use means it belongs to another profile. That address is already on your profile means you added it before. This confirmation link has expired means you should click Resend for a new one. You've sent too many confirmation emails. Wait a few minutes and try again means you reached the sending limit. You can add up to 5 contact emails. A new account cannot be registered with an address that is already confirmed on a profile. ## Send view and comment emails to the right address Each confirmed address in the Emails card has a Receive notifications tick. When someone views a link you shared or comments on your preview, the email goes to every address you ticked. Receipts stay on your default address. A new confirmed address is not ticked, except the first one you confirm, which becomes your default and is ticked. One address must keep receiving notifications, so the last ticked one cannot be unticked. If none is ticked, mail goes to your login email. On a narrow screen the tick sits inside each address's row. ## Choose which dashboards a teammate sees How do I stop a teammate seeing one client dashboard? Uncheck them on that dashboard's access list. The Users & dashboards page sets who can view, comment on and approve ad previews, and which dashboards they see. 1. Find the dashboard in the list and click Manage access. 2. Dashboard access opens with the dashboard name and everyone on the workspace. Use Search people… to find someone. 3. Check a person to give them that dashboard. Uncheck them to take it away. 4. Click Save access. Owner and Admin always see every dashboard, so they stay checked and cannot be changed. A teammate who shows All dashboards can be unchecked on one dashboard. They then keep the other live dashboards and lose that one. Checking someone on one dashboard does not give them dashboards created later. An invite that has not been accepted yet shows Pending. ## Can I invite a teammate on the Free plan? Seats and inviting teammates How many people can I invite? Every plan can invite teammates. The Free plan includes 2 seats, you and one teammate. Studio Pro also includes 2 seats. An invitation that has not been accepted yet holds a seat. To add more seats, open Billing and use Extra user seats under the Studio Pro row. On the Free plan, the button reads Upgrade to add and opens Studio Pro checkout. On Studio Pro, extra seats are added to your next invoice. ## Integrations - Google Ads lists the accounts used to import campaigns and refresh metrics. A connection that needs to be signed in again shows Disconnected. With none, it says No Google Ads account connected yet. - Slack notifications shows a lock and PREMIUM. It is not included in Studio Pro. ## Can I get Slack notifications for comments? Not on the Free plan or Studio Pro. In Settings, under Integrations, Slack notifications shows a lock and PREMIUM, and Connect Slack cannot be clicked. On the Free plan the button under it opens Studio checkout, and on Studio Pro it reads Compare plans. To hear about new comments today, use email and the notification bell. See Notifications. ## API Keys Where do I get an API key? API keys are for Enterprise workspaces, and you create them in Settings, under API Keys. On other plans the pane says API access requires Enterprise. To build ad mockups from ChatGPT or Claude you do not need an API key. See Create previews from an AI assistant. --- # Roadmap and feature votes on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/roadmap-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-26 Where can I see your roadmap? It is at ppcadeditor.com/roadmap/, linked as Roadmap in the website footer. The page is titled Help us decide what to build next. It lists channels and tools we are considering, with a Vote button on each, and a Suggest a feature form for anything that is not listed. Nothing on it has a date, and an item on it is not in the product today. ## What is coming next? What is on the roadmap page? Two lists, each marked No dates yet. - Channels we are considering. TikTok is not in the editor. Pinterest is not in the editor. You can vote for either. - Tools we are considering. Insights, Negative Keywords, and Performance Anomaly are not available, and you can vote for them. These are ideas we may build, not features you can use now. We do not give a release date. X (Twitter) is not on the roadmap because X ads are already in the editor. Pick X in New Preview or on the first-ad screen to build one. See [Ad formats in the editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ad-formats/). ## How do I vote for a feature? 1. Open ppcadeditor.com/roadmap/. 2. Click Vote on the item you want. The button changes to Voted. 3. Click Voted again to take your vote back. You do not need an account to vote. Your votes are kept in this browser, so the page shows them as Voted when you come back on the same browser. On another browser or device, the page starts without your votes. ## Will you email me when a roadmap item ships? Not from a vote. The Vote button does not ask for or save an email address. The note under the list says Votes are counted in this browser, and after you vote it says Thanks. Your vote for TikTok is counted, for example. If you want to hear back, use Suggest a feature and add your email for a reply. ## How do I suggest a feature or a channel that is not listed? 1. On the roadmap page, under Nothing here that you need?, click Suggest a feature. 2. Type your idea under What should we consider? It needs at least 20 characters, or the page asks for a bit more detail. 3. If you want an answer, type your address under Email if you want a reply (optional). 4. Click Send suggestion. The page says Thanks and that a person will read that. If the page says We could not open a ticket from here, email your idea to the address the message gives, or send it with Give feedback at the top right of Budget Pacer, Ad Recap, AdScanner or AdMinerX instead. ## Can I vote inside the app? Yes, for channels. On the first-ad screen, click Need another channel? Vote on what's next to vote for Google Shopping, Amazon Ads, or TikTok, or click + Request another channel to type your own. Insights, Negative KW, and Performance Anomaly are not available. They are listed in the grid menu at the top of the app with Notify me, which only adds you to a list. --- # Security page on our website: what is true in the app today Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/security-page-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-10-30 Read the Security page on our website and want to know what the app does? The page is at ppcadeditor.com/security/. It is a marketing page, so check a security point here before you rely on it in a client or vendor review. This page says what PPC Ad Editor does today. ## Does PPC Ad Editor have two-factor authentication? Not yet. The Security page says every account supports two-factor authentication, but sign-in does not ask for a second step today. In Settings, Login & security shows Two-factor authentication with ON or OFF, and its button reads Coming soon. A workspace Owner or Admin can mark a person as needing two-factor sign-in, but that does not add a second sign-in step yet. See [Change your password: Login & security](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/login-and-security/). ## Does the Security page's role-based access exist? Yes. Each teammate has a role that decides whether they edit, only view and comment, or invite people and manage billing, and each share link has its own permission. See [Invites, roles, and guests](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/invites-roles-guests/). ## Is PPC Ad Editor SOC 2, GDPR, HIPAA or ISO certified? Do not rely on a certification for PPC Ad Editor. PPC Ad Editor is not SOC 2 certified, not GDPR certified, and not HIPAA certified. If the Security page lists a certificate, ask us for the certificate itself before you put it in a review. See [What PPC Ad Editor does not do](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/guardrails/). ## I need answers for a security review or a vendor questionnaire Contact support and say it is a security review. Ask Albert to open a ticket, or use Contact support in the editor. The team answers questions about hosting, backups, encryption and testing directly. Albert does not answer them from the website page. --- # The What's New page on our website Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/whats-new-page-on-our-website/ Last verified: 2026-11-02 Read something on the What's New page on your website, ppcadeditor.com/whats-new/, and want to know how it works in the app? Each item on that page is below, with what PPC Ad Editor does today and where to click. The page is a short list of releases, newest first. For the full in-app change list, see What's new in the ad editor. ## Tool fields keep your cursor where you click This is about the free mockup tools on our website, not the editor. Clicking in a tool field that starts with sample text puts the cursor where you clicked, so you can change part of a line. To replace the whole line, select it and type over it. The Budget Tracker and the Budget Pacer sample on the website show their numbers in full on a phone. See [Free ad mockup tools on our website](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/free-tools-on-our-website/). ## Generator tools fit a phone Also about the website tools. The mockup generators and the Budget Pacer sample fit a phone screen, so the form and the mockup are not cut off at the side. ## Every format is on the free plan True for today's Free plan. Every format in the editor can be built on Free, with no shorter list: Google search, display, Performance Max and Demand Gen, YouTube, Meta single, carousel and story ads, LinkedIn single and carousel ads, Programmatic, ChatGPT, X, Reddit, and Microsoft Ads search. Pick any of them under New Preview. Three things to know. - Multi-Channel, one preview built for several channels at once, is part of Studio. On Free its card in New Preview opens an upgrade. - An account that signed up on an earlier Free plan may see a lock on some formats with the message that the format is available with Studio and that Free includes RSA, RDA, Meta Single, and YouTube. That is the older plan's list, not today's Free plan. - The demo at ppcadeditor.com/demo is a sample editor with its own locks. A lock you saw in the demo does not mean the format is locked in your free account. See [Ad formats in the editor](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ad-formats/). ## Click-to-Edit Extensions On a responsive search ad, hover over a sitelink, callout, structured snippet, call extension, image, logo or business name in the preview and it says Click to edit. Click it and the matching asset window opens, such as Sitelinks on this ad group, with the one you clicked highlighted. Change it there and the preview updates. Headlines and descriptions are not opened this way. Click them in the form, or in the preview to leave a comment on that line. You need edit access to the preview. A client on a share link can click to edit only when the link is set to Editor. ## Custom Client Brand Logos Yes. Put your client's logo at the top left of the editor and of the page your client opens from a share link. In the editor, click More options, the ⋯ at the top right, or the logo at the top left in the classic layout. Then click Set as dashboard default for every preview of that client, or Set logo for this preview for this one only. Pick or upload the logo and click Done. Use dashboard default and Remove dashboard logo undo it. See [Put your client's logo on the preview and the share page](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/brand-logo/). ## Template Exports from Shared Links A person viewing your share link can export only when you allow it. It is not open to everyone by default. - In Share, under Sharing options, tick Allow export. Its note says Clients can download this preview. Allow export is a Studio feature. On Free it shows a Studio badge and opens an upgrade, and a client on a Free link sees Export greyed out. - On a responsive search ad the client can then download the PPC Ad Editor Template (Excel), the PDF, or the Google Ads Editor CSV, from Export on the share page. - To let someone start building from your preview in their own workspace, tick Allow copying in the same place. Its note says Signed-in viewers can copy this preview into their own workspace. They click Make it yours on the share page. Allow copying is on Free too, but not for a group of previews or a Programmatic preview. See [Copy a shared preview into your own workspace](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/make-it-yours/). You and your teammates can export from the editor on every plan, Free tier included. See [Export or download a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export/). ## YouTube Ad Previews Yes. A YouTube preview shows four placements, as tabs above the preview: In-Stream, In-Feed, Shorts and Bumper, plus All to see them side by side. In-Feed has Shows in, to switch between Search results and Home feed. Bumper uses the first 6 seconds of your video. YouTube is on Free. Download PNG, above the preview, saves the view on screen as a picture. ## Demand Gen Format Yes. Demand Gen is a format in the editor, on Free and Studio. Pick Demand Gen in New Preview. It sits in the same dashboard as your search, display and Performance Max previews. Demand Gen previews have no Export button and do not download as a file you import. ## MCP server, free without an account? Yes. Add pcade-mcp to Claude, Cursor or Windsurf and ask for an ad. Without an account the assistant shows a mockup of the ad and gives you a save link that works for 7 days. Save the ad to a free PPC Ad Editor account from that link to edit it, share it, or collect comments. A share link straight from the assistant needs a signed-in connection or an Enterprise API key. Previews without an account have a daily limit, and the count is not three. When it is reached the assistant says Daily preview limit reached. Save a preview to a free PPC Ad Editor account to keep working there. Setup is on ppcadeditor.com/mcp/. See [Create ad previews from an AI assistant](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/create-previews-from-an-ai-assistant/). ## Real-Time Co-Editing Yes. When two people in your workspace open the same preview, edits show up for both of you as you type, with no saving or refreshing. When a teammate clicks into a field, a label with their name, such as Sam is editing, shows above that field. It is on every plan. Free includes 2 seats, so you and one teammate. See [Edit the same preview with a teammate at the same time](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/edit-together/). ## @Mentions in Comments @mentions are part of Studio. On Studio, type @ in a comment, or click the @ button, and pick a teammate from the list. They get a notification. On Free you can comment, but typing @ does not open the list of teammates. ## Approval Workflow Yes, and it is part of Studio. In Share, set the link's permission to Approval, described as Client approves or requests revisions in one click. Your client sees Approve and Request changes on the share page, and the preview records their answer. Approval is not on the Free tier. There it shows a Studio badge, and a link can be set to Viewer or Commentor. See Approval. ## PDF Deck & Image Exports Partly. There is a PDF, and there are pictures. - PDF. On a responsive search ad, click Export, pick Download PDF, choose Client review or Internal detail, and click Export PDF. You get one PDF file with your ads and the extras you pick. It is offered on responsive search ads only, not on other formats. - Pictures. On a responsive search ad, Download variations as ZIP saves one PNG per combination. On Meta, LinkedIn and YouTube, Download PNG saves the view on screen. Both are on every plan, Free tier included. See [Export or download a preview](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/export/). ## AI Ad Generation Yes. Suggest copy in the editor, and Draft with AI in New Preview, write ad copy for you on Free and Studio. Free includes 50 AI credits a month for each person in the workspace, and Studio includes more. One AI generation uses one credit. Credits reset each month. When they run out, an upgrade window opens. See [Draft copy with AI](https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/studio/ai-draft/). --- # Your ad content Source: https://www.ppcadeditor.com/knowledge-base/suite/your-ad-content/ Last verified: 2026-10-20 Where does my ad content go? The ads you build are saved in your own workspace. People in your workspace can see them, and so can anyone you send a share link to, with the permission level you picked on that link. ## Who can see my ads? - Members of your workspace, with the role you gave them. - Anyone who opens a share link you sent. A Viewer link lets them look, a Commentor link lets them comment, and on Studio an Approval link lets them approve or request changes. Approval is a Studio feature, not on the Free tier. ## What does the AI assistant connector receive and keep? When you ask Claude or ChatGPT to show an ad with the PPC Ad Editor connector, no sign-in is needed. The connector receives only what the assistant sends for that ad: the headlines, descriptions and other ad text, the landing page URL and display paths, the business name, links to images, logos or videos, ad extensions such as sitelinks, callouts and a phone number, and an optional ad name. It does not receive your conversation, chat history or files. - The mockup is kept as a temporary draft for 7 days, so the Save & share button works. After 7 days it is deleted. - Nothing is saved to a workspace until you sign in or create a free account and save it. - The connector does not generate images. If the assistant links to images on your website, your chat app loads them from that website. - Anyone who has the save link can save a copy into their own account while it works, so only share it with people you trust. To stop using it, remove the connector in your assistant's settings. ## Do you use my ads to train AI, or for anything else? Albert does not answer that question. Read the privacy policy at ppcadeditor.com/privacy-policy, or contact support and ask for the current answer in writing.